June 2018
First Printing
Litho in U.S.A.
Owner’s Manual
2019 MKZ
2019 MKZ Owner’s Manual
KH6J 19A321 AA
owner.lincoln.com lincolncanada.com
The information contained in this publication was correct at the time of going to print. In the interest of continuous development, we reserve the right to change specifications,
design or equipment at any time without notice or obligation. No part of this publication may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system or translated into any language
in any form by any means without our written permission. Errors and omissions excepted.
© Ford Motor Company 2018
All rights reserved.
Part Number: 201805 20180509212602
California Proposition 65
WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and
lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other
reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except
as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands
frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,
chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash your
hands after handling.
Introduction
About This Manual ...........................................7
Symbols Glossary .............................................7
Data Recording ...............................................10
Perchlorate .......................................................12
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
..........................................................................12
Replacement Parts Recommendation
..........................................................................13
Special Notices ...............................................13
Mobile Communications Equipment .........14
Export Unique Options ..................................14
Environment
Protecting the Environment .........................16
At a Glance
Instrument Panel Overview ..........................17
Child Safety
General Information .......................................19
Installing Child Restraints .............................21
Booster Seats .................................................30
Child Restraint Positioning ..........................33
Child Safety Locks .........................................35
Seatbelts
Principle of Operation ...................................37
Fastening the Seatbelts ...............................38
Seatbelt Height Adjustment .........................41
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime ...........................................................42
Seatbelt Reminder .........................................43
Child Restraint and Seatbelt Maintenance
.........................................................................44
Seatbelt Extension ........................................45
Personal Safety System™
Personal Safety System™ .............................46
Supplementary Restraints System
Principle of Operation ...................................47
Driver and Passenger Airbags ...................48
Front Passenger Sensing System .............50
Side Airbags ...................................................52
Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags ........53
Safety Canopy™ ..............................................53
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator ........55
Airbag Disposal ..............................................56
Keys and Remote Controls
General Information on Radio Frequencies
.........................................................................57
Remote Control ..............................................58
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote Control
..........................................................................61
MyKey™
Principle of Operation ..................................62
Creating a MyKey ..........................................63
Clearing All MyKeys ......................................64
Checking MyKey System Status ................64
Using MyKey With Remote Start Systems
........................................................................65
MyKey Troubleshooting ...............................65
Doors and Locks
Locking and Unlocking .................................67
Power Decklid ..................................................71
1
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Keyless Entry ...................................................73
Interior Luggage Compartment Release
.........................................................................75
Security
Passive Anti-Theft System ...........................77
Anti-Theft Alarm .............................................78
Steering Wheel
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column .........................................................80
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering Column
........................................................................80
Audio Control .................................................82
Voice Control ..................................................82
Cruise Control .................................................83
Information Display Control ........................83
Heated Steering Wheel ...............................83
Wipers and Washers
Windshield Wipers ........................................84
Autowipers ......................................................85
Windshield Washers .....................................86
Lighting
General Information ......................................87
Lighting Control ..............................................87
Autolamps .......................................................88
Instrument Lighting Dimmer .......................89
Headlamp Exit Delay ....................................89
Daytime Running Lamps ..............................89
Automatic High Beam Control ...................90
Adaptive Headlamps .....................................91
Direction Indicators .......................................92
Welcome Lighting ..........................................92
Interior Lamps .................................................93
Ambient Lighting ...........................................94
Windows and Mirrors
Power Windows .............................................95
Global Opening and Closing ......................96
Exterior Mirrors ...............................................96
Interior Mirror ..................................................99
Sun Visors ......................................................100
Sun Shades ...................................................100
Moonroof .......................................................100
Instrument Cluster
Gauges ...........................................................103
Warning Lamps and Indicators .................105
Audible Warnings and Indicators .............108
Information Displays
General Information .....................................110
Information Messages .................................116
Climate Control
Automatic Climate Control ........................136
Hints on Controlling the Interior Climate
.......................................................................138
Heated Windshield ......................................139
Heated Rear Window ..................................139
Heated Exterior Mirrors ..............................139
Cabin Air Filter ..............................................139
Remote Start ..................................................140
Seats
Sitting in the Correct Position ....................141
2
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Head Restraints ............................................142
Power Seats ...................................................143
Memory Function ..........................................147
Rear Seats ......................................................148
Heated Seats .................................................149
Climate Controlled Seats ...........................150
Rear Seat Armrest .........................................151
Universal Garage Door Opener
Universal Garage Door Opener ...............153
Auxiliary Power Points
Auxiliary Power Points ................................158
Storage Compartments
Center Console ............................................160
Overhead Console ......................................160
Starting and Stopping the Engine
General Information ......................................161
Keyless Starting .............................................161
Starting a Gasoline Engine ........................162
Engine Block Heater ...................................164
Fuel and Refueling
Safety Precautions .......................................166
Fuel Quality ...................................................166
Fuel Filler Funnel Location .........................167
Running Out of Fuel ....................................168
Refueling ........................................................169
Fuel Consumption ........................................172
Engine Emission Control
Emission Law .................................................173
Catalytic Converter ......................................174
Transmission
Automatic Transmission ..............................177
All-Wheel Drive
Using All-Wheel Drive .................................183
Brakes
General Information ....................................192
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
.......................................................................193
Electric Parking Brake .................................193
Auto Hold .......................................................194
Traction Control
Principle of Operation .................................197
Using Traction Control ................................197
Stability Control
Principle of Operation .................................198
Using Stability Control ................................199
Parking Aids
Principle of Operation .................................201
Rear Parking Aid ...........................................201
Front Parking Aid ........................................202
Side Sensing System .................................203
Active Park Assist .......................................205
Rear View Camera .......................................213
Cruise Control
Principle of Operation .................................217
3
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Using Cruise Control ...................................217
Using Adaptive Cruise Control .................218
Driving Aids
Driver Alert ....................................................227
Lane Keeping System ................................229
Blind Spot Information System ................234
Cross Traffic Alert ........................................236
Steering .........................................................240
Pre-Collision Assist ......................................241
Drive Control ................................................246
Load Carrying
Load Limit ......................................................248
Towing
Towing a Trailer ............................................253
Recommended Towing Weights .............254
Essential Towing Checks ..........................255
Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels ......257
Driving Hints
Breaking-In ...................................................259
Economical Driving .....................................259
Driving Through Water ..............................259
Floor Mats .....................................................260
Roadside Emergencies
Roadside Assistance ..................................262
Hazard Flashers ..........................................263
Fuel Shutoff ..................................................263
Jump Starting the Vehicle .........................264
Post-Crash Alert System ...........................266
Transporting the Vehicle ...........................267
Towing Points ...............................................268
Customer Assistance
Getting the Services You Need ...............269
In California (U.S. Only) ..............................270
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only) ........................271
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only) ..........................................272
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada .......................................................273
Ordering Additional Owner's Literature
......................................................................275
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only) ......275
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada Only)
......................................................................276
Fuses
Fuse Specification Chart ............................277
Changing a Fuse .........................................294
Maintenance
General Information ....................................297
Opening and Closing the Hood ..............297
Under Hood Overview - 2.0L ...................298
Under Hood Overview - 3.0L ...................300
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L .........................302
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.0L ..........................302
Engine Oil Check ........................................302
Oil Change Indicator Reset ......................303
Engine Coolant Check ...............................304
Automatic Transmission Fluid Check ......308
Brake Fluid Check ........................................313
Washer Fluid Check .....................................313
Fuel Filter ........................................................313
Changing the 12V Battery ..........................314
4
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Checking the Wiper Blades .......................315
Changing the Wiper Blades ......................316
Adjusting the Headlamps ..........................316
Changing a Bulb ...........................................317
Changing the Engine Air Filter ..................317
Vehicle Care
General Information .....................................319
Cleaning Products .......................................319
Cleaning the Exterior .................................320
Waxing ............................................................321
Cleaning the Engine ...................................322
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper Blades
......................................................................322
Cleaning the Interior ...................................323
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens ........................325
Cleaning Leather Seats .............................325
Repairing Minor Paint Damage ................326
Cleaning the Wheels ..................................326
Vehicle Storage ............................................327
Body Styling Kits ..........................................328
Wheels and Tires
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit ......................329
Tire Care ........................................................336
Using Summer Tires ...................................350
Using Snow Chains ......................................351
Tire Pressure Monitoring System ...........352
Changing a Road Wheel ...........................356
Technical Specifications ............................364
Capacities and Specifications
Engine Specifications - 2.0L .....................366
Engine Specifications - 3.0L .....................367
Motorcraft Parts - 2.0L ...............................368
Motorcraft Parts - 3.0L ................................370
Vehicle Identification Number ...................371
Vehicle Certification Label .........................371
Transmission Code Designation .............372
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L ......373
Capacities and Specifications - 3.0L ......379
Bulb Specification Chart ............................386
Audio System
General Information ....................................389
Audio Unit ......................................................391
USB Port ........................................................392
Media Hub ....................................................392
SYNC™ 3
General Information ....................................394
Home Screen ...............................................409
Using Voice Recognition .............................411
Entertainment ................................................421
Climate ...........................................................435
Phone .............................................................439
Navigation .....................................................447
Apps ...............................................................458
Settings ...........................................................461
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting ..........................481
Accessories
Accessories ..................................................499
Lincoln Protect
Lincoln Protect ..............................................501
5
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Table of Contents
Scheduled Maintenance
General Maintenance Information ..........504
Normal Scheduled Maintenance ............508
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance .............................................512
Scheduled Maintenance Record .............516
Appendices
Electromagnetic Compatibility ................536
End User License Agreement ...................541
Type Approvals .............................................571
6
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Table of Contents
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
Thank you for choosing Lincoln. We
recommend that you take some time to get
to know your vehicle by reading this manual.
The more that you know about it, the greater
the safety and pleasure you will get from
driving it.
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any device
that may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: This manual describes product
features and options available throughout
the range of available models, sometimes
even before they are generally available. It
may describe options not fitted to the vehicle
you have purchased.
Note: Some of the illustrations in this manual
may show features as used in different
models, so may appear different to you on
your vehicle.
Note: Always use and operate your vehicle
in line with all applicable laws and
regulations.
Note: Pass on this manual when selling your
vehicle. It is an integral part of your vehicle.
This manual may qualify the location of a
component as left-hand side or right-hand
side. The side is determined when facing
forward in the seat.
E154903
Right-hand side.A
Left-hand side.B
SYMBOLS GLOSSARY
These are some of the symbols you may see
on your vehicle.
E162384
Air conditioning system
E231157
Air conditioning system lubricant
type
7
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Introduction
Anti-lock braking system
Avoid smoking, flames or sparks
Battery
Battery acid
Brake fluid - non petroleum based
Brake system
E270480
Brake system
Cabin air filter
Check fuel cap
Child safety door lock or unlock
Child seat lower anchor
Child seat tether anchor
E71340
Cruise control
Do not open when hot
Engine air filter
Engine coolant
Engine coolant temperature
Engine oil
Explosive gas
Fan warning
E71880
Fasten seatbelt
E231160
Flammable
E67017
Front airbag
Front fog lamps
Fuel pump reset
Fuse compartment
Hazard flashers
Heated rear window
8
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Introduction
Windshield defrosting system
Interior luggage compartment
release
Jack
E161353
Keep out of reach of children
Lighting control
Low tire pressure warning
Maintain correct fluid level
Note operating instructions
E270945
Horn control
Panic alarm
E139213
Parking aid
Parking brake
Power steering fluid
Power windows front/rear
Power window lockout
E231159
Requires registered technician
Safety alert
See Owner's Manual
E231158
See Service Manual
Service engine soon
E270849
Passenger airbag activated
E270850
Passenger airbag deactivated
Side airbag
E167012
Shield the eyes
E138639
Stability control
E163957
Hill descent control
E271982
Trail control
E270969
Windshield wiping system
9
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Introduction
Windshield wash and wipe
DATA RECORDING
Service Data Recording
Service data recorders in your vehicle are
capable of collecting and storing diagnostic
information about your vehicle. This
potentially includes information about the
performance or status of various systems
and modules in the vehicle, such as engine,
throttle, steering or brake systems. In order
to properly diagnose and service your
vehicle, Ford Motor Company (Ford of
Canada in Canada), and service and repair
facilities may access or share among them
vehicle diagnostic information received
through a direct connection to your vehicle
when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle.
Additionally, Ford Motor Company (Ford of
Canada, in Canada) may, where permitted
by law, use vehicle diagnostic information
for vehicle improvement or with other
information we may have about you, (for
example, your contact information), to offer
you products or services that may interest
you. Data may be provided to our service
providers such as part suppliers that may
help diagnose malfunctions, and who are
similarly obligated to protect data. We retain
this data only as long as necessary to
perform these functions or to comply with
law. We may provide information where
required in response to official requests to
law enforcement or other government
authorities or third parties acting with lawful
authority or court order, and such information
may be used in legal proceedings. For U.S.
only (if equipped), if you choose to use
connected apps and services, such as SYNC
Vehicle Health Report or MyFord Mobile App,
you consent that certain diagnostic
information may also be accessed
electronically by Ford Motor Company and
Ford authorized service facilities, and that
the diagnostic information may be used to
provide services to you, personalizing your
experience, troubleshoot, and to improve
products and services and offer you products
and services that may interest you, where
permitted by law. For Canada only, for more
information, please review the Ford of
Canada privacy policy at www.ford.ca,
including our U.S. data storage and use of
service providers in other jurisdictions who
may be subject to legal requirements in
Canada, the United States and other
countries applicable to them, for example,
lawful requirements to disclose personal
information to governmental authorities in
those countries. See SYNC™ 3 (page 394).
Event Data Recording
This vehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder. The main purpose of an event
data recorder is to record, in certain crash
or near crash-like situations, such as an
airbag deployment or hitting a road
obstacle; this data will assist in
understanding how a vehicle’s systems
performed. The event data recorder is
designed to record data related to vehicle
dynamics and safety systems for a short
period of time, typically 30 seconds or less.
10
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Introduction
The event data recorder in this vehicle is
designed to record such data as:
• How various systems in your vehicle
were operating;
• Whether or not the driver and
passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened;
• How far (if at all) the driver was
depressing the accelerator and/or the
brake pedal; and
• How fast the vehicle was traveling; and
• Where the driver was positioning the
steering wheel.
This data can help provide a better
understanding of the circumstances in
which crashes and injuries occur.
Note: Event data recorder data is recorded
by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash
situation occurs; no data is recorded by the
event data recorder under normal driving
conditions and no personal data or
information (e.g., name, gender, age, and
crash location) is recorded (see limitations
regarding 911 Assist and Traffic, directions
and Information privacy below). However,
parties, such as law enforcement, could
combine the event data recorder data with
the type of personally identifying data
routinely acquired during a crash
investigation.
To read data recorded by an event data
recorder, special equipment is required,
and access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder is needed. In addition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such
as law enforcement, that have such special
equipment, can read the information if they
have access to the vehicle or the event data
recorder. Ford Motor Company and Ford
of Canada do not access event data
recorder information without obtaining
consent, unless pursuant to court order or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities or other third
parties acting with lawful authority. Other
parties may seek to access the information
independently of Ford Motor Company and
Ford of Canada.
11
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Introduction
Note: Including to the extent that any law
pertaining to Event Data Recorders applies
to SYNC or its features, please note the
following: Once 911 Assist (if equipped) is
enabled (set ON), 911 Assist may, through
any paired and connected cell phone,
disclose to emergency services that the
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or, in certain
vehicles, the activation of the fuel pump
shut-off. Certain versions or updates to 911
Assist may also be capable of being used
to electronically or verbally provide to 911
operators the vehicle location (such as
latitude and longitude), and/or other details
about the vehicle or crash or personal
information about the occupants to assist
911 operators to provide the most
appropriate emergency services. If you do
not want to disclose this information, do
not activate the 911 Assist feature. See
SYNC™ 3 (page 394).
Additionally, when you connect to Traffic,
Directions and Information (if equipped,
U.S. only), the service uses GPS technology
and advanced vehicle sensors to collect
the vehicle’s current location, travel
direction, and speed (“vehicle travel
information”), only to help provide you with
the directions, traffic reports, or business
searches that you request. If you do not
want Ford or its vendors to receive this
information, do not activate the service. For
more information, see Traffic, Directions
and Information, Terms and Conditions.
See SYNC™ 3 (page 394).
PERCHLORATE
Certain components in your vehicle such as
airbag modules, seatbelt pretensioners and
remote control batteries may contain
perchlorate material. Special handling may
apply for service or vehicle end of life
disposal.
For more information visit:
Web Address
www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazard-
ouswaste/perchlorate
LINCOLN AUTOMOTIVE
FINANCIAL SERVICES
Lincoln Automotive Financial Services offers
a full range of financing and lease plans to
help you acquire your vehicle. We are
dedicated to providing answers, information
and a truly extraordinary experience.
Use the options below to contact us with
questions about your account or financing
and we will respond promptly:
Web Address
www.LincolnAFS.com
Phone: 1-888-498-8801
Mail: Lincoln Automotive Financial Services
12
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Introduction
P.O. Box 542000
Omaha, NE 68154-8000
REPLACEMENT PARTS
RECOMMENDATION
We have built your vehicle to the highest
standards using quality parts. We
recommend that you demand the use of
genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts whenever
your vehicle requires scheduled
maintenance or repair. You can clearly
identify genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
by looking for the Ford, FoMoCo or
Motorcraft branding on the parts or their
packaging.
Scheduled Maintenance and
Mechanical Repairs
One of the best ways for you to make sure
that your vehicle provides years of service
is to have it maintained in line with our
recommendations using parts that conform
to the specifications detailed in this Owner’ s
Manual. Genuine Ford and Motorcraft parts
meet or exceed these specifications.
Collision Repairs
We hope that you never experience a
collision, but accidents do happen. Genuine
Ford replacement collision parts meet our
stringent requirements for fit, finish, structural
integrity, corrosion protection and dent
resistance. During vehicle development we
validate that these parts deliver the intended
level of protection as a whole system. A
great way to know for sure you are getting
this level of protection is to use genuine Ford
replacement collision parts.
Warranty on Replacement Parts
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft replacement
parts are the only replacement parts that
benefit from a Lincoln Warranty. Damage
caused to your vehicle as a result of the
failure of non-Ford parts may not be covered
by the Lincoln Warranty. For additional
information, refer to the terms and conditions
of the Lincoln Warranty.
SPECIAL NOTICES
New Vehicle Limited Warranty
For a detailed description of what is covered
and what is not covered by your vehicle’s
New Vehicle Limited Warranty, see the
Warranty Manual that is provided to you
along with your Owner’s Manual.
Special Instructions
For your added safety, your vehicle is fitted
with sophisticated electronic controls.
WARNING: You risk death or serious
injury to yourself and others if you do not
follow the instruction highlighted by the
warning symbol. Failure to follow the specific
warnings and instructions could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: NEVER use a rearward
facing child restraint on a seat protected by
an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or
SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur.
13
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Introduction
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector
WARNING: Do not connect wireless
plug-in devices to the data link connector.
Unauthorized third parties could gain access
to vehicle data and impair the performance
of safety related systems. Only allow repair
facilities that follow our service and repair
instructions to connect their equipment to
the data link connector.
Your vehicle has an OBD Data Link
Connector (DLC) that is used in conjunction
with a diagnostic scan tool for vehicle
diagnostics, repairs and reprogramming
services. Installing an aftermarket device that
uses the DLC during normal driving for
purposes such as remote insurance company
monitoring, transmission of vehicle data to
other devices or entities, or altering the
performance of the vehicle, may cause
interference with or even damage to vehicle
systems. We do not recommend or endorse
the use of aftermarket plug-in devices unless
approved by Ford. The vehicle Warranty will
not cover damage caused by an aftermarket
plug-in device.
MOBILE COMMUNICATIONS
EQUIPMENT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any device
that may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Using mobile communications equipment is
becoming increasingly important in the
conduct of business and personal affairs.
However, you must not compromise your
own or others’ safety when using such
equipment. Mobile communications can
enhance personal safety and security when
appropriately used, particularly in emergency
situations. Safety must be paramount when
using mobile communications equipment to
avoid negating these benefits. Mobile
communication equipment includes, but is
not limited to, cellular phones, pagers,
portable email devices, text messaging
devices and portable two-way radios.
EXPORT UNIQUE OPTIONS
For your particular global region, your vehicle
may be equipped with features and options
that are different from the features and
options that are described in this Owner’s
Manual. A market unique supplement may
be supplied that complements this book. By
referring to the market unique supplement,
if provided, you can properly identify those
features, recommendations and
14
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Introduction
specifications that are unique to your vehicle.
This Owner’s Manual is written primarily for
the U.S. and Canadian Markets. Features or
equipment listed as standard may be
different on units built for export. Refer to
this Owner’s Manual for all other required
information and warnings.
15
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Introduction
PROTECTING THE ENVIRONMENT
You should play your part in protecting the
environment. Correct vehicle usage and the
authorized disposal of waste, cleaning and
lubrication materials are significant steps
toward this aim.
For details about Ford Motor Company's
sustainability progress and initiatives visit:
Web Address
www.sustainability.ford.com
16
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Environment
INSTRUMENT PANEL OVERVIEW
E251093
17
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
At a Glance
Direction indicators. See Direction
Indicators (page 92).
A
Instrument cluster. See Gauges
(page 103). See Warning Lamps
and Indicators (page 105).
B
Wiper lever. See Wipers and
Washers (page 84).
C
Information and entertainment
display.
D
Audio unit. See Audio Unit (page
391).
E
Hazard warning flasher switch.
See Hazard Flashers (page 263).
F
Parking aid switch. See Parking
Aids (page 201).
G
Heated rear window switch. See
Heated Rear Window (page 139).
H
Climate controls. See Climate
Control (page 136).
I
Start button. See Keyless Starting
(page 161).
J
Entertainment, navigation and
phone.
K
Voice control. See Voice Control
(page 82).
L
Horn.M
Steering wheel adjustment. See
Adjusting the Steering Wheel
(page 80).
N
Cruise control switches. See
Using Cruise Control (page 217).
O
Information display controls. See
Information Displays (page 110).
P
Parking brake. See Electric
Parking Brake (page 193).
Q
Lighting control. See Lighting
Control (page 87). Instrument
lighting dimmer. See Instrument
Lighting Dimmer (page 89).
R
18
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
At a Glance
GENERAL INFORMATION
See the following sections for directions on
how to properly use safety restraints for
children.
WARNING: Always make sure your
child is secured properly in a device that is
appropriate for their height, age and weight.
Child safety restraints must be bought
separately from your vehicle. Failure to follow
these instructions and guidelines may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or death
to your child.
WARNING: All children are shaped
differently. The National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration and other safety
organizations, base their recommendations
for child restraints on probable child height,
age and weight thresholds, or on the
minimum requirements of the law. We
recommend that you check with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
(CPST) to make sure that you properly install
the child restraint in your vehicle and that
you consult your pediatrician to make sure
you have a child restraint appropriate for
your child. To locate a child restraint fitting
station and CPST, contact NHTSA toll free
at 1-888-327-4236 or go to
www.nhtsa.dot.gov. In Canada, contact
Transport Canada toll free at 1-800-333-0371
or go to www.tc.gc.ca to find a Child Car Seat
Clinic in your area. Failure to properly restrain
children in child restraints made especially
for their height, age and weight, may result
in an increased risk of serious injury or death
to your child.
WARNING: On hot days, the
temperature inside the vehicle can rise very
quickly. Exposure of people or animals to
these high temperatures for even a short
time can cause death or serious heat related
injuries, including brain damage. Small
children are particularly at risk.
19
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children
Recommended restraint typeChild size, height, weight, or ageChild
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat).
Children weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age four or
younger).
Infants or toddlers
Use a belt-positioning booster seat.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child
safety seat (generally children who are less than 4 ft. 9 in. (1.45 m)
tall, are greater than age four and less than age 12, and between
40 lb (18 kg) and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by your child restraint manufacturer).
Small children
Use a vehicle seatbelt having the lap belt
snug and low across the hips, shoulder belt
centered across the shoulder and chest, and
seatback upright.
Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt-
positioning booster seat (generally children who are at least 4 ft.
9 in. (1.45 m) tall or greater than 80 lb (36 kg) or 100 lb (45 kg) if
recommended by child restraint manufacturer).
Larger children
20
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
• You are required by law to properly use
safety seats for infants and toddlers in
the United States and Canada.
• Many states and provinces require that
small children use approved booster
seats until they reach age eight, a height
of 4 feet 9 inches (1.45 meters) tall, or
80 lb (36 kg). Check your local and state
or provincial laws for specific
requirements about the safety of children
in your vehicle.
• When possible, always properly restrain
children 12 years of age and under in a
rear seating position of your vehicle.
Accident statistics suggest that children
are safer when properly restrained in the
rear seating positions than in a front
seating position. See Front Passenger
Sensing System (page 50).
INSTALLING CHILD RESTRAINTS
Child Seats
E142594
Use a child safety seat (sometimes called an
infant carrier, convertible seat, or toddler
seat) for infants, toddlers, or children
weighing 40 lb (18 kg) or less (generally age
four or younger).
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are unable
to properly secure all children in a rear
seating position, properly secure the largest
child on the front seat. If you must use a
forward facing child restraint on the front
seat, move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
21
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies
and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to be
properly restrained.
When installing a child safety seat with
combination lap and shoulder belts:
• Use the correct seatbelt buckle for that
seating position.
• Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle until you hear a snap and feel it
latch. Make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
• Keep the buckle release button pointing
up and away from the safety seat, with
the tongue between the child restraint
and the release button, to prevent
accidental unbuckling.
• Place the vehicle seat upon which the
child restraint will be installed in the
upright position.
• Put the seatbelt in the automatic locking
mode. See Step 5. This vehicle does not
require the use of a locking clip.
Perform the following steps when installing
the child restraint with combination lap and
shoulder belts:
Note: Although the child restraint illustrated
is a forward facing child restraint, the steps
are the same for installing a rear facing child
restraint.
Standard Seatbelts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E142529
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, pull down on
the shoulder belt and then grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
22
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is
not twisted.
E142531
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E142875
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the shoulder portion
of the belt and pull downward until you
pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt clicks as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
23
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
E142533
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling up on the shoulder belt in order
to force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that exists once the extra weight of the
child is added to the child restraint. It also
helps to achieve the proper snugness of
the child restraint to your vehicle.
Sometimes, a slight lean toward the
buckle provides extra help to remove
remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 in
(2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
24
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
Inflatable Seatbelts
E142528
1. Position the child safety seat in a seat
with a combination lap and shoulder belt.
E146522
2. After positioning the child safety seat in
the proper seating position, grasp the
shoulder belt and lap belt together
behind the belt tongue.
E142530
3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue
through the child restraint according to
the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions. Be sure the belt webbing is
not twisted.
25
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
E146523
4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) for that
seating position until you hear a snap and
feel the latch engage. Make sure the
tongue is latched securely by pulling on
it.
E146524
5. To put the retractor in the automatic
locking mode, grasp the lap portion of
the inflatable seatbelt and pull upward
until you pull all of the belt out.
Note: The automatic locking mode is
available on the front passenger and rear
seats.
Note: Unlike the standard seatbelt, the
inflatable seatbelt's unique lap portion locks
the child restraint for installation. The ability
for the shoulder portion of the belt to move
freely is normal, even after the lap belt has
been put into the automatic locking mode.
Note: The lock-off device on some child
restraints may not accommodate the
shoulder portion of the inflatable seatbelt.
Follow all instructions provided by the
manufacturer of the child restraint regarding
the necessary and proper use of the lock-off
device. In some instances, these devices
have been provided only for use in vehicles
with seatbelt systems that would otherwise
require a locking clip.
6. Allow the belt to retract to remove slack.
The belt clicks as it retracts to indicate it
is in the automatic locking mode.
7. Try to pull the belt out of the retractor to
make sure the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode (you should not
be able to pull more belt out). If the
retractor is not locked, unbuckle the belt
and repeat Steps 5 and 6.
26
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
E146525
8. Remove remaining slack from the belt.
Force the seat down with extra weight,
for example, by pressing down or
kneeling on the child restraint while
pulling down on the lap belt in order to
force slack from the belt. This is
necessary to remove the remaining slack
that will exist once the extra weight of
the child is added to the child restraint.
It also helps to achieve the proper
snugness of the child restraint to your
vehicle. Sometimes, a slight lean toward
the buckle will additionally help to
remove remaining slack from the belt.
9. Attach the tether strap (if the child
restraint is equipped).
E142534
10. Before placing the child in the seat,
forcibly move the seat forward and back
to make sure the seat is securely held
in place. To check this, grab the seat at
the belt path and attempt to move it
side to side and forward and back.
There should be no more than 1 in
(2.5 cm) of movement for proper
installation.
We recommend checking with a NHTSA
Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician
to make certain the child restraint is properly
installed. In Canada, check with Transport
Canada for referral to a Child Car Seat Clinic.
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH)
WARNING: Do not attach two child
safety restraints to the same anchor. In a
crash, one anchor may not be strong enough
to hold two child safety restraint attachments
and may break, causing serious injury or
death.
WARNING: Depending on where you
secure a child restraint, and depending on
the child restraint design, you may block
access to certain seatbelt buckle assemblies
and LATCH lower anchors, rendering those
features potentially unusable. To avoid risk
of injury, make sure occupants only use
seating positions where they are able to be
properly restrained.
27
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
The LATCH system is composed of three
vehicle anchor points: two lower anchors
where the seat backrest and seat cushion
meet (called the seat bight) and one top
tether anchor behind that seating position.
LATCH compatible child safety seats have
two rigid or webbing mounted attachments
that connect to the two lower anchors at the
LATCH equipped seating positions in your
vehicle. This type of attachment method
eliminates the need to use seatbelts to attach
the child restraint. However, you can still use
the seatbelt to attach the child restraint. For
forward-facing child restraints, the top tether
strap must also be attached to the proper
top tether anchor if a top tether strap has
been provided with your child restraint.
E142535
Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for
child restraint installation at the seating
positions marked with the child restraint
symbol.
E144054
The LATCH anchors are at the rear section
of the rear seat between the cushion and
seat backrest below the symbols as shown.
Follow the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions to properly install a child restraint
with LATCH attachments. Follow the
instructions on attaching child safety seats
with tether straps.
Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child
restraint only to the anchors shown.
Use of Inboard Lower Anchors from the
Outboard Seating Positions (Center Seating
Use)
WARNING: The standardized spacing
for LATCH lower anchors is 11 in (280 mm)
center to center. Do not use LATCH lower
anchors for the center seating position
unless the child restraint manufacturer's
instructions permit and specify using anchors
spaced at least as far apart as those in this
vehicle.
28
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
The lower anchors at the center of the
second row rear seat are spaced 18 in
(46 cm) apart. You cannot install a child
restraint with rigid LATCH attachments at the
center seating position. You can only use
LATCH compatible child restraints (with
attachments on belt webbing) at this seating
position provided that the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions permit use with
the anchor spacing stated. Do not attach a
child restraint to any lower anchor if an
adjacent child restraint is attached to that
anchor.
Each time you use the safety seat, check that
the seat is properly attached to the lower
anchors and tether anchor, if applicable. Tug
the child restraint from side to side and
forward and back where it is secured to your
vehicle. The seat should move less than 1 in
(2.5 cm) when you do this for a proper
installation.
If the safety seat is not anchored properly,
the risk of a child being injured in a crash
greatly increases.
Combining Seatbelt and LATCH Lower
Anchors for Attaching Child Safety Seats
When used in combination, either the
seatbelt or the LATCH lower anchors may
be attached first, provided a proper
installation is achieved. Attach the tether
strap afterward, if included with the child
restraint.
Using Tether Straps
Many forward-facing child safety
seats include a tether strap which
extends from the back of the child
safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point
called the top tether anchor. Tether straps
are available as an accessory for many older
safety seats.
Contact the manufacturer of your child
restraint for information about ordering a
tether strap, or to obtain a longer tether strap
if the tether strap on your safety seat does
not reach the appropriate top tether anchor
in your vehicle.
Once you install the child safety seat using
either the seatbelt, the lower anchors of the
LATCH system, or both, you can attach the
top tether strap.
The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are
in the following positions (shown from top
view):
E142537
Perform the following steps to install a child
safety seat with tether anchors:
29
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
Note: If you install a child restraint with rigid
LATCH attachments, do not tighten the
tether strap enough to lift the child restraint
off your vehicle seat cushion when the child
is seated in it. Keep the tether strap just snug
without lifting the front of the child restraint.
Keeping the child restraint just touching your
vehicle seat gives the best protection in a
severe crash.
1. Route the child safety seat tether strap
over the back of the seat. For the
outermost seating positions, route the
tether strap under the head restraint and
between the head restraint posts. For the
center seating positions, route the tether
strap over the top of the head restraint.
If needed, you can also remove the head
restraints.
E144274
2. Locate the correct anchor for the
selected seating position, then open the
tether anchor cover.
E144275
3. Clip the tether strap to the anchor as
shown.
4. Tighten the child safety seat tether strap
according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
If your child restraint system has a tether
strap, and the child restraint manufacturer
recommends its use, we also recommend its
use.
BOOSTER SEATS
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child to
put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back. Failure
to follow this instruction could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury or death in a crash.
Note: Some booster seat seatbelt guides
may not accommodate the shoulder portion
of the inflatable seatbelt.
Use a belt-positioning booster seat for
children who have outgrown or no longer
properly fit in a child safety seat (generally
children who are less than 57 in (1.45 m) tall,
are greater than age four (4) and less than
age twelve (12), and between 40 lb (18 kg)
and 80 lb (36 kg) and upward to 100 lb
(45 kg) if recommended by your child
restraint manufacturer). Many state and
provincial laws require that children use
approved booster seats until they reach age
eight, a height of 57 in (1.45 m) tall, or 80 lb
(36 kg).
30
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
Booster seats should be used until you can
answer YES to ALL of these questions when
seated without a booster seat:
E142595
• Can the child sit all the way back against
their vehicle seat backrest with knees
bent comfortably at the edge of the seat
cushion?
• Can the child sit without slouching?
• Does the lap belt rest low across the
hips?
• Is the shoulder belt centered on the
shoulder and chest?
• Can the child stay seated like this for the
whole trip?
Always use booster seats in conjunction with
your vehicle lap and shoulder belt.
Types of Booster Seats
E68924
• Backless booster seats
If your backless booster seat has a
removable shield, remove the shield. If a
vehicle seating position has a low seat
backrest or no head restraint, a backless
booster seat may place your child's head (as
measured at the tops of the ears) above the
top of the seat. In this case, move the
backless booster to another seating position
with a higher seat backrest or head restraint
and lap and shoulder belts, or consider using
a high back booster seat.
E70710
• High back booster seats
31
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
If, with a backless booster seat, you cannot
find a seating position that adequately
supports your child's head, a high back
booster seat would be a better choice.
Children and booster seats vary in size and
shape. Choose a booster that keeps the lap
belt low and snug across the hips, never up
across the stomach, and lets you adjust the
shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest
snugly near the center of the shoulder. The
following drawings compare the ideal fit
(center) to a shoulder belt uncomfortably
close to the neck and a shoulder belt that
could slip off the shoulder. The drawings also
show how the lap belt should be low and
snug across the child's hips.
E142596
32
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
E142597
If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat
upon which it is being used, placing a
rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner
under the booster seat may improve this
condition. Do not introduce any item thicker
than this under the booster seat. Check with
the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
CHILD RESTRAINT POSITIONING
WARNING: Do not place a rearward
facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure children
12 years old and under in a rear seating
position whenever possible. If you are unable
to properly secure all children in a rear
seating position, properly secure the largest
child on the front seat. If you must use a
forward facing child restraint on the front
seat, move the seat as far back as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions could
result in personal injury or death.
33
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
WARNING: Always carefully follow the
instructions and warnings provided by the
manufacturer of any child restraint to
determine if the restraint device is
appropriate for your child's size, height,
weight, or age. Follow the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions and warnings
provided for installation and use in
conjunction with the instructions and
warnings provided by your vehicle
manufacturer. A safety seat that is improperly
installed or utilized, is inappropriate for your
child's height, age, or weight or does not
properly fit the child may increase the risk of
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow a passenger
to hold a child on their lap when your vehicle
is moving. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death in the
event of a sudden stop or crash.
WARNING: Do not use pillows, books
or towels to boost your child's height. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Properly secure child
restraints or booster seats when they are not
in use. They could become projectiles in a
sudden stop or crash. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not put the shoulder
section of the seatbelt or allow the child to
put the shoulder section of the seatbelt
under their arm or behind their back. Failure
to follow this instruction could reduce the
effectiveness of the seatbelt and increase
the risk of injury or death in a crash.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
pets unattended in your vehicle. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in personal
injury or death.
34
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
Recommendations for Attaching Child Safety Restraints for Children
Use Any Attachment Method as Indicated Below by X
Combined Weight
of Child and Child
Restraint
Restraint Type
Seatbelt OnlySeatbelt and LATCH
(Lower Anchors and
Top Tether Anchor)
Seatbelt and Top
Tether Anchor
LATCH (Lower
Anchors Only)
LATCH (Lower
Anchors and Top
Tether Anchor)
XX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
restraint
X
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Rear facing child
restraint
XXX
Up to 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child restraint
XX
Over 65 lb
(29.5 kg)
Forward facing
child restraint
Note: The child restraint must rest tightly
against the vehicle seat upon which it is
installed. It may be necessary to lift or
remove the head restraint. See Seats (page
141).
CHILD SAFETY LOCKS
When these locks are set, the rear doors
cannot be opened from the inside.
35
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
E112197
The childproof locks are located on the rear
edge of each rear door and must be set
separately for each door.
Left-Hand Side
Turn counterclockwise to lock and clockwise
to unlock.
Right-Hand Side
Turn clockwise to lock and counterclockwise
to unlock.
36
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Child Safety
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Always drive and ride with
your seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
WARNING: Children must always be
properly restrained.
WARNING: Never let a passenger hold
a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is
moving. The passenger cannot protect the
child from injury in a crash.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of
injury or death.
WARNING: It is extremely dangerous
to ride in a cargo area, inside or outside of
a vehicle. In a crash, people riding in these
areas are more likely to be seriously injured
or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any
area of your vehicle that is not equipped with
seats and seatbelts. Make sure everyone in
your vehicle is in a seat and properly using
a seatbelt. Failure to follow this warning
could result in serious personal injury or
death.
WARNING: In a rollover crash, an
unbelted person is significantly more likely
to die than a person wearing a seatbelt.
WARNING: Each seating position in
your vehicle has a specific seatbelt assembly
made up of one buckle and one tongue
designed to be used as a pair. Use the
shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only.
Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm.
Never use a single seatbelt for more than
one person.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child restraint. Properly restrain
children 12 and under in the rear seat
whenever possible.
WARNING: Seatbelts and seats may
be hot in a vehicle that is in the sunshine.
The hot seatbelts or seats may burn a small
child. Check seat covers and buckles before
you place a child anywhere near them.
All seating positions in your vehicle have lap
and shoulder seatbelts. All occupants of the
vehicle should always properly wear their
seatbelts, even when an airbag supplemental
restraint system is provided.
The seatbelt system consists of:
• Lap and shoulder seatbelts.
• Shoulder seatbelt with automatic locking
mode, (except driver seatbelt).
• Height adjuster at the front outboard
seating positions.
37
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seatbelts
• Seatbelt pretensioner at the front
outboard seating positions.
• Belt tension sensor at the outboard
passenger seating position.
E71880
• Seatbelt warning light and chime.
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator.
The seatbelt pretensioners at the front
seating positions are designed to tighten the
seatbelts when activated. In frontal and
near-frontal crashes, the seatbelt
pretensioners may be activated alone or, if
the crash is of sufficient severity, together
with the front airbags. The pretensioners may
also activate when the Safety Canopy
deploys.
FASTENING THE SEATBELTS
Standard belts shown, inflatable belts similar
The front outboard and rear safety restraints
in the vehicle are combination lap and
shoulder belts.
E142587
1. Insert the belt tongue into the proper
buckle (the buckle closest to the direction
the tongue is coming from) until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure you
securely fasten the tongue in the buckle.
E142588
2. To unfasten, press the release button
and remove the tongue from the buckle.
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy
WARNING: Always ride and drive with
your seatback upright and properly fasten
your seatbelt. Fit the lap portion of the
seatbelt snugly and low across the hips.
Position the shoulder portion of the seatbelt
across your chest. Pregnant women must
follow this practice. See the following figure.
38
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seatbelts
E142590
Pregnant women should always wear their
seatbelt. Position the lap belt portion of a
combination lap and shoulder belt low across
the hips below the belly and worn as tight
as comfort allows. Position the shoulder belt
to cross the middle of the shoulder and the
center of the chest.
Seatbelt Locking Modes
WARNING: If your vehicle is involved
in a crash, have the seatbelts and associated
components inspected as soon as possible.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
All safety restraints in the vehicle are
combination lap and shoulder belts. The
driver seatbelt has the vehicle sensitive
locking mode. The front outboard passenger
and rear seatbelts have both the vehicle
sensitive locking mode and the automatic
locking mode.
Vehicle Sensitive Mode
This is the normal retractor mode, which
allows free shoulder belt length adjustment
to your movements and locking in response
to vehicle movement. For example, if the
driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner
sharply, or the vehicle receives an impact of
about 5 mph (8 km/h) or more, the
combination seatbelts lock to help reduce
forward movement of the driver and
passengers.
In addition, the retractor is designed to lock
if you pull the webbing out too quickly. If the
seatbelt retractor locks, slowly lower the
height adjuster to allow the seatbelt to
retract. If the retractor does not unlock, pull
the seatbelt out slowly then feed a small
length of webbing back toward the stowed
position. For rear seatbelts, recline the rear
seat backrest or push the seat backrest
cushion away from the seatbelt. Feed a small
length of webbing back toward the stowed
position.
Automatic Locking Mode
In this mode, the shoulder belt automatically
pre-locks. The belt retracts to remove any
slack in the shoulder belt. The automatic
locking mode is not available on the driver
seatbelt.
When to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Use this mode any time a child safety seat,
except a booster, is installed in passenger
front or rear seating positions. Properly
restrain children 12 years old and under in a
rear seating position whenever possible.
See Child Safety (page 19).
How to Use the Automatic Locking Mode
Standard seatbelts
39
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seatbelts
E142591
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull
downward until you pull the entire belt
out. As the belt retracts, you will hear a
clicking sound. This indicates the seatbelt
is now in the automatic locking mode.
Rear outboard inflatable seatbelts (second
row only–if equipped)
E146363
1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt.
2. Grasp the lap portion of the belt and pull
upward until you pull the entire belt out.
3. Allow the belt to retract. As the belt
retracts, you will hear a clicking sound.
This indicates the seatbelt is now in the
automatic locking mode.
How to Disengage the Automatic Locking
Mode
Unbuckle the combination lap and shoulder
belt and allow it to retract completely to
disengage the automatic locking mode and
activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)
locking mode.
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a supplementary restraint
system component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are in the
shoulder portion of the seatbelts of the
second-row outboard seating positions.
40
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seatbelts
Note: The rear inflatable seatbelts are
compatible with most infant and child safety
car seats and belt positioning booster seats
when properly installed. This is because they
are designed to fill with a cooled gas at a
lower pressure and at a slower rate than
traditional airbags. After inflation, the
shoulder portion of the seatbelt remains cool
to the touch.
The rear inflatable seatbelt consists of the
following:
• An inflatable bag in the shoulder seatbelt
webbing.
• Lap seatbelt webbing with automatic
locking mode.
• The same warning light, electronic
control and diagnostic unit as used for
the front seatbelts.
• Impact sensors in various parts of the
vehicle.
How does the rear inflatable seatbelt
system work?
The rear inflatable seatbelts function like
standard restraints in everyday usage.
E146364
During a crash of sufficient force, the
inflatable belt inflates from inside the
webbing.
E146365
The fully inflated belt's increased diameter
more effectively holds the occupant in the
appropriate seating position, and spreads
crash forces over more area of the body than
regular seatbelts. This helps reduce pressure
on the chest and helps control head and
neck motion for passengers.
The rear inflatable seatbelts are designed to
inflate in frontal or near-frontal crashes and
in some side impact crashes and rollover
crashes. The fact that the rear inflatable
seatbelt did not inflate in a crash does not
mean that something is wrong with the
system. Rather, it means the forces were not
of the type sufficient to cause activation.
SEATBELT HEIGHT ADJUSTMENT
WARNING: Position the safety belt
height adjusters so that the belt rests across
the middle of your shoulder. Failure to adjust
the safety belt properly could reduce the
effectiveness of the safety belt and increase
the risk of injury in a crash.
41
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seatbelts
Adjust the height of the shoulder belt so the
belt rests across the middle of your shoulder.
E146191
To adjust the shoulder belt height:
1. Press the button and slide the height
adjuster up or down.
2. Release the button and pull down on the
height adjuster to make sure it is locked
in place.
SEATBELT WARNING LAMP AND
INDICATOR CHIME
E71880
This lamp illuminates and an
audible warning will sound if the
driver seatbelt has not been
fastened when the vehicle's ignition is turned
on.
Conditions of operation
ThenIf
The seatbelt warning light illuminates and the warning chime sounds
for a few seconds.
The driver seatbelt is not buckled before the ignition switch is turned
to the on position...
The seatbelt warning light and warning chime turn off.The driver seatbelt is buckled while the indicator light is illuminated
and the warning chime is sounding...
The seatbelt warning light and indicator chime remain off.The driver seatbelt is buckled before the ignition switch is turned to
the on position...
42
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seatbelts
SEATBELT REMINDER
Belt-Minder™
This feature supplements the safety belt
warning function by providing additional
reminders that intermittently sound a tone
and illuminate the safety belt warning light
when you are in the driver seat or you have
a front seat passenger and a safety belt is
unbuckled.
The system uses information from the front
passenger sensing system to determine if a
front seat passenger is present and therefore
potentially in need of a warning. To avoid
activating the Belt-Minder feature for objects
you place in the front passenger seat, only
the front seat passengers receive warnings
as determined by the front passenger
sensing system.
If the Belt-Minder warnings expire (warnings
for about five minutes) for one passenger
(driver or front passenger), the other
passenger can still cause the Belt-Minder
feature to turn on.
Then...If...
The Belt-Minder feature will not activate.You and the front seat passenger buckle your safety belts before you
switch the ignition on or less than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch
the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
You or the front seat passenger do not buckle your safety belts before
your vehicle reaches at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and 1-2 minutes elapse
after you switch the ignition on...
The Belt-Minder feature activates, the safety belt warning light illumin-
ates and a warning tone sounds for 6 seconds every 25 seconds,
repeating for about 5 minutes or until you and the front seat passenger
buckle your safety belts.
The safety belt for the driver or front passenger is unbuckled for about
1 minute while the vehicle is traveling at least 6 mph (9.7 km/h) and
more than 1-2 minutes elapse after you switch the ignition on...
43
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seatbelts
Deactivating and Activating the Belt-Minder
Feature
WARNING: While the system allows
you to deactivate it, this system is designed
to improve your chances of being safely
belted and surviving an accident. We
recommend you leave the system activated
for yourself and others who may use the
vehicle.
Note: The driver and front passenger
warnings switch on and off independently.
When you perform this procedure for one
seating position, do not buckle the other
position as this will terminate the process.
Read Steps 1 - 4 thoroughly before
proceeding with the programming
procedure.
Before following the procedure, make sure
that:
• The parking brake is set.
• The transmission is in park (P) or neutral
(N).
• The ignition is off.
• The driver and front passenger safety
belts are unbuckled.
1. Switch the ignition on. Do not start the
vehicle.
2. Wait until the safety belt warning light
turns off (about one minute). After Step
2, wait an additional 5 seconds before
proceeding with Step 3. Once you start
Step 3, you must complete the procedure
within 30 seconds.
3. For the seating position you are switching
off, buckle then unbuckle the safety belt
three times at a moderate speed, ending
in the unbuckled state. After Step 3, the
safety belt warning light turns on.
4. While the safety belt warning light is on,
buckle and then unbuckle the safety belt.
After Step 4, the safety belt warning light
flashes for confirmation.
• This will switch the feature off for that
seating position if it is currently on.
• This will switch the feature on for that
seating position if it is currently off.
CHILD RESTRAINT AND SEATBELT
MAINTENANCE
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts and child
restraint systems periodically to make sure
they work properly and are not damaged.
Inspect the vehicle seatbelts to make sure
there are no nicks, tears or cuts. Replace if
necessary. All vehicle seatbelt assemblies,
including retractors, buckles, front seatbelt
buckle assemblies, buckle support
assemblies (slide bar-if equipped), shoulder
belt height adjusters (if equipped), shoulder
belt guide on seatback (if equipped), rear
inflatable seatbelts (if equipped), child
restraint LATCH and tether anchors, and
attaching hardware, should be inspected
after a crash. Read the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions for additional
inspection and maintenance information
specific to the child restraint.
44
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seatbelts
We recommend that all seatbelt assemblies
in use in vehicles involved in a crash be
replaced. However, if the crash was minor
and an authorized dealer finds that the belts
do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Seatbelt assemblies not in use
during a crash should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper
operation is noted.
Properly care for seatbelts. See Cleaning
the Interior (page 323).
SEATBELT EXTENSION
WARNING: Persons who fit into the
vehicle's seatbelt should not use an
extension. Unnecessary use could result in
serious personal injury in the event of a
crash.
WARNING: Only use extensions
provided free of charge by Lincoln Motor
Company dealers. The dealer will provide
an extension designed specifically for this
vehicle, model year and seating position. The
use of an extension intended for another
vehicle, model year or seating position may
not offer you the full protection of your
vehicle’s seatbelt restraint system.
WARNING: Never use seatbelt
extensions to install child restraints.
WARNING: Do not use a seatbelt
extension with an inflatable seatbelt.
WARNING: Do not use extensions to
change the fit of the belt across the torso,
over the lap or to make the seatbelt buckle
easier to reach.
If, because of body size or driving position,
it is not possible to properly fasten the
seatbelt over your lap and shoulder, an
extension that is compatible with the
seatbelts is available free of charge from
Lincoln Motor Company dealers. Only Lincoln
seatbelt extensions made by the same
company which made the original equipment
seatbelts, should be used with Lincoln
seatbelts. Ask your authorized dealer if your
extension is compatible with your Lincoln
vehicle restraint system.
45
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seatbelts
The Personal Safety System provides an
improved overall level of frontal crash
protection to front seat occupants and is
designed to help further reduce the risk of
airbag-related injuries. The system is able to
analyze different occupant conditions and
crash severity before activating the
appropriate safety devices to help better
protect a range of occupants in a variety of
frontal crash situations.
The Vehicle Personal Safety System consists
of:
• Driver and passenger dual-stage airbag
supplemental restraints.
• Front seat outermost seatbelts with
pretensioners, energy management
retractors and seatbelt usage sensors.
• Driver seat position sensor.
• Passenger seat position sensor.
• Front passenger sensing system.
• Passenger airbag off and on indicators.
• Front crash severity sensors.
• Restraints control module with impact
and safing sensors.
• Restraint system warning lamp and tone.
• The electrical wiring for the airbags, crash
sensors, seatbelt pretensioners, front
seatbelt usage sensors, driver seat
position sensor, front passenger sensing
system and indicators.
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?
The Personal Safety System can adapt the
deployment strategy of the safety devices
according to crash severity and occupant
conditions. A collection of crash and
occupant sensors provides information to
the restraints control module. During a crash,
the restraints control module may deploy the
seatbelt pretensioners, one or both stages
of the dual-stage airbags based on crash
severity and occupant conditions.
46
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Personal Safety System™
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Airbags do not inflate
slowly or gently, and the risk of injury from a
deploying airbag is the greatest close to the
trim covering the airbag module.
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of
injury or death.
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place your arms on
the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front of
the airbags free from obstruction. Do not affix
anything to or over the airbag covers.
Objects could become projectiles during
airbag deployment or in a sudden stop.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, move the seat upon
which the child restraint is installed all the
way back.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Several airbag system
components get hot after inflation. To reduce
the risk of injury, do not touch them after
inflation.
WARNING: If a supplementary restraint
system component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
The airbags are a supplemental restraint
system and are designed to work with the
seatbelts to help protect the driver and right
front passenger from certain upper body
injuries. Airbags do not inflate slowly; there
is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag.
Note: You will hear a loud bang and see a
cloud of harmless powdery residue if an
airbag deploys. This is normal.
47
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon
activation. After airbag deployment, it is
normal to notice a smoke-like, powdery
residue or smell the burnt propellant. This
may consist of cornstarch, talcum powder (to
lubricate the bag) or sodium compounds (for
example, baking soda) that result from the
combustion process that inflates the airbag.
Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be
present which may irritate the skin and eyes,
but none of the residue is toxic.
While the system is designed to help reduce
serious injuries, contact with a deploying
airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling.
Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility
as a result of the noise associated with a
deploying airbag. Because airbags must
inflate rapidly and with considerable force,
there is the risk of death or serious injuries
such as fractures, facial and eye injuries or
internal injuries, particularly to occupants
who are not properly restrained or are
otherwise out of position at the time of airbag
deployment. Thus, it is extremely important
that occupants be properly restrained as far
away from the airbag module as possible
while maintaining vehicle control.
Routine maintenance of the airbags is not
required.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER
AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place your arms on
the airbag cover or through the steering
wheel. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in personal injury.
WARNING: Keep the areas in front of
the airbags free from obstruction. Do not affix
anything to or over the airbag covers.
Objects could become projectiles during
airbag deployment or in a sudden stop.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, move the seat upon
which the child restraint is installed all the
way back.
E151127
The driver and front passenger airbags will
deploy during significant frontal and near
frontal crashes.
48
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The driver and passenger front airbag system
consists of:
• Driver and passenger airbag modules.
• Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 55).
Proper Driver and Front Passenger
Seating Adjustment
WARNING: National Highway Traffic
Safety Administration (NHTSA) recommends
a minimum distance of at least 10 in (25 cm)
between an occupant's chest and the driver
airbag module.
To properly position yourself away from the
airbag:
• Move your seat to the rear as far as you
can while still reaching the pedals
comfortably.
• Recline the seat slightly (one or two
degrees) from the upright position.
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on seatbelts, it is very important that
they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seatback, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash is greatly
increased.
Children and Airbags
WARNING: Airbags can kill or injure a
child in a child restraint. Never place a
rear-facing child restraint in front of an active
airbag. If you must use a forward-facing child
restraint in the front seat, move the seat upon
which the child restraint is installed all the
way back.
E142846
Children must always be properly restrained.
Accident statistics suggest that children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Failure to follow these instructions
may increase the risk of injury in a crash.
49
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
FRONT PASSENGER SENSING
SYSTEM
WARNING: Even with advanced
restraints systems, properly restrain children
12 and under in a rear seating position.
Failure to follow this could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of
position or with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion and
affect the decision of the passenger sensing
system, resulting in serious injury or death
in the event of a crash. Always sit upright
against your seat back, with your feet on the
floor.
WARNING: Any alteration or
modification to the front passenger seat may
affect the performance of the front passenger
sensing system. This could seriously increase
the risk of injury or death.
This system works with sensors that are part
of the front passenger seat and seatbelt to
detect the presence of a properly-seated
occupant and determine if the front
passenger frontal airbag should be enabled
(may inflate) or not.
E181984
The front passenger sensing system uses a
passenger airbag status indicator that
illuminates indicating that the front
passenger frontal airbag is either ON
(enabled) or OFF (disabled).
The indicator lamp is in the center stack of
the instrument panel.
Note: The passenger airbag status indicator
OFF and ON indicator lamps illuminate for
a short period of time when you first switch
the ignition on to confirm it is functional.
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to disable (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag when the front
passenger seat is unoccupied, or a rear
facing infant seat, a forward-facing child
restraint, or a booster seat is detected. Even
with this technology, parents are strongly
encouraged to always properly restrain
children in the rear seat. The sensor also
turns off the passenger front airbag when
the passenger seat is empty.
• When the front passenger sensing
system disables (will not inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag, the passenger
airbag status indicator illuminates the
OFF lamp and stays lit to remind you that
the front passenger frontal airbag is
disabled.
• If the child restraint has been installed
and the passenger airbag status indicator
illuminates the ON lamp, then switch the
vehicle off, remove the child restraint
from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint
following the child restraint
manufacturer's instructions.
50
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
The front passenger sensing system is
designed to enable (may inflate) the front
passenger frontal airbag anytime the system
senses that a person of adult size is sitting
properly in the front passenger seat.
• When the front passenger sensing
system enables the front passenger
frontal airbag (may inflate), the passenger
airbag status indicator illuminates the ON
lamp and remains illuminated.
If a person of adult size is sitting in the front
passenger seat, but the airbag off indicator
lamp is lit, it is possible that the person is not
sitting properly in the seat. If this happens:
• Switch the vehicle off and ask the person
to place the seat backrest in an upright
position.
• Have the person sit upright in the seat,
centered on the seat cushion, with the
person’s legs comfortably extended.
• Restart the vehicle and have the person
remain in this position for about two
minutes. This allows the system to detect
that person and enable the passenger
frontal airbag.
• If the indicator OFF lamp remains lit even
after this, advise the person to ride in the
rear seat.
Passenger AirbagPassenger Airbag Status IndicatorOccupant
DisabledOFF: LitEmpty
ON: Unlit
DisabledOFF: LitChild
ON: Unlit
EnabledOFF: UnlitAdult
ON: Lit
51
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
After all occupants have adjusted their seats
and put on seatbelts, it is very important that
they continue to sit properly. A properly
seated occupant sits upright, leaning against
the seat backrest, and centered on the seat
cushion, with their feet comfortably extended
on the floor. Sitting improperly can increase
the chance of injury in a crash event. For
example, if an occupant slouches, lies down,
turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward
or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the
chance of injury during a crash greatly
increases.
The conditions listed above may cause the
weight of a properly seated occupant to be
incorrectly interpreted by the front passenger
sensing system. The person in the front
passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter
due to the conditions described in the list
above.
E67017
Make sure the front passenger
sensing system is operating
properly. See Crash Sensors and
Airbag Indicator (page 55).
Do not attempt to repair or service the
system. Take your vehicle immediately to an
authorized dealer.
If it is necessary to modify an advanced front
airbag system to accommodate a person
with disabilities, contact the Ford Customer
Relationship Center. See Getting the
Services You Need (page 269).
SIDE AIRBAGS
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the front or rear
seatbacks, or in areas that may come into
contact with a deploying airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not use accessory seat
covers. The use of accessory seat covers
may prevent the deployment of the side
airbags and increase the risk of injury in an
accident.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on
the door. The side airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the side of the seatback.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
WARNING: If a supplementary restraint
system component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
The side airbags are on the outboard side
of the seat backrests of the front seats. In
certain sideways crashes, the side airbags
will be inflated. The airbag was designed to
inflate between the door panel and occupant
to further enhance the protection provided
occupants in side impact crashes.
52
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
E152533
The system consists of the following:
• A label or embossed side panel
indicating that side airbags are fitted to
your vehicle.
• Side airbags inside the driver and front
passenger seat backrests.
• Front passenger sensing system.
E67017
• Crash sensors and monitoring system
with readiness indicator. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator (page 55).
The design and development of the side
airbag system included recommended
testing procedures that were developed by
a group of automotive safety experts known
as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group.
These recommended testing procedures
help reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags.
DRIVER AND PASSENGER KNEE
AIRBAGS
Driver and passenger knee airbags are
located under or within the instrument panel.
During a crash, the restraints control module
may activate the driver and passenger knee
airbags (individually or both) based on crash
severity and respective occupant conditions.
Under certain crash and occupant conditions,
the driver and passenger knee airbags may
deploy (individually or both) but the
corresponding front airbag may not activate.
As with front and side airbags, it is important
to be properly seated and restrained to
reduce the risk of death or serious injury.
E67017
Make sure the knee airbags are
operating properly. See Crash
Sensors and Airbag Indicator
(page 55).
SAFETY CANOPY™
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the headliner
at the siderail that may come into contact
with a deploying curtain airbag. Failure to
follow these instructions may increase the
risk of personal injury in the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not lean your head on
the door. The curtain airbag could injure you
as it deploys from the headliner.
WARNING: Do not attempt to service,
repair, or modify the supplementary restraint
system or associated components. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury or death.
53
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
WARNING: All occupants of your
vehicle, including the driver, should always
properly wear their seatbelts, even when an
airbag supplemental restraint system is
provided. Failure to properly wear your
seatbelt could seriously increase the risk of
injury or death.
WARNING: To reduce risk of injury, do
not obstruct or place objects in the
deployment path of the airbag.
WARNING: If a supplementary restraint
system component has deployed, it will not
function again. Have the system and
associated components inspected as soon
as possible. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
The Safety Canopy deploys during significant
side crashes or when a certain likelihood of
a rollover event is detected by the rollover
sensor. The Safety Canopy is mounted to
the roof side rail sheet metal, behind the
headliner, above each row of seats. In certain
sideways crashes or rollover events, the
Safety Canopy will be activated, regardless
of which seats are occupied. The Safety
Canopy is designed to inflate between the
side window area and occupants to further
enhance protection provided in side impact
crashes and rollover events.
E75004
The system consists of the following:
• Safety Canopy curtain airbags above the
trim panels over the front and rear side
windows identified by a label or wording
on the headliner or roof-pillar trim.
• A flexible headliner which opens above
the side doors to allow air curtain
deployment
E67017
· Crash sensors and monitoring
system with a readiness indicator.
See Crash Sensors and Airbag
Indicator (page 55).
Properly restrain children 12 years old and
under in the rear seats. The Safety Canopy
will not interfere with children restrained
using a properly installed child or booster
seat because it is designed to inflate
downward from the headliner above the
doors along the side window opening.
The design and development of the Safety
Canopy included recommended testing
procedures that were developed by a group
of automotive safety experts known as the
Side Airbag Technical Working Group. These
recommended testing procedures help
reduce the risk of injuries related to the
deployment of side airbags (including the
Safety Canopy).
54
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
CRASH SENSORS AND AIRBAG
INDICATOR
WARNING: Modifying or adding
equipment to the front end of the vehicle
(including frame, bumper, front end body
structure and tow hooks) may affect the
performance of the airbag system, increasing
the risk of injury. Do not modify the front end
of the vehicle.
Your vehicle has a collection of crash and
occupant sensors which provide information
to the restraints control module. The
restraints control module deploys (activates)
the front seatbelt system, the adaptive
collapsible steering column, driver airbag,
passenger airbag, knee airbag(s), seat
mounted side airbags, Safety Canopy and
optional rear inflatable seatbelts. Based on
the type of crash, the restraints control
module will deploy the appropriate safety
devices.
The restraints control module also monitors
the readiness of the above safety devices
plus the crash and occupant sensors. The
readiness of the safety system is indicated
by a warning indicator light in the instrument
cluster or a backup tone (if equipped).
Routine maintenance of the airbag is not
required.
A difficulty with the system is indicated by
one or more of the following:
E67017
The readiness light will not
illuminate immediately after the
ignition is turned on.
• The readiness light will either flash or
stay lit.
• A series of five beeps will be heard (If
equipped). The tone pattern will repeat
periodically until the problem, the light
or both are repaired.
If any of these things happen, even
intermittently, have the supplemental
restraint system serviced at an authorized
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the
system may not function properly in the
event of a crash.
The seatbelt pretensioners and the front
airbag supplemental restraint system are
designed to activate when the vehicle
sustains frontal deceleration sufficient to
cause the restraints control module to deploy
a safety device.
The fact that the seatbelt pretensioners or
front airbags did not activate for both front
seat occupants in a crash does not mean
that something is wrong with the system.
Rather, it means the restraints control module
determined the accident conditions (crash
severity, belt usage) were not appropriate to
activate these safety devices.
• The design of the front airbags is to
activate only in frontal and near-frontal
crashes (not rollovers, side impacts or
rear impacts) unless the crash causes
sufficient frontal deceleration.
• The seatbelt pretensioners and rear
inflatable seatbelts are designed to
activate in frontal, near-frontal and side
crashes and rollovers.
• The knee airbag(s) may deploy based on
crash severity and occupant conditions.
55
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
• The design of the side airbags is to inflate
in certain side impact crashes. Side
airbags may activate in other types of
crashes if the vehicle experiences
sufficient sideways motion or
deformation.
• The design of the Safety Canopy is to
inflate in certain side impact crashes or
rollover events. The Safety Canopy may
activate in other types of crashes if the
vehicle experiences sufficient sideways
motion or deformation, or a certain
likelihood of rollover.
AIRBAG DISPOSAL
Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. Airbags must be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
56
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Supplementary Restraints System
GENERAL INFORMATION ON
RADIO FREQUENCIES
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with Licence exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
• This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The typical operating range for your
transmitter is approximately 33 ft (10 m).
Vehicles with the remote start feature will
have a greater range. One of the following
could cause a decrease in operating range:
• weather conditions
• nearby radio towers
• structures around the vehicle
• other vehicles parked next to your
vehicle
Other short-distance radio transmitters, such
as amateur radios, medical equipment,
wireless headphones, remote controls and
alarm systems may operate on the same
frequency as your remote control. If other
transmitters are operating on those
frequencies, you may not be able to use your
remote control. Using your remote control
near some types of electronic equipment,
such as USB devices, computers or cell
phones can interfere with remote operation.
Operating your remote control near metal or
metallic-finished purses, bags or clothing can
interfere with remote operation. You can lock
and unlock the doors with the key.
Note: Make sure to lock your vehicle before
leaving it unattended.
Note: If you are in range, the remote control
will operate if you press any button
unintentionally.
Intelligent Access
The system uses a radio frequency signal to
communicate with your vehicle and authorize
your vehicle to unlock when one of the
following conditions are met:
• You touch the inside of any exterior door
handle within 3 ft (1 m) proximity of an
intelligent access key.
• You press the luggage compartment
button.
• You press a button on the transmitter.
If excessive radio frequency interference is
present in the area or if the transmitter
battery is low, you may need to mechanically
unlock your door. You can use the
mechanical key blade in your intelligent
access key to open the driver door in this
situation. See Remote Control (page 58).
57
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
REMOTE CONTROL
Intelligent Access Key
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
E218688
The intelligent access keys operate the
power locks and the remote start system.
The key must be in your vehicle to use the
push button start.
E151795
Note: Your vehicle keys came with a
security label that provides important key
cut information. Keep the label in a safe
place for future reference.
Removable Key Blade
The intelligent access key also contains a
removable key blade that you can use to
unlock your vehicle.
E218689
Push the release button and pull the key
blade out.
Replacing the Battery
Note: Refer to local regulations when
disposing of transmitter batteries.
Note: Do not wipe off any grease on the
battery terminals or on the back surface of
the circuit board.
58
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Note: Replacing the battery does not erase
the programmed key from your vehicle. The
transmitter should operate normally.
A message appears in the information
display when the remote control battery is
low. See Information Messages (page 116).
The remote control uses one coin-type
three-volt lithium battery equivalent.
E218689
1. Push the release button and pull the key
blade out.
E218690
2. Twist a thin coin under the tab hidden
behind the key blade head to remove
the battery cover.
E218691
3. Insert a suitable tool, for example a
screwdriver, in the position shown and
carefully remove the battery.
4. Install a new battery with the + facing
upward.
59
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
5. Reinstall the battery cover and the key
blade.
Car Finder
E138623
Press the button twice within three
seconds. A tone sounds and the
direction indicators will flash. We
recommend you use this method to locate
your vehicle, rather than using the panic
alarm.
Sounding the Panic Alarm
Note: The panic alarm only operates when
the ignition is off.
E138624
Press the button to sound the
panic alarm. Press the button
again or switch the ignition on to
turn it off.
Remote Start
WARNING: To avoid exhaust fumes,
do not use remote start if your vehicle is
parked indoors or in areas that are not well
ventilated.
Note: Do not use remote start if your fuel
level is low.
E138625
The remote start button is on the
transmitter.
This feature allows you to start your vehicle
from the outside. The transmitter has an
extended operating range.
You can configure your automatic climate
control to operate when you remote start
your vehicle. See Climate Control (page
136).
Many states and provinces have restrictions
for the use of remote start. Check your local
and state or provincial laws for specific
requirements regarding remote start
systems.
The remote start system does not work if any
of the following occur:
• The ignition is on.
• The anti-theft alarm triggers.
• You switch the feature off in the
information display.
• The hood is open.
• The transmission is not in park (P).
• The battery voltage is below the
minimum operating voltage.
Remote Control Feedback (If Equipped)
An LED on the remote control provides status
feedback of remote start or stop commands.
StatusLED
Remote start
successful
Solid green
Remote stop
successful
Solid red
Request failed or
status not received
Blinking red
Status incompleteBlinking green
60
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
Remote Starting your Vehicle
Note: You must press each button within
three seconds of each other. If you do not
follow this sequence, your vehicle does not
start remotely, the direction indicators do
not flash twice and the horn does not sound.
E138626
1. Press the lock button to lock all the
doors.
2. Press the remote start button twice. The
exterior lamps flash twice.
A tone sounds if the system fails to start.
Note: You must press the push button
ignition switch on the instrument panel once
while applying the brake pedal before
driving your vehicle.
The power windows do not work during
remote start and the radio does not turn on
automatically.
The parking lamps remain on and your
vehicle will run for 5, 10 or 15 minutes,
depending on the setting.
Extending the Engine Running Time
To extend the engine running time duration
of your vehicle during remote start, repeat
steps 1 and 2 while the engine is running. If
the duration is set to 15 minutes, the duration
extends by another 15 minutes. For example,
if your vehicle had been running from the
first remote start for 5 minutes, your vehicle
continues to run now for a total of 30
minutes. You can extend the engine running
time duration to a maximum of 30 minutes.
Wait at least five seconds before remote
starting after the engine stops running.
Turning Your Vehicle Off After Remote
Starting
E138625
Press the button once. Your
vehicle and the parking lamps turn
off.
You may have to be closer to your vehicle
than when starting due to ground reflection
and the added noise of your running vehicle.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display. See General
Information (page 110).
Memory Feature
You can program your intelligent access key
to recall memory positions. See Memory
Function (page 147).
REPLACING A LOST KEY OR
REMOTE CONTROL
Replacement keys or remote controls can
be purchased from an authorized dealer.
Authorized dealers can program remote
controls for your vehicle. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 77).
61
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Keys and Remote Controls
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
MyKey allows you to program keys with
restricted driving modes to promote good
driving habits. You can program the
restrictions to all keys except one. Any keys
that you did not program are administrator
keys or admin keys.
You can use admin keys to:
• Create a MyKey with certain vehicle
restrictions.
• Program certain MyKey settings.
• Clear all MyKey restrictions.
After you program a MyKey, you can view
the following information through the
information display:
• The total number of admin keys and
MyKeys for your vehicle.
• The total distance a MyKey driver
traveled with your vehicle.
Note: Every MyKey receives the same
restrictions and settings. You cannot
program them individually.
Note: For vehicles equipped with a
push-button start switch: When both a MyKey
and an admin key are present when you
start your vehicle, the system recognizes the
admin key only.
Standard Settings
Not every vehicle includes the features listed
below. If your vehicle has this equipment,
then you cannot change the following
settings when using a MyKey:
• Seatbelt reminder or Belt-Minder™. MyKey
mutes the audio system until drivers, and
in some instances, passengers, fasten
their seatbelts. Note: If your vehicle
includes an AM/FM radio or a very basic
audio system, then the radio may not
mute.
• Earlier low-fuel warning. The low-fuel
warning activates earlier for MyKey
drivers, giving them more time to refuel.
• Certain driver alerts, stability systems or
parking aids turn on automatically when
you use the MyKey system. For example,
Blind Spot Information System (BLIS),
cross traffic alert, lane departure warning
or forward collision warning. Note: MyKey
drivers may be able to turn the lane
departure warning feature off, but this
feature turns back on automatically with
every new key cycle.
• Restricted touchscreen operation in some
markets. For example, MyKey may
prevent manual navigation destination
input while the vehicle is in any gear
other than park (P) or when the vehicle
reaches a certain rate of speed.
• Satellite radio adult content restrictions,
if this feature is available in your market.
Optional Settings
You can configure certain vehicle feature
settings when you first create a MyKey. You
can also change the settings afterward with
an admin key.
62
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
MyKey™
Note: Not every feature applies to every
vehicle in every market. When they are
available for your vehicle, then they appear
in your information display, providing choices
to switch them on or off, or to select a more
specific setting.
• Various vehicle speed limits so the
MyKey driver cannot exceed certain
speeds. The information display shows
warnings followed by an audible tone
when the MyKey driver reaches the set
speed. You cannot override the set
speed by fully depressing the accelerator
pedal.
WARNING: Do not set MyKey
maximum speed limit to a limit that will
prevent the driver from maintaining a safe
speed considering posted speed limits and
prevailing road conditions. The driver is
always responsible to drive in accordance
with local laws and prevailing conditions.
Failure to do so could result in accident or
injury.
• Various vehicle speed reminders so
MyKey drivers know when their vehicle
speed approaches the limits. Warnings
appear in your information display and a
tone sounds when the MyKey drivers
exceed the set vehicle speed.
• The audio system's maximum volume
limits to 45% so MyKey drivers can
concentrate on the road. A message
appears in the information display when
MyKey drivers attempt to exceed the
limited volume. MyKey also disables the
automatic volume control. Note: If your
vehicle includes an AM/FM radio or a
very basic audio system, then the radio
may not limit.
• Always on setting. This setting forces
certain features to remain on and active
for MyKey drivers. For example, E911 or
emergency assistance and the do not
disturb features stay on even if a MyKey
driver uses the feature's control to switch
it off. When you select, you will not be
able to turn off Advance Trac or traction
control (if your vehicle has this feature).
CREATING A MYKEY
Use the information display to create a
MyKey:
1. Insert the key you want to program into
the ignition. See Starting a Gasoline
Engine (page 162). If your vehicle is
equipped with a push-button start, place
the remote control into the backup slot.
See Passive Anti-Theft System (page
77).
2. Switch the ignition on.
3. Access the main menu in the information
display and then scroll through the
menus to change the settings of your
MyKey. From the MyKey menu select the
option Create MyKey. See Information
Displays (page 110).
4. When prompted, hold the OK button until
you see a message informing you to label
this key as a MyKey. The programmed
restrictions apply when you key off, open
and close the driver door and restart your
vehicle with the programmed key or
transmitter.
63
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
MyKey™
MyKey is successfully created. Make sure
you label it so you can distinguish it from the
admin keys.
You can also program configurable settings
for the key(s). See Programming and
Changing Configurable Settings.
Programming and Changing
Configurable Settings
Use the information display to access your
configurable MyKey settings.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin key
or transmitter you want to program.
2. Access the main menu in the information
display and then scroll through the
menus to change the settings of your
MyKey. See Information Displays (page
110).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
Note: You can clear or change your MyKey
settings at any time during the same key
cycle as you created the MyKey. Once you
have switched the vehicle off, however, you
will need an admin key to change or clear
your MyKey settings.
CLEARING ALL MYKEYS
When you clear your MyKeys, you remove
all restrictions and return all MyKeys to their
original admin key status at once. To clear
all MyKeys of all MyKey settings, use the
information display.
1. Switch the ignition on using an admin
key.
2. Access the main menu in the information
display and then scroll through the
menus to begin clearing your MyKey
programming. See Information Displays
(page 110).
3. Follow the instructions in the display.
4. A confirmation message appears in the
display after you finish clearing your
MyKeys.
Note: When you clear your MyKeys, you
remove all restrictions and return all MyKeys
to their original admin key status. You cannot
remove the MyKey restrictions individually.
CHECKING MYKEY SYSTEM
STATUS
You can find information about your
programmed MyKeys by using the
information display. See Information
Displays (page 110).
MyKey Distance
Tracks the distance when drivers use a
MyKey. The only way to delete the
accumulated distance is by using an admin
key to clear all MyKeys. If the distance does
not accumulate as expected, then the
intended user is not using the MyKey, or an
admin key user recently cleared and then
recreated a MyKey.
Number of MyKeys
Indicates the number of MyKeys
programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature
to detect how many MyKeys you have for
your vehicle and determine when all MyKeys
have been deleted.
64
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
MyKey™
Number of Admin Keys
Indicates how many admin keys are
programmed to your vehicle. Use this feature
to determine how many admin keys you have
for your vehicle, and detect if an additional
MyKey has been programmed.
USING MYKEY WITH REMOTE
START SYSTEMS
MyKey is not compatible with non
Lincoln-approved, aftermarket remote start
systems. If you choose to install a remote
start system, see an authorized dealer for a
Lincoln-approved remote start system.
MYKEY TROUBLESHOOTING
Potential CausesCondition
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges.I cannot create a MyKey.
Vehicles with keyless start: Make sure you place the transmitter into the backup slot. See Passive
Anti-Theft System (page 77).
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle is the only admin key. There always has to be at
least one admin key.
The passive anti-theft system is disabled or in unlimited mode.
The transmitter used to start your vehicle does not have admin privileges.I cannot program the configurable
settings. There are no MyKeys programmed to the vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 63).
The key or transmitter used to start the vehicle does not have admin privileges.I cannot clear the MyKeys.
No MyKeys are created. See Creating a MyKey (page 63).
Purchase a new key or transmitter from an authorized dealer.I lost the only admin key.
65
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
MyKey™
Potential CausesCondition
Program a spare key or transmitter. You may need to see an authorized dealer. See Passive Anti-
Theft System (page 77).
I lost a key.
The MyKey user is not using the MyKey.The MyKey distance does not accumu-
late. An admin key holder cleared the MyKeys and created new MyKeys.
The key system has been reset.
An admin transmitter is present at vehicle start.No MyKey functions with the trans-
mitter. There are no MyKeys programmed to your vehicle. See Creating a MyKey (page 63).
66
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
MyKey™
LOCKING AND UNLOCKING
You can use the power door lock control or
the remote control to lock and unlock your
vehicle.
Power Door Locks
The power door lock control is on the driver
and front passenger door panels.
E138628
Unlock.A
Lock.B
Door Lock Indicator
An LED on each door window trim illuminates
when you lock the door. It remains on for
up to 10 minutes after you switch the ignition
off.
Door Lock Switch Inhibitor
When you electronically lock your vehicle,
the power door lock switch and interior trunk
release switch will not operate after 20
seconds. You must unlock your vehicle with
the remote control or keyless keypad, or
switch the ignition on, to restore function to
these switches. You can switch this feature
on or off in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 116).
Note: Switch the ignition on and off after
changing the setting in the information
display.
Rear Door Unlocking and Opening
Pull the interior door handle twice to unlock
and open a rear door. The first pull unlocks
the door and the second pull opens the door.
Remote Control
You can use the remote control at any time.
Unlocking the Doors (Two-Stage Unlock)
E138629
Press the button to unlock the
driver door.
Press the button again within three
seconds to unlock all doors. A tone sounds
and the direction indicators flash.
Press and hold both the lock and unlock
buttons on the remote control for three
seconds to change between driver door or
all doors unlock mode. The direction
indicators will flash twice to indicate a
change to the unlocking mode. Driver door
mode only unlocks the driver door when you
press the unlock button once. All door mode
unlocks all doors when you press the unlock
button once. The unlocking mode applies
to the remote control, keyless entry keypad
and intelligent access. You can also change
between the unlocking modes using the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 116).
67
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
Locking the Doors
E138623
Press the button to lock all doors.
A tone sounds and the direction
indicators flash.
Press the button again within three seconds
to confirm that all the doors are closed. The
doors lock again, a tone sounds and the
direction indicators flash if all the doors and
the luggage compartment are closed.
Mislock
If any door or the luggage compartment is
open, or if the hood is open on vehicles with
an anti-theft alarm or remote start, a tone
sounds and the direction indicators do not
flash. You can switch this feature on or off
in the information display. See Information
Messages (page 116).
Opening the Luggage Compartment
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the luggage compartment.
Make sure to close and latch the luggage
compartment before driving your vehicle. An
unlatched luggage compartment may cause
objects to fall out or block your view.
Note: The luggage compartment release
button only works when your vehicle speed
is below 3 mph (5 km/h).
Activating Intelligent Access
General Information
You can unlock and lock the vehicle without
taking the keys out of your pocket or purse
when your intelligent access key is within
3 ft (1 m) of your vehicle. Intelligent access
uses a sensor on the back of the door handle
for unlocking and a separate sensor on the
face of each door handle for locking.
The system does not function if:
• Your vehicle battery has no charge.
• The key battery has no charge.
• The passive key frequencies are jammed.
Note: The system may not function if the key
is close to metal objects or electronic
devices, for example keys or a cell phone.
Note: If the system does not function, use
the key blade to lock and unlock your
vehicle. See Remote Control (page 58).
Unlocking Using Intelligent Access
E248553
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the unlock sensor
on the back of the door handle for a brief
period and then pull on the door handle to
unlock, being careful to not touch the lock
sensor at the same time or pulling the door
handle too quickly. The intelligent access
system requires a brief delay to authenticate
your intelligent access key fob.
Locking Using Intelligent Access
E248554
68
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
With your intelligent access key within 3 ft
(1 m) of your vehicle, touch the outer door
handle lock sensor for approximately one
second to lock, being careful to not touch
the unlock sensor on the back of the door
handle at the same time. After locking, you
can immediately pull on the door handle to
confirm locking occurred without
inadvertently unlocking.
Locking and Unlocking the Doors with
the Key Blade
E112203
If the central locking function does not
operate, lock the doors individually using the
key in the position shown.
On the driver side, turn the key clockwise to
lock. On the passenger side, turn the key
counterclockwise to lock.
Smart Unlocks for Intelligent Access
Keys
This feature helps to prevent you from
locking your intelligent access key inside
your vehicle's passenger compartment or
rear cargo area.
When you electronically lock your vehicle
with any door open, the transmission is in
park (P) and the ignition is off, the system
searches for an intelligent access key inside
your vehicle after you close the last door. If
the system finds a key, all of the doors
immediately unlock and a tone sounds,
indicating a key is inside.
You can override the smart unlock feature
and intentionally lock the intelligent access
key inside your vehicle.
To do this, lock your vehicle after you have
closed all the doors by:
• Using the keyless entry keypad.
• Pressing the lock button on another
intelligent access key.
• Touching the locking area on the front of
the door handle with another intelligent
access key in your hand.
69
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
When you open one of the front doors and
lock your vehicle using the power door lock
control, all doors will lock then unlock if:
• The ignition is on.
• The ignition is off and the transmission
is not in park (P).
Autolock (If Equipped)
Autolock locks all the doors when:
• All doors are closed.
• The ignition is on.
• You shift into any gear putting your
vehicle in motion.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autolock repeats when:
• You open then close any door while the
ignition is on and your vehicle speed is
9 mph (15 km/h) or lower.
• Your vehicle reaches a speed greater
than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Autounlock
Autounlock unlocks all the doors when:
• The ignition is on, all the doors are
closed, and your vehicle has been
moving at a speed greater than 12 mph
(20 km/h).
• Your vehicle comes to a stop and you
switch the ignition off or to the accessory
position.
• You open the driver door within 10
minutes of switching the ignition off or to
accessory.
Note: The doors will not autounlock if you
electronically lock your vehicle after you
switch the ignition off and before you open
the driver door.
Enabling or Disabling Autounlock
You can enable or disable the autounlock
feature in the information display or an
authorized dealer can do it for you. See
General Information (page 110).
Illuminated Entry
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when you unlock the doors with
the remote control.
The illuminated entry system turns off the
lights if:
• The ignition is on.
• You press the remote control lock button.
• After 25 seconds of illumination.
The lights do not turn off if:
• You turn them on with the lamp control.
• Any door is open.
Illuminated Exit
The interior lamps and some exterior lamps
illuminate when all doors are closed and you
switch the ignition off.
The lamps turn off when all the doors remain
closed and:
• 25 seconds have elapsed.
• You press the push button ignition
switch.
70
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
Battery Saver
If you leave the courtesy lamps, interior
lamps or headlamps on, the battery saver
shuts them off 10 minutes after you switch
the ignition off.
Accessory Mode Battery Saver for
Intelligent Access Keys
If you leave the ignition switched on, it shuts
off when it detects a certain amount of
battery drain, or after 45 minutes.
Luggage Compartment
From Inside Your Vehicle
E138633
Press the button on the instrument
panel to open the luggage
compartment.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press twice within three seconds
to open the luggage compartment.
From Outside Your Vehicle
E205262
Press the exterior release button to open the
luggage compartment. Your vehicle must be
unlocked or have an intelligent access
transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) of the luggage
compartment.
POWER DECKLID (If Equipped)
WARNING: Make sure all persons are
clear of the power decklid area before using
the power decklid control.
WARNING: Keep keys out of the reach
of children. Do not allow children to operate
or play near an open or moving power
decklid. You should supervise the operation
of the power decklid at all times.
Note: Do not drive with the decklid open
unless you switch off the power feature.
Make sure the decklid is fully closed before
you drive your vehicle.
You can switch the power decklid feature on
or off in the information display. See General
Information (page 110). The remote control
and instrument panel button will still operate
the decklid regardless of the setting.
71
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
Opening and Closing the Power
Decklid
Note: You can reverse the decklid
movement. Press the instrument panel or
decklid button again, or press the remote
control button twice.
Note: Do not push or pull on the power
decklid while it is under operation, as this
may cause damage to your vehicle.
The decklid will only operate with the
transmission in park (P).
If the decklid reverses or starts to close after
an open request, you will hear a fast
continuous chime. This indicates excessive
load on the decklid or a possible gas strut
failure. If the decklid continues to close after
opening, have the system checked by an
authorized dealer.
From Inside Your Vehicle
E138633
Press the button on the instrument
panel.
With the Remote Control
E138630
Press the button twice within three
seconds.
From Outside Your Vehicle
E205262
Press the exterior release button to open the
luggage compartment. Your vehicle must be
unlocked or have an intelligent access
transmitter within 3 ft (1 m) of the luggage
compartment.
Note: Let the power system operate the
decklid after pressing the control. Pushing
or pulling the decklid may activate the
obstacle detection feature and stop the
power operation.
With the Decklid Close Button
E194407
Press the button inside the decklid
on the left-hand side.
Obstacle Detection
The decklid will reverse to full open if it
detects an obstacle while closing. Three
chimes will sound as the decklid begins to
reopen. Remove the obstacle to close the
decklid.
72
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
Note: Before driving your vehicle, check the
instrument cluster for a trunk ajar or door
ajar message or warning indicator. Failure
to do this could result in unintentionally
leaving the decklid open while driving.
The decklid will stop and three chimes will
sound if it detects an obstacle while opening.
Remove the obstacle to operate the decklid.
Resetting the Power Decklid
The decklid may not operate correctly and
you may need to reset it if:
• The vehicle battery charge is low.
• You disconnect the battery.
• You manually close the decklid and leave
it unlatched.
To reset the power decklid:
1. Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds
then reconnect the battery.
2. Manually close the decklid making sure
it is fully closed.
3. Power open the decklid using the remote
control or instrument panel button.
KEYLESS ENTRY
SECURICODE™ KEYLESS ENTRY
KEYPAD
The keypad is located near the driver
window. It is invisible until you touch it, then
it lights up so you can see and touch the
appropriate buttons.
Note: If you enter your entry code too fast
on the keypad, the unlock function may not
work. Re-enter your entry code more slowly.
E138637
You can use the keypad to:
• Lock or unlock the doors.
• Program and erase personal entry codes.
• Arm and disarm the anti-theft alarm.
• Release the trunk.
Note: The keypad does not operate a power
decklid.
73
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
You can operate the keypad with the
factory-set 5-digit entry code. The code is
located on the owner’s wallet card in the
glove box and is available from an authorized
dealer. You can also create up to five of your
own 5-digit personal entry codes.
Programming a Personal Entry Code
To create your own personal entry code:
1. Enter the factory-set code.
2. Press 1·2 on the keypad within five
seconds.
3. Enter your personal 5-digit code. You
must enter each number within five
seconds of each other.
4. Press 1·2 on the keypad to save personal
code 1.
The doors lock then unlock to confirm that
programming was successful.
To program additional personal entry codes,
repeat Steps 1-3, then for Step 4:
• Press 3·4 to save personal code 2
• Press 5·6 to save personal code 3
• Press 7·8 to save personal code 4
• Press 9·0 to save personal code 5.
You may also program a personal entry code
using the touchscreen. See Settings (page
461).
Tips:
• Do not set a code that uses five of the
same number.
• Do not use five numbers in sequential
order.
• The factory-set code works even if you
have set your own personal code.
Erasing a Personal Code
1. Enter the factory-set 5-digit code.
2. Press and release 1·2 on the keypad
within five seconds.
3. Press and hold 1·2 for two seconds. You
must do this within five seconds of
completing Step 2.
If you complete this successfully, you have
erased all personal codes and only the
factory-set 5-digit code works.
Anti-Scan Feature
The keypad goes into an anti-scan mode if
you enter the wrong code seven times (35
consecutive button presses). This mode
disables the keypad for one minute and the
keypad lamp flashes.
The anti-scan feature turns off after:
• One minute of keypad inactivity.
• Pressing the unlock button on the remote
control.
• Switching the ignition on.
• Unlocking your vehicle using intelligent
access.
Unlocking and Locking the Doors
To Unlock the Driver Door
Enter the factory-set 5-digit code or your
personal code. You must press each number
within five seconds of each other. The
interior lamps illuminate.
Note: All doors unlock if you enable the all
door unlocking mode. See Locking and
Unlocking (page 67).
74
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
To Unlock All Doors
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 3·4 within five seconds.
To Lock All Doors
Press and hold 7·8 and 9·0 at the same time
with the driver door closed. You do not need
to enter the keypad code first.
To Release the Trunk
Enter the factory-set code or your personal
code, then press 5·6 within five seconds.
Note: The keypad does not operate a power
decklid.
Displaying the Factory Set Code
Note: You need to have two programmed
intelligent access keys for this procedure.
To display the factory-set code in the
information display:
E155835
1. Remove the rubber covering (A) from the
cupholder. With the buttons facing
upwards and the unlock button facing
the front of the vehicle, place the first
intelligent access in the backup slot (B).
2. Press the START/STOP button once and
wait a few seconds.
3. Press the START/STOP button again and
remove the key.
4. Insert the second programmed key into
the backup slot, and then press the
START/STOP button.
The factory-set code appears in the
information display for a few seconds.
Note: The code may not display until after
any other warning messages first display.
INTERIOR LUGGAGE
COMPARTMENT RELEASE
WARNING: Keep vehicle doors and
luggage compartment locked and keep keys
and remote transmitters out of a child’s
reach. Unsupervised children could lock
themselves in the trunk and risk injury.
Children should be taught not to play in
vehicles.
WARNING: Do not leave children or
animals unattended in the vehicle. On hot
days, the temperature in the trunk or vehicle
interior can rise very quickly. Exposure of
people or animals to these high
temperatures for even a short time can cause
death or serious heat-related injuries,
including brain damage. Small children are
particularly at risk.
75
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
Your vehicle is equipped with a release
handle that provides a means of escape for
children and adults if they become locked
inside the luggage compartment.
Adults should familiarize themselves with the
operation and location of the release handle.
E144403
The handle is located inside the luggage
compartment either on the luggage
compartment door (lid) or near the tail lamps.
It is composed of a material that will glow for
hours in darkness following brief exposure
to ambient light.
Pull the handle and push up on the luggage
compartment door (lid) to open from within
the luggage compartment.
76
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Doors and Locks
PASSIVE ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM
Note: The system is not compatible with
non-Ford aftermarket remote start systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle
starting problems and a loss of security
protection.
Note: Metallic objects, electronic devices
or a second coded key on the same key
chain may cause vehicle starting problems
if they are too close to the key when starting
your vehicle. Prevent these objects from
touching the coded key while starting your
vehicle. Switch the ignition off, move all
objects on the key chain away from the
coded key and restart your vehicle if a
problem occurs.
Note: Do not leave a duplicate coded key
in your vehicle. Always take your keys and
lock all doors when leaving your vehicle.
SecuriLock
The system helps prevent your vehicle from
starting unless you use a coded key
programmed to your vehicle. Using the
wrong key may prevent your vehicle from
starting. A message may appear in the
information display.
If you are unable to start your vehicle with a
correctly coded key, it is not operating
properly. A message may appear in the
information display.
Automatic Arming
Your vehicle arms immediately after
switching the ignition off.
Automatic Disarming
Switching the ignition on with a coded key
disarms your vehicle.
Replacement Keys
Note: Your vehicle comes equipped with two
intelligent access keys.
The intelligent access key functions as a
programmed key that operates the driver
door lock and activates the intelligent access
with push button start system, as well as a
remote control.
If your programmed transmitters are lost or
stolen and you do not have an extra coded
key, have your vehicle towed to an
authorized dealer. You need to erase the
key codes from your vehicle and program
new coded keys.
Store an extra programmed key away from
your vehicle in a safe place to help prevent
any inconveniences. See your authorized
dealer to purchase additional spare or
replacement keys.
Programming a Spare Intelligent Access
Key
Note: You can program a maximum of four
intelligent access keys to your vehicle.
77
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Security
You must have two previously programmed
intelligent access keys inside your vehicle
and the new unprogrammed intelligent
access keys readily accessible. See an
authorized dealer to have the spare key
programmed if two previously programmed
keys are not available.
Make sure that your vehicle is off before
beginning this procedure. Make sure that
you close all the doors before beginning and
that they remain closed throughout the
procedure. Perform all steps within 30
seconds of starting the sequence. Stop and
wait for at least one minute before starting
again if you perform any steps out of
sequence.
Read and understand the entire procedure
before you begin.
E155835
1. Remove the rubber covering (A) from the
cupholder. With the buttons facing
upwards and the unlock button facing
the front of the vehicle, place the first
intelligent access in the backup slot (B).
2. Press the push button ignition switch.
3. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
4. Remove the intelligent access key.
5. Within 10 seconds, place a second
programmed intelligent access key in the
backup slot. Press the push button
ignition switch.
6. Wait five seconds and then press the
push button ignition switch again.
7. Remove the intelligent access key.
8. Place the unprogrammed intelligent
access key in the backup slot and press
the push button ignition switch.
Programming is now complete. Verify the
remote control functions operate and your
vehicle starts with the new intelligent access
key.
If programming was not successful, wait 10
seconds and repeat Steps 1 through 7. If you
are still unsuccessful, take your vehicle to
your authorized dealer.
ANTI-THEFT ALARM
The system will warn you of an unauthorized
entry to your vehicle. It will be triggered if
any door, the luggage compartment or the
hood is opened without using the key,
remote control or keyless entry keypad.
The direction indicators will flash and the
horn will sound if unauthorized entry is
attempted while the alarm is armed.
78
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Security
Take all remote controls to an authorized
dealer if there is any potential alarm problem
with your vehicle.
Arming the Alarm
The alarm is ready to arm when there is not
a key in your vehicle. Electronically lock your
vehicle to arm the alarm.
Disarming the Alarm
Disarm the alarm by any of the following
actions:
• Unlock the doors or luggage
compartment with the remote control or
keyless entry keypad.
• Switch your vehicle on or start your
vehicle.
• Use a key in the driver door to unlock
your vehicle, then switch your vehicle on
within 12 seconds.
Note: Pressing the panic button on the
remote control will stop the horn and signal
indicators, but will not disarm the system.
79
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Security
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
- VEHICLES WITH: MANUAL
ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering
wheel when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 141).
E259854
1. Unlock the steering column.
2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired
position.
E259855
3. Lock the steering column.
ADJUSTING THE STEERING WHEEL
- VEHICLES WITH: POWER
ADJUSTABLE STEERING COLUMN
WARNING: Do not adjust the steering
wheel when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Make sure that you are sitting in the
correct position. See Sitting in the Correct
Position (page 141).
80
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
E261582
Use the control on the side of the steering
column to adjust the position.
To adjust:
• Tilt: Press the top or bottom of the
control.
• Telescope: Press the front or rear of the
control.
End of Travel Position
The steering column sets a stopping position
just short of the end of the column position
to prevent damage to the steering column.
A new stopping position sets if the steering
column encounters an object when tilting or
telescoping.
To reset the steering column to its normal
stopping position:
1. Confirm there is nothing obstructing the
motion of the steering column.
2. Press and hold the steering column
control until the steering column stops
moving.
3. Press the steering column control again.
Note: The steering column may begin to
move again.
4. When the steering column stops,
continue holding the control for a few
seconds.
5. Repeat for each direction as necessary.
A new stopping position sets. The next time
you tilt or telescope the steering column, it
stops just short of the end of the column
position.
Memory Feature (If Equipped)
You can save and recall the steering column
position with the memory function. See
Memory Function (page 147).
Pressing the adjustment control during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
The column moves up when you switch the
ignition off. Switch the ignition on to return
the system to its previous settings. You can
switch this feature on or off in the information
display. See Information Displays (page
110).
Note: If you press any adjustment or
memory button when in easy exit mode, the
system cancels the operation.
Note: Depending on your vehicle, the column
may move up and in.
81
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
AUDIO CONTROL
You can operate the following functions with
the control:
E145979
Volume up.A
Volume down.B
Seek up or next.C
Seek down or previous.D
Mute.E
Seek, Next or Previous
Press the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next or previous
stored preset.
• Play the next or the previous track.
Press and hold the seek button to:
• Tune the radio to the next station up or
down the frequency band.
• Seek through a track.
VOICE CONTROL
E145980
Voice recognition.A
End call.B
Answer call.C
See your SYNC information.
82
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
CRUISE CONTROL
Type One
E145976
Type Two
E222823
See Cruise Control (page 217).
INFORMATION DISPLAY CONTROL
E145981
See Information Displays (page 110).
HEATED STEERING WHEEL
The heated steering wheel button is on the
climate controls.
Press the button to switch the
heated steering wheel on and off.
Note: You can use the heated steering
wheel only when the engine is running.
Note: The system uses a sensor and is
designed to control the temperature of the
steering wheel and to prevent it from
overheating.
Note: In warm temperatures, the steering
wheel quickly reaches its maximum
temperature and the system reduces the
current to the heating element. This could
cause you to think that the system has
stopped working but it has not. This is
normal.
83
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Steering Wheel
WINDSHIELD WIPERS
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure you switch the windshield
wipers off before entering a car wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: Do not operate the wipers on a dry
windshield. This may scratch the glass,
damage the wiper blades or cause the wiper
motor to burn out. Always use the
windshield washers before wiping a dry
windshield.
E221743
Single wipe.A
Intermittent wipe.B
Low-speed wipe.C
High-speed wipe.D
Intermittent Wipe (If Equipped)
E221744
Intermittent wipe.A
Short wipe interval.B
Long-wipe interval.C
Use the rotary control to adjust the
intermittent wipe interval.
Speed Dependent Wipers
When your vehicle speed increases, the
interval between wipes decreases.
84
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
AUTOWIPERS (If Equipped)
Wet or winter driving conditions with ice,
snow or salty road mist can cause
inconsistent and unexpected wiping or
smearing.
E269411
Autowipers On.A
High sensitivity.B
Low sensitivity.C
E270969
Use the rotary control to adjust the
sensitivity of the autowipers.
When you select low sensitivity, the wipers
operate when the sensor detects a large
amount of water on the windshield. When
you select high sensitivity, the wipers
operate when the sensor detects a small
amount of water on the windshield.
Keep the outside of the windshield clean.
The rain sensor is very sensitive and the
wipers may operate if dirt, mist or insects hit
the windshield.
In these conditions, you can do the following:
• Lower the sensitivity of the autowipers
to reduce the amount of smearing on the
windshield.
• Switch to normal or high-speed wipe.
• Switch autowipers off.
Note: Fully defrost the windshield before you
switch the windshield wipers on.
Note: Make sure that you switch the
windshield wipers off before entering a car
wash.
Note: If streaks or smears appear on the
windshield, clean the windshield and the
wiper blades. If that does not resolve the
issue, install new wiper blades.
Note: If you switch autolamps and
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
Autowipers Settings
This setting defaults to on and remains on
until you switch it off in the information
display.
When you switch off autowipers, the wipers
operate in intermittent mode.
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit (If Equipped)
The rain sensing feature will not operate
immediately after starting your vehicle when
it is in park (P) and the outside temperature
is below 32°F (0°C). You can switch on the
wipers by adjusting the rain sensor sensitivity
or adjusting the wiper speed.
This prevents damage to the wiper blades
from ice and snow on the windshield.
85
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
WINDSHIELD WASHERS
Note: Do not operate the washers when the
washer reservoir is empty. This may cause
the washer pump to overheat.
E221745
Pull the lever toward you to operate the
windshield washers. When you release the
lever, wiping continues for a short period of
time.
Note: Do not operate the windshield
washers for more than 10 seconds at a time.
86
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wipers and Washers
GENERAL INFORMATION
Condensation in the Exterior Front
Lamps and Rear Lamps
Exterior front lamps and rear lamps have
vents to accommodate normal changes in
air pressure.
Condensation can be a natural by-product
of this design. When moist air enters the
lamp assembly through the vents, there is a
possibility that condensation can occur when
the temperature is cold. When normal
condensation occurs, a fine mist can form on
the interior of the lens. The fine mist
eventually clears and exits through the vents
during normal operation.
Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours
under dry weather conditions.
Examples of acceptable condensation are:
• The presence of a fine mist (no streaks,
drip marks or large droplets).
• A fine mist covers less than 50% of the
lens.
Examples of unacceptable condensation are:
• A water puddle inside the lamp.
• Streaks, drip marks or large droplets
present on the interior of the lens.
If you see any unacceptable condensation,
have your vehicle checked by an authorized
dealer.
LIGHTING CONTROL
E142449
Lamps off.A
Parking lamps, instrument panel
lamps, license plate lamps and tail
lamps.
B
Headlamp low beam.C
87
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Lighting
Headlamp High Beam
E273182
Push the lever away from you to
switch the high beam on.
Push the lever away from you again or pull
the lever toward you to switch the high beam
off.
Flashing the Headlamp High Beam
E273181
Slightly pull the lever toward you and release
it to flash the headlamps.
AUTOLAMPS
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive with
due care and attention. You may need to
override the system if it does not turn the
headlamps on in low visibility conditions, for
example daytime fog.
E142451
When the lighting control is in the autolamps
position, the headlamps turn on in low light
situations, or when the wipers turn on.
The headlamps remain on for a period of
time after you switch the ignition off. Use
the information display controls to adjust the
period of time that the headlamps remain
on.
Note: If you switch the autolamps on, you
cannot switch the high beams on until the
system turns the low beams on.
88
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Lighting
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps
When you switch the autolamps on, the
headlamps turn on within 10 seconds of
switching the wipers on. They turn off
approximately 60 seconds after you switch
the windshield wipers off.
The headlamps do not turn on with the
wipers:
• During a single wipe.
• When using the windshield washers.
• If the wipers are in intermittent mode.
Note: If you switch the autolamps and the
autowipers on, the headlamps turn on when
the windshield wipers continuously operate.
INSTRUMENT LIGHTING DIMMER
Note: If you disconnect and connect the
battery, or fully discharge and charge the
battery, the illuminated components switch
to the maximum setting.
E165337
A B
Press repeatedly or press and hold
to dim.
A
Press repeatedly or press and hold
to brighten.
B
HEADLAMP EXIT DELAY
Note: Perform steps one through four within
a 10 second period. Autolamps and parking
lamps turn on.
Switch the headlamps and parking lamps on
and off with the following sequence:
1. Deselect the autolamps.
2. Switch on the vehicle.
3. Switch off the vehicle.
4. Select the autolamps.
5. To switch the lamps off, deselect the
autolamps after about three minutes.
DAYTIME RUNNING LAMPS (If
Equipped)
WARNING: The daytime running lamps
system does not activate the rear lamps and
may not provide adequate lighting during
low visibility driving conditions. Make sure
you switch the headlamps on, as appropriate,
during all low visibility conditions. Failure to
do so may result in a crash.
89
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Lighting
Type One - Conventional (Non-
Configurable)
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. Switching the ignition on.
2. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions, or
releasing the parking brake for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
3. The lighting control is in the off, parking
lamp or autolamps positions.
4. The headlamps are off.
Type Two - Configurable
Switch the daytime running lamps on or off
using the information display. See
Information Displays (page 110).
The daytime running lamps turn on when:
1. The lamps are on in the information
display.
2. Switching the ignition on.
3. The transmission is not in park (P) for
vehicles with automatic transmissions, or
releasing the parking brake for vehicles
with manual transmissions.
4. The lighting control is in the autolamps
position.
5. The headlamps are off.
The other lighting control switch positions
do not turn on the daytime running lamps.
If the daytime running lamps are off in the
information display, the lamps stay off in all
switch positions.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING: The system does not
relieve you of your responsibility to drive with
due care and attention. You may need to
override the system if it does not turn the
high beams on or off.
The system turns on high beams if it is dark
enough and no other traffic is present. If it
detects an approaching vehicle’s headlamps
or tail lamps, or street lighting ahead, the
system turns off high beams before they can
distract other road users. Low beams remain
on.
Note: The system may not operate properly
if the sensor is blocked. Keep the windshield
free from obstruction or damage.
Note: The system may not operate properly
in cold or inclement conditions. You can
switch on the high beams by overriding the
system.
Note: If the system detects a blockage, for
example bird droppings, bug splatter, snow
or ice, the system goes into low beam mode
until you clear the blockage. A message may
appear in the information display if the
camera is blocked.
Note: Using much larger tires or equipping
vehicle accessories such as snowplows can
modify your vehicle's ride height and
degrade automatic high beam control
performance.
90
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Lighting
A camera sensor, centrally mounted behind
the windshield of your vehicle, continuously
monitors conditions to turn the high beams
on and off.
Once the system is active, the high beams
turn on if:
• The ambient light level is low enough.
• There is no traffic in front of your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 32 mph (51 km/h).
The system turns the high beams off if:
• The ambient light level is high enough
that high beams are not required.
• The system detects an approaching
vehicle's headlamps or tail lamps.
• The vehicle speed falls below
approximately 27 mph (44 km/h).
• The system detects severe rain, snow or
fog.
• The camera is blocked.
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on using the information
display. See Information Displays (page
110).
E142451
Switch the lighting control to the autolamps
position. See Autolamps (page 88).
Overriding the System
Push the lever away from you to switch
between high beam and low beam.
Automatic High Beam Indicator
The indicator illuminates to confirm
when the system is ready to assist.
ADAPTIVE HEADLAMPS (If Equipped)
The headlamp beams move in the same
direction as the steering wheel. This provides
more visibility when driving around curves.
A. Without adaptive headlamps.
B. With adaptive headlamps.
91
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Lighting
E161714
B
A
The system only works with the lighting
control in the autolamp position. You can
switch this feature on or off in the information
display.
Note: There is a delay of two to five seconds
before the system operates when you drive
your vehicle.
Note: The system is only active at speeds
above 3 mph (5 km/h).
System Check (If Equipped)
The system has a power-up movement check
feature. When you start your vehicle, the
lamps track left to right, then back to center
to alert the driver that the system is working
properly.
DIRECTION INDICATORS
E273180
Push the lever up or down to use
the direction indicators.
Indicating a Lane Change
Tap the lever up or down to make the
direction indicators flash three times to
indicate a lane change.
WELCOME LIGHTING
The Lincoln welcome mat projection lights
are on the bottom of the exterior mirror
housings. They project an image onto the
ground a short distance from your vehicle
when welcome lighting or lighted entry turns
on.
For auto-fold mirrors, the Lincoln welcome
mat turns on when welcome lighting or
lighted entry turns on and the mirrors fold in
upon locking or using the switch on the door.
You can switch this feature on or off in the
information display.
92
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Lighting
Note: Moisture, frost and ice build-up or
other types of contamination on the surface
of the light lens can cause non-permanent
distortion or reduced brightness of the
image. Do not use abrasive materials to
clean the lens.
Note: If you enable auto-fold and then you
fold the mirrors in to the door window glass,
the welcome mats do not turn on.
INTERIOR LAMPS
The lamps turn on under the following
conditions:
• You open any door.
• You press a remote control button.
• You press the all lamps on button on the
overhead console.
Front Interior Lamp
E262162
The front interior lamp switches are on the
overhead console.
Note: The position of each button on the
overhead console depends on your vehicle.
All Lamps On
Press to switch all interior lamps
on.
All Lamps Off
E262185
Press to switch all interior lamps
off.
Individual Dome Lamps
E262193
Press to switch the left-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
Press to switch the right-hand
individual dome lamp on and off.
Interior Lamp Function
Press to switch the interior lamp
function on and off.
When the interior lamp function is off and
you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps stay off.
When the interior lamp function is on and
you open a door, the courtesy and door
lamps turn on.
Note: The indicator lamp lights amber when
the door function is off.
Individual Map Lamps
Press a map lens to switch individual map
lamps on and off independently.
93
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Lighting
Rear Interior Lamps
The rear interior lamps may be above the
rear seat or above the rear windows.
Press to switch the lamps on or off.
AMBIENT LIGHTING (If Equipped)
Use the touchscreen to select the following:
Select the settings option on the
feature bar.
E279027
Select ambient lighting.
E273192
Switching Ambient Lighting On
Touch a color once.
Changing the Color
Touch any color once.
Adjusting the Brightness
Drag the selected color up or down.
Switching Ambient Lighting Off
Touch the selected color once or drag the
selected color down to zero brightness.
94
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Lighting
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not let
them play with the power windows. Failure
to follow this instruction could result in
personal injury.
WARNING: When closing the power
windows, verify they are free of obstruction
and make sure that children and pets are not
in the proximity of the window openings.
E146043
Note: You may hear a pulsing noise when
just one of the windows is open. Lower the
opposite window slightly to reduce this
noise.
Press the switch to open the window.
Lift the switch to close the window.
One-Touch Down
Press the switch fully and release it. Press
again or lift it to stop the window.
One-Touch Up
Lift the switch fully and release it. Press or
lift it again to stop the window.
Resetting One-Touch Up
Start the engine.
1. Lift and hold the window switch until you
fully close the door window. Continue to
hold the switch for a few seconds after
you close the window.
2. Release the window switch.
3. Press and hold the window switch until
you fully open the door window.
4. Release the window switch.
5. Lift and hold the window switch until you
fully close the window.
6. Test for correct window operation by
carrying out the one-touch down and
one-touch up features.
Bounce-Back
The window will stop automatically while
closing. It reverses some distance if there is
an obstacle in the way.
Overriding the Bounce-Back Feature
WARNING: If you override
bounce-back, the window does not reverse
if it detects an obstacle. Take care when
closing the windows to avoid personal injury
or damage to your vehicle.
Pull up the window switch and hold within a
few seconds of the window reaching the
bounce-back position. The window travels
up with no bounce-back protection. The
window stops if you release the switch
before the window fully closes.
95
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Window Lock
E144072
Press the control to lock or unlock the rear
window controls. It illuminates when you
lock the rear window controls.
Accessory Delay
You can use the window switches for several
minutes after you switch the ignition off or
until you open either front door.
GLOBAL OPENING AND CLOSING
You can use the remote control to operate
the windows with the ignition off.
Note: You can enable or disable this feature
in the information display or see an
authorized dealer. See General Information
(page 110).
Note: To operate this feature, accessory
delay must not be active.
Opening the Windows
You can only open the windows for a short
time after you unlock your vehicle with the
remote control. After you unlock your vehicle,
press and hold the remote control unlock
button to open the windows and vent the
moonroof. Release the button once
movement starts. Press the lock or unlock
button to stop movement.
Closing the Windows
WARNING: When closing the windows
and moonroof, you should verify they are
free of obstructions and make sure that
children and pets are not in the proximity of
the window openings.
To close the windows and moonroof, press
and hold the remote control lock button.
Release the button once movement starts.
Press the lock or unlock button to stop
movement.
EXTERIOR MIRRORS
Power Exterior Mirrors
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirrors
when your vehicle is moving.
96
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
E144073
Left-hand mirror.A
Adjustment control.B
Right-hand mirror.C
To adjust a mirror:
1. Select the mirror you want to adjust. The
control illuminates.
2. Adjust the position of the mirror.
3. Press the mirror switch again.
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors
Push the mirror toward the door window
glass. Make sure that you fully engage the
mirror in its support when returning the mirror
to its original position.
Auto-Folding Mirrors (If Equipped)
The exterior mirrors automatically fold in
toward the glass after you place the
transmission into park (P), turn off the vehicle,
open and close the driver's side door and
lock the vehicle. The exterior mirrors
automatically unfold and return to their
driving position after you unlock the vehicle
and open and close the driver's side door.
You can switch this feature on and off
through the information display. See General
Information (page 110).
E170431
You can fold the mirrors on demand by
pressing the power-folding mirror control
located on the door. The control lights and
the mirrors fold in toward the glass. Press
the control again to unfold the mirrors. The
control light turns off.
Note: If you use the power-folding control to
fold the mirrors on demand and the auto fold
feature is switched on, you must use the
control again to unfold them.
97
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
Loose Mirror
If your power-folding mirrors are manually
folded, they may not work properly even
after you re-position them. You need to reset
them if:
• The mirrors vibrate when you drive.
• The mirrors feel loose.
• The mirrors do not stay in the folded or
unfolded position.
• One of the mirrors is not in its normal
driving position.
To reset the power-fold feature, use the
power-folding mirror control to fold and
unfold the mirrors. You may hear a loud noise
as you reset the power-folding mirrors. This
sound is normal. Repeat this process as
needed each time the mirrors are manually
folded.
Heated Exterior Mirrors
See Heated Exterior Mirrors (page 139).
Memory Mirrors
You can save and recall the mirror positions
through the memory function. See Memory
Function (page 147).
Auto-Dimming Feature (If Equipped)
The driver exterior mirror automatically dims
when the interior auto-dimming mirror turns
on.
Signal Indicator Mirrors
The outer portion of the appropriate mirror
housing blinks when you switch on the
direction indicator.
Lincoln Welcome Mat
Projection lights, on the bottom of the mirror
housings, project an image onto the ground
a short distance from the vehicle. See
Lighting (page 87).
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors (If Equipped)
WARNING: Objects in the blind spot
mirror are closer than they appear.
Blind spot mirrors have an integrated convex
mirror built into the upper outboard corner
of the exterior mirrors. Their design can
increase your visibility along the side of your
vehicle.
Check the main mirror first before a lane
change, then check the blind spot mirror. If
no vehicles are present in the blind spot
mirror and the traffic in the adjacent lane is
at a safe distance, signal that you intend to
change lanes. Glance over your shoulder to
verify traffic is clear and carefully change
lanes.
98
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
A
B
C
E138665
The image of the approaching vehicle is
small and near the inboard edge of the main
mirror when it is at a distance. The image
becomes larger and begins to move
outboard across the main mirror as the
vehicle approaches (A). The image transitions
from the main mirror and begins to appear
in the blind spot mirror as the vehicle
approaches (B). The vehicle transitions to
your peripheral field of view as it leaves the
blind spot mirror (C).
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
See Blind Spot Information System (page
234).
INTERIOR MIRROR
WARNING: Do not adjust the mirror
when your vehicle is moving.
Note: Do not clean the housing or glass of
any mirror with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum or ammonia-based cleaning
products.
You can adjust the interior mirror to your
preference. Some mirrors also have a second
pivot point. This lets you move the mirror
head up or down and from side to side.
Auto-Dimming Mirror
Note: Do not block the sensors on the front
and back of the mirror. Mirror performance
may be affected. A rear center passenger
or raised rear center head restraint may also
block light from reaching the sensor.
The mirror will dim automatically to reduce
glare when bright lights are detected from
behind your vehicle. It will automatically
return to normal reflection when you select
reverse gear to make sure you have a clear
view when backing up.
99
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
SUN VISORS
E138666
Rotate the sun visor toward the side window
and extend it rearward for extra shade.
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
E162197
Lift the cover to switch the lamp on.
SUN SHADES
Note: Do not try to move the sun shade
manually.
The power rear sun shade covers the rear
window of the vehicle.
E145986
The control is in the overhead console.
The sun shade has a one-touch up and down
feature. Press and release the control to
move the sun shade. To stop motion, press
the control a second time.
The sun shade automatically retracts when
you shift the transmission into R (Reverse).
MOONROOF (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not leave children
unattended in your vehicle and do not let
them play with the moonroof. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in personal
injury.
100
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
WARNING: When closing the
moonroof, verify that it is free of obstruction
and make sure that children and pets are not
in the proximity of the roof opening.
Type 1
The sliding shade can be manually opened
or closed when the moonroof is closed. Pull
the shade toward the front of the vehicle to
close it.
The moonroof controls are on the overhead
console and have a one-touch open and
close feature. To stop it during one-touch
operation, touch the control a second time.
Opening and Closing
E144499
OpenA
VentB
CloseC
Press A to open the moonroof. It will stop
short of the fully opened position.
Note: This position helps to reduce wind
noise or rumbling which may happen with
the moonroof fully open. Press A again to
fully open the moonroof.
Press C to close the moonroof.
Venting the Moonroof
Press and release to close the sunshade. If
fully open, the sunshade stops after covering
the rear glass panel. Press and release again
to fully close the sunshade.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof reverses some distance if an
obstacle is detected while closing.
Press and hold C within two seconds of a
bounce-back event to override this function.
Type 2
Note: With the panoramic moonroof fully
open and vehicle speed increasing to about
50 mph (80 km/h), the moonroof opening
panel closes about 8 in (20 cm) to reduce
excessive wind noise at higher speeds. This
feature only functions one time per key cycle,
so that you can open the glass further if
desired.
101
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
The moonroof controls are on the overhead
console and have a one-touch open and
close feature. To stop its movement during
one-touch operation, press the control a
second time.
Opening and Closing
E191272
Moonroof open.A
Moonroof vent.B
Sunshade open.C
Sunshade close.D
Moonroof close.E
Moonroof Open
Press and release to open the moonroof.
The moonroof stops short of the fully opened
position. Press and release the control again
to open the moonroof fully.
Moonroof Vent
Press and release to vent the moonroof.
Sunshade Open
Press and release to open the sunshade.
The sunshade opens with the moonroof. You
can also open the sunshade with the
moonroof closed.
Note: The sunshade stops short of its fully
opened position for the comfort of rear
passengers. To open the sunshade fully,
press the control again.
Sunshade Close
Press and release to close the sunshade. If
fully open, the sunshade stops after covering
the rear glass panel. Press and release again
to fully close the sunshade.
Moonroof Close
Press and release to close the moonroof
from either the open or vent positions.
Bounce-Back
The moonroof reverses some distance if an
obstacle is detected while closing.
To override this feature, press and hold the
moonroof close control within two seconds
after the roof comes to a stop following a
bounce-back reversal or two successive
reversals.
102
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Windows and Mirrors
GAUGES
E270687
103
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
TachometerA
Information displayB
SpeedometerC
Fuel gaugeD
Engine coolant temperature gaugeE
Information Display
Odometer
Located in the bottom of the information
display. Registers the accumulated distance
your vehicle has traveled.
Trip Computer
See General Information (page 110).
Vehicle Settings and Personalization
See General Information (page 110).
Fuel Gauge
The fuel gauge indicates about how much
fuel is in the fuel tank.
The arrow adjacent to the fuel pump symbol
indicates on which side of your vehicle the
fuel filler door is located.
Note: The fuel gauge may vary slightly when
your vehicle is moving or on a slope.
Low Fuel Reminder
A low fuel level reminder displays and
sounds when the distance to empty reaches
75 mi (120 km) to empty for MyKey, and at
50 mi (80 km), 25 mi (40 km), 10 mi (20 km)
and 0 mi (0 km) for all vehicle keys.
Note: The low fuel reminder can appear at
different fuel gauge positions depending on
fuel economy conditions. This variation is
normal.
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
WARNING: Do not remove the coolant
reservoir cap when the cooling system is hot.
Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to
cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility
of scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
Indicates engine coolant temperature. At
normal operating temperature, the level
indicator will be in the normal range. If the
engine coolant temperature exceeds the
normal range, stop the vehicle as soon as
safely possible, switch off the engine and let
the engine cool.
104
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
WARNING LAMPS AND
INDICATORS
The following warning lamps and indicators
alert you to a vehicle condition that may
become serious. Some lamps illuminate
when you start your vehicle to make sure
they work. If any lamps remain on after
starting your vehicle, refer to the respective
system warning lamp for further information.
Note: Some warning indicators appear in
the information display and operate the
same as a warning lamp but do not
illuminate when you start your vehicle.
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator (If
Equipped)
E144524
The speed control system indicator
light changes color to indicate
what mode the system is in: See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 218).
On (white light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is turned on.
Turns off when the speed control system is
turned off.
Engaged (green light): Illuminates when the
adaptive cruise control system is engaged.
Turns off when the speed control system is
disengaged.
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Lamp
If it illuminates when you are
driving, this indicates a
malfunction. You will continue to
have the normal braking system (without
ABS) unless the brake system warning lamp
is also illuminated. Have the system checked
by your authorized dealer.
Auto Hold Active
E197933
It illuminates when the system
holds your vehicle stationary.
Auto Hold Unavailable
E197934
It illuminates when the system is
on, but unavailable to hold your
vehicle stationary.
Automatic Headlamp High Beam
Indicator (If Equipped)
It illuminates when the system
automatically turns the headlamp
high beam on.
See Automatic High Beam Control (page
90).
Battery
If it illuminates while driving, it
indicates a malfunction. Switch off
all unnecessary electrical
equipment and have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately.
Blind Spot Monitor (If Equipped)
E151262
It illuminates when you switch this
feature off or in conjunction with a
message. See Blind Spot
Information System (page 234). See
Information Messages (page 116).
105
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Brake System Warning Lamp
WARNING: Driving your vehicle with
the warning lamp on is dangerous. A
significant decrease in braking performance
may occur. It may take you longer to stop
your vehicle. Have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible. Driving extended distances
with the parking brake engaged can cause
brake failure and the risk of personal injury.
Note: Indicators vary depending on region.
This lamp is a dual function lamp and will
illuminate when:
• You apply the parking brake with the
ignition on.
• Your vehicle has a brake fault or low
brake fluid level, regardless of parking
brake position.
E270480
If the lamp illuminates while you
are moving, you may have the
parking brake applied. Be sure that
the parking brake is off. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as
possible if the lamp continues to
illuminate.
Cruise Control Indicator
E71340
It illuminates when you switch the
system on.
See Using Cruise Control (page
217).
Direction Indicator
Illuminates when the left or right
turn signal or the hazard warning
flasher is turned on. If the
indicators stay on or flash faster, check for a
burned out bulb. See Changing a Bulb
(page 317).
Door Ajar
Displays when the ignition is on
and any door is not completely
closed.
Electric Park Brake
E146190
It illuminates or flashes when the
electric parking brake has a
malfunction. See Electric Parking
Brake (page 193).
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Lamp
Illuminates when the engine
coolant temperature is high. Stop
the vehicle as soon as possible,
switch off the engine and let cool. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 304).
Engine Oil
It illuminates when you switch the
ignition on.
106
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
If it illuminates when the engine is running
this indicates a malfunction. Stop your
vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so and
switch the engine off. Check the engine oil
level. If the oil level is sufficient, this
indicates a system malfunction. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
See Engine Oil Check (page 302).
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp
E71880
It illuminates and a chime sounds
until you fasten the seatbelts.
Front Airbag
E67017
If it fails to illuminate when you
start your vehicle, continues to
flash or remains on, it indicates a
malfunction. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer.
Heads Up Display (If Equipped)
E156133
A red beam of lights will illuminate
on the windshield in certain
instances when using adaptive
cruise control and/or the collision warning
system. It will also illuminate momentarily
when you start your vehicle to make sure the
display works.
Headlamp High Beam Indicator
It illuminates when you switch the
high beam headlamps on. It will
flash when you use the headlamp
flasher.
Hood Ajar
E159324
Displays when the ignition is on
and the hood is not completely
closed.
Lane Keeping System Lamp
E144813
It illuminates when the system
activates.
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp
It illuminates when the fuel level is
low or the fuel tank is nearly
empty. Refuel as soon as possible.
Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp
It illuminates when your tire
pressure is low. If the lamp remains
on with the engine running or
when driving, check your tire pressure as
soon as possible.
It also illuminates momentarily when you
switch the ignition on to confirm the lamp is
functional. If it does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, or begins to flash at
any time, have the system checked by your
authorized dealer.
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Lamp
E132353
It illuminates when the windshield
washer fluid is low.
107
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Parking Lamps
It illuminates when you switch the
parking lamps on.
Powertrain Fault
Illuminates when a powertrain or
an AWD fault has been detected.
Contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Service Engine Soon
If it illuminates when the engine is
running this indicates a
malfunction. The On Board
Diagnostics system has detected a
malfunction of the vehicle emission control
system.
If it flashes, engine misfire may be occurring.
Increased exhaust gas temperatures could
damage the catalytic converter or other
vehicle components. Drive in a moderate
fashion (avoid heavy acceleration and
deceleration) and have your vehicle
immediately serviced.
It illuminates when you switch the ignition
on prior to engine start to check the bulb and
to indicate whether your vehicle is ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
Normally, it illuminates until the engine is
cranked and automatically turns off if no
malfunctions are present. However, if after
15 seconds it flashes eight times, this
indicates that your vehicle is not ready for
Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) testing.
See Emission Law (page 173).
Stability Control
E138639
It flashes when the system is
active. If it remains illuminated or
does not illuminate when you
switch the ignition on, this indicates a
malfunction. During a malfunction the system
will switch off. Have the system checked by
your authorized dealer immediately. See
Using Stability Control (page 199).
Stability Control Off
E130458
It illuminates when you switch the
system off.
Trunk Ajar
E159323
Displays when the ignition is on
and the trunk is not completely
closed.
AUDIBLE WARNINGS AND
INDICATORS
Keyless Warning Alert
The horn will sound twice when you exit your
vehicle with the intelligent access key and
your vehicle is in RUN, indicating your vehicle
is still on.
Headlamps On Warning Chime
Sounds when you remove the key from the
ignition and open the driver's door and you
have left the headlamps or parking lamps
on.
108
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
Parking Brake On Warning Chime
Sounds when you have left the parking brake
on and drive your vehicle. If the warning
chime remains on after you have released
the parking brake, have the system checked
by your authorized dealer immediately.
109
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Instrument Cluster
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any device
that may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
You can control various systems on your
vehicle using the information display controls
on the steering wheel. The information
display shows the corresponding information.
Information Display Controls
E152750
• Press the up and down arrow buttons to
scroll through and highlight the options
within a menu.
• Press the right arrow button to enter a
sub-menu.
• Press the left arrow button to exit a menu.
• Press and hold the left arrow button at
any time to return to the main menu
display (escape button).
• Press the OK button to choose and
confirm settings or messages.
E204495
This icon gives you the ability to
switch a feature on or off. A check
in the box indicates the feature is
enabled, and unchecked indicates the
feature is disabled.
Main menu
From the main menu bar on the left side of
the information display, you can choose from
the following categories:
• Trip 1 & 2
• Fuel Economy
• Driver Assist
• Settings
Scroll up or down to highlight one of the
categories and then press the right arrow
key or OK to enter into that category. Press
the left arrow key as needed to exit back to
the main menu.
110
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Trip 1 & 2 Press and hold OK to reset the currently
displayed trip information.
Trip 1 & 2
All value screen (Trip odometer, Average fuel economy, Trip Timer)
• Trip odometer — Shows your accumulated trip distance.
• Average fuel economy — Shows your average fuel economy for a given trip.
• Trip Timer— The timer stops when you switch off your vehicle and restarts when you restart your vehicle.
Fuel Economy
Use the left or right arrow buttons to choose
the desired fuel economy display.
Fuel Economy
Instantaneous Fuel Economy
Average MPG
• Instantaneous Fuel Economy: This display shows a visual graph of your instantaneous fuel economy.
• Average MPG — Shows your average fuel economy for a given trip.
Press and hold OK to reset your current fuel economy information.
111
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Driver Assist Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose
between different driver assist choices.
Driver Assist
Traction Control
Blindspot
Cross Traffic
Adaptive or NormalCruise Control
Driver AlertDriver Alert
Driver Alert DisplayDriver Alert Display
Intelligent AWD
Alert, Aid or Alert + AidModeLane Keeping Sys
High, Normal or LowIntensity
High, Normal or LowAlert SensitivityPre-Collision
Active Braking
Rear Park Aid
Tire Monitor
112
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Settings Use the up or down arrow buttons to choose
between different driver setting choices.
Note: Some items are optional and may not
appear.
Note: Some MyKey items will only appear if a MyKey is set.
Settings
Comfort, Normal or SportHandling in DDrive ControlVehicle
Normal or SportHandling in S
Normal or SportPerformance in S
Easy Entry/Exit
Auto Engine Off
Adaptive HeadlampsAdaptive HeadlampsLighting
Traffic Setup
Auto Highbeam
Select time intervalAutolamp Delay
Daytime Lights
Welcome Lighting
AutolockLocks
Autounlock
113
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Settings
FeedbackFeedback
Mislock
All doors or Driver doorRemote Unlock
Switches Inhibit
AutofoldMirror
Hold OK to InitializeNeutral Towing
Remaining Life XXX% - Hold OK to ResetOil Life
Enable Switch or Disable SwitchPower Decklid
Auto or Last SettingsClimate ControlRemote Start
Auto Heated or OffFront Seats & Wheel
5, 10 or 15 minutesDuration
System
RemoteWindows
Courtesy WipeWipers
Rain Sensing
Hold OK to Create MyKeyCreate MyKeyMyKey
114
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Settings
Always On or User Selectable911 Assist
Always On or User SelectableTraction Control
Choose desired speed or offMax Speed
Choose desired speed or offSpeed Minder
Volume Limiter
Always On or User SelectableDo Not Disturb
Hold OK to Clear All MyKeysClear MyKeys
Miles & Gallons, L/100km or km/LDistance UnitDisplay
°Fahrenheit or °CelsiusTemperature Unit
psi, kPa or BARTire Pressure
Choose your applicable setting - Hold OK to SetLanguage
Speedo in km/h
115
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
INFORMATION MESSAGES
Note: Depending on the vehicle options
equipped with your vehicle, not all of the
messages will display or be available.
Certain messages may be abbreviated or
shortened depending upon which cluster
type you have.
E145981
Press the OK button to acknowledge and
remove some messages from the information
display. Other messages will be removed
automatically after a short time.
Certain messages need to be confirmed
before you can access the menus.
Active Park
ActionMessage
Displayed when the system needs service. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.Active Park Fault
116
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Adaptive Cruise Control
ActionMessage
Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 218).
Adaptive Cruise Malfunction
Displayed when conditions exist such that the adaptive cruise cannot function properly. See
Using Adaptive Cruise Control (page 218).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available
Displayed when the radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility due to bad weather or ice/
mud/water in front of radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor to resolve. See Using Adaptive
Cruise Control (page 218).
Adaptive Cruise Not Available Sensor
Blocked See Manual
Displayed when the automatic braking has been disabled.Normal Cruise Active Automatic Braking
Turned Off
Displayed when a radar malfunction is preventing the ACC from engaging.Front Sensor Not Aligned
Displayed when the adaptive cruise has reinstated controls to the driver.Adaptive Cruise - Driver Resume Control
Displays when the vehicle speed is too slow to activate the adaptive cruise.Adaptive Cruise Speed Too Low to
Activate
Displays when the adaptive cruise is automatically adjusting the gap distance and the driver
needs to shift the transmission into a lower gear.
Adaptive Cruise Shift Down
117
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Adaptive Headlamps
ActionMessage
Displays when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Check Headlamp System See Manual
AdvanceTrac™
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Service AdvanceTrac
Displayed when the traction control has been disabled or enabled by the driver.AdvanceTrac Off On
Airbag
ActionMessage
Displays when the system detects a malfunction due to a blocked sensor.Occupant Sensor BLOCKED Remove
Objects Near Passenger Seat
118
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Alarm
ActionMessage
Displays when the alarm has been triggered due to unauthorized entry. See Anti-Theft Alarm
(page 78).
Vehicle Alarm To Stop Alarm, Start Vehicle.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
ActionMessage
Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off.Engine Shuts Off In {seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds
Displays when the engine has shut off to help increase fuel economy.Engine Shut Off For Fuel Economy
Displays when the engine is getting ready to shut off. You can press OK on the left steering
wheel button to override the shut down.
Engine Shuts Off in {seconds to shut off:#0}
Seconds Press Ok to Override
119
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
AWD
ActionMessage
Displayed when the AWD system has been temporarily disabled to protect itself from overheating.AWD Temporarily Disabled
Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically disabled to protect itself. This is caused
by operating the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is overheating.
AWD OFF
The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a short distance
with the road tire re-installed or after the system is allowed to cool.
AWD Restored
Displayed in conjunction with the Throttle Control/Transmission/AWD light when the AWD system
is not operating properly. If the warning stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
AWD Malfunction Service Required
120
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Battery and Charging System
ActionMessage
Displayed when the charging system needs servicing. If the warning stays on or continues to
come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Check Charging System
Displayed when the battery management system detects an extended low-voltage condition.
Various vehicle features will be disabled to help preserve the battery. Turn off as many of the
electrical loads as soon as possible to improve system voltage. If the system voltage has
recovered, the disabled features will operate again as normal.
Low Battery Features Temporarily Turned
Off
Displayed when the battery management system determines that the battery is at a low state of
charge. Turn the ignition off as soon as possible to protect the battery. This message will clear
once the vehicle has been started and the battery state of charge has recovered. Turning off
unnecessary electrical loads will allow faster battery state-of-charge recovery.
Turn Power Off To Save Battery
121
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert System
ActionMessage
Displayed when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact your authorized dealer as soon
as possible.
Blindspot System Fault
Displayed when the system sensors are blocked. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible. See Blind Spot Information System (page 234).
Blindspot Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Displayed when the system detects a vehicle. See Blind Spot Information System (page 234).Cross Traffic Vehicle Coming From X
Displayed when the blind spot information system and cross traffic alert system sensors are
blocked. See Blind Spot Information System (page 234).
Cross Traffic Not Available Sensor Blocked
See Manual
Displays when a fault with the system has occurred. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
Cross Traffic System Fault
Doors and Locks
ActionMessage
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed and the vehicle is moving.X Door Ajar
Displays when the door(s) listed is not completely closed.
Displays when the luggage compartment is not completely closed.Trunk Ajar
Displays when the hood is not completely closed.Hood Ajar
122
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the door switches have been disabled.Switches Inhibited Security Mode
Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the child locks. Contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible.
Child Lock Malfunction Service Required
Displays the factory keypad code after the keypad has been reset. See Keyless Entry (page
73).
Factory Keypad Code {X X X X X}
Driver Alert
ActionMessage
Stop and rest as soon as it is safe to do so.Driver Alert Warning Rest Now
Take a rest soon.Driver Alert Warning Rest Suggested
Fuel
ActionMessage
Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition.Fuel Level Low
Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed.Check Fuel Fill Inlet
123
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Hill Start Assist
ActionMessage
Displays when hill start assist is not available. Contact your authorized dealer. See Auto Hold
(page 194).
Hill Start Assist Not Available
Keys and Intelligent Access
ActionMessage
Displayed as a reminder to press the brake while starting the vehicle.To START Press Brake
Displayed if the key is not detected by the system. See Keyless Starting (page 161).No Key Detected
Displayed when the start/stop button is pressed to shut off the engine and an Intelligent Access
key is not detected inside the vehicle.
Restart Now or Key is Needed
Displayed when the vehicle is in the run ignition state.Run Power Active
This message is displayed when there is a problem with your vehicle’ s starting system. See your
authorized dealer for service.
Starting System Fault
Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent access key is programmed to the
system.
Key Program Successful
Displayed during spare key programming, when an intelligent access key has failed to be
programmed.
Key Program Failure
124
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displayed during spare key programming when the maximum number of keys have been
programmed.
Max Number of Keys Learned
Displayed during spare key programming when not enough keys have been programmed.Not Enough Keys Learned
Displays when the key battery is low. Change the battery as soon as possible.Key Battery Low Replace Soon
Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys.Could Not Program Integrated Key
Displays to inform the driver that they are exiting the vehicle and the engine is on.Vehicle is ON
Lane Keeping System
ActionMessage
The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.Lane Keeping Sys. Malfunction Service
Required
The system has detected a condition that has caused the system to be temporarily unavailable.Front Camera Temporarily Not Available
The system has detected a condition that requires the windshield to be cleaned to operate
properly.
Front Camera Low Visibility Clean Screen
The system has malfunctioned. Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible.Front Camera Malfunction Service
Required
Displayed when the system requests the driver to keep their hands on the steering wheel.Keep Hands on Steering Wheel
125
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Maintenance
ActionMessage
Stop the vehicle as soon as safely possible, turn off the engine. Check the oil level. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on with your engine running, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
Low Engine Oil Pressure
Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10% or less. See General Maintenance Inform-
ation (page 504).
Change Engine Oil Soon
Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0%. See General Maintenance Information (page 504).Oil Change Required
Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately.
See Brake Fluid Check (page 313).
Brake Fluid Level Low
Displays when the brake system needs servicing. Stop the vehicle in a safe place. Contact your
authorized dealer.
Check Brake System
Displays when the engine coolant temperature is excessively high.Engine Coolant Over Temperature
Displays when the washer fluid is low and needs to be refilled.Washer Fluid Level Low
Displays when the engine has reduced power in order to help reduce high coolant temperatures.Power Reduced to Lower Engine Temp
Displays to indicate that the vehicle is still in Transport or Factory mode. This may not allow some
features to operate properly. See your authorized dealer.
Transport / Factory Mode
Informs the driver that the powertrain needs service due to a powertrain malfunction.See Manual
126
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
MyKey
ActionMessage
Displayed during key programming when MyKey cannot be programmed.MyKey not Created
Displays when MyKey is active.MyKey Active Drive Safely
Displays when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on.Speed Limited to XX MPH/km/h
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is
approaching 80 mph (130 km/h).
Near Vehicle Top Speed
Displays when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is reached.Vehicle at Top Speed of MyKey Setting
Displays when MyKey is active.Check Speed Drive Safely
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Belt-Minder is activated.Buckle Up to Unmute Audio
Displays when a MyKey is in use and AdvanceTrac is activated.AdvanceTrac On - MyKey Setting
Displays when a MyKey is in use and Traction control is activated.Traction Control On - MyKey Setting
Displays when a MyKey is in use and park aid is activated.MyKey Park Aid Cannot be Deactivated
Displayed when the lane keeping aid is on per MyKey settings.Lane Keeping Alert On MyKey Setting
127
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Park Aid
ActionMessage
Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized
dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page 201).
Check Front Park Aid
Displays when the system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your authorized
dealer. See Rear Parking Aid (page 201).
Check Rear Park Aid
Displays the park aid status.Front Park Aid On Off
Displays the park aid status.Rear Park Aid On Off
Park Brake
ActionMessage
The electric parking brake is set and a manual release is attempted without the brake pedal
being pressed.
To Release: Press Brake and Switch
The electric parking brake is set and an automatic release is attempted but cannot be performed.
Perform a manual release.
Park Brake Use Switch to Release
The electric parking brake is set and your vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h). Release park
brake before continued driving.
Release Park Brake
The electric parking brake is not fully applied.Park Brake Not Applied
128
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
The electric parking brake is not fully released.Park Brake Not Released
The electric parking brake system has been put into a special mode that is used to allow service
of the rear brakes. Contact an authorized dealer.
Park Brake Maintenance Mode
The electric park brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Some functionality
may still be available. Contact your authorized dealer.
Park Brake Limited Function Service
Required
The electric parking brake system has detected a condition that requires service. Contact your
authorized dealer.
Park Brake Malfunction Service Now
Numerous park brake applies have overheated the system. Wait 2 minutes before attempting
to apply again.
Park Brake System Overheated
Power Steering
ActionMessage
The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service. See your authorized
dealer.
Steering Fault Service Now
The power steering system is not working. Stop the vehicle a safe place. Contact your authorized
dealer.
Steering Loss Stop Safely
The power steering system has detected a condition within the power steering system or passive
entry or passive start system requires service. Contact your authorized dealer.
Steering Assist Fault Service Required
129
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Pre-Collision Assist
ActionMessage
Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will
be disabled. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Malfunction
Displayed when the collision warning system radar is blocked because of poor radar visibility
due to bad weather, ice, mud or water in front of the radar. Driver can typically clean the sensor
to resolve. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available Sensor
Blocked
Displayed when there is a system malfunction with the collision warning system. The system will
be disabled. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Pre-Collision Assist Not Available
Remote Start
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder to apply the brake and push the gear shift button to drive the vehicle
after a remote start.
To Drive: Press Brake and Gear Shift
Button
130
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Seats
ActionMessage
Displays as a reminder that memory seats are not available while driving.Memory Recall Not Permitted While Driving
Displays to show where your memory setting has been saved.Memory {0} Saved
Starting System
ActionMessage
Displays when starting the vehicle as a reminder to apply the brake.To START Press Brake
Displays when the starter has exceeded its cranking time in attempting to start the vehicle.Cranking Time Exceeded
Displays when the starter is attempting to start the vehicle.Engine Start Pending Please Wait
Displays when the pending start has been cancelled.Pending Start Cancelled
131
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Tire Pressure Monitoring System
ActionMessage
Displays when one or more tires on your vehicle have low tire pressure. See Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (page 352).
Tire Pressure Low
Displays when the tire pressure monitoring system is malfunctioning. If the warning stays on or
continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer. See Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(page 352).
Tire Pressure Monitor Fault
Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning, or your spare tire is in use. If the warning
stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible. See Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (page 352).
Tire Pressure Sensor Fault
Traction Control
ActionMessage
Displays when the traction control system has been switched off or on. See Using Traction
Control (page 197).
Traction Control Off / Traction Control On
Displays when a spinout has occurred and the hazard are activated.Spinout Detected Hazards Activated
132
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
Transmission
ActionMessage
See your authorized dealer.Transmission Malfunction Service Now
The transmission is overheating and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it’ s possible.Transmission Overheating Stop Safely
The transmission has overheated and needs to cool. Stop in a safe place as soon as it’ s possible.Transmission Over Temperature Stop
Safely
See your authorized dealer.Transmission Service Required
Transmission is getting hot. Stop to let it cool.Transmission Too Hot Press Brake
Displays when the transmission has overheated and has limited functionality.Transmission Limited Function See Manual
Transmission is too cold. Wait for it to warm up before you drive.Transmission Warming Up Please Wait
A reminder to shift into park. In addition, this message is typical after reconnecting or recharging
the battery until you cycle the ignition to the on mode. See Changing the 12V Battery (page
314).
Transmission Not in Park
Displays when the transmission has adjusted the shift strategy.Transmission Adjusted
Displays when the transmission is adjusting the shift strategy.Transmission AdaptMode
Displays when the transmission shift lever is locked and unable to select gears.Transmission IndicatMode Lockup On
Displays when the transmission shift lever is unlocked and free to select gears.Transmission IndicatMode Lockup Off
Displays when an invalid gear has been selected.Invalid Gear Selection
133
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed.Press Brake Pedal
Displays when the brake pedal needs to be depressed to enable the transmission to shift from
park.
Depress Brake to Shift from Park
Displays when the neutral button N needs to be pressed again to enter neutral hold. See Auto-
matic Transmission (page 177).
Press N again to Enter Stay in Neutral
Mode
Displays when neutral hold is active. See Automatic Transmission (page 177).Stay in Neutral Mode Engaged
Displays when neutral hold is active. See General Information (page 110).Stay in Neutral Tow Engaged See Manual
to Disable
Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake needs to be depressed before exiting
the vehicle. See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Confirm Park Brake
Apply Before Exiting the Vehicle
Displays when there is a system fault and the park brake needs to be depressed before exiting
the vehicle. See your authorized dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Cannot Shift Trans Use
Park Brake to Secure Vehicle
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Service Required
Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle is shifting to park. See your authorized
dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Vehicle is Shifting to
Park
Displays when there is a system fault while the vehicle is shifting to reverse. See your authorized
dealer.
SHIFT SYS FAULT Reverse Unavailable
Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Drive Unavailable Select
S for Drive Service Required
134
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
ActionMessage
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Neutral Unavailable
Service Required
See your authorized dealer.SHIFT SYS FAULT Sport Unavailable
Service Required
Displays when neutral tow is active and the ignition needs to be turned off. See Towing the
Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 257).
Neutral Tow Engaged Turn Ignition Off for
Towing
Displays while attempting to exit neutral tow. The brake pedal needs to be depressed and park
button selected to deactivate. See Towing the Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 257).
Neutral Tow Engaged Depress Brake and
Select Park to Exit Neutral Tow
Displays when neutral tow is active and the park brake needs to be released. See Towing the
Vehicle on Four Wheels (page 257).
Neutral Tow Remove Park Brake for
Towing
Displays when neutral tow has been deactivated.Neutral Tow Disengaged
135
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Information Displays
AUTOMATIC CLIMATE CONTROL
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See your
SYNC information.
Directing Air to the Instrument Panel
Air Vents
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to instrument panel
air vents.
Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents
Press and release the button to
direct airflow to footwell air vents.
Setting the Blower Motor Speed
Turn the control to adjust the
volume of air circulated in the
vehicle.
Setting the Temperature
Press the toggle button on the left-hand side
of the climate control upward or downward
to set the left-hand temperature.
Note: This control also adjusts the right-hand
side temperature when you switch off dual
zone mode.
Press the toggle button on the right-hand
side of the climate control upward or
downward to set the right-hand temperature.
Switching Auto Mode On and Off
Press and release the button to
cycle through the automatic
settings and off, then set the
temperature.
When three indicators are on, the blower
motor adjusts to the highest speed to reach
the selected temperature as quickly as
possible.
When two indicators are on, the blower
motor adjusts to a medium speed to reach
the selected temperature with a reduced
amount of cabin noise.
When one indicator is on, the blower motor
adjusts to the lowest speed to reach the
selected temperature with the least amount
of cabin noise.
Note: The system starts at the previous fan
setting when you switch on AUTO.
Note: You can also switch off dual zone
mode by pressing and holding the button for
more than two seconds.
Switching Defrost On and Off
Press and release the button to
distribute air through the
windshield air vents and de-mister.
Air directed to the instrument panel and
footwell air vents turns off. You can also use
this setting to defog and clear the windshield
of a thin covering of ice.
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off
Press and release the button.
136
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Climate Control
Use air conditioning with recirculated air to
improve cooling performance and efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for example,
maximum defrost) the air conditioning
compressor may continue to operate even
though you switch off the air conditioning.
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off
Press and release the button.
Switching the Climate Controlled Seats
On and Off
E265282
Press and release the button to
cycle through the various climate
controlled seat settings and off.
See Climate Controlled Seats (page 150).
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and Off
E265280
Press and release the button to
switch on temperature control for
the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Switching the Heated Seats On and Off
Press and release the button to
cycle through the various heat
settings and off.
See Heated Seats (page 149).
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel
On and Off
Press and release the button.
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning
On and Off
Press and release the button for
maximum cooling.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set to
LO, recirculated air flows through the
instrument panel air vents, air conditioning
turns on and the blower motor adjusts to the
highest speed.
Switching Maximum Defrost On and
Off
Press and release the button for
maximum defrosting.
The left-hand and right-hand settings set to
HI, air flows through the windshield air vents,
and the blower motor adjusts to the highest
speed.
You can also use this setting to defog and
clear the windshield of a thin covering of ice.
Note: To prevent window fogging, you
cannot select recirculated air when
maximum defrost is on.
Note: The heated rear window also turns on
when you select maximum defrost.
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off
Press and release the button to
switch between outside air and
recirculated air.
137
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Climate Control
The air currently in the passenger
compartment recirculates. This may reduce
the time needed to cool the interior (when
used with A/C) and reduce unwanted odors
from entering your vehicle.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off (or
prevent you from switching on) in all air flow
modes except MAX A/C to reduce the risk
of fogging. Recirculation may also turn on
and off in various air distribution control
combinations during hot weather in order to
improve cooling efficiency.
HINTS ON CONTROLLING THE
INTERIOR CLIMATE
General Hints
Note: Prolonged use of recirculated air may
cause the windows to fog up.
Note: You may feel a small amount of air
from the footwell air vents regardless of the
air distribution setting.
Note: To reduce humidity build-up inside
your vehicle, do not drive with the system
switched off or with recirculated air always
switched on.
Note: Do not place objects under the front
seats as this may interfere with the airflow
to the rear seats.
Note: Remove any snow, ice or leaves from
the air intake area at the base of the
windshield.
Note: To improve the time to reach a
comfortable temperature in hot weather,
drive with the windows open until you feel
cold air through the air vents.
Automatic Climate Control
Note: Adjusting the settings when your
vehicle interior is extremely hot or cold is not
necessary.
Note: The system adjusts to heat or cool the
interior to the temperature you select as
quickly as possible.
Note: For the system to function efficiently,
the instrument panel and side air vents
should be fully open.
Note: If you select AUTO during cold outside
temperatures, the system directs air flow to
the windshield and side window air vents. In
addition, the blower motor may run at a
slower speed until the engine warms up.
Note: If you select AUTO during hot
temperatures and the inside of the vehicle
is hot, the system uses recirculated air to
maximize interior cooling. Blower motor
speed may also reduce until the air cools.
Quickly Heating the Interior
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer.
Recommended Settings for Heating
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Quickly Cooling the Interior
1. Press and release MAX A/C.
138
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Climate Control
Recommended Settings for Cooling
1. Press and release AUTO.
2. Adjust the temperature function to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather
1. Press and release defrost.
2. Adjust the temperature control to the
setting you prefer. Use 72°F (22°C) as a
starting point, then adjust the setting as
necessary.
HEATED WINDSHIELD (If Equipped)
Windshield Wiper De-Icer
E184884
When you switch the heated rear
window on, the windshield wiper
de-icer turns on.
HEATED REAR WINDOW
E184884
Press the button to clear the rear
window of thin ice and fog. The
heated rear window turns off after
a short period of time.
Note: Make sure the engine is on before
operating the heated windows.
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle Warranty may not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
HEATED EXTERIOR MIRRORS
When you switch the heated rear window
on, the heated exterior mirrors turn on.
Note: Do not remove ice from the mirrors
with a scraper or adjust the mirror glass
when it is frozen in place.
Note: Do not clean the mirror housing or
glass with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
CABIN AIR FILTER
Your vehicle is equipped with a cabin air
filter, which gives you and your passengers
the following benefits:
• It improves your driving comfort by
reducing particle and odor concentration.
• It improves the interior compartment
cleanliness.
• It protects the climate control
components from particle deposits.
You can locate the cabin air filter behind the
glove box.
Note: Make sure you have a cabin air filter
installed at all times. This prevents foreign
objects from entering the system. Running
the system without a filter in place could
result in degradation or damage to the
system.
Replace the filter at regular intervals. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 504).
For additional cabin air filter information, or
to replace the filter, see a qualified
technician.
139
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Climate Control
REMOTE START
The climate control system adjusts the
interior temperature during remote start.
You can switch this feature on or off and
adjust the settings using the information
display controls. See Information Displays
(page 110).
You cannot adjust the climate control setting
during remote start operation. Switch the
ignition on to make adjustments.
Based on your remote start settings, the
following vehicle-dependent features may
or may not remain on after remote starting
your vehicle:
• Climate controlled seats.
• Heated steering wheel.
• Heated mirrors.
• Heated rear window.
• Windshield wiper de-icer.
Note: For dual zone climate controlled seats,
the passenger seat setting defaults to match
the driver seat during remote start.
Automatic Settings
If Auto is on, the system sets the interior
temperature to 72°F (22°C) and heats or
cools the vehicle interior as required to
achieve comfort.
Note: In cold weather, the heated rear
window and heated mirrors turn on.
Last Settings
If Last Settings is on, the system uses the
settings last selected before you turned off
the vehicle.
Heated and Cooled Features
In Auto mode, certain heated features may
switch on during cold weather, and cooled
features during hot weather.
140
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Climate Control
SITTING IN THE CORRECT
POSITION
WARNING: Sitting improperly, out of
position or with the seatback reclined too far
can take weight off the seat cushion and
affect the decision of the passenger sensing
system, resulting in serious injury or death
in the event of a crash. Always sit upright
against your seat back, with your feet on the
floor.
WARNING: Do not recline the seatback
as this can cause the occupant to slide under
the safety belt, resulting in serious injury in
the event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not place objects higher
than the seatback to reduce the risk of
serious injury in the event of a crash or
during heavy braking.
E68595
When you use them properly, the seat, head
restraint, safety belt and airbags will provide
optimum protection in the event of a crash.
We recommend that you follow these
guidelines:
• Sit in an upright position with the base of
your spine as far back as possible.
• Do not recline the seatback more than
30 degrees.
• Adjust the head restraint so that the top
of it is level with the top of your head and
as far forward as possible. Make sure that
you remain comfortable.
• Keep sufficient distance between
yourself and the steering wheel. We
recommend a minimum of 10 in (25 cm)
between your breastbone and the airbag
cover.
• Hold the steering wheel with your arms
slightly bent.
• Bend your legs slightly so that you can
press the pedals fully.
• Position the shoulder strap of the safety
belt over the center of your shoulder and
position the lap strap tightly across your
hips.
Make sure that your driving position is
comfortable and that you can maintain full
control of your vehicle.
141
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seats
HEAD RESTRAINTS
WARNING: Fully adjust the head
restraint before you sit in or operate your
vehicle. This will help minimize the risk of
neck injury in the event of a crash. Do not
adjust the head restraint when your vehicle
is moving.
WARNING: The adjustable head
restraint is a safety device. Whenever
possible, it should be installed and properly
adjusted when the seat is occupied. Failure
to adjust the head restraint properly could
reduce its effectiveness during certain
impacts.
WARNING: Install the head restraint
properly to help minimize the risk of neck
injury in the event of a crash.
Note: Adjust the seatback to an upright
driving position before adjusting the head
restraint. Adjust the head restraint so that
the top of it is level with the top of your head
and as far forward as possible. Make sure
that you remain comfortable. If you are
extremely tall, adjust the head restraint to
its highest position.
Front seat head restraint
E138642
Rear seat outboard head restraints
E153105
Rear center head restraint
E138645
142
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seats
The head restraints consist of:
an energy absorbing head restraintA
two steel stemsB
guide sleeve adjust and unlock
button
C
guide sleeve unlock and remove
button
D
Adjusting the Head Restraint
Raising the Head Restraint
Pull the head restraint up.
Lowering the Head Restraint
1. Press and hold button C.
2. Push the head restraint down.
Removing the Head Restraint
1. Pull the head restraint up until it reaches
its highest position.
2. Press and hold buttons C and D.
3. Pull the head restraint up.
Installing the Head Restraint
Align the steel stems into the guide sleeves
and push the head restraint down until it
locks.
Tilting Head Restraints
The front head restraints have a tilting
feature for extra comfort. To tilt the head
restraint, do the following:
E144727
1. Adjust the seatback to an upright driving
or riding position.
2. Pivot the head restraint forward toward
your head to the desired position.
After the head restraint reaches the
forward-most tilt position, pivoting it forward
again will then release it to the rearward,
untilted position.
POWER SEATS
WARNING: Do not adjust the driver
seat or seat backrest when your vehicle is
moving. This may result in sudden seat
movement, causing the loss of control of your
vehicle.
WARNING: Do not place cargo or any
objects behind the seatback before returning
it to the original position.
143
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seats
E144632
144
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seats
Adjusting the Lumbar Support
E165608
Adjusting the Four-Way Lumbar
Support (If Equipped)
E223345
Press to increase upper lumbar
only.
A
Press to decrease upper and lower
lumbar.
B
Press to increase lower lumbar
only.
C
Press to increase upper and lower
lumbar.
D
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front
Seats With Active Motion (If Equipped)
Note: The engine must be running or the
vehicle must be in accessory mode to
activate the seats.
Note: Allow a few seconds for any selection
to activate. The seat backrest and cushion
massage cannot function at the same time.
E156301
145
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seats
Lumbar and Bolster ModeMassage Mode
Upper lumbarBack massage intensity adjustmentA
Lumbar decrease
Massage intensity decrease and off
*
B
Lower lumbar
**
Cushion massage intensity adjustmentC
Lumbar increaseMassage intensity increaseD
-On and offE
*
The massage feature defaults to an alternating massage mode with back massage intensity adjustment. The lumbar and bolster features
default to the middle lumbar mode.
**
Press C a second time to adjust the back bolster. Press C a third time to adjust the cushion bolster.
You can also adjust this feature through the touchscreen.
E142607
Press the Menu Settings icon, then
Vehicle. Choose Multi-Contour
Seats.
When switched on, the system displays
directions for you to adjust the lumbar
settings in your seat or to set the massage
function.
To access and make adjustments to the
lumbar setting:
1. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
2. Press the + or - to adjust the lumbar
intensity.
To access and make adjustments to the
massage setting:
1. Press the Menu Settings icon, then
Vehicle. Choose Multi-Contour Seats.
2. Choose the desired seat to adjust.
3. Press OFF, LO or HI.
146
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seats
MEMORY FUNCTION
WARNING: Before activating the
memory seat, make sure that the area
immediately surrounding the seat is clear of
obstructions and that all occupants are clear
of moving parts.
WARNING: Do not use the memory
function when your vehicle is moving.
This feature automatically recalls the position
of the following features:
• Driver seat.
• Power mirrors.
• Power steering column.
The memory control is on the driver door.
E223340
Saving a PreSet Position
1. Adjust the memory features to your
desired position.
2. Press the SET button until you hear a
single tone.
3. Press the desired preset button until you
hear a single tone.
You can save up to two preset memory
positions. You can save a memory preset at
any time.
Recalling a PreSet Position
Press and release the preset button
associated with your desired driving position.
The memory features move to the position
stored for that preset.
Note: You can only recall a preset memory
position when you switch the ignition off, or
when the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N) if the ignition is on and the vehicle
is not moving.
You can also recall a preset memory position
by:
• Pressing the unlock button on your
intelligent access key fob if it is linked to
a preset position.
• Unlocking the intelligent driver door
handle if a linked key fob is present.
Note: Using a linked key fob to recall your
memory position when the ignition is off
moves the seat to the Easy Entry position.
Note: Pressing any active memory feature
control - power seat, mirror, or steering
column (or any memory button) during a
memory recall cancels the operation.
147
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seats
Linking a PreSet Position to your
Remote Control or Intelligent Access
Key Fob
Your vehicle can save the preset memory
positions for up to two remote controls or
intelligent access (IA) keys.
After you have saved your desired memory
preset positions:
1. Press and hold the desired preset button
for about three seconds until you hear a
single tone.
2. Within three seconds, press the lock
button on the remote control you are
linking.
To unlink a remote control, follow the same
procedure – except in step 2, press the
unlock button on the remote control.
Note: If more than one linked remote control
or intelligent access key is in range, the
memory function moves to the settings of
the first key to initiate a memory recall.
Easy Entry and Exit Feature
If you enable the easy entry and exit feature,
it automatically moves the driver seat
position rearward up to 2 in (5 cm) when you
switch the ignition off.
The driver seat returns to the previous
position when you switch the ignition on.
You can enable or disable this feature in the
information display. See General
Information (page 110).
REAR SEATS
Note: Your vehicle may have split seatbacks
that you must fold individually.
Note: Make sure the center safety belt is
unbuckled before folding the seatback.
To lower the seat back(s) from inside the
vehicle, do the following:
E144634
1. Pull the handle to release the seatback.
2. Push the seatback forward.
148
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seats
E164098
3. Stow the safety belt in the stowage clip.
This will prevent the safety belt from
getting caught in the seat latch.
When raising the seat back(s), make sure you
hear the seat latch into place.
HEATED SEATS (If Equipped)
Front Seats
WARNING: People who are unable to
feel pain to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the heated seat. The heated
seat may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such as
a blanket or cushion. This may cause the
heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture
the seat with pins, needles or other pointed
objects. This may damage the heating
element which may cause the heated seat
to overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
149
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seats
Rear Seats
WARNING: Persons who are unable
to feel pain to the skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion,
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the seat heater. The seat
heater may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such as
a blanket or cushion, because this may cause
the seat heater to overheat. Do not puncture
the seat with pins, needles, or other pointed
objects because this may damage the
heating element which may cause the seat
heater to overheat. An overheated seat may
cause serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the seat heater if water or any
other liquid is spilled on the seat. Allow
the seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
The rear seat heat controls are located on
the rear of the center console.
E146322
Press the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
The heated seat module resets at every
ignition run cycle. While the ignition is on,
press the high or low heated seat switch to
enable heating mode. When activated, they
will turn off automatically when you turn the
engine off.
CLIMATE CONTROLLED SEATS (If
Equipped)
Heated Seats
WARNING: People who are unable to
feel pain to their skin because of advanced
age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord
injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion
or other physical conditions, must exercise
care when using the heated seat. The heated
seat may cause burns even at low
temperatures, especially if used for long
periods of time. Do not place anything on
the seat that insulates against heat, such as
a blanket or cushion. This may cause the
150
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seats
heated seat to overheat. Do not puncture
the seat with pins, needles or other pointed
objects. This may damage the heating
element which may cause the heated seat
to overheat. An overheated seat may cause
serious personal injury.
Do not do the following:
• Place heavy objects on the seat.
• Operate the heated seat if water or any
other liquid spills on the seat. Allow the
seat to dry thoroughly.
• Operate the heated seats unless the
engine is running. Doing so can cause
the battery to lose charge.
E146322
Touch the heated seat symbol to cycle
through the various heat settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate warmer
settings.
Cooled Seats
The cooled seats will only function when the
engine is running.
E146309
To operate the cooled seats:
Press the cooled seat symbol to cycle
through the various cooling settings and off.
More indicator lights indicate cooler settings.
If the engine falls below 350 RPM while the
cooled seats are on, the feature will turn itself
off. You will need to reactivate it.
Climate controlled seat air filter
replacement
Your vehicle is equipped with lifetime air
filters that are integrated with the seats.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
REAR SEAT ARMREST
E144635
Fold the armrest down to use the armrest
and cupholder. To open the storage lid, pull
up on the latch between the cupholders.
151
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seats
Armrest Pass-Through
Note: Do not exceed 80 lb (36 kg) of weight
on the pass-through door.
E152622
Release the latch, then pull down on the door
in the back of the armrest. You can store
cargo of a longer length such as skis or
lumber.
152
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Seats
HomeLink Wireless Control System
WARNING: Do not use the system with
any garage door opener that does not have
the safety stop and reverse feature as
required by U.S. Federal Safety Standards
(this includes any garage door opener
manufactured before April 1, 1982). A garage
door opener which cannot detect an object,
signaling the door to stop and reverse, does
not meet current federal safety standards.
Using a garage door opener without these
features increases the risk of serious injury
or death.
Note: Make sure that the garage door and
security device are free from obstruction
when you are programming. Do not program
the system with the vehicle in the garage.
Note: Make sure you keep the original
remote control transmitter for use in other
vehicles as well as for future system
programming.
Note: We recommend that upon the sale or
lease termination of your vehicle, you erase
the programmed function buttons for security
reasons. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
Note: You can program a maximum of three
devices. To change or replace any of the
three devices after it has been initially
programmed, you must first erase the current
settings. See Erasing the Function Button
Codes.
E142657
The universal garage door opener replaces
the common hand-held garage door opener
with a three-button transmitter that is
integrated into the driver’s sun visor.
The system includes two primary features, a
garage door opener and a platform for
remote activation of devices within the home.
As well as being programmed for garage
doors, the system transmitter can be
programmed to operate entry gate operators,
security systems, entry door locks and home
or office lighting.
Additional system information can be found
online at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or by
calling the toll-free help line on
1-800-355-3515.
In-Vehicle Programming
This process is to program your hand-held
transmitter and your in-vehicle HomeLink
button.
Note: The programming steps below assume
you will be programming HomeLink that was
not previously programmed.
Note: Put a new battery in the hand-held
transmitter. This will ensure quicker training
and accurate transmission of the
radio-frequency signal.
153
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
E142658
1. With your vehicle parked outside of the
garage, turn your ignition to the on
position, but do not start your vehicle.
2. Hold your hand-held garage door
transmitter 2–6 in (5–14 cm) away from
the HomeLink button you want to
program.
3. Using both hands, simultaneously, press
and hold the desired HomeLink button
and the hand-held transmitter button. DO
NOT release either one until the
HomeLink indicator light flashes slowly
and then rapidly. When the indicator light
flashes rapidly, both buttons may be
released. The rapid flashing indicates
successful training.
Note: You may need to use a different
method if you live in Canada or have
difficulties programming your gate operator
or garage door opener. See Gate Operator
/ Canadian Programming.
4. Press and hold the HomeLink button you
programmed for two seconds, then
release. You may need to do this twice
to activate the door. If your garage door
does not operate, watch the HomeLink
indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on, the
programming is complete. No further action
is needed.
If the indicator light flashes rapidly for 2
seconds and then turns to a constant light,
the HomeLink button is not programmed yet.
See Programming Your Garage Door
Opener Motor.
To program additional buttons, repeat Steps
1 – 4.
For questions or comments, please contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming Your Garage Door Opener
Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to reach the
unit and you may need to remove the cover
or lamp lens on your garage door opener.
E142659
1. Press the learn button on the garage
door opener motor and then you have
30 seconds to complete the next two
steps.
2. Return to your vehicle.
154
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
E142658
3. Press and hold the function button you
want to program for 2 seconds, then
release. Repeat this step. Depending on
your brand of garage door opener, you
may need to repeat this sequence a third
time.
Gate Operator / Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require
transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after
several seconds of transmission – which may
not be long enough for HomeLink to pick up
the signal during programming. Similar to
this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators
are designed to “time-out” in the same
manner.
Note: If programming a garage door opener
or gate operator, it is advised to unplug the
device during the “cycling” process to
prevent possible overheating.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink button
while you press and release, every two
seconds, your hand-held transmitter until
the HomeLink indicator light changes
from a slow to a rapidly blinking light.
2. Release both the HomeLink and
hand-held transmitter buttons.
3. Continue programing HomeLink. See
In-Vehicle Programming.
Erasing the Function Button Codes
Note: You cannot erase individual buttons.
E142660
1. Press and hold the outer two function
buttons simultaneously for approximately
20 seconds until the indicator lights
above the buttons flash rapidly.
2. When the indicator lights flash, release
the buttons. The codes for all buttons are
erased.
Reprogramming a Single Button
To program a device to a previously trained
button, follow these steps:
1. Press and hold the desired button. Do
NOT release the button.
155
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
2. The indicator light will begin to flash after
20 seconds. Without releasing the
button, follow Step 1 in the Programming
section.
For questions or comments, contact
HomeLink at www.homelink.com,
www.youtube.com/HomeLinkGentex or
1-800-355-3515.
Programming to a Genie Intellicode 2
Garage Door Opener
Note: The Genie Intellicode 2 transmitter
must already be programmed to operate
with the garage door opener.
Note: To program HomeLink to the
transmitter you must first put the transmitter
into programming mode.
BA
E142661
Red indicator lightA.
Green indicator lightB.
1. Press and hold one of the buttons on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from green to
red and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change to programming mode. If
done properly the indicator light will
appear red.
3. Hold the transmitter within 1–3 in
(2–8 cm) of the button on the visor you
want to program.
4. Press and hold both the programmed
Genie button on the hand-held
transmitter and the button you want to
program. The indicator light on the visor
will flash rapidly when the programming
is successful.
Note: The Genie transmitter will transmit for
up to 30 seconds. If HomeLink does not
program within 30 seconds the Genie
transmitter will need to be pressed again. If
the Genie transmitter indicator light displays
green and red, release the button until the
indicator light turns off before pressing the
button again.
Once HomeLink has been programmed
successfully, the Genie transmitter must be
changed out of program mode. To do this:
1. Press and hold the previously
programmed Genie button on the
hand-held transmitter for 10 seconds. The
indicator light will change from red to red
and green.
2. Press the same button twice to confirm
the change. If done correctly the indicator
light will turn green.
156
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
Programming HomeLink to the Genie
Intellicode Garage Door Opener Motor
Note: You may need a ladder to access the
garage door opener motor.
E142662
1. Press and hold the program button on
the garage door opener motor until both
blue indicator lights turn on.
2. Release the program button. Only the
smaller round indicator light should be
on.
3. Press and release the program button.
The larger purple indicator light will flash.
Note: The next two steps must be completed
in 30 seconds.
4. Press and release the Genie Intellicode
2 hand-held transmitter’s previously
programmed button. Both indicator lights
on the garage door opener motor unit
should now flash purple.
5. Press and hold the previously
programmed button on the visor for 2
seconds. Repeat this step up to 3 times
until the garage door moves.
Programming is now complete.
Clearing a HomeLink Device
To erase programming from the three
HomeLink buttons press and hold the two
outer HomeLink buttons until the indicator
light begins to flash. The indicator light will
begin flashing in 10 to 20 seconds, at which
time both buttons should be released.
Programming has now been erased, and the
indicator light should blink slowly to indicate
the device is in train mode when any of the
three HomeLink buttons are pressed.
FCC and RSS-210 Industry Canada
Compliance
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
harmful interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications to your device not
expressly approved by the party responsible
for compliance can void the user’ s authority
to operate the equipment.
157
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Universal Garage Door Opener
12 Volt DC Power Point
WARNING: Do not plug optional
electrical accessories into the cigar lighter
socket. Incorrect use of the cigar lighter can
cause damage not covered by the vehicle
warranty, and can result in fire or serious
injury.
Note: When you switch the ignition on, you
can use the socket to power 12 volt
appliances with a maximum current rating
of 15 amps.
If the power supply does not work after you
switch the ignition off, switch the ignition on.
Note: Do not hang any accessory from the
accessory plug.
Note: Do not use the power point over the
vehicle capacity of 12 volt DC 180 watts or
a fuse may blow.
Note: Always keep the power point caps
closed when not in use.
Do not insert objects other than an accessory
plug into the power point. This damages the
power point and may blow the fuse.
Run the vehicle for full capacity use of the
power point.
To prevent the battery from running out of
charge:
• Do not use the power point longer than
necessary when the vehicle is not
running.
• Do not leave devices plugged in
overnight or when you park your vehicle
for extended periods.
Locations
Power points may be in the following
locations:
• On the front of the center console.
• Inside the center console.
• On the rear of the center console.
110 Volt AC Power Point
WARNING: Do not keep electrical
devices plugged in the power point
whenever the device is not in use. Do not
use any extension cord with the 110 volt AC
power point, since it will defeat the safety
protection design. Doing so may cause the
power point to overload due to powering
multiple devices that can reach beyond the
150 watt load limit and could result in fire or
serious injury.
Note: The power point turns off when you
switch the ignition off, or when the battery
voltage drops below 11 volts.
You can use the power point for electric
devices that require up to 150 watts. It is on
the rear of the center console.
158
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
E194174
To gain access to the outlet contacts, press
the plug against the outlet and rotate
clockwise.
When the indicator light on the power point
is:
• On: The power point is working, the
ignition is on and a device is plugged in.
• Off: The power point is off, the ignition is
off or no device is plugged in.
• Flashing: The power point is in fault
mode.
The power outlet temporarily turns off power
when in fault mode if the device exceeds the
150 watt limit. Unplug your device and
switch the ignition off. Switch the ignition
back on, but do not plug your device back
in. Let the system cool off and switch the
ignition off to reset the fault mode. Switch
the ignition back on and make sure the
indicator light remains on.
Do not use the power point for certain
electric devices, including:
• Cathode-ray, tube-type televisions.
• Motor loads, such as vacuum cleaners,
electric saws and other electric power
tools or compressor-driven refrigerators.
• Measuring devices, which process
precise data, such as medical equipment
or measuring equipment.
• Other appliances requiring an extremely
stable power supply such as
microcomputer-controlled electric
blankets or touch-sensor lamps.
159
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Auxiliary Power Points
CENTER CONSOLE
Stow items in the cup holder carefully as
items may become loose during hard
braking, acceleration or crashes, including
hot drinks which may spill.
Available console features include:
E228739
Front storage bin with remote USB
port.
A
Cup holders.B
Storage compartment with auxiliary
power point and USB port.
C
Heated rear seats.D
AC power point, auxiliary power
point, and charger USB ports.
E
Two auxiliary power points.F
Rear Seat Armrest
E225987
Cup holders.A
Storage compartment.B
OVERHEAD CONSOLE
E224352
Press near the rear edge of the door to open
it.
160
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Storage Compartments
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Extended idling at high
engine speeds can produce very high
temperatures in the engine and exhaust
system, creating the risk of fire or other
damage.
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: Do not start the engine in
a closed garage or in other enclosed areas.
Exhaust fumes can be toxic. Always open
the garage door before you start the engine.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
If you disconnect the battery, your vehicle
may exhibit some unusual driving
characteristics for approximately 5 mi (8 km)
after you reconnect it. This is because the
engine management system must realign
itself with the engine. You can disregard any
unusual driving characteristics during this
period.
The powertrain control system meets all
Canadian interference-causing equipment
standard requirements regulating the
impulse electrical field or radio noise.
When you start the engine, avoid pressing
the accelerator pedal before and during
operation. Only use the accelerator pedal
when you have difficulty starting the engine.
KEYLESS STARTING
Note: The keyless starting system may not
function if the key is close to metal objects
or electronic devices such as cellular
phones.
Note: A valid key must be located inside
your vehicle to switch the ignition on and
start the vehicle.
Ignition Modes
E164319
161
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
The keyless starting system has three
modes:
• Off: Turns the ignition off.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once
when the ignition is in the on mode,
or when the vehicle is running but is
not moving.
• On: All electrical circuits are operational
and the warning lamps and indicators
illuminate.
• Without applying the brake pedal,
press and release the button once.
• Start: Starts the vehicle. The engine may
not start when the vehicle starts.
• Press the brake pedal, and then press
the button until the vehicle starts. An
indicator light on the button
illuminates when the ignition is on
and when the vehicle starts.
STARTING A GASOLINE ENGINE
When you start the engine, the idle speed
increases, this helps to warm up the engine.
If the engine idle speed does not slow down
automatically, have your vehicle checked by
an authorized dealer.
Before starting the engine, check the
following:
• Make sure all occupants have fastened
their safety belts.
• Make sure the headlamps and electrical
accessories are off.
• Make sure the parking brake is on.
• Put the transmission in P.
Note: Do not touch the accelerator pedal.
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Press the button.
The system does not function if:
• The key frequencies are jammed.
• The key battery has no charge.
If you are unable to start the engine, do the
following:
E155835
1. Remove the rubber covering (A) in the
cupholder. With the buttons facing
upward and the unlock button facing the
front of your vehicle, place the first
intelligent access key into the backup
slot (B).
2. With the key in this position, press the
brake pedal, then the START button to
switch the ignition on and start your
vehicle.
Fast Restart
The fast restart feature allows you to restart
the engine within 20 seconds of switching it
off, even if a valid key is not present.
162
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
Within 20 seconds of switching the engine
off, press the brake pedal and press the
button. After 20 seconds have expired, you
can no longer restart the engine without the
key present inside your vehicle.
Once the engine has started, it remains
running until you press the button, even if
the system does not detect a valid key. If you
open and close a door while the engine is
running, the system searches for a valid key.
You cannot restart the engine if the system
does not detect a valid key within 20
seconds.
Failure to Start
If you cannot start the engine after three
attempts, wait 10 seconds and follow this
procedure:
1. Fully press the brake pedal.
2. Fully press the accelerator pedal and
hold it there.
3. Start the engine.
Note: You can crank the engine for a total
of 60 seconds without the engine starting
before the starting system temporarily
disables. The 60 seconds does not have to
be all at once. For example, if you crank the
engine three times for 20 seconds each time,
without the engine starting, you reached the
60-second time limit. A message appears
in the information display alerting you that
you exceeded the cranking time. You
cannot attempt to start the engine for at
least 15 minutes.
Note: After 15 minutes, you are limited to a
15-second engine cranking time. You need
to wait 60 minutes before you can crank the
engine for 60 seconds again.
Automatic Engine Shutdown
If your vehicle is equipped with a keyless
ignition, it has a feature that automatically
shuts down the engine if it has been idling
for an extended period. The ignition also
turns off in order to save battery power.
Before the engine shuts down, a message
appears in the information display showing
a timer counting down from 30 seconds. If
you do not intervene within 30 seconds, the
engine shuts down. Another message
appears in the information display to inform
you that the engine has shut down in order
to save fuel. Start your vehicle as you
normally do.
Automatic Engine Shutdown Override
Note: You cannot permanently switch off the
automatic engine shutdown feature. When
you switch it off temporarily, it turns on at
the next ignition cycle.
You can stop the engine shutdown, or reset
the timer, at any point before the 30-second
countdown has expired by doing any of the
following:
163
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
• You can reset the timer by interacting
with your vehicle (such as pressing the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal).
• You can temporarily switch off the
shutdown feature any time the ignition is
on (for the current ignition cycle only).
Use the information display to do so. See
Information Displays (page 110).
• During the countdown before engine
shutdown, you are prompted to press OK
or RESET (depending on your type of
information display) to temporarily switch
the feature off (for the current ignition
cycle only).
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Stationary
1. Put the transmission in position P.
2. Press the button once.
3. Apply the parking brake.
Note: This switches off the ignition, all
electrical circuits, warning lamps and
indicators.
Note: If the engine is idling for 30 minutes,
the ignition and engine automatically shut
down.
Stopping the Engine When Your
Vehicle is Moving
WARNING: Switching off the engine
when the vehicle is still moving will result in
a loss of brake and steering assistance. The
steering will not lock, but higher effort will
be required. When the ignition is switched
off, some electrical circuits, including air
bags, warning lamps and indicators may also
be off. If the ignition was turned off
accidentally, you can shift into neutral (N) and
re-start the engine.
1. Put the transmission in position N and
use the brakes to bring your vehicle to a
safe stop.
2. When your vehicle has stopped, put the
transmission in position P.
3. Press and hold the button for one
second, or press it three times within two
seconds.
4. Apply the parking brake.
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Important Ventilating Information
If you stop your vehicle and then leave the
engine idling for long periods, we
recommend that you do one of the following:
• Open the windows at least 1 in (2.5 cm).
• Set your climate control to outside air.
ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (If Equipped)
WARNING: Failure to follow engine
block heater instructions could result in
property damage or serious personal injury.
164
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
WARNING: Do not use your heater with
ungrounded electrical systems or
two-pronged adapters. There is a risk of
electrical shock.
WARNING: Do not fully close the hood,
or allow it to drop under its own weight when
using the engine block heater. This could
damage the power cable and may cause an
electrical short resulting in fire, injury and
property damage.
Note: The heater is most effective when
outdoor temperatures are below 0°F (-18°C).
The heater acts as a starting aid by warming
the engine coolant. This allows the climate
control system to respond quickly. The
equipment includes a heater element
(installed in the engine block) and a wire
harness. You can connect the system to a
grounded 120-volt AC electrical source.
We recommend that you do the following for
a safe and correct operation:
• Use a 16-gauge outdoor extension cord
that is product certified by Underwriter’ s
Laboratory (UL) or Canadian Standards
Association (CSA). This extension cord
must be suitable for use outdoors, in cold
temperatures, and be clearly marked
Suitable for Use with Outdoor
Appliances. Do not use an indoor
extension cord outdoors. This could
result in an electric shock or become a
fire hazard.
• Use as short an extension cord as
possible.
• Do not use multiple extension cords.
• Make sure that when in operation, the
extension cord plug and heater cord plug
connections are free and clear of water.
This could cause an electric shock or fire.
• Make sure your vehicle is parked in a
clean area, clear of combustibles.
• Make sure the heater, heater cord and
extension cord are firmly connected.
• Check for heat anywhere in the electrical
hookup once the system has been
operating for approximately 30 minutes.
• Make sure the system is unplugged and
properly stowed before starting and
driving your vehicle. Make sure the
protective cover seals the prongs of the
block heater cord plug when not in use.
• Make sure the heater system is checked
for proper operation before winter.
Using the Engine Block Heater
Make sure the receptacle terminals are clean
and dry prior to use. Clean them with a dry
cloth if necessary.
The heater uses 0.4 to 1.0 kilowatt-hours of
energy per hour of use. The system does not
have a thermostat. It achieves maximum
temperature after approximately three hours
of operation. Using the heater longer than
three hours does not improve system
performance and unnecessarily uses
electricity.
165
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Starting and Stopping the Engine
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank.
The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause
leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out,
which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Fuels can cause serious
injury or death if misused or mishandled.
WARNING: Fuel may contain benzene,
which is a cancer-causing agent.
WARNING: When refueling always shut
the engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler valve.
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous
under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling
excess fumes.
Follow these guidelines when refueling:
• Extinguish all smoking materials and any
open flames before refueling your
vehicle.
• Always switch the engine off before
refueling.
• Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal
if swallowed. Fuel is highly toxic and if
swallowed can cause death or permanent
injury. If fuel is swallowed immediately
call a physician, even if no symptoms are
immediately apparent. The toxic effects
of fuel may not be apparent for hours.
• Avoid inhaling fuel vapors. Inhaling fuel
vapor can lead to eye and respiratory
tract irritation. In severe cases, excessive
or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can
cause serious illness and permanent
injury.
• Avoid getting fuel in your eyes. If you
splash fuel in your eyes, immediately
remove contact lenses (if worn), flush with
water for 15 minutes and seek medical
attention. Failure to seek proper medical
attention could lead to permanent injury.
• Fuels can be harmful if absorbed through
the skin. If you splash fuel on your skin,
clothing or both, promptly remove
contaminated clothing and thoroughly
wash your skin with soap and water.
Repeated or prolonged skin contact
causes skin irritation.
• Be particularly careful if you are taking
Antabuse or other forms of Disulfiram for
the treatment of alcoholism. Breathing
fuel vapors could cause an adverse
reaction, serious personal injury or
sickness. Immediately call a physician if
you experience any adverse reactions.
FUEL QUALITY
Choosing the Right Fuel
E161513
166
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Your vehicle is designed to operate on
regular unleaded gasoline with a minimum
pump (R+M)/2 octane rating of 87.
Some fuel stations, particularly those in high
altitude areas, offer fuels posted as regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating
below 87. The use of these fuels could result
in engine damage that will not be covered
by the vehicle warranty.
For best overall vehicle and engine
performance, premium fuel with an octane
rating of 91 or higher is recommended. The
performance gained by using premium fuel
is most noticeable in hot weather as well as
other conditions, for example when towing
a trailer. See Towing (page 253).
Do not be concerned if the engine
sometimes knocks lightly. However, if the
engine knocks heavily while using fuel with
the recommended octane rating, contact an
authorized dealer to prevent any engine
damage.
We recommend Top Tier detergent
gasolines, where available to help minimize
engine deposits and maintain optimal vehicle
and engine performance. For additional
information, refer to www.toptiergas.com.
Note: Use of any fuel for which the vehicle
was not designed can impair the emission
control system, cause loss of vehicle
performance, and cause damage to the
engine which may not be covered by the
vehicle Warranty.
Do not use:
• Diesel fuel.
• Fuels containing kerosene or paraffin.
• Fuel containing more than 15% ethanol
or E85 fuel.
• Fuels containing methanol.
• Fuels containing metallic-based additives,
including manganese-based compounds.
• Fuels containing the octane booster
additive, methylcyclopentadienyl
manganese tricarbonyl (MMT).
• Leaded fuel, using leaded fuel is
prohibited by law.
The use of fuels with metallic compounds
such as methylcyclopentadienyl manganese
tricarbonyl (commonly known as MMT), which
is a manganese-based fuel additive, will
impair engine performance and affect the
emission control system.
FUEL FILLER FUNNEL LOCATION
The fuel filler funnel is under the luggage
compartment floor covering.
167
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
E162864
RUNNING OUT OF FUEL
Running out of fuel can cause damage not
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If your vehicle runs out of fuel:
• Add a minimum of 1.3 gal (5 L) of fuel to
restart the engine.
• You may need to switch the ignition from
off to on several times after refueling to
allow the fuel system to pump the fuel
from the tank to the engine. When
restarting, cranking time takes a few
seconds longer than normal.
Note: If your vehicle is on a steep slope,
more fuel may be required.
Filling a Portable Fuel Container
WARNING: Flow of fuel through a fuel
pump nozzle can produce static electricity.
This can cause a fire if you are filling an
ungrounded fuel container.
Use the following guidelines to avoid
electrostatic charge build-up, which can
produce a spark, when filling an ungrounded
fuel container:
• Only use an approved fuel container to
transfer fuel to your vehicle. Place the
container on the ground when filling it.
• Do not fill a fuel container when it is
inside your vehicle (including the cargo
area).
• Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact
with the fuel container when filling it.
• Do not use a device that holds the fuel
pump nozzle lever in the fill position.
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container
WARNING: Do not insert the nozzle of
a fuel container or an aftermarket funnel into
the fuel filler neck. This may damage the fuel
system filler neck or its seal and cause fuel
to run onto the ground.
168
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNING: Do not try to pry open or
push open the capless fuel system with
foreign objects. This could damage the fuel
system and its seal and cause injury to you
or others.
WARNING: Do not dispose of fuel in
the household refuse or the public sewage
system. Use an authorized waste disposal
facility.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, use the fuel filler funnel
included with your vehicle. See Fuel Filler
Funnel Location (page 167).
Note: Do not use aftermarket funnels as they
may not work with the capless fuel system
and can damage it.
When refueling the vehicle fuel tank from a
fuel container, do the following:
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
2. Fully insert the fuel filler funnel into the
fuel filler inlet.
E157452
3. Add fuel to your vehicle from the fuel
container.
4. Remove the fuel filler funnel.
5. Fully close the fuel filler door.
6. Clean the fuel filler funnel and place it
back in your vehicle or correctly dispose
of it.
Note: Extra funnels can be purchased from
an authorized dealer if you choose to
dispose of the funnel.
REFUELING
WARNING: When refueling always shut
the engine off and never allow sparks or
open flames near the fuel tank filler valve.
Never smoke or use a cell phone while
refueling. Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous
under certain conditions. Avoid inhaling
excess fumes.
WARNING: The fuel system may be
under pressure. If you hear a hissing sound
near the fuel filler inlet, do not refuel until the
sound stops. Otherwise, fuel may spray out,
which could cause serious personal injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the fuel
pump nozzle from its fully inserted position
when refueling.
WARNING: Do not overfill the fuel tank.
The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause
leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire.
169
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
WARNING: Stop refueling when the
fuel pump nozzle automatically shuts off for
the first time. Failure to follow this will fill the
expansion space in the fuel tank and could
lead to fuel overflowing.
WARNING: Wait at least five seconds
before removing the fuel pump nozzle to
allow any residual fuel to drain into the fuel
tank.
WARNING: Do not pry open the fuel
tank filler valve. This could damage the fuel
system. Failure to follow this instruction could
result in fire, personal injury or death.
Note: Your vehicle may not have a fuel tank
filler cap.
E206911
A B
C D
Left-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
A
Right-hand side. To open the fuel
filler door, press the center rear
edge of the fuel filler door and
then release.
B
Left-hand side. Pull the rear of the
fuel filler door to open it.
C
Right-hand side. Pull the rear of the
fuel filler door to open it.
D
1. Fully open the fuel filler door.
E139202
A
Note: When you insert the correct size fuel
pump nozzle a spring loaded inhibitor opens.
170
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
2. Insert the fuel pump nozzle up to the first
notch on the nozzle A. Keep it resting
on the cover of the fuel tank filler pipe
opening.
E139203
A
B
3. Hold the fuel pump nozzle in position B
when refueling. Holding the nozzle in
position A can affect the flow of fuel and
shut off the fuel nozzle before the tank
is full.
E206912
A B
4. Operate the fuel pump nozzle within the
area shown.
E119081
5. When you finish refueling slightly raise
the fuel pump nozzle and slowly remove
it.
6. Fully close the fuel filler door.
Note: Do not attempt to start the engine if
you have filled the fuel tank with incorrect
fuel. Incorrect fuel use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle warranty. Have
your vehicle immediately checked.
System Warnings (If Equipped)
If the fuel filler inlet does not fully close a
warning message appears in the information
display.
1. Stop your vehicle as soon as it is safe to
do so and switch the engine off.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Apply the parking brake.
4. Fully open the fuel filler door.
5. Check the fuel filler inlet and the area
around it for any items or debris that may
be obstructing its movement.
6. Fully insert a fuel pump nozzle or the fuel
filler funnel provided with your vehicle
into the fuel filler inlet. This action should
dislodge any debris that may be
preventing the fuel filler inlet from fully
closing.
7. Fully close the fuel filler door.
171
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
Note: If this action corrects the problem the
message may not immediately reset. If the
message remains and a warning lamp
illuminates, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
FUEL CONSUMPTION
Advertised Capacity
The advertised capacity is the maximum
amount of fuel that you can add to the fuel
tank after running out of fuel. Included in the
advertised capacity is an empty reserve. The
empty reserve is an unspecified amount of
fuel that remains in the fuel tank when the
fuel gauge indicates empty.
Note: The amount of fuel in the empty
reserve varies and should not be relied upon
to increase driving range.
Fuel Economy
Your vehicle calculates fuel economy figures
through the trip computer average fuel
function. See General Information (page
110).
The first 1,000 mi (1,500 km) of driving is the
break-in period of the engine. A more
accurate measurement is obtained after
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
Impacting Fuel Economy
• Incorrect tire inflation pressures.
• Fully loading your vehicle.
• Carrying unnecessary weight.
• Adding certain accessories to your
vehicle such as bug deflectors, rollbars
or light bars, running boards and ski
racks.
• Using fuel blended with alcohol. See
Fuel Quality (page 166).
• Fuel economy may decrease with lower
temperatures.
• Fuel economy may decrease when
driving short distances.
• You may get better fuel economy when
driving on flat terrain than when driving
on hilly terrain.
172
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuel and Refueling
EMISSION LAW
WARNING: Do not remove or alter the
original equipment floor covering or
insulation between it and the metal floor of
the vehicle. The floor covering and insulation
protect occupants of the vehicle from the
engine and exhaust system heat and noise.
On vehicles with no original equipment floor
covering insulation, do not carry passengers
in a manner that permits prolonged skin
contact with the metal floor. Failure to follow
these instructions may result in fire or
personal injury.
U.S. federal laws and certain state laws
prohibit removing or rendering inoperative
emission control system components. Similar
federal or provincial laws may apply in
Canada. We do not approve of any vehicle
modification without first determining
applicable laws.
Tampering with emissions control
systems including related sensors
or the Diesel Exhaust Fluid system
can result in reduced engine power and the
illumination of the service engine soon light.
Tampering With a Noise Control
System
Federal laws prohibit the following acts:
• Removal or rendering inoperative by any
person other than for purposes of
maintenance.
• Repair or replacement of any device or
element of the design incorporated into
a new vehicle for the purpose of noise
control prior to its sale or delivery to the
ultimate purchaser or while it is in use.
• The use of the vehicle after any person
removes or renders inoperative any
device or element of the design.
The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency
may presume to constitute tampering as
follows:
• Removal of hood blanket, fender apron
absorbers, fender apron barriers,
underbody noise shields or acoustically
absorptive material.
• Tampering or rendering inoperative the
engine speed governor, to allow engine
speed to exceed manufacturer
specifications.
If the engine does not start, runs rough,
experiences a decrease in engine
performance, experiences excess fuel
consumption or produces excessive exhaust
smoke, check for the following:
• A plugged or disconnected air inlet
system hose.
• A plugged engine air filter element.
• Water in the fuel filter and water
separator.
• A clogged fuel filter.
• Contaminated fuel.
• Air in the fuel system, due to loose
connections.
173
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
• An open or pinched sensor hose.
• Incorrect engine oil level.
• Incorrect fuel for climatic conditions.
• Incorrect engine oil viscosity for climactic
conditions.
Note: Some vehicles have a lifetime fuel filter
that is integrated with the fuel tank. Regular
maintenance or replacement is not needed.
Note: If these checks do not help you correct
the concern, have your vehicle checked as
soon as possible.
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance
On January 1, 1978, Federal regulation
became effective governing the noise
emission on trucks over 10,000 lb (4,536 kg)
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). The
preceding statements concerning prohibited
tampering acts and maintenance, and the
noise warranty found in the Warranty Guide,
are applicable to complete chassis cabs over
10,000 lb (4,536 kg) GVWR.
CATALYTIC CONVERTER
WARNING: Do not park, idle or drive
your vehicle on dry grass or other dry ground
cover. The emission system heats up the
engine compartment and exhaust system,
creating the risk of fire.
WARNING: The normal operating
temperature of the exhaust system is very
high. Never work around or attempt to repair
any part of the exhaust system until it has
cooled. Use special care when working
around the catalytic converter. The catalytic
converter heats up to a very high
temperature after only a short period of
engine operation and stays hot after the
engine is switched off.
WARNING: Exhaust leaks may result
in entry of harmful and potentially lethal
fumes into the passenger compartment. If
you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle,
have your vehicle inspected immediately. Do
not drive if you smell exhaust fumes.
Your vehicle has various emission control
components and a catalytic converter that
enables it to comply with applicable exhaust
emission standards.
To make sure that the catalytic converter and
other emission control components continue
to work properly:
• Do not crank the engine for more than
10 seconds at a time.
• Do not run the engine with a spark plug
lead disconnected.
• Do not push-start or tow-start your
vehicle. Use booster cables. See Jump
Starting the Vehicle (page 264).
• Use only the specified fuel listed.
• Do not switch the ignition off when your
vehicle is moving.
• Avoid running out of fuel.
• Have the items listed in scheduled
maintenance information performed
according to the specified schedule.
Note: Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
174
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
The scheduled maintenance items listed in
scheduled maintenance information are
essential to the life and performance of your
vehicle and to its emissions system.
If you use anything other than Lincoln,
Motorcraft or Lincoln-authorized parts for
maintenance replacements or for service of
components affecting emission control, such
non-Lincoln parts should be equivalent to
genuine Lincoln Motor Company parts in
performance and durability.
Illumination of the service engine soon
indicator, charging system warning light or
the temperature warning light, fluid leaks,
strange odors, smoke or loss of engine
power could indicate that the emission
control system is not working properly.
An improperly operating or damaged exhaust
system may allow exhaust to enter the
vehicle. Have a damaged or improperly
operating exhaust system inspected and
repaired immediately.
Do not make any unauthorized changes to
your vehicle or engine. By law, vehicle
owners and anyone who manufactures,
repairs, services, sells, leases, trades
vehicles, or supervises a fleet of vehicles are
not permitted to intentionally remove an
emission control device or prevent it from
working. Information about your vehicle’s
emission system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information Decal located on or near
the engine. This decal also lists engine
displacement.
Please consult your warranty information for
complete details.
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)
Your vehicle has a computer known as the
on-board diagnostics system (OBD-II) that
monitors the engine’s emission control
system. The system protects the environment
by making sure that your vehicle continues
to meet government emission standards. The
OBD-II system also assists a service
technician in properly servicing your vehicle.
When the service engine soon
indicator illuminates, the OBD-II
system has detected a malfunction.
Temporary malfunctions may cause the
service engine soon indicator to illuminate.
Examples are:
1. Your vehicle has run out of fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
2. Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel—the
engine may misfire or run poorly.
3. The fuel fill inlet may not have closed
properly. See Refueling (page 169).
4. Driving through deep water—the
electrical system may be wet.
You can correct these temporary
malfunctions by filling the fuel tank with good
quality fuel, properly closing the fuel fill inlet
or letting the electrical system dry out. After
three driving cycles without these or any
other temporary malfunctions present, the
service engine soon indicator should stay off
the next time you start the engine. A driving
cycle consists of a cold engine startup
followed by mixed city and highway driving.
No additional vehicle service is required.
175
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
If the service engine soon indicator remains
on, have your vehicle serviced at the first
available opportunity. Although some
malfunctions detected by the OBD-II may not
have symptoms that are apparent, continued
driving with the service engine soon indicator
on can result in increased emissions, lower
fuel economy, reduced engine and
transmission smoothness and lead to more
costly repairs.
Readiness for Inspection and
Maintenance (I/M) Testing
Some state and provincial and local
governments may have
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) programs to
inspect the emission control equipment on
your vehicle. Failure to pass this inspection
could prevent you from getting a vehicle
registration.
If the service engine soon indicator
is on or the bulb does not work,
your vehicle may need service.
See On-Board Diagnostics.
Your vehicle may not pass the I/M test if the
service engine soon indicator is on or not
working properly (bulb is burned out), or if
the OBD-II system has determined that some
of the emission control systems have not
been properly checked. In this case, the
vehicle is not ready for I/M testing.
If the vehicle’s engine or transmission has
just been serviced, or the battery has
recently run down or been replaced, the
OBD-II system may indicate that the vehicle
is not ready for I/M testing. To determine if
the vehicle is ready for I/M testing, turn the
ignition key to the on position for 15 seconds
without cranking the engine. If the service
engine soon indicator blinks eight times, it
means that the vehicle is not ready for I/M
testing; if the service engine soon indicator
stays on solid, it means that your vehicle is
ready for I/M testing.
The OBD-II system checks the emission
control system during normal driving. A
complete check may take several days.
If the vehicle is not ready for I/M testing, you
can perform the following driving cycle
consisting of mixed city and highway driving:
1. 15 minutes of steady driving on an
expressway or highway followed by 20
minutes of stop-and-go driving with at
least four 30-second idle periods.
2. Allow your vehicle to sit for at least eight
hours with the ignition off. Then, start the
vehicle and complete the above driving
cycle. The vehicle must warm up to its
normal operating temperature. Once
started, do not turn off the vehicle until
the above driving cycle is complete.
If the vehicle is still not ready for I/M testing,
you need to repeat the above driving cycle.
176
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Engine Emission Control
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift into
park (P). Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not apply the brake
pedal and accelerator pedal simultaneously.
Applying both pedals simultaneously for
more than a few seconds will limit engine
performance, which may result in difficulty
maintaining speed in traffic and could lead
to serious injury.
Note: You may not be able to shift out of
park (P) unless the intelligent access key is
inside your vehicle.
Push Button Shift Transmission
Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic
transmission. The shift buttons are located
near the middle of the instrument panel. The
gears are selected by pressing and releasing
the PRNDS buttons.
E146223
Every time a gear is selected, the selected
button will light up.
Understanding the Positions of your
Electronic Transmission
Note: Always come to a complete stop
before putting your vehicle into and out of
park (P).
Putting your vehicle in gear:
1. Fully press down the brake pedal.
2. Press and release the button on the
instrument panel of the gear you want to
select.
3. The gearshift button you select will
illuminate and the selected gear will
appear in the instrument cluster.
4. Release the brake pedal and your
transmission will remain in the selected
gear.
177
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Transmission
Note: If you attempt to leave your vehicle
while it is in gear, the vehicle will
automatically shift into park (P). Safety belt
and door monitors determine your intent and
make the shift for you. During this time, a
message will appear in the information
display screen prompting you to make the
shift. See Information Messages (page 116).
Note: To put your vehicle in gear with the
door open, perform steps 1-4. See the
Automatic Return to Park section in this
chapter for more information on this feature.
Park (P)
With the transmission in park (P), your vehicle
locks the transmission and prevents the front
wheels from turning. Always come to a
complete stop before putting your vehicle
into and out of park (P). An audible chime
sounds once you select park (P).
When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle
will automatically shift into park (P). If the
ignition is turned off while the vehicle is
moving, it will first shift into neutral (N) until
a slow enough speed is reached. The vehicle
will then shift into park (P) automatically.
Automatic Return to Park
Note: This feature will not operate when your
vehicle is in Stay in Neutral mode or neutral
tow.
Your vehicle has a safety feature that will
automatically shift your vehicle into park (P)
when any of the following conditions occur:
• You turn the ignition off
• You open the driver's door with your
safety belt unlatched
• Your safety belt is unlatched while the
driver's door is open
If you turn the ignition off while your vehicle
is moving, your vehicle will first shift into
neutral (N) until it slows down enough to shift
into park (P) automatically.
Note: If you have waited an extended period
of time, (2-15 minutes) before starting your
vehicle, unlatching your safety belt will cause
this feature to activate, even with the driver's
door closed.
Note: This feature may not work properly if
the door ajar switch is malfunctioning. If your
door ajar indicator does not illuminate when
you open the driver’s door or the indicator
illuminates with the driver’ s door closed. See
your authorized dealer.
Reverse (R)
With the transmission in reverse (R), your
vehicle will move backward. Always come
to a complete stop before shifting into and
out of reverse (R).
Neutral (N)
With the transmission in neutral (N), you can
start your vehicle and it is free to roll. Hold
the brake pedal down while in this position.
Stay in Neutral mode
Stay in Neutral mode allows your vehicle to
stay in neutral (N) when you exit the vehicle.
Your vehicle must be stationary to enter this
mode.
To enter Stay in Neutral mode:
1. Press the neutral (N) button on your
shifter assembly.
178
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Transmission
2. A message will appear in your
information display screen prompting you
to press the neutral (N) button.
3. Press the neutral (N) button again to
enter Stay in Neutral mode.
A message will appear in your information
display screen when your vehicle has
entered Stay in Neutral mode.
Note: During this mode the neutral (N) button
will flash continuously and your instrument
cluster will display N as the selected gear.
Exiting Stay in Neutral mode
To disable Stay in Neutral mode select
another gear. See the Putting the Vehicle
in Gear for instructions on how to do this.
Entering a Carwash
Note: Always put your vehicle in Stay in
Neutral mode when entering an automatic
car wash. Failure to do this could result in
vehicle damage not covered by warranty.
Drive (D)
The normal driving position for the best fuel
economy.
Sport (S)
Putting the vehicle in sport (S):
• Provides additional engine braking and
extends lower gear operation to enhance
performance for uphill climbs, hilly terrain
or mountainous areas. This will increase
engine RPM during engine braking
• Provides additional lower gear operation
through the automatic transmission shift
strategy
• Provides gear selection more quickly and
at higher engine speeds
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission
Your SelectShift Automatic transmission
gives you the ability to change gears
manually.
Paddle Shifters
With your vehicle in drive (D), the paddle
shifters provide temporary manual control.
They allow you the ability to shift gears
quickly, without taking your hands off the
steering wheel.
You can achieve extensive manual control
by pressing the sport (S) button.
• Pull the right paddle (+) to upshift.
• Pull the left paddle (–) to downshift.
E144821
Upshift to the recommended shift speeds
according to the following chart:
179
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Transmission
Upshifts when accelerating (recommended for best fuel economy)
mph (km/h)Gear Upshift
ToFrom
15 mph (24 km/h)21
25 mph (40 km/h)32
40 mph (64 km/h)43
45 mph (72 km/h)54
50 mph (80 km/h)65
The instrument cluster will display your
currently selected gear.
The transmission will automatically upshift if
your engine speed is too high or downshift
if your engine speed is too low.
Note: The system will stay in manual control
until you make another shift button selection.
For example, drive (D).
Brake-Shift Interlock Override
WARNING: Do not drive your vehicle
until you verify that the stoplamps are
working.
WARNING: When doing this procedure,
you need to take the transmission out of park
(P) which means your vehicle can roll freely.
To avoid unwanted vehicle movement,
always fully apply the parking brake prior to
doing this procedure. Use wheels chocks if
appropriate.
180
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Transmission
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully
released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
Note: See your authorized dealer as soon
as possible if this procedure is used.
Note: For some markets this feature is
disabled.
Note: This feature will only function if your
12-volt battery has power. If vehicle battery
voltage is not sufficient, an external 12-volt
power source (for example, jumper cables,
battery charger or jump pack) may be
required to function the interlock override
switch.
Use the brake-shift interlock override to
move your transmission from the park
position in the event of an electrical
malfunction. If your vehicle has a dead
battery, an external power source will be
required.
1. Apply the parking brake and turn your
ignition off before performing this
procedure.
E240975
2. Locate your brake-shift interlock access
slot. The slot is located near the center
console. The access slot does not have
a label.
Note: Make sure that you correctly identify
the access hole as not to damage the media
hub.
3. Using a tool, press and hold the brake
shift interlock switch. The shift buttons
on the instrument panel will flash when
your vehicle is in override mode.
4. With the override switch still held, press
the neutral button (N) to shift from park.
5. Release the override button.
6. Your vehicle will remain in Stay in Neutral
mode for wrecker towing purposes or
can be shifted to the desired gear and
driven (if possible).
7. Release the parking brake.
181
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Transmission
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning
This feature increases durability and provides
consistent shift feel over the life of your
vehicle. A new vehicle or transmission may
have firm or soft shifts. This operation will
not affect function or durability of your
transmission and is normal. Over time, the
adaptive learning process will fully update
transmission operation. Additionally, the
strategy must be relearned whenever the
battery is disconnected or a new battery is
installed.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow
Note: Do not rock your vehicle if your engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to your transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock your vehicle for more than
a minute or damage to your transmission
and tires may occur, or your engine may
overheat.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control, it
may be beneficial to disengage the
AdvanceTrac with Roll Stability Control
system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow,
you can help rock your vehicle out by shifting
between forward and reverse gears,
stopping between shifts in a steady pattern.
Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
182
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Transmission
USING ALL-WHEEL DRIVE
All-Wheel Drive (AWD) uses all four wheels
to power the vehicle. This increases traction,
enabling you to drive over terrain and road
conditions that a conventional two-wheel
drive vehicle cannot. The AWD system is
active all the time and requires no input from
the operator.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped with
Dynamic Torque Vectoring. This feature uses
all four wheels to power the vehicle and
independently controls the torque to each
rear wheel. In addition, the system has the
ability to over speed the outside rear wheel
in a turn. This increases traction and
handling performance, allowing the vehicle
to travel through road conditions and have
path following capability superior to
conventional two-wheel drive and AWD
vehicles. The Dynamic Torque Vectoring
system is active all the time and requires no
input from the operator.
Note: Your AWD vehicle is not intended for
off-road use. The AWD feature gives your
vehicle some limited off-road capabilities in
which driving surfaces are relatively level,
obstruction-free and otherwise similar to
normal on-road driving conditions. Operating
your vehicle under other than those
conditions could subject the vehicle to
excessive stress which might result in
damage which is not covered under your
warranty.
Note: When an AWD system fault is present,
the warning AWD Malfunction Service
Required displays in the information display.
The AWD system is not functioning correctly
and defaulted to front-wheel drive. When
this warning displays, have your vehicle
serviced at an authorized dealer.
Note: The AWD OFF message may also
appear in the information display if the AWD
system overheats and defaults to front-wheel
drive. This may occur if the vehicle is
operated in extreme conditions with
excessive wheel slip, such as deep sand.
To resume normal AWD function as soon as
possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location
and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes.
After the engine has been restarted and the
AWD system has adequately cooled, the
AWD OFF message will turn off and normal
AWD function returns. If the engine is not
stopped, the AWD OFF message turns off
when the system cools and normal AWD
function returns.
183
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
All-Wheel Drive Messages
Action / DescriptionAWD Messages
Displays when the system automatically disables to protect itself. This
may be caused by operating the vehicle with the compact tire installed,
if the system is overheating or if there is an issue with another vehicle
system preventing AWD operation. The system resumes normal
operation and clears this message after cycling the ignition on and
off and driving a short distance with the road tire re-installed, after
the system is allowed to cool or after the other vehicle system issues
are resolved.
AWD OFF
Displays in conjunction with the powertrain malfunction or reduced
power light when the system is not operating properly. If the message
stays on or continues to come on, contact your authorized dealer as
soon as possible.
AWD Malfunction Service Required
184
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Operating AWD Vehicles With Spare
or Mismatched Tires
WARNING: Only use replacement tires
and wheels that are the same size, load
index, speed rating and type (such as
P-metric versus LT-metric or all-season
versus all-terrain) as those originally provided
by Ford. The recommended tire and wheel
size may be found on either the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed to
either the door hinge pillar, door-latch post,
or the door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver’ s seating position), or
the Tire Label which is located on the B-Pillar
or edge of the driver’s door. If this
information is not found on these labels, then
you should contact your authorized dealer
as soon as possible. Use of any tire or wheel
not recommended by Ford can affect the
safety and performance of your vehicle,
which could result in an increased risk of loss
of vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death.
A spare tire of a different size other than the
tire provided should never be used. The
AWD system may disable automatically and
enter front-wheel drive only mode to protect
driveline components if a non-full sized tire
is installed. This condition may display an
AWD OFF message in the information
display. If there is an AWD OFF message in
the information display from using a non-full
sized spare tire, this indicator should turn off
after reinstalling the repaired or replaced
normal road tire and cycling the ignition off
and on. It is recommended to reinstall the
repaired or replaced road tire as soon as
possible.
Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front
and rear axles (for example, 17 inch low
profile tires on the front axle and 22 inch high
profile tires on the rear axle) could cause the
AWD system to stop functioning and default
to front-wheel drive or damage the AWD
system. However, the AWD system is
capable of tolerating any combination of new
and worn tires of the same original tire size.
For example, using 3 worn tread tires and 1
new tread tire all of the same original tire
size, can be tolerated by the AWD system.
Driving In Special Conditions With All-
Wheel Drive (AWD)
AWD vehicles are equipped for driving on
sand, snow, mud and rough roads and have
operating characteristics that are somewhat
different from conventional vehicles, both on
and off the highway.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use a low
gear when possible. Lower gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect overheating
of the engine.
Basic operating principles in special
conditions
• Drive slower in strong crosswinds which
can affect the normal steering
characteristics of your vehicle.
• Be extremely careful when driving on
pavement made slippery by loose sand,
water, gravel, snow or ice.
185
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
If Your Vehicle Goes Off the Edge of the
Pavement
• If your vehicle goes off the edge of the
pavement, slow down, but avoid severe
brake application, ease the vehicle back
onto the pavement only after reducing
your speed. Do not turn the steering
wheel too sharply while returning to the
road surface.
• It may be safer to stay on the apron or
shoulder of the road and slow down
gradually before returning to the
pavement. You may lose control if you
do not slow down or if you turn the
steering wheel too sharply or abruptly.
• It often may be less risky to strike small
objects, such as highway reflectors, with
minor damage to your vehicle rather than
attempt a sudden return to the pavement
which could cause the vehicle to slide
sideways out of control or rollover.
Remember, your safety and the safety of
others should be your primary concern.
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
WARNING: Always set the parking
brake fully and make sure you shift the
gearshift lever to park (P). Switch the ignition
off and remove the key whenever you leave
your vehicle.
WARNING: If the parking brake is fully
released, but the brake warning lamp
remains illuminated, the brakes may not be
working properly. Have your vehicle checked
as soon as possible.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels at
over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may fail and
injure a passenger or bystander.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle if the engine
is not at normal operating temperature or
damage to the transmission may occur.
Note: Do not rock the vehicle for more than
a few minutes or damage to the transmission
and tires may occur or the engine may
overheat.
If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it
may be rocked out by shifting between
forward and reverse gears, stopping
between shifts, in a steady pattern. Press
lightly on the accelerator in each gear.
If your vehicle is equipped with
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™, it
may be beneficial to disengage the
AdvanceTrac® with Roll Stability Control™
system while attempting to rock the vehicle.
Emergency Maneuvers
• In an unavoidable emergency situation
where a sudden sharp turn must be
made, remember to avoid "over-driving"
your vehicle (that is, turn the steering
wheel only as rapidly and as far as
required to avoid the emergency).
Excessive steering will result in less
vehicle control, not more. Additionally,
smooth variations of the accelerator
and/or brake pedal pressure should be
utilized if changes in vehicle speed are
called for. Avoid abrupt steering,
186
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
acceleration or braking which could result
in an increased risk of loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and/or personal
injury. Use all available road surface to
return the vehicle to a safe direction of
travel.
• In the event of an emergency stop, avoid
skidding the tires and do not attempt any
sharp steering wheel movements.
• If the vehicle goes from one type of
surface to another (that is, from concrete
to gravel) there will be a change in the
way the vehicle responds to a maneuver
(steering, acceleration or braking). Again,
avoid these abrupt inputs.
Sand
Most of the time traction control improves
tire traction by managing wheel slip through
Brake, Engine, and AWD calibrations.
However, during low speed driving, disabling
traction control in deep sand can help keep
the wheels moving to maintain vehicle
momentum.
When driving over sand, try to keep all four
wheels on the most solid area of the trail.
Avoid reducing the tire pressures but shift
to a lower gear and drive steadily through
the terrain. Apply the accelerator slowly and
avoid spinning the wheels.
Do not drive your vehicle in deep sand for
an extended period of time. This could cause
the AWD system to overheat and default to
front-wheel drive. If this occurs, an AWD OFF
message displays in the information display.
To resume normal AWD function as soon as
possible, stop the vehicle in a safe location
and stop the engine for at least 10 minutes.
After the engine has been restarted and the
AWD system has adequately cooled, the
AWD OFF message turns off and normal
AWD function returns. In the event the
engine is not stopped, the AWD OFF
message turns off when the system cools
and normal AWD function returns.
When driving at slow speeds in deep sand
under high outside temperatures, use L (Low)
gear when possible. L (Low) gear operation
will maximize the engine and transmission
cooling capability.
Under severe operating conditions, the A/C
may cycle on and off to protect overheating
of the engine.
Avoid excessive speed because vehicle
momentum can work against you and cause
the vehicle to become stuck to the point that
assistance may be required from another
vehicle. Remember, you may be able to back
out the way you came if you proceed with
caution.
Mud and Water
If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. Traction or brake capability may be
limited.
When driving through water, determine the
depth; avoid water higher than the bottom
of the wheel rims (for cars) or the bottom of
the hubs (for trucks) (if possible) and proceed
slowly. If the ignition system gets wet, the
vehicle may stall.
187
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Once through water, always try the brakes.
Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as
effectively as dry brakes. Drying can be
improved by moving your vehicle slowly
while applying light pressure on the brake
pedal.
Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle
speed or direction when you are driving in
mud. Even AWD vehicles can lose traction
in slick mud. As when you are driving over
sand, apply the accelerator slowly and avoid
spinning your wheels. If the vehicle does
slide, steer in the direction of the slide until
you regain control of the vehicle.
After driving through mud, clean off residue
stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires. Excess
mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts
causes an imbalance that could damage
drive components.
Note: Driving through deep water may
damage the transmission.
If the front or rear axle is submerged in water,
have the power transfer unit (PTU) or rear
axle serviced by an authorized dealer.
Driving on Hilly or Sloping Terrain
Note: Avoid driving crosswise or turning on
steep slopes or hills. A danger lies in losing
traction, slipping sideways and possibly
rolling over. Whenever driving on a hill,
determine beforehand the route you will use.
Do not drive over the crest of a hill without
seeing what conditions are on the other side.
Do not drive in reverse over a hill without
the aid of an observer.
Although natural obstacles may make it
necessary to travel diagonally up or down a
hill or steep incline, you should always try to
drive straight up or straight down.
When climbing a steep slope or hill, start in
a lower gear rather than downshifting to a
lower gear from a higher gear once the
ascent has started. This reduces strain on
the engine and the possibility of stalling.
If you do stall out, do not try to turnaround
because you might roll over. It is better to
back down to a safe location.
Apply just enough power to the wheels to
climb the hill. Too much power will cause the
tires to slip, spin or lose traction, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
E143949
Descend a hill in the same gear you would
use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive
brake application and brake overheating. Do
not descend in neutral; instead, disengage
overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear.
When descending a steep hill, avoid sudden
hard braking as you could lose control. The
front wheels have to be turning in order to
steer the vehicle.
188
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, therefore
apply the brakes steadily. Do not “pump” the
brakes.
Driving on Snow and Ice
WARNING: If you are driving in slippery
conditions that require tire chains or cables,
then it is critical that you drive cautiously.
Keep speeds down, allow for longer stopping
distances and avoid aggressive steering to
reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle
control which can lead to serious injury or
death. If the rear end of your vehicle slides
while cornering, steer in the direction of the
slide until you regain control of your vehicle.
Note: Your vehicle may have original
equipment tires designed to optimize the
performance of your vehicle in dry or wet
summer road conditions. If your vehicle is
equipped with such tires, we recommend
using a dedicated set (all 4 tires) of winter
tires in snow and ice conditions. Do not mix
winter tires and performance tires between
axles or degraded traction and handling
characteristics could result.
Note: Excessive tire slippage can cause
driveline damage.
AWD vehicles have advantages over
two-wheel drive (2WD) vehicles in snow and
ice but can skid like any other vehicle.
Should you start to slide while driving on
snowy or icy roads, turn the steering wheel
in the direction of the slide until you regain
control.
189
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
E223901
A
B
Direction of travel.A
Steering wheel rotation.B
Avoid sudden applications of power and
quick changes of direction on snow and ice.
Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily
when starting from a full stop.
Avoid sudden braking as well. Although an
AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a
two-wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice, it
won’t stop any faster, because as in other
vehicles, braking occurs at all four wheels.
Do not become overconfident as to road
conditions.
Make sure you allow sufficient distance
between you and other vehicles for stopping.
Drive slower than usual and consider using
one of the lower gears. In emergency
stopping situations, apply the brake steadily.
Since your vehicle is equipped with a four
wheel (ABS), do not “pump” the brakes. See
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock Brakes
(page 193).
Maintenance and Modifications
The suspension and steering systems on
your vehicle have been designed and tested
to provide predictable performance whether
loaded or empty and durable load carrying
capability. For this reason, Ford Motor
Company strongly recommends that you do
not make modifications such as adding or
removing parts (such as lowering kits or
stabilizer bars) or by using replacement parts
not equivalent to the original factory
equipment.
Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the
center of gravity can make it more likely the
vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of
control. Ford Motor Company recommends
that caution be used with any vehicle
equipped with a high load or device (such
as ladder or luggage racks).
190
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may
void the warranty, increase your repair cost,
reduce vehicle performance and operational
capabilities and adversely affect driver and
passenger safety. Frequent inspection of
vehicle chassis components is recommended
if the vehicle is subjected to off-highway
usage.
191
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
All-Wheel Drive (If Equipped)
GENERAL INFORMATION
Note: Occasional brake noise is normal. If
a metal-to-metal, continuous grinding or
continuous squeal sound is present, the
brake linings may be worn-out. Have the
system checked by an authorized dealer. If
your vehicle has continuous vibration or
shudder in the steering wheel while braking,
have it checked by an authorized dealer.
Note: Brake dust may accumulate on the
wheels, even under normal driving
conditions. Some dust is inevitable as the
brakes wear and does not contribute to
brake noise. See Cleaning the Wheels
(page 326).
Note: Depending on applicable laws and
regulations in the country for which your
vehicle was originally built, your brake lamps
may flash during heavy braking. Following
this, your hazard lights may also flash when
your vehicle comes to a stop.
E138644
See Warning Lamps and
Indicators (page 105).
Wet brakes result in reduced braking
efficiency. Gently press the brake pedal a
few times when driving from a car wash or
standing water to dry the brakes.
Brake Over Accelerator
In the event the accelerator pedal becomes
stuck or entrapped, apply steady and firm
pressure to the brake pedal to slow the
vehicle and reduce engine power. If you
experience this condition, apply the brakes
and bring your vehicle to a safe stop. Move
the transmission to park (P), switch the
engine off and apply the parking brake.
Inspect the accelerator pedal for any
interference. If none are found and the
condition persists, have your vehicle towed
to the nearest authorized dealer.
Brake Assist
Brake assist detects when you brake rapidly
by measuring the rate at which you press the
brake pedal. It provides maximum braking
efficiency as long as you press the pedal,
and can reduce stopping distances in critical
situations.
Anti-lock Brake System
This system helps you maintain steering
control during emergency stops by keeping
the brakes from locking.
This lamp momentarily illuminates
when you switch the ignition on. If
the light does not illuminate during
start up, remains on or flashes, the system
may be disabled. Have the system checked
by an authorized dealer. If the anti-lock brake
system is disabled, normal braking is still
effective.
E138644
If the brake warning lamp
illuminates when you release the
parking brake, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer. It also
illuminates momentarily when you switch the
ignition on to confirm the lamp is functional.
If it does not illuminate when you switch the
ignition on or begins to flash at any time,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
192
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Brakes
HINTS ON DRIVING WITH ANTI-
LOCK BRAKES
The anti-lock braking system does not
eliminate the risks when:
• You drive too closely to the vehicle in
front of you.
• Your vehicle is hydroplaning.
• You take corners too fast.
• The road surface is poor.
Note: If the system activates, the brake
pedal may pulse and may travel further.
Maintain pressure on the brake pedal. You
may also hear a noise from the system. This
is normal.
ELECTRIC PARKING BRAKE
WARNING: Always fully apply the
parking brake and make sure you shift into
park (P). Failure to follow this instruction
could result in personal injury or death.
WARNING: If you drive extended
distances with the parking brake applied,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
WARNING: The electric parking brake
does not operate if the vehicle battery is
running out of charge.
Your vehicle has an electric parking brake.
You operate it with a switch instead of a
lever. The switch is on the center console or
to the left-hand side of the steering wheel,
on the lower part of the instrument panel.
Note: The electric parking brake makes
noises during operation. This is normal.
Applying the Electric Parking Brake
E267156
Pull the switch upward.
E270480
The red warning lamp flashes
during operation and illuminates
when the parking brake is applied.
Note: It remains illuminated for a short
period of time after you switch the ignition
off.
If it continues to flash or does not illuminate,
the system has malfunctioned. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Note: You can apply the electric parking
brake when the ignition is off.
Note: The electric parking brake could
automatically apply when you shift into park
(P). See Transmission (page 177).
Applying the Electric Parking Brake in an
Emergency
Note: Do not apply the electric parking brake
when your vehicle is moving, except in an
emergency. If you repeatedly use the electric
parking brake to slow or stop your vehicle,
you could cause damage to the brake
system.
You can use the electric parking brake to
slow or stop your vehicle in an emergency.
193
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Brakes
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold it.
E270480
The red warning lamp illuminates,
a tone sounds and the stoplamps
turn on.
The electric parking brake continues to slow
your vehicle down unless you release the
switch.
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake
Switch the ignition on.
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Push the switch downward.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the system
has malfunctioned. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible.
Pulling Away on a Hill When Towing a
Trailer
Press and hold the brake pedal.
E267156
Pull the switch upward and hold it.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal until engine has
developed sufficient torque to prevent your
vehicle from rolling down the hill.
E267156
Release the switch and pull away
in a normal manner.
Automatically Releasing the Electric
Parking Brake
Close the driver door.
Shift into gear.
Press the accelerator pedal and pull away in
a normal manner.
E270480
The red warning lamp turns off.
If it remains illuminated or flashes, the electric
parking brake has not released. Manually
release the parking brake.
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if
the Vehicle Battery is Running Out of
Charge
Connect a booster battery to the vehicle
battery to release the electric parking brake
if the vehicle battery is running out of charge.
See Jump Starting the Vehicle (page 264).
AUTO HOLD
WARNING: The system does not
replace the parking brake. When you leave
your vehicle, always apply the parking brake.
194
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Brakes
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system will turn off if
a malfunction is apparent. Failure to take
care may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
Auto Hold uses your vehicle's brakes to hold
your vehicle at a stop once your vehicle has
reached a standstill condition. For example,
Auto Hold can assist you while stopping at
traffic lights or while in traffic jams by holding
the brake pressure for you once you bring
your vehicle to a stop.
Switch Auto Hold off during vehicle or trailer
towing.
Note: In case of a malfunction in the system
while Auto Hold actively holds the vehicle
(for example, low power supply), a message
appears in the information display asking
you to press the brake pedal. If you see this
message, press the brake pedal
immediately.
Note: Auto Hold only activates if the system
recognizes it is applying enough brake
pressure. On a steep hill or incline, you may
need to make sure the brake pedal is
pressed sufficiently to activate the Auto Hold
system.
Note: In some cases, Auto Hold might hand
over to the parking brake. When the parking
brake automatically applies, the red brake
lamp appears. This is normal. When you
press the accelerator pedal, the drive away
release feature automatically releases the
parking brake.
Note: Auto Hold works on all road grades.
E227185
Press the Auto Hold button to switch the
system on and off. The Auto Hold indicator
light illuminates in the Auto Hold button
when the system is on.
Note: You can only switch Auto Hold on if
you close the door and fasten your seatbelt.
195
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Brakes
Note: Auto Hold is last remembered after
ignition. Auto Hold also suppresses while in
Reverse (R).
When Auto Hold is off, your vehicle behaves
the same as a vehicle without Auto Hold.
There is an Auto Hold indicator lamp in the
instrument cluster that has two modes, active
and unavailable:
E197933
The Auto Hold (ACTIVE) indicator
light illuminates in the information
display when the system holds
your vehicle stationary. When in active mode,
press the brake pedal and the Auto Hold
button to switch Auto Hold off.
E197934
The Auto Hold (UNAVAILABLE)
indicator light illuminates in the
information display when the
system is on but unavailable to hold your
vehicle (for example, during Active Park
Assist, Stay in Neutral Mode, or when you
do not fasten your seatbelt or close the
door).
Note: Make sure you switch off Auto Hold
or use the Stay in Neutral mode before you
enter a car wash. See Automatic
Transmission (page 177).
Using Auto Hold
1. Bring your vehicle to a stop by pressing
the brake pedal. After coming to a stop,
the green Auto Hold (ACTIVE) indicator
lamp illuminates in the information
display.
2. Release the brake pedal. The Auto Hold
(ACTIVE) indicator light remains
illuminated in the information display and
Auto Hold will hold your vehicle at a stop.
3. When you press the accelerator pedal,
Auto Hold releases the brakes and you
will be able to drive off. Once you drive
off, the green Auto Hold (ACTIVE)
indicator no longer illuminates in the
information display.
Note: The Stop/Start system (if equipped)
may stop the engine when you press the
brake pedal. If this occurs, it will restart once
you press the accelerator pedal. Auto Hold
still holds your vehicle at a standstill with the
engine off.
196
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Brakes
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
The traction control system helps avoid drive
wheel spin and loss of traction.
If your vehicle begins to slide, the system
applies the brakes to individual wheels and,
when needed, reduces engine power at the
same time. If the wheels spin when
accelerating on slippery or loose surfaces,
the system reduces engine power in order
to increase traction.
USING TRACTION CONTROL
WARNING: The stability and traction
control light illuminates steadily if the system
detects a failure. Make sure you did not
manually disable the traction control system
using the information display controls or the
switch. If the stability control and traction
control light is still illuminating steadily, have
the system serviced by an authorized dealer
immediately. Operating your vehicle with the
traction control disabled could lead to an
increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If your vehicle is stuck in mud or snow,
switching traction control off may be
beneficial as this allows the wheels to spin.
Note: When you switch traction control off,
stability control remains fully active.
Switching the System Off
When you switch the system off or on, a
message appears in the information display
showing system status.
You can switch the system off by either using
the information display controls or the switch.
Using the Information Display Controls
You can switch this feature off or on in the
information display. See General Information
(page 110).
Using a Switch (If Equipped)
Use the traction control switch on the
instrument panel to switch the system off or
on.
System Indicator Lights and Messages
E138639
The stability and traction control
light:
• Temporarily illuminates on engine
start-up.
• Flashes when a driving condition
activates either of the systems.
• Illuminates if a problem occurs in either
of the systems.
E130458
The stability and traction control
off light temporarily illuminates on
engine start-up and stays on when
you switch the traction control system off.
197
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Traction Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: Vehicle modifications
involving braking system, aftermarket roof
racks, suspension, steering system, tire
construction and wheel and tire size may
change the handling characteristics of your
vehicle and may adversely affect the
performance of the electronic stability control
system. In addition, installing any stereo
loudspeakers may interfere with and
adversely affect the electronic stability
control system. Install any aftermarket stereo
loudspeaker as far as possible from the front
center console, the tunnel, and the front
seats in order to minimize the risk of
interfering with the electronic stability control
sensors. Reducing the effectiveness of the
electronic stability control system could lead
to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control,
vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.
WARNING: Remember that even
advanced technology cannot defy the laws
of physics. It’s always possible to lose control
of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input
for the conditions. Aggressive driving on any
road condition can cause you to lose control
of your vehicle increasing the risk of personal
injury or property damage. Activation of the
electronic stability control system is an
indication that at least some of the tires have
exceeded their ability to grip the road; this
could reduce the operator’s ability to control
the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of
vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal
injury and death. If your electronic stability
control system activates, SLOW DOWN.
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
If a fault occurs in either the stability control
or the traction control system, you may
experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
illuminates steadily.
• The stability control and traction control
systems do not enhance your vehicle's
ability to maintain traction of the wheels.
If a driving condition activates either the
stability control or the traction control system
you may experience the following conditions:
• The stability and traction control light
flashes.
• Your vehicle slows down.
• Reduced engine power.
• A vibration in the brake pedal.
• The brake pedal is stiffer than usual.
• If the driving condition is severe and your
foot is not on the brake, the brake pedal
may move as the system applies higher
brake force.
The stability control system has several
features built into it to help you maintain
control of your vehicle:
198
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Stability Control
Electronic Stability Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to prevent skids or lateral slides by applying
brakes to one or more of the wheels
individually and, if necessary, reducing
engine power.
Traction Control
The system enhances your vehicle’s ability
to maintain traction of the wheels by
detecting and controlling wheel spin. See
Using Traction Control (page 197).
E72903
A
A
A
B
B
B
B
Vehicle without stability control
skidding off its intended route.
A
Vehicle with stability control
maintaining control on a slippery
surface.
B
USING STABILITY CONTROL
The system automatically turns on each time
you switch the ignition on.
The electronic stability control portion of the
system disables when the transmission is in
reverse (R) or, on some models, if you press
and hold the stability control button for more
than five seconds when you apply the brakes
and the vehicle is at a stop.
You can switch the traction control system
off or on independently.
199
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Stability Control
Stability Control and Traction Control Features
Collision Warning
with Brake Support
Traction Control
System
Electronic Stability
Control
Stability Control Off
Light
ModeButton Functions
EnabledEnabledEnabledOn during bulb checkStability and traction
control fully enabled
Default at start-up
EnabledDisabledEnabledOnTraction control offButton pressed
momentarily
DisabledEnabled with higher
threshold target
Enabled with higher
threshold target
OnSport mode (if
equipped)
Button pressed twice
rapidly
DisabledDisabledDisabledOnStability and traction
control fully disabled
Button pressed and
held more than five
seconds
EnabledEnabledEnabledOffStability and traction
control fully enabled
Button pressed again
after deactivation
Note: Stability control fully off can only occur
when you put the Active Suspension System
(CCD) in sport mode. If you are not in sport
mode or change from sport mode to another
mode, the stability control enables.
Note: Do not use Sport mode on public
roadways.
Your vehicle, if equipped with sport mode
allows you to reduce normal stability and
traction control system intervention and
provide a more spirited driving experience.
To enter sport mode, press the stability
control button twice rapidly. A message
appears in the information display that the
system is now in sport mode.
200
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Stability Control
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: To help avoid personal
injury, always use caution when in reverse
(R) and when using the sensing system.
WARNING: The system may not detect
objects with surfaces that absorb reflection.
Always drive with due care and attention.
Failure to take care may result in a crash.
WARNING: Traffic control systems,
inclement weather, air brakes, external
motors and fans may affect the correct
operation of the sensing system.This may
cause reduced performance or false alerts.
WARNING: The system may not detect
small or moving objects, particularly those
close to the ground.
Note: If your vehicle is equipped with
MyKey™, the sensing system cannot be
turned off when a MyKey™ is present. See
Principle of Operation (page 62).
Note: Keep the sensors, located on the
bumper or fascia, free from snow, ice and
large accumulations of dirt. If the sensors
are covered, the system’s accuracy can be
affected. Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: If your vehicle sustains damage to the
bumper or fascia, leaving it misaligned or
bent, the sensing zone may be altered
causing inaccurate measurement of
obstacles or false alerts.
Note: Certain add-on devices installed
around the bumper or fascia may create
false alerts. For example, large trailer
hitches, bike or surfboard racks, license plate
brackets, bumper covers or any other device
that may block the normal detection zone
of the system. Remove the add-on device to
prevent false alerts.
Note: When a trailer is connected to your
vehicle, the rear parking aid may detect the
trailer and therefore provide an alert. Disable
the rear parking aid when a trailer is
connected to prevent the alert.
The sensing system warns the driver of
obstacles within a certain range of your
vehicle. The system turns on automatically
whenever you switch the ignition on.
The system can be switched off through the
information display menu or from the pop-up
message that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 110).
If a fault is present in the system, a warning
message appears in the information display.
See Information Messages (page 116).
REAR PARKING AID
The rear sensors are only active when the
transmission is in reverse (R). As your vehicle
moves closer to the obstacle, the rate of the
audible warning increases. When the
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away, the
warning sounds continuously. If the system
detects a stationary or receding object
farther than 12 in (30 cm) from the corners of
the bumper, the tone sounds for only three
seconds. Once the system detects an object
approaching, the warning sounds again.
201
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
E130178
Coverage area of up to 6 ft (1.8 m) from the
rear bumper. There may be decreased
coverage area at the outer corners of the
bumper.
The system detects certain objects while the
transmission is in reverse (R) :
• Your vehicle is moving toward a
stationary object at a speed of 3 mph
(5 km/h) or less.
• Your vehicle is not moving, but a moving
object is approaching the rear of your
vehicle at a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) or
less.
• Your vehicle is moving at a speed of less
than 3 mph (5 km/h) and a moving object
is approaching the rear of your vehicle
at a speed of less than 3 mph (5 km/h).
The system provides audio warnings only
when your vehicle is moving or when your
vehicle is stationary and the detected
obstacle is less than 12 in (30 cm) away from
the bumper.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The distance indicator displays when the
transmission is in reverse (R).
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks illuminate
and move towards the vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed out.
FRONT PARKING AID (If Equipped)
The front sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P) and your vehicle is traveling at low
speed.
E187330
202
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Coverage area of up to 28 in (70 cm) from
the front bumper. The coverage area
decreases at the outer corners.
When your vehicle approaches an object, a
warning tone sounds. When your vehicle
moves closer to an object, the warning tone
repeat rate increases. The warning tone
sounds continuously when an object is 12 in
(30 cm) or less from the front bumper.
You can switch the system off through the
information display menu or from the pop-up
message that appears once you shift the
transmission into reverse (R). See General
Information (page 110). If your vehicle has a
parking aid button, you can switch the
system off by pressing the button.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
The indicator displays:
• As the distance to the obstacle
decreases the indicator blocks illuminate
and move towards the vehicle icon.
• If there is no obstacle detected, the
distance indicator blocks are grayed out.
If the transmission is in reverse (R), the front
sensing system provides audio warnings
when your vehicle is moving and the
detected obstacle is moving towards your
vehicle. Once the vehicle is stationary, the
audio warning will be stopped after 2
seconds. Visual indication is always present
in reverse (R).
If the transmission is in drive (D) or any other
forward gear (for example, low (L), sport (S)
or any forward gear in a manual
transmission), the front sensing system
provides audio and visual warnings when
your vehicle is moving below a speed of
5 mph (8 km/h) and an obstacle is located
inside the detection area. Once the vehicle
is stationary, the audio warning will be
stopped after 2 seconds and the visual
indication stops after 4 seconds. If the
obstacles detected are within 12 in (30 cm),
the visual indication remains on.
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the
system provides visual indication only when
your vehicle is moving at 5 mph (8 km/h) or
below and an obstacle is located inside the
detection area. Once your vehicle is
stationary, the visual indication will stop after
4 seconds.
SIDE SENSING SYSTEM
The side sensing system uses the front and
rear side sensors to detect and map
obstacles within the vehicle's driving path,
located near the sides of your vehicle. The
side sensors are active when the
transmission is in any position other than
park (P).
203
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Note: Obstacles that enter the side detection
area without being detected and mapped
by the front or rear side sensors will not be
detected.
E187810
Coverage area is up to 24 in (60 cm) from
the sides of your vehicle.
When the system detects an object close to
the side of your vehicle, an audible warning
sounds. As your vehicle moves closer to
obstacles within the driving path of your
vehicle, the rate of the audible warning
increases.
Obstacle Distance Indicator (If Equipped)
E190459
The system provides obstacle distance
indication through the information display.
As the distance to the obstacle decreases,
the indicator blocks illuminate and move
toward the vehicle icon. If there is no
obstacle detected, the distance indicator
blocks show greyed out.
When you shift to reverse (R), the side
sensing system provides audible warnings
when your vehicle is moving and obstacles
are detected within 24 in (60 cm) and are
inside the driving path of your vehicle. When
you stop your vehicle the audible warning
stops after two seconds.
Note: Visual distance indication remains on
when the transmission is in reverse (R).
When you shift to drive (D) or any other
forward gear, for example, low (L), sport (S)
or any forward gear in manual transmission,
the side sensing system provides audible
and visual distance warnings when your
vehicle is moving below a speed of 5 mph
(8 km/h) and obstacles are detected within
24 in (60 cm) and are inside the driving path
of your vehicle. Once your vehicle reaches
a standstill condition, the audible warning
stops after two seconds and visual indication
stops after four seconds.
204
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
If the transmission is in neutral (N), the side
sensing system provides visual distance
indication only when your vehicle is moving
below a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h) and there
is a front or rear parking aid obstacle
detected, and the side obstacle is within
24 in (60 cm) from the side of your vehicle.
When you stop your vehicle the visual
distance indication stops after four seconds.
If the side sensing system is not available,
the side distance indicator blocks do not
appear.
The side sensing system is not available
under the following condition:
• If you switch the traction control system
off.
The side sensing system may not be
available until you have driven approximately
the length of your vehicle in order for the
system to reinitialize if:
• You switch the ignition on, off and back
on.
• Your vehicle remains stationary for over
two minutes.
• The anti-lock brake system is activated.
• The traction control system is activated.
• When the steering wheel angle
information is not available, the side
sensing system is not available. The
vehicle must be driven at least 492 ft
(150 m) above 19 mph (30 km/h) to
recover the steering wheel angle
information.
ACTIVE PARK ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNING: You must remain in your
vehicle when the system turns on. At all
times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: The sensors may not detect
objects in heavy rain or other conditions that
cause interference.
WARNING: Active park assist does not
apply the brakes under any circumstances.
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover up the sensors.
Note: Do not clean the sensors with sharp
objects.
Note: The sensors may not detect objects
with surfaces that absorb ultrasonic waves.
The sensors may falsely detect objects due
to ultrasonic interference caused by
motorcycle exhausts, truck air brakes or
horns, for example.
Note: If you change any tires, the system
must recalibrate and may not correctly
operate for a short time.
205
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Active park assist is a multi-step process and
may require you to shift the transmission
multiple times. Follow the onscreen
instructions until the parking maneuver is
complete.
If you are uncomfortable with the proximity
to any vehicle or object, you may choose to
override the system by grabbing the steering
wheel, or by taking full control of your vehicle
after pressing the active park assist button.
Keep your hands, hair, clothing and any
loose items clear of the steering wheel when
using active park assist.
The sensors are on the front and rear
bumpers.
The system may not correctly operate in any
of the following conditions:
• You use a spare tire or a tire that is
significantly worn more than the other
tires.
• One or more tires are incorrectly inflated.
• You try to park on a tight curve.
• Something passes between the front
bumper and the parking space. For
example, a pedestrian or cyclist.
• The edge of the neighboring parked
vehicle is high off the ground. For
example, a bus, tow truck or flatbed
truck.
• The weather conditions are poor. For
example, during heavy rain, snow, fog,
high humidity and high temperatures.
Do not use the system if:
• You have attached an add-on accessory
close to the sensors on the front or rear
of your vehicle. For example, a bike rack
or trailer.
• You have attached an overhanging
object to the roof. For example, a
surfboard.
• The front bumper, rear bumper or the
side sensors are damaged.
• The correct tire size is not in use on your
vehicle. For example, a mini-spare tire.
Using Active Park Assist
Selecting an Active Park Assist Mode
E146186
Press the button once to activate
parallel parking. Press the button
a second time to activate
perpendicular parking. If you press the
button again the system switches off.
If your vehicle is parked and after you switch
the ignition on, you can use the information
display to toggle through the modes. Press
the button to switch the system on and open
the system menu in the information display.
Note: If your vehicle is parked, the default
mode is parallel park out assist. However, if
you did not use active park assist to parallel
park your vehicle, use the information
display to select park out assist.
Note: You can repeatedly press the active
park assist button to toggle through the
modes only after moving your vehicle
approximately 33 ft (10 m).
206
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
To toggle through the modes, use the
buttons on the information display to select
the following:
• Parallel parking.
• Perpendicular parking.
• Parallel park out assist.
• Switch the system off.
Note: There is no time limit for toggling
through the modes.
Parallel Parking
The system detects available parallel parking
spaces and steers your vehicle into the
space. You control the accelerator, gearshift
and brakes. The system visually and audibly
guides you into a parallel parking space.
E146186
Press the button once to search
for a parking space.
Note: You can also switch the system on
after you have already driven partially or
completely past a parking space. Press the
active park assist button and the system
informs you if you have recently passed a
suitable parking space.
When the vehicle speed is less than 22 mph
(35 km/h), the system scans both sides of
your vehicle for an available parking space.
A message and a graphic appear in the
information display to indicate the system is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator lever to search for a
parking space on the driver or passenger
side of your vehicle.
Note: The system scans both sides of your
vehicle and offers parking spaces one side
at a time if you do not use the direction
indicator.
Note: The system defaults to the passenger
side if you do not use the direction indicator.
E130107
Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)
and parallel to the other parked vehicles
when searching for a parking space.
Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft
(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away from
other parked vehicles, the system may not
be able to detect an available parking
space.
When the system detects a suitable space,
a message displays and a tone sounds. Stop
your vehicle and follow the onscreen
instructions. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may have to move forward a
short distance before the system is ready to
park.
Note: You must observe that the space the
system selects remains clear of obstructions
at all times during the maneuver.
Note: The system always offers the last
parking space it detects. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces when you
are driving, it offers the last one.
Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 22 mph (35 km/h), the system
shows a message to instruct you to reduce
the vehicle speed.
207
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Automatically Steering into a Parallel
Parking Space
When you shift into reverse (R), with your
hands off the steering wheel and nothing
obstructing its movement, your vehicle steers
itself into the space. The system displays
instructions to move your vehicle backward
and forward in the space.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you interrupt
the maneuver, or the system switches off,
you must take full control of your vehicle.
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct you
to stop your vehicle. The system may not
provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.
E130108
When you believe your vehicle is correctly
parked, or a solid tone sounds and an
information message appears, bring your
vehicle to a complete stop.
When the Active Park Assist maneuver is
complete, a tone sounds and an information
message appears.
Note: You are responsible for checking how
your vehicle is parked and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
Deactivating Active Park Assist
You can manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the Active Park Assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above 22 mph (35 km/h) for 30
seconds when searching for a parking
space.
• Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h).
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during an
active maneuver.
• Switching the traction control system off.
Certain vehicle conditions may also
deactivate the system, for example:
• The traction control system activates or
fails.
• The anti-lock brake system activates or
fails.
If the system malfunctions, a message
appears and a tone sounds. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Perpendicular Parking
The system detects available perpendicular
parking spaces and steers your vehicle into
the space. You control the accelerator,
gearshift and brakes. The system visually
and audibly guides you into a perpendicular
parking space.
E146186
Press the button twice to search
for a parking space.
208
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
When the vehicle speed is less than 19 mph
(30 km/h), the system scans both sides of
your vehicle for an available parking space.
A message and a graphic appear in the
information display to indicate the system is
searching for a parking space. Use the
direction indicator lever to search for a
parking space on the driver or passenger
side of your vehicle.
Note: The system scans both sides of your
vehicle and offers parking spaces one side
at a time if you do not use the direction
indicator.
Note: The system defaults to the passenger
side if you do not use the direction indicator.
E186193
Drive your vehicle approximately 3 ft (1 m)
and perpendicular to the other parked
vehicles when searching for a parking space.
Note: If you drive your vehicle less than 2 ft
(0.5 m) or greater than 5 ft (1.5 m) away from
other parked vehicles, the system may not
be able to detect an available parking
space.
When the system detects a suitable space,
a message displays and a tone sounds. Stop
your vehicle and follow the onscreen
instructions. If your vehicle is moving very
slowly, you may have to move forward a
short distance before the system is ready to
park.
Note: You must observe that the space the
system selects remains clear of obstructions
at all times during the maneuver.
Note: The system always offers the last
detected parking space. For example, if your
vehicle detects multiple spaces when you
are driving, it offers the last one.
Note: If the vehicle speed is greater than
approximately 19 mph (30 km/h), the system
shows a message to instruct you to reduce
the vehicle speed.
Automatically Steering into a Perpendicular
Parking Space
When you shift into reverse (R), with your
hands off the steering wheel and nothing
obstructing its movement, your vehicle steers
itself into the space. The system displays
instructions to move your vehicle backward
and forward in the space.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you interrupt
the maneuver, or the system switches off,
you must take full control of your vehicle.
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct you
to stop your vehicle. The system may not
provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.
209
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
E186191
When you believe your vehicle is correctly
parked, or a solid tone sounds and an
information message appears, bring your
vehicle to a complete stop.
When the active park assist maneuver is
complete, a tone sounds and a message
appears.
Note: You are responsible for checking how
your vehicle is parked and making any
necessary corrections before leaving your
vehicle.
Deactivating Active Park Assist
You can manually deactivate the system by:
• Pressing the Active Park Assist button
during an active maneuver.
• Grabbing the steering wheel during an
active maneuver.
• Driving above 19 mph (30 km/h) for 30
seconds when searching for a parking
space.
• Driving above 31 mph (50 km/h).
• Driving above 6 mph (9 km/h) during an
active maneuver.
• Switching the traction control system off.
Certain vehicle conditions may also
deactivate the system, for example:
• The traction control system activates or
fails.
• The anti-lock brake system activates or
fails.
If the system malfunctions, a message
appears and a tone sounds. Have your
vehicle checked as soon as possible.
Parallel Park Out Assist
The system steers your vehicle out of a
parallel parking space. You control the
accelerator, gearshift and brakes. The system
visually and audibly guides you out of a
parallel parking space.
Note: This system is not intended to assist
when exiting a perpendicular parking space.
E146186
Press the button once when your
vehicle is stationary in a parallel
parking space.
Note: If you did not use active park assist to
parallel park your vehicle, pressing the
button once selects parallel park. You must
use the information display to select park
out assist.
The system displays a message instructing
you to switch a direction indicator on. Use
the direction indicator to select which side
of your vehicle you want to exit the parking
space. The system displays instructions to
move your vehicle backward and forward in
the space.
210
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Note: If the system detects an object is very
close to your vehicle and it may be unsafe
to continue the maneuver, it may instruct you
to stop your vehicle. The system may not
provide any further instruction. Steering
assistance continues to operate but you
must decide if it is safe to continue the
maneuver.
E188012
After the system directs your vehicle to a
position where you can exit the parking
space in a forward movement, a message
appears instructing you to take full control
of your vehicle. Generally, hand-over is when
your vehicle is still inside the parking space.
Note: Parallel Park Out Assist may not be
available when the clearance to the front or
the rear of your vehicle is too small.
Note: If the vehicle speed exceeds
approximately 6 mph (9 km/h), you interrupt
the maneuver, or the system switches off,
you must take full control of your vehicle.
Note: You are responsible for controlling
your vehicle and making sure the path is
clear prior to pulling into traffic.
Troubleshooting
Possible CauseSymptom
You may have switched the traction control off.The system does not search for a parking space.
The transmission is in reverse (R). Your vehicle must be moving forward to be able to
detect a parking space.
The sensors may be blocked. For example, snow, ice or dirt buildup. Blocked sensors
can affect how the system functions.
The system does not offer a parking space.
There is not enough room in the parking space for your vehicle to safely park.
There is not enough space for the parking maneuver on the opposite side of the parking
space.
211
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Possible CauseSymptom
The parking space is more than 5 ft (1.5 m) or less than 2 ft (0.5 m) away.
The vehicle speed is greater than 22 mph (35 km/h) for parallel parking or greater than
19 mph (30 km/h) for perpendicular parking.
You recently disconnected or replaced the battery. After you reconnect the battery you
must drive your vehicle on a straight road for a short period of time.
Your vehicle is rolling in the opposite direction of the current transmission position. For
example, rolling forward when in reverse (R).
The system does not correctly position your vehicle
in a parking space.
An irregular curb along the parking space prevents the system from correctly aligning
your vehicle.
Vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be correctly parked.
Your vehicle stopped too far past the parking space.
The tires may not be correctly installed or maintained. For example, not inflated correctly,
improper size, or of different sizes.
A repair or alteration changes the detection capabilities.
212
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Possible CauseSymptom
A parked vehicle has a high attachment. For example, a salt sprayer, snowplow or moving
truck bed.
The parking space length or position of parked objects changes after your vehicle passes
the space.
The temperature around your vehicle quickly changes. For example, driving from a
heated garage into the cold, or after leaving a car wash.
REAR VIEW CAMERA
WARNING: The rear view camera
system is a reverse aid supplement device
that still requires the driver to use it in
conjunction with the interior and exterior
mirrors for maximum coverage.
WARNING: Objects that are close to
either corner of the bumper or under the
bumper, might not be seen on the screen
due to the limited coverage of the camera
system.
WARNING: Back up as slow as
possible since higher speeds might limit your
reaction time to stop your vehicle.
WARNING: Use caution when using
the rear video camera and the trunk is ajar.
If the trunk is ajar, the camera will be out of
position and the video image may be
incorrect. All guidelines (if enabled) have
been removed when the trunk is ajar.
WARNING: Use caution when turning
camera features on or off while in reverse
(R). Make sure your vehicle is not moving.
The rear view camera system provides a
video image of the area behind your vehicle.
The image will display in either the rear view
mirror or the display in the center of the
instrument panel.
During operation, lines will appear in the
display that represent your vehicle’s path
and proximity to objects behind your vehicle.
213
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
E152548
The camera is located on the trunk near the
high-mount brake lamp.
Using the Rear View Camera System
The rear view camera system displays what
is behind your vehicle when you place the
transmission in reverse (R).
The system uses three types of guides to
help you see what is behind your vehicle:
• Active guidelines: Show the intended
path of your vehicle when reversing.
• Fixed guidelines: Show the actual path
your vehicle is moving in while reversing
in a straight line. This can be helpful
when backing into a parking space or
aligning your vehicle with another object
behind you.
• Centerline (if applicable): Helps align the
center of your vehicle with an object
(trailer).
Note: If the transmission is in reverse (R) and
the luggage compartment is ajar, no rear
view camera features will display.
Note: If the image comes on while the
transmission is not in reverse (R), have the
system inspected by an authorized dealer.
Note: When towing, the camera only sees
what you are towing behind your vehicle.
This might not provide adequate coverage
and you might not see some objects. In some
vehicles, the guidelines may disappear once
you connect the trailer tow connector.
The camera may not operate correctly under
the following conditions:
• Nighttime or dark areas if the reverse
lamps are not operating.
• Mud, water or debris obstructs the
camera's view. Clean the lens with a soft,
lint-free cloth and non-abrasive cleaner.
• The camera is misaligned due to damage
to the rear of your vehicle.
To access any of the rear view camera
system settings, make the following
selections in the touch screen when the
transmission is not in reverse (R):
• Menu > Vehicle > Camera Settings
After changing a system setting, the touch
screen shows a preview of the selected
features.
Guidelines and the Centerline
Note: Active guidelines and fixed guidelines
are only available when the transmission is
in reverse (R).
Note: The centerline is only available if
Active or Fixed guidelines are on.
214
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
A B C D
F
E
E142436
Active guidelinesA
CenterlineB
Fixed guideline: Green zoneC
Fixed guideline: Yellow zoneD
Fixed guideline: Red zoneE
Rear bumperF
Active guidelines are only shown with fixed
guidelines. To use active guidelines, turn the
steering wheel to point the guidelines toward
an intended path. If you change the steering
wheel position while reversing, your vehicle
might deviate from the original intended
path.
The fixed and active guidelines fade in and
out depending on your steering wheel
position. When your steering wheel position
is straight, the active guidelines are not
visible.
Always use caution while reversing. Objects
in the red zone are closest to your vehicle
and objects in the green zone are farther
away. Objects are getting closer to your
vehicle as they move from the green zone
to the yellow or red zones. Use the side view
mirrors and rear view mirror to get better
coverage on both sides and rear of your
vehicle.
Enhanced Park Aids
Note: The reverse sensing system is not
effective at speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h)
and may not detect certain angular or
moving objects.
The system uses red, yellow and green
highlights that appear on top of the video
image when the reverse sensing system
detects an object. The alert highlights the
closest object detected. You can disable the
reverse sensing alert if you have enhanced
park aids enabled, you will still see the
displayed highlighted areas.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Manual Zoom
WARNING: When manual zoom is on,
the full area behind your vehicle is not
shown. Be aware of your surroundings when
using the manual zoom feature.
Note: Manual zoom is only available when
the transmission is in reverse (R).
215
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
Note: Only the centerline shows when you
enable manual zoom.
This allows you to get a closer view of an
object behind your vehicle. The zoomed
image keeps the bumper in the image to
provide a reference. The zoom is only active
while the transmission is in reverse (R). When
you shift the transmission out of reverse (R),
the feature automatically turns off and you
must enable it to use it again.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF.
Rear Camera Delay
When shifting the transmission out of reverse
(R) and into any gear other than park (P), the
camera image remains in the display until
your vehicle speed reaches 5 mph (8 km/h)
or until you select a radio button.
Selectable settings for this feature are ON
and OFF. The default setting for the rear
camera delay is OFF.
216
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Parking Aids
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
Cruise control lets you maintain a set speed
without keeping your foot on the accelerator
pedal. You can use cruise control when your
vehicle speed is greater than 20 mph
(30 km/h).
USING CRUISE CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use cruise control
on winding roads, in heavy traffic or when
the road surface is slippery. This could result
in loss of vehicle control, serious injury or
death.
WARNING: When you are going
downhill, your vehicle speed could increase
above the set speed. The system does not
apply the brakes.
To help the system to maintain the set speed
when going downhill, downshift to a lower
gear.
Your vehicle speed could decrease below
the set speed when driving uphill.
Note: The system cancels if your vehicle
speed drops below 10 mph (16 km/h) under
the set speed when driving uphill.
E262918
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 83).
Switching Cruise Control On
E265296
For vehicles without Speed Limiter,
press and release the button.
E71340
For vehicles with Speed Limiter,
press and release the button.
The indicator displays in the instrument
cluster.
Setting the Cruise Speed
Drive to your preferred speed.
Press and release to set the
current speed.
Press and release to set the
current speed.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Note: The indicator changes color.
Changing the Set Speed
Press and release to increase the
set speed in small increments.
Press and release to decrease the
set speed in small increments.
Press and hold either button to accelerate
or decelerate, respectively. Release the
button when you reach your preferred speed.
217
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Cruise Control
Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach your preferred speed. Press either
button.
Note: If you accelerate by pressing only the
accelerator pedal, the set speed does not
change. When you release the accelerator
pedal, your vehicle returns to the speed you
previously set.
Canceling the Set Speed
E265298
Press and release the button, or
tap the brake pedal to cancel the
set speed.
Note: The system remembers the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
Press and release to resume the
set speed.
Switching Cruise Control Off
E265297
For vehicles without Speed Limiter,
press and release the button when
the system is in standby mode or
switch the ignition off.
E71340
For vehicles with Speed Limiter,
press and release the button when
the system is in standby mode or
switch the ignition off.
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
USING ADAPTIVE CRUISE
CONTROL (If Equipped)
WARNING: Always pay close attention
to changing road conditions when using
adaptive cruise control. The system does not
replace attentive driving. Failing to pay
attention to the road may result in a crash,
serious injury or death.
WARNING: Do not use the adaptive
cruise control when entering or leaving a
highway, on roads with intersections or
roundabouts or non-vehicular traffic or roads
that are winding, slippery, unpaved, or steep
slopes.
WARNING: Do not use the system in
poor visibility, for example fog, heavy rain,
spray or snow.
WARNING: Do not use the system
when towing a trailer that has aftermarket
electronic trailer brake controls. Failure to
follow this instruction could result in the loss
of control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Do not use tire sizes other
than those recommended because this can
affect the normal operation of the system.
Failure to do so may result in a loss of vehicle
control, which could result in serious injury.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
may not detect stationary or slow moving
vehicles below 6 mph (10 km/h).
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
does not detect pedestrians or objects in the
road.
218
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Cruise Control
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
does not detect oncoming vehicles in the
same lane.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control is
not a crash warning or avoidance system.
The system adjusts your vehicle speed to
maintain the set gap between you and the
vehicle in front of you in the same lane. You
can select four gap settings.
The system uses a radar sensor which
projects a beam directly in front of your
vehicle.
Note: It is your responsibility to stay alert,
drive safely and be in control of the vehicle
at all times.
E262918
The cruise controls are on the steering
wheel. See Cruise Control (page 83).
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control On
E265296
For vehicles without Speed Limiter,
press and release the button.
E144529
For vehicles with Speed Limiter,
press and release the button.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
E164805
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
Drive to your preferred speed.
Press and release the button.
Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
E164805
219
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Cruise Control
A vehicle graphic illuminates if there is a
vehicle detected in front of you.
Note: When adaptive cruise control is active,
the speedometer may vary slightly from the
set speed displayed in the information
display.
Setting the Adaptive Cruise Speed
When Your Vehicle is Stationary
Follow a vehicle to a complete stop.
E265299
Press while keeping the brake
pedal fully pressed.
The set speed adjusts to 20 mph (30 km/h).
The indicator, current gap setting and set
speed appear in the information display.
Following a Vehicle
WARNING: When following a vehicle,
your vehicle does not always decelerate
quickly enough to avoid a crash without
driver intervention. Always apply the brakes
when necessary. Failing to do so may result
in a crash, serious injury or death.
WARNING: Adaptive cruise control
only warns of vehicles detected by the radar
sensor. In some cases there may be no
warning or a delayed warning. You should
always apply the brakes when necessary.
Failure to do so may result in a crash, serious
injury or death.
When a vehicle ahead of you enters the
same lane or a slower vehicle is ahead in the
same lane, the vehicle speed adjusts to
maintain a preset gap distance. A vehicle
graphic illuminates in the instrument cluster.
Note: The brakes may emit noise when
applied by the system.
Note: When you are following a vehicle and
you switch on a direction indicator, adaptive
cruise control may provide a small temporary
acceleration to help you pass.
Your vehicle maintains a consistent gap from
the vehicle ahead until:
• The vehicle in front of you accelerates to
a speed above the set speed.
• The vehicle in front of you moves out of
the lane you are in.
• You set a new gap distance.
The system applies the brakes to slow your
vehicle to maintain a safe gap distance from
the vehicle in front. The system only applies
limited braking. You can override the system
by applying the brakes.
If the system determines that its maximum
braking level is not sufficient, an audible
warning sounds when the system continues
to brake. A red warning bar displays on the
windshield and you must take immediate
action.
Following a Vehicle to a Complete Stop
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to a complete
stop and remains stationary for less than
three seconds, your vehicle accelerates from
a stationary position to follow the vehicle
ahead.
220
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Cruise Control
E265299
If your vehicle follows a vehicle to
a complete stop and remains
stationary for more than three
seconds, press to follow the vehicle ahead.
Or press the accelerator pedal.
Setting the Gap Distance
You can decrease or increase the distance
between your vehicle and the vehicle in front
by pressing the gap control.
E263697
Press and release to decrease the
gap distance.
E263696
Press and release to increase the
gap distance.
E164805
The selected gap appears in the information
display as shown by the bars in the image.
Note: The gap setting is time dependent and
therefore the distance adjusts with your
vehicle speed.
Note: It is your responsibility to select a gap
appropriate to the driving conditions.
Adaptive Cruise Control Gap Settings
Dynamic
Behavior
Distance GapGraphic
Display,
Bars Indic-
ated
Between
Vehicles
Sport.Closest.1
Normal.Close.2
Normal.Medium.3
Comfort.Far.4
Each time you switch the system on, it
selects the last chosen gap setting.
Overriding the Set Speed
WARNING: If you override the system
by pressing the accelerator pedal, it does
not automatically apply the brakes to
maintain a gap from any vehicle ahead.
When you press the accelerator pedal, you
override the set speed and gap distance.
E144529
Use the accelerator pedal normally
to intentionally exceed the set
speed limit.
When you override the system, the green
indicator light illuminates and the vehicle
image does not appear in the information
display.
The system resumes operation when you
release the accelerator pedal. The vehicle
speed decreases to the set speed, or a lower
speed if following a slower vehicle.
Changing the Set Speed
E265299
Press and release to increase the
set speed in small increments.
221
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Cruise Control
Press and release to decrease the
set speed in small increments.
Press and hold either button to change the
set speed in large increments. Release the
button when you reach your preferred speed.
Press the accelerator or brake pedal until
you reach your preferred speed. Press either
button.
The system may apply the brakes to slow
the vehicle to the new set speed. The set
speed displays continuously in the
information display when the system is
active.
Canceling the Set Speed
E265298
Press and release the button or tap
the brake pedal.
Note: The system remembers the set speed.
Resuming the Set Speed
E265299
Press and release the button.
Your vehicle speed returns to the previously
set speed and gap setting. The set speed
displays continuously in the information
display when the system is active.
Note: Only use resume if you are aware of
the set speed and intend to return to it.
Automatic Cancellation
Automatic cancellation can also occur when:
• The tires lose traction.
• You apply the parking brake.
Park Brake Application
Automatic parking brake application and
cancellation occurs if:
• You unbuckle the seatbelt and open the
door after you stop the vehicle.
• You hold the vehicle at a stop
continuously for more than three minutes.
Hilly Condition Usage
You should select a lower gear when the
system is active in situations such as
prolonged downhill driving on steep grades,
for example in mountainous areas. The
system needs additional engine braking in
these situations to reduce the load on the
vehicle’s regular brake system to prevent it
from overheating.
Note: An audible alarm sounds and the
system shuts down if it applies brakes for an
extended period of time. This allows the
brakes to cool. The system functions
normally again after the brakes cool.
Switching Adaptive Cruise Control Off
E265297
For vehicles without Speed Limiter,
press and release the button when
the system is in standby mode or
switch the ignition off.
E144529
For vehicles with Speed Limiter,
press and release the button when
the system is in standby mode or
switch the ignition off.
222
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Cruise Control
Note: You erase the set speed when you
switch the system off.
Detection Issues
WARNING: On rare occasions,
detection issues can occur due to the road
infrastructures, for example bridges, tunnels
and safety barriers. In these cases, the
system may brake late or unexpectedly. At
all times, you are responsible for controlling
your vehicle, supervising the system and
intervening, if required.
WARNING: If the system malfunctions,
have your vehicle checked as soon as
possible.
The radar sensor has a limited field of view.
It may not detect vehicles at all or detect a
vehicle later than expected in some
situations. The lead vehicle graphic does not
illuminate if the system does not detect a
vehicle in front of you.
E71621
Detection issues can occur:
When driving on a different line
than the vehicle in front.
A
With vehicles that edge into your
lane. The system can only detect
these vehicles once they move
fully into your lane.
B
There may be issues with the
detection of vehicles in front when
driving into and coming out of a
bend or curve in the road.
C
In these cases, the system may brake late or
unexpectedly. You should stay alert and take
action when necessary.
If something hits the front end of your vehicle
or damage occurs, the radar-sensing zone
may change. This could cause missed or
false vehicle detection.
Optimal system performance requires a clear
view of the road by the windshield-mounted
camera.
Optimal performance may not occur if:
223
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Cruise Control
• The camera is blocked.
• There is poor visibility or lighting
conditions.
• There are bad weather conditions.
System Not Available
Conditions that can cause the system to
deactivate or prevent the system from
activating when requested include:
• A blocked sensor.
• High brake temperature.
• A failure in the system or a related
system.
Blocked Sensor
E249424
A message displays if something obstructs
the radar signals from the sensor. The
sensor is in the lower grille. The system
cannot detect a vehicle ahead and does not
function when something blocks the sensor.
Note: You cannot see the sensor. It is behind
a fascia panel.
Keep the front of your vehicle free of dirt,
metal badges or objects. Vehicle front
protectors and aftermarket lights may also
block the sensor.
224
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Cruise Control
Possible Causes and Actions for This Message Displaying:
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar is dirty or obstructed.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that it is free from obstruction.
The surface of the radar is clean but the message remains in the
display.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Heavy rain or snow is interfering with the radar signals.
Do not use the system in these conditions because it may not detect
any vehicles ahead.
Water, snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere with the
radar signals.
Wait a short time or switch to normal cruise control.You are in a desert or remote area with no other vehicles and no
roadside objects.
Due to the nature of radar technology, it is possible to get a blockage warning with no actual block. A false blocked condition either self
clears, or clears after you restart your vehicle.
225
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Cruise Control
Switching to Normal Cruise Control
WARNING: Normal cruise control will
not brake when your vehicle is approaching
slower vehicles. Always be aware of which
mode you have selected and apply the
brakes when necessary.
E71340
The cruise control indicator light
replaces the adaptive cruise
control indicator light if you select
normal cruise control. The gap setting does
not display, and the system does not respond
to lead vehicles. Automatic braking remains
active to maintain set speed.
You can change from adaptive cruise control
to normal cruise control through the
information display.
226
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Cruise Control
DRIVER ALERT (If Equipped)
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: The system may not
function if the sensor is blocked.
WARNING: Take regular rest breaks if
you feel tired. Do not wait for the system to
warn you.
WARNING: Certain driving styles may
result in the system warning you even if you
are not feeling tired.
WARNING: In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not function. Rain,
snow and spray can all limit sensor
performance.
WARNING: The system will not operate
if the sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted with
a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: The system may not operate correctly
if you modify the ride height.
Note: Keep the windshield free from
obstructions. For example, bird droppings,
insects, snow or ice.
Note: If the camera is blocked or if the
windshield is damaged, the system may not
function.
Note: If enabled in the menu, the system
activates at speeds above 40 mph (64 km/h).
When below the activation speed, the
information display informs the driver that
the system is unavailable.
E249505
The system automatically monitors your
driving behavior using various inputs
including the front camera sensor.
If the system detects that your driving
alertness is reduced below a certain
threshold, the system alerts you using a
chime and a message in the information
display.
227
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
USING DRIVER ALERT
Switching the System On and Off
Switch the system on or off using the
information display. See General Information
(page 110).
When active, the system monitors your
alertness level based upon your driving
behavior in relation to the lane markings and
other factors.
System Warnings
Note: The system does not issue warnings
below approximately 40 mph (64 km/h).
The warning system has two stages. First,
the system issues a temporary warning that
you need to take a rest. This message only
appears for a short time. If the system
detects further reduction in driving alertness,
it may issue another warning that remains in
the information display for a longer time. You
can press OK on the steering wheel control
to clear the warning.
System Display
When active, the system runs automatically
in the background and only issues a warning
if required. You can view the status at any
time using the information display. See
General Information (page 110).
The alertness level is shown by six steps in
a colored bar.
E131358
The current assessment of your alertness is
within a typical range.
E131359
The current assessment of your alertness
indicates that you should rest as soon as
safely possible.
The status bar travels from left to right as the
calculated alertness level decreases. As the
meter approaches the rest icon, the color
turns from green to yellow to red.
The yellow position indicates the first
warning is active and the red position
indicates the second warning is active.
Note: If you have recently received a
warning, you should consider resting, even
if the current assessment is within the typical
range.
Note: If the camera sensor cannot track the
road lane markings, or if your vehicle speed
drops below approximately 40 mph
(64 km/h), the alertness level changes to
grey for a short time and the information
display informs you that the system is
unavailable.
Resetting the System
You can reset the system by either:
228
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
• Switching the ignition off and on.
• Stopping the vehicle and then opening
and closing the driver’s door.
LANE KEEPING SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Always drive with due care
and attention when using and operating the
controls and features on your vehicle.
WARNING: In cold and severe weather
conditions the system may not function. Rain,
snow and spray can all limit sensor
performance.
WARNING: The system will not operate
if the sensor cannot track the road lane
markings.
WARNING: The sensor may incorrectly
track lane markings as other structures or
objects. This can result in a false or missed
warning.
WARNING: Large contrasts in outside
lighting can limit sensor performance.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly if the sensor is blocked.
Keep the windshield free from obstruction.
WARNING: If damage occurs in the
immediate area surrounding the sensor, have
your vehicle checked as soon as possible.
WARNING: The system may not
correctly operate if your vehicle is fitted with
a suspension kit not approved by us.
Note: The system works above 40 mph
(64 km/h).
Note: The system works as long as the
camera can detect one lane marking.
Note: When aid mode is on and the system
detects no steering activity for a short period,
the system alerts you to put your hands on
the steering wheel. The system may detect
a light grip or touch on the steering wheel
as hands off driving.
Note: The system may not function if the
camera is blocked, or if the windshield is
damaged or dirty.
E249505
229
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
When you switch the system on and it
detects an unintentional drift out of your lane
is likely to occur, the system notifies or
assists you to stay in your lane through the
steering system and information display.
Depending on the feature operation mode
you select, the system provides a warning
by vibrating the steering wheel or a steering
assistance by gently counter steering your
vehicle back into the lane.
Switching the System On and Off
Note: The system on or off setting is stored
until it is manually changed, unless a MyKey™
is detected. If the system detects a MyKey™,
it defaults to on and the mode is set to alert.
E132099
Press the button on the direction indicator
stalk to switch the system on or off.
System Settings
The system has optional setting menus
available. The system stores the last-known
selection for each of these settings. You do
not need to readjust your settings each time
you switch on the system.
Mode: This setting allows you to select which
of the system features you can enable.
E165515
Alert only – Provides a steering wheel
vibration when the system detects an
unintended lane departure.
E165516
Aid only – Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center when the system
detects an unintended lane departure.
230
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
E165517
AlertA
AidB
Alert + Aid – Provides steering assistance
toward the lane center.
If your vehicle continues drifting out of the
lane after the lane keeping aid corrects the
vehicle, the system provides a steering
wheel vibration.
Note: The alert and aid diagrams illustrate
general zone coverage. They do not provide
exact zone parameters.
Intensity: This setting affects the intensity of
the steering wheel vibration used for the alert
and alert + aid modes. This setting does not
affect the aid mode.
• Low
• Normal
• High
System Display
E151660
If you switch the system on in alert mode, an
overhead graphic of a vehicle with lane
markings appears in the information display.
If you switch the system on in aid or alert and
aid mode, a separate white icon also
appears, or in some vehicles, arrows display
with the lane markings.
When you switch the system off, the lane
marking graphics do not display.
While the system is on, the color of the lane
markings change to indicate the system
status.
Gray: Indicates that the system is temporarily
unable to provide a warning or intervention
on the indicated side. This may be because:
• Your vehicle is under the activation
speed.
• The direction indicator is active.
• Your vehicle is in a dynamic maneuver.
231
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
• The road has no or poor lane markings
in the camera field of view.
• The camera is obscured or unable to
detect the lane markings due to
environmental, traffic or vehicle
conditions. For example, significant sun
angles, shadows, snow, heavy rain or fog,
following a large vehicle that is blocking
or shadowing the lane, poor headlamp
illumination.
See Troubleshooting for additional
information.
Green: Indicates that the system is available
or ready to provide a warning or intervention,
on the indicated side.
Yellow: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping aid
intervention.
Red: Indicates that the system is providing
or has just provided a lane keeping alert
warning.
The system can be temporarily suppressed
at any time by the following:
• Quick braking.
• Fast acceleration.
• Using the turn signal indicator.
• Evasive steering maneuver.
• Driving too close to the lane marking.
Troubleshooting
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Your vehicle speed is outside the operational range of the feature.
The sun is shining directly into the camera lens.
A quick intentional lane change has occurred.
Your vehicle stays too close to the lane markings.
Driving at high speeds in curves.
The last alert warning or aid intervention occurred a short time ago.
Ambiguous lane markings, for example in construction zones.
232
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Why is the feature not available (line markings are gray) when I can see the lane markings on the road?
Rapid transition from light to dark, or from dark to light.
Sudden offset in lane markings.
ABS or AdvanceTrac™ is active.
There is a camera blockage due to dirt, grime, fog, frost or water on the windshield.
You are driving too close to the vehicle in front of you.
Transitioning between no lane markings to lane markings or vice versa.
There is standing water on the road.
Faint lane markings, for example partial yellow lane markings on concrete roads.
Lane width is too narrow or too wide.
The camera has not been calibrated after a windshield replacement.
Driving on tight roads or on uneven roads.
233
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Why does the vehicle not come back toward the middle of the lane, as expected, in the Aid or Aid + Alert mode?
High cross winds are present.
There is a large road crown.
Rough roads, grooves or shoulder drop-offs.
Heavy uneven loading of the vehicle or improper tire inflation pressure.
The tires have been changed, or the suspension has been modified.
BLIND SPOT INFORMATION
SYSTEM (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use the blind spot
information system as a replacement for
using the interior and exterior mirrors or
looking over your shoulder before changing
lanes. The blind spot information system is
not a replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain
and spray. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result in
a crash.
A
A
E124788
234
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that may have entered the blind spot zone
(A). The detection area is on both sides of
your vehicle, extending rearward from the
exterior mirrors to approximately 13 ft (4 m)
beyond the rear bumper.
Note: The system does not prevent contact
with other vehicles. It is not designed to
detect parked vehicles, pedestrians, animals
or other infrastructures.
Using the Blind Spot Information
System
Vehicles with Automatic Transmission
The system turns on when all of the following
occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• You shift into drive (D).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in park
(P) or reverse (R).
Vehicles with Manual Transmission
The system turns on when all of the following
occur:
• You start your vehicle.
• The vehicle speed is greater than 6 mph
(10 km/h).
Note: The system does not operate in
reverse (R).
System Lights and Messages
E142442
When the system detects a vehicle, an alert
indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on
the side the approaching vehicle is coming
from. If you turn the direction indicator on for
that side of your vehicle, the alert indicator
flashes.
Note: The system may not alert you if a
vehicle quickly passes through the detection
zone.
Blocked Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper on
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
235
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display. See
Information Messages (page 116). The alert
indicators remain illuminated but the system
does not alert you.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault, a warning lamp
illuminates and a message displays. See
Information Messages (page 116).
Switching the System Off and On
You can switch the system off using the
information display. See General
Information (page 110). When you switch the
system off, a warning lamp illuminates and
a message displays. When you switch the
system on or off, the alert indicators flash
twice.
Note: The system remembers the last setting
when you start your vehicle.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved by
us, the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (If Equipped)
WARNING: Do not use the cross traffic
alert system as a replacement for using the
interior and exterior mirrors or looking over
your shoulder before reversing out of a
parking space. The cross traffic alert system
is not a replacement for careful driving.
WARNING: The system may not
operate properly during severe weather
conditions, for example snow, ice, heavy rain
and spray. Always drive with due care and
attention. Failure to take care may result in
a crash.
The system is designed to alert you of
vehicles approaching from the sides when
you shift into reverse (R).
Using the Cross Traffic Alert System
The system is designed to detect vehicles
that approach with a speed up to 37 mph
(60 km/h). Coverage decreases when the
sensors are partially, mostly or fully
obstructed. Slowly reversing helps increase
the coverage area and effectiveness.
The system turns on when you start the
engine and you shift into reverse (R). The
system turns off when you shift out of reverse
(R).
236
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
E142440
The sensor on the left-hand side is only
partially obstructed and zone coverage on
the right-hand side is maximized.
237
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
E142441
Zone coverage also decreases when parking
at narrow angles. The sensor on the left-hand
side is mostly obstructed and zone coverage
on that side is severely reduced.
238
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts
E142442
When the system detects a vehicle, an
indicator illuminates in the exterior mirror on
the side the approaching vehicle is coming
from. A tone sounds and a message appears
in the information display.
Note: In exceptional conditions, the system
could alert you even when there is nothing
in the detection zone, for example a vehicle
passing in the distance.
Blocked Sensors
E205199
The sensors are behind the rear bumper on
both sides of your vehicle.
Note: Keep the sensors free from snow, ice
and large accumulations of dirt.
Note: Do not cover the sensors with bumper
stickers, repair compound or other objects.
Note: Blocked sensors could affect system
performance.
If the sensors are blocked, a message may
appear in the information display when you
shift into reverse (R). See Information
Messages (page 116).
System Limitations
The system may not correctly operate when
any of the following occur:
• The sensors are blocked.
• Adjacently parked vehicles or objects are
obstructing the sensors.
• Vehicles approach at speeds greater
than 37 mph (60 km/h).
• The vehicle speed is greater than 7 mph
(12 km/h).
• You reverse out of an angled parking
space.
System Errors
If the system detects a fault a message
displays. See Information Messages (page
116).
Switching the System Off and On
You can temporarily switch the system off
using the information display. See
Information Messages (page 116). When you
switch system off, a message displays. See
Information Messages (page 116).
239
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: The system turns on each time you
switch the ignition on and you shift into
reverse (R). If you temporarily switch the
system off, it turns on the next time you
switch the ignition on.
Note: The system may not correctly operate
when towing a trailer. For vehicles with a
trailer tow module and tow bar approved by
us, the system turns off when you attach a
trailer. For vehicles with an aftermarket
trailer tow module or tow bar, we
recommend that you switch the system off
when you attach a trailer.
To permanently switch the system off,
contact an authorized dealer.
STEERING
Electric Power Steering
WARNING: The electric power steering
system has diagnostic checks that
continuously monitor the system. If a fault is
detected, a message displays in the
information display. Stop your vehicle as
soon as it is safe to do so. Switch the ignition
off. After at least 10 seconds, switch the
ignition on and watch the information display
for a steering system warning message. If a
steering system warning message returns,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
WARNING: If the system detects an
error, you may not feel a difference in the
steering, however a serious condition may
exist. Obtain immediate service from an
authorized dealer, failure to do so may result
in loss of steering control.
Your vehicle has an electric power steering
system. There is no fluid reservoir. No
maintenance is required.
If your vehicle loses electrical power while
you are driving, electric power steering
assistance is lost. The steering system still
operates and you can steer your vehicle
manually. Manually steering your vehicle
requires more effort.
Extreme continuous steering may increase
the effort required for you to steer your
vehicle. This increased effort prevents
overheating and permanent damage to the
steering system. You do not lose the ability
to steer your vehicle manually. Typical
steering and driving maneuvers allow the
system to cool and return to normal
operation.
Steering Tips
If the steering wanders or pulls, check for:
• Correct tire pressures.
• Uneven tire wear.
• Loose or worn suspension components.
• Loose or worn steering components.
• Improper vehicle alignment.
240
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: A high crown in the road or high
crosswinds may also make the steering
seem to wander or pull.
Adaptive Learning
The electronic power steering system
adaptive learning helps correct road
irregularities and improves overall handling
and steering feel. It communicates with the
brake system to help operate advanced
stability control and accident avoidance
systems. Additionally, whenever the battery
is disconnected or a new battery installed,
you must drive your vehicle a short distance
before the system relearns the strategy and
reactivates all systems.
PRE-COLLISION ASSIST (If Equipped)
WARNING: You are responsible for
controlling your vehicle at all times. The
system is designed to be an aid and does
not relieve you of your responsibility to drive
with due care and attention. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: The system does not detect
vehicles that are driving in a different
direction, pedestrians at night, cyclists or
animals. Failure to take care may result in
the loss of control of your vehicle, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: The system does not
operate during hard acceleration or steering.
Failure to take care may lead to a crash or
personal injury.
WARNING: The system may fail or
operate with reduced function during cold
and severe weather conditions. Snow, ice,
rain, spray and fog can adversely affect the
system. Keep the front camera and radar free
of snow and ice. Failure to take care may
result in the loss of control of your vehicle,
serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: In situations where the
vehicle camera has limited detection
capability, this may reduce system
performance. These situations include but
are not limited to direct or low sunlight,
vehicles at night without tail lights,
unconventional vehicle types, pedestrians
with complex backgrounds, running
pedestrians, partly obscured pedestrians, or
pedestrians that the system cannot
distinguish from a group. Failure to take care
may result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, serious personal injury or death.
241
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
WARNING: The system cannot help
prevent all crashes. Do not rely on this
system to replace driver judgment and the
need to maintain a safe distance and speed.
Using the Pre-Collision Assist System
The Pre-Collision Assist system is active at
speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h)
and pedestrian detection is active at speeds
up to 50 mph (80 km/h).
E156130
If your vehicle is rapidly approaching another
stationary vehicle, a vehicle traveling in the
same direction as yours, or a pedestrian
within your driving path, the system is
designed to provide three levels of
functionality:
1. Alert
2. Brake Support
3. Active Braking
E156131
Alert: When active, a flashing visual warning
appears and an audible warning tone
sounds.
Brake Support: The system is designed to
help reduce the impact speed by preparing
the brakes for rapid braking. The system
does not automatically apply the brakes. If
you press the brake pedal, the system could
apply additional braking up to maximum
braking force, even if you lightly press the
brake pedal.
Active Braking: Active braking may activate
if the system determines that a collision is
imminent. The system may help the driver
reduce impact damage or avoid the crash
completely.
Note: If you perceive Pre-Collision Assist
alerts as being too frequent or disturbing,
then you can reduce the alert sensitivity,
though the manufacturer recommends using
the highest sensitivity setting where possible.
Setting lower sensitivity would lead to fewer
and later system warnings.
Distance Indication and Alert
Distance Indication and Alert is a function
that provides a graphical indication of the
time gap to other preceding vehicles
traveling in the same direction. The Distance
Indication and Alert screen in the information
display shows a graphic similar to the one
that follows.
E190004
If the time gap to a preceding vehicle is
small, a red visual indication displays.
242
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: Distance Indication and Alert
deactivates and the graphics do not display
when adaptive cruise control is active.
Time GapDistance GapGraphicsSensitivitySpeed
>0.9sec>82 ft (25 m)GreyNormal62 mph (100 km/h)
0.6sec — 0.9sec56–82 ft (17–25 m)YellowNormal62 mph (100 km/h)
<0.6sec<56 ft (17 m)RedNormal62 mph (100 km/h)
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings
You can adjust the following settings by
using the information display controls. See
General Information (page 110).
• You can change Alert and Distance Alert
sensitivity to one of three possible
settings.
• You can switch Distance Indication and
Alert on or off.
• If required, you can switch Active Braking
on or off.
Note: Active braking automatically turns on
every time you switch the ignition on.
243
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Blocked Sensors
E260069
If a message regarding a blocked sensor or
camera appears in the information display,
the radar signals or camera images are
obstructed. The radar sensor is located
behind a fascia cover near the driver side of
the lower grille. With an obstructed radar,
the Pre-Collision Assist system does not
function and cannot detect a vehicle ahead.
With the front camera obstructed, the
Pre-Collision Assist system does not respond
to pedestrians or stationary vehicles and the
system performance on moving vehicles
reduces. The following table lists possible
causes and actions for when this message
displays.
244
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
ActionCause
Clean the grille surface in front of the radar or remove the object
causing the obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is dirty or obstructed in some
way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the radar to detect
that there is no obstruction.
The surface of the radar in the grille is clean but the message remains
in the display.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-Collision
Assist should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather
conditions improve.
Heavy rain, spray, snow, or fog is interfering with the radar signals.
The Pre-Collision Assist system is temporarily disabled. Pre-Collision
Assist should automatically reactivate a short time after the weather
conditions improve.
Swirling water, or snow or ice on the surface of the road may interfere
with the radar signals.
Contact an authorized dealer to have the radar checked for proper
coverage and operation.
Radar is out of alignment due to a front end impact.
Clean the outside of the windshield in front of the camera.
The windshield in front of the camera is dirty or obstructed in some
way.
Wait a short time. It may take several minutes for the camera to detect
that there is no obstruction.
The windshield in front of the camera is clean but the message remains
in the display.
Note: Proper system operation requires a
clear view of the road by the camera. Have
any windshield damage in the area of the
camera's field of view repaired.
245
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
Note: If something hits the front end of your
vehicle or damage occurs, the radar sensing
zone may change. This could cause missed
or false vehicle detections. Contact an
authorized dealer to have the radar checked
for proper coverage and operation.
Note: If your vehicle detects excessive heat
at the camera or a potential misalignment
condition, a message may display in the
information display indicating temporary
sensor unavailability. This message
deactivates automatically when operational
conditions return to normal. For example,
when the ambient temperature around the
sensor decreases or the sensor
automatically recalibrates successfully.
DRIVE CONTROL (If Equipped)
Lincoln Drive Control
Lincoln Drive Control delivers the Lincoln
driving experience through a suite of
sophisticated electronic vehicle systems.
These systems continuously monitor your
driving inputs and the road conditions to
optimize ride comfort, steering, handling,
powertrain response and sound. You can
preset your preferences for these systems
within the information display. Lincoln Drive
Control will respond to your preferences
based on what gear position you select. This
provides a single location to control multiple
systems performance settings.
Lincoln Drive Control consists of the
following systems:
• Adaptive suspension dynamically adjusts
the shock absorbers stiffness in real time
to match the road surface and driver
inputs. This system continuously monitors
your vehicle’s motion, suspension
position, load, speed, road conditions
and steering to adjust the suspension
damping for optimal vehicle control.
• Electronically power-assisted steering
adjusts steering effort and feel based on
your vehicle speed and your inputs.
• Active noise control utilizes your vehicle
electronics to enhance the acoustic
experience.
• Electronic stability control and traction
control maintain your vehicle control in
adverse conditions or high performance
driving.
• Electronic throttle control enhances the
powertrain response to your inputs.
Using Lincoln Drive Control
You can configure which of the drive control
modes are active when your vehicle is in
drive (D) or sport (S). The configuration
remains active until modified from the main
menu on the information display.
246
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
These systems have a range of modes which
you can choose from in order to customize
your ideal driving experience:
• Comfort – Provides a more relaxed
driving experience, maximizing comfort.
Your steering effort decreases and the
suspension movement is more fluid.
Comfort mode is ideal when you desire
enhanced traveling comfort.
• Normal – Delivers a balanced
combination of comfortable, controlled
ride and confident handling. This mode
provides an engaging drive experience
and a direct connection to the road
without sacrificing any of the composure
demanded from a luxury vehicle.
• Sport – Provides a sportier driving
experience. The suspension stiffens, with
an emphasis on handling and control.
The engine responds more directly to
your inputs and takes on a more powerful
tone. Sport mode is ideal for use during
more spirited driving.
You can change your vehicle's Drive Control
settings from the menu on the display
screen. See General Information (page 110).
Note: Not all settings may be available.
Note: Lincoln Drive Control has diagnostic
checks that continuously monitor the system
to ensure proper operation. Certain types of
system errors gray out the mode selections
within the information display, preventing
you from changing states when the gear
position is changed. Other types of errors
produce a temporary message in the
information display. See Information
Messages (page 116). If either condition
persists for multiple key cycles, see an
authorized dealer.
247
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Aids
LOAD LIMIT
Vehicle Loading - with and without a
Trailer
This section guides you in the proper
loading of your vehicle, trailer, or both.
Keep your loaded vehicle weight within
its design rating capability, with or
without a trailer. Properly loading your
vehicle provides maximum return of
vehicle design performance. Before you
load your vehicle, become familiar with
the following terms for determining your
vehicle’s weight rating, with or without
a trailer, from the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information label or Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Tire and Loading Label Information
Example:
E198719
248
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Load Carrying
Payload
E143816
PAYLOAD
Payload is the combined weight of cargo
and passengers that your vehicle is
carrying. The maximum payload for your
vehicle appears on the Tire and Loading
label. The label is either on the B-pillar
or the edge of the driver door. Vehicles
exported outside the US and Canada
may not have a tire and loading label.
Look for “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg OR XXX lb” for
maximum payload. The payload listed
on the Tire and Loading Information
label is the maximum payload for your
vehicle as built by the assembly plant. If
you install any additional equipment on
your vehicle, you must determine the
new payload. Subtract the weight of the
equipment from the payload listed on
the Tire and Loading label. When towing,
trailer tongue weight or king pin weight
is also part of payload.
WARNING: The appropriate
loading capacity of your vehicle can be
limited either by volume capacity (how
much space is available) or by payload
capacity (how much weight the vehicle
should carry). Once you have reached
the maximum payload of your vehicle,
do not add more cargo, even if there is
space available. Overloading or
improperly loading your vehicle can
contribute to loss of vehicle control and
vehicle rollover.
249
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Load Carrying
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
GAWR is the maximum allowable weight
that a single axle (front or rear) can carry.
These numbers are on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. The label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
The total load on each axle must never
exceed its Gross Axle Weight Rating.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
GVWR is the maximum allowable weight
of the fully loaded vehicle. This includes
all options, equipment, passengers and
cargo. It appears on the Safety
Compliance Certification label. The label
is located on the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver seating position.
The gross vehicle weight must never
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating.
Safety Compliance Certification Label
Example:
E198828
WARNING: Exceeding the Safety
Compliance Certification label vehicle
weight rating limits could result in
substandard vehicle handling or
performance, engine, transmission
and/or structural damage, serious
damage to the vehicle, loss of control
and personal injury.
Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight
Maximum loaded trailer weight is the
highest possible weight of a fully loaded
trailer the vehicle can tow. Consult an
authorized dealer (or the RV and Trailer
Towing Guide available at an authorized
dealer) for more detailed information.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight
Rating)
GCWR is the maximum allowable weight
of the vehicle and the loaded trailer,
including all cargo and passengers, that
the vehicle can handle without risking
damage. (Important: The towing
vehicle’s braking system is rated for
operation at Gross Vehicle Weight
Rating, not at Gross Combined Weight
Rating.) Separate functional brakes
should be used for safe control of towed
vehicles and for trailers where the Gross
Combined Weight of the towing vehicle
plus the trailer exceed the Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating of the towing vehicle.
250
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Load Carrying
The gross combined weight must never
exceed the Gross Combined Weight
Rating.
Note: For trailer towing information
refer to the RV and Trailer Towing Guide
available at an authorized dealer.
WARNING: Do not exceed the
GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
Safety Compliance Certification label.
WARNING: Do not use
replacement tires with lower load
carrying capacities than the original tires
because they may lower your vehicle’s
GVWR and GAWR limitations.
Replacement tires with a higher limit
than the original tires do not increase
the GVWR and GAWR limitations.
WARNING: Exceeding any vehicle
weight rating limitation could result in
serious damage to your vehicle,
personal injury or both.
Steps for determining the correct load
limit:
1. Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
lb." on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of
the driver and passengers that will
be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
driver and passengers from XXX kg
or XXX lb.
4. The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity. For example,
if the “XXX” amount equals 1,400 lb.
and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 650 lb.
(1400-750 (5 x 150) = 650 lb.)
5. Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on
the vehicle. That weight may not
safely exceed the available cargo
and luggage load capacity calculated
in Step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer,
load from your trailer will be
transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this
reduces the available cargo and
luggage load capacity of your
vehicle.
Helpful examples for calculating the
available amount of cargo and
luggage load capacity
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You decide to go golfing. Is
there enough load capacity to carry you,
four of your friends and all the golf bags?
You and four friends average 220
pounds (99 kilograms) each and the golf
bags weigh approximately 30 pounds
(13.5 kilograms) each. The calculation
would be: 1400 - (5 x 220) - (5 x 30) =
251
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Load Carrying
1400 - 1100 - 150 = 150 pounds. Yes, you
have enough load capacity in your
vehicle to transport four friends and your
golf bags. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (5 x 99
kilograms) - (5 x 13.5 kilograms) = 635 -
495 - 67.5 = 72.5 kilograms.
Suppose your vehicle has a 1400-pound
(635-kilogram) cargo and luggage
capacity. You and one of your friends
decide to pick up cement from the local
home improvement store to finish that
patio you have been planning for the
past two years. Measuring the inside of
the vehicle with the rear seat folded
down, you have room for twelve
100-pound (45-kilogram) bags of
cement. Do you have enough load
capacity to transport the cement to your
home? If you and your friend each weigh
220 pounds (99 kilograms), the
calculation would be: 1400 - (2 x 220) -
(12 x 100) = 1400 - 440 - 1200 = - 240
pounds. No, you do not have enough
cargo capacity to carry that much
weight. In metric units, the calculation
would be: 635 kilograms - (2 x 99
kilograms) - (12 x 45 kilograms) = 635 -
198 - 540 = -103 kilograms. You will need
to reduce the load weight by at least
240 pounds (104 kilograms). If you
remove three 100-pound (45-kilogram)
cement bags, then the load calculation
would be:1400 - (2 x 220) - (9 x 100) =
1400 - 440 - 900 = 60 pounds. Now you
have the load capacity to transport the
cement and your friend home. In metric
units, the calculation would be: 635
kilograms - (2 x 99 kilograms) - (9 x 45
kilograms) = 635 - 198 - 405 = 32
kilograms.
The above calculations also assume that
the loads are positioned in your vehicle
in a manner that does not overload the
front or the rear gross axle weight rating
specified for your vehicle on the Safety
Compliance Certification label.
Special Loading Instructions for
Owners of Pick-up Trucks and Utility-
type Vehicles
WARNING: Loaded vehicles may
handle differently than unloaded
vehicles. Take extra precautions, such
as slower speeds and increased
stopping distance, when driving a
heavily loaded vehicle.
252
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Load Carrying
TOWING A TRAILER
WARNING: Do not exceed the
GVWR or the GAWR specified on the
certification label.
WARNING: Towing trailers beyond
the maximum recommended gross
trailer weight exceeds the limit of your
vehicle and could result in engine
damage, transmission damage,
structural damage, loss of vehicle
control, vehicle rollover and personal
injury.
Note: There may be electrical items
such as fuses or relays that can affect
trailer towing operation. See Fuses
(page 277).
The load capacity of your vehicle is
designated by weight not volume. You
may not necessarily be able to use all
available space when loading your
vehicle or trailer.
Towing a trailer places extra load on the
engine, transmission, axle, brakes, tires,
and suspension. Inspect these
components before, during and after
towing.
Load Placement
To help minimize how trailer movement
affects the vehicle when driving:
• Load the heaviest items closest to
the trailer floor.
• Load the heaviest items in the center
of the left and right side trailer tires.
• Load the heaviest items above the
trailer axles or just slightly forward
toward the trailer tongue. Do not
allow the final trailer tongue weight
to go above or below 10-15% of the
loaded trailer weight.
• Select a ball mount with the correct
rise or drop. When both the loaded
vehicle and trailer are connected, the
trailer frame should be level, or
slightly angled down toward the
vehicle, when viewed from the side.
When driving with a trailer or payload, a
slight takeoff vibration or shudder may
be present due to the increased payload
weight. Additional information regarding
proper trailer loading and setting your
vehicle up for towing is located in the
Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 248).
You can also find information in the RV
& Trailer Towing Guide available at your
authorized dealer, or online.
253
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Towing
RV & Trailer Towing Guide Online
http://www.fleet.ford.com/towing-guides/Website
RECOMMENDED TOWING
WEIGHTS
Note: Do not exceed the trailer weight
for your vehicle configuration listed in
the chart below.
Note: Be sure to take into consideration
trailer frontal area. Do not exceed 12 ft²
(1.11 m²).
Note: For high altitude operation,
reduce the gross combined weight by
2% per 1,000 ft (300 m) starting at the
1,000 ft (300 m) elevation point.
Note: Certain states require electric
trailer brakes for trailers over a specified
weight. Be sure to check state
regulations for this specified weight. The
maximum trailer weights listed may be
limited to this specified weight, as the
vehicle’s electrical system may not
include the wiring connector needed to
activate electric trailer brakes.
Your vehicle may tow a trailer provided
the maximum trailer weight is less than
or equal to the maximum trailer weight
listed for your vehicle configuration on
the following chart.
Maximum trailer weight
1
Powertrain
1,000 lb (454 kg)2.0L GTDI
1,000 lb (454 kg)3.0L V6 GTDI
1
Calculated with SAE J2807 method.
254
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Towing
ESSENTIAL TOWING CHECKS
Follow these guidelines for safe towing:
• Do not tow a trailer until you drive your
vehicle at least 1,000 mi (1,600 km).
• Consult your local motor vehicle laws for
towing a trailer.
• See the instructions included with towing
accessories for the proper installation
and adjustment specifications.
• Service your vehicle more frequently if
you tow a trailer. See your scheduled
maintenance information.
• If you use a rental trailer, follow the
instructions the rental agency gives you.
You can find information on load
specification terms found on the tire label
and Safety Compliance label as well as
instructions on calculating your vehicle's load
in the Load Carrying chapter. See Load Limit
(page 248).
Remember to account for the trailer tongue
weight as part of your vehicle load when
calculating the total vehicle weight.
Hitches
Do not use a hitch that either clamps onto
the bumper or attaches to the axle.
Distribute the trailer load so 10-15% of the
total trailer weight is on the tongue.
Safety Chains
Note: Never attach safety chains to the
bumper.
Always connect the safety chains to the hook
retainers of your vehicle hitch.
To connect the safety chains, cross them
under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning tight corners. Do not allow
the chains to drag on the ground.
Trailer Brakes
WARNING: Do not connect a trailer's
hydraulic brake system directly to your
vehicle's brake system. Your vehicle may not
have enough braking power and your
chances of having a collision greatly
increase.
Electric brakes and manual, automatic or
surge-type trailer brakes are safe if you install
them properly and adjust them to the
manufacturer's specifications. The trailer
brakes must meet local and federal
regulations.
The rating for the tow vehicle's braking
system operation is at the gross vehicle
weight rating, not the gross combined
weight rating.
Separate functioning brake systems are
required for safe control of towed vehicles
and trailers weighing more than 1500 lb
(680 kg) when load.
Trailer Lamps
WARNING: Never connect any trailer
lamp wiring to the vehicle's tail lamp wiring;
this may damage the electrical system
resulting in fire. Contact your authorized
dealer as soon as possible for assistance in
proper trailer tow wiring installation.
Additional electrical equipment may be
required.
255
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Towing
Trailer lamps are required on most towed
vehicles. Make sure all running lights, brake
lights, turn signals and hazard lights are
working.
Before Towing a Trailer
Practice turning, stopping and backing up to
get the feel of your vehicle-trailer
combination before starting on a trip. When
turning, make wider turns so the trailer
wheels clear curbs and other obstacles.
When Towing a Trailer
• Do not drive faster than 70 mph
(113 km/h) during the first 500 mi
(800 km).
• Do not make full-throttle starts.
• Check your hitch, electrical connections
and trailer wheel lug nuts thoroughly after
you have traveled 50 mi (80 km).
• When stopped in congested or heavy
traffic during hot weather, place the
transmission in park (P) to aid engine and
transmission cooling and to help A/C
performance.
• Turn off the speed control with heavy
loads or in hilly terrain. The speed control
may turn off automatically when you are
towing on long, steep grades.
• Shift to a lower gear when driving down
a long or steep hill. Do not apply the
brakes continuously, as they may
overheat and become less effective.
• If your transmission is equipped with a
Grade Assist or Tow/Haul feature, use
this feature when towing. This provides
engine braking and helps eliminate
excessive transmission shifting for
optimum fuel economy and transmission
cooling.
• Allow more distance for stopping with a
trailer attached. Anticipate stops and
brake gradually.
• Avoid parking on a grade. However, if
you must park on a grade:
1. Turn the steering wheel to point your
vehicle tires away from traffic flow.
2. Set your vehicle parking brake.
3. Place the transmission in park (P).
4. Place wheel chocks in front and back of
the trailer wheels. Chocks are not
included with your vehicle.
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or
Personal Watercraft (PWC)
Note: Disconnect the wiring to the trailer
before backing the trailer into the water.
Note: Reconnect the wiring to the trailer
after removing the trailer from the water.
When backing down a ramp during boat
launching or retrieval:
• Do not allow the static water level to rise
above the bottom edge of the rear
bumper.
• Do not allow waves to break higher than
6 in (15 cm) above the bottom edge of
the rear bumper.
Exceeding these limits may allow water to
enter vehicle components:
• Causing internal damage to the
components.
• Affecting driveability, emissions, and
reliability.
256
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Towing
Replace the rear axle lubricant anytime you
submerge the rear axle in water. Water may
contaminate the rear axle lubricant, which is
not a normal maintenance inspection item
unless there is a possibility of a leak or other
axle repair is required.
TOWING THE VEHICLE ON FOUR
WHEELS
Emergency Towing
WARNING: If your vehicle has a
steering wheel lock make sure the ignition
is in the accessory or on position when being
towed.
You can flat-tow (all wheels on the ground,
regardless of the powertrain/transmission
configuration) your disabled vehicle (without
access to wheel dollies, car-hauling trailer,
or flatbed transport vehicle) under the
following conditions:
• Your vehicle is facing forward so you tow
it in a forward direction.
• You place the transmission in neutral (N).
If you cannot place the transmission in
neutral (N), you may need to override the
gear shifter. See Automatic
Transmission (page 177).
• Maximum speed is 35 mph (56 km/h).
• Maximum distance is 50 mi (80 km).
Recreational Towing
Note: Put your climate control system in
recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust
fumes from entering the vehicle. See
Climate Control (page 136).
Follow these guidelines if you have a need
for recreational (RV) towing. An example of
recreational towing would be towing your
vehicle behind a motorhome. These
guidelines are to make sure you do not
damage the transmission during towing.
Vehicles Equipped with a 2.0L Engine
Front-wheel drive (FWD) vehicles CANNOT
be flat-towed (all wheels on the ground) as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
You must place the front wheels on a
two-wheel tow dolly. If you are using a tow
dolly, follow the instructions specified by the
equipment provider.
All-wheel drive (AWD) vehicles CANNOT be
flat-towed (all wheels on the ground), as
vehicle or transmission damage may occur.
It is recommended to tow your vehicle with
all four (4) wheels off the ground such as
when using a car-hauling trailer. Otherwise,
you cannot tow your vehicle.
257
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Towing
Vehicles Equipped with a 3.0L Engine
You can tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground using the Stay in Neutral
mode feature, or with all four wheels off the
ground using a vehicle transport trailer. If you
are using a vehicle transport trailer, follow
the instruction specified by the equipment
provider.
If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels
on the ground:
• Tow only in the forward direction.
• Release the parking brake.
• Place the vehicle in Stay in Neutral mode.
See Automatic Transmission (page 177).
• Do not exceed 65 mph (105 km/h).
Note: If the parking brake is applied, a
message appears in the information display.
Note: Start the engine and allow it to run for
a few minutes at the beginning of each day,
and every six hours or fewer. With the engine
running and your foot on the brake, shift into
drive (D) and then into reverse (R) before
shifting back into neutral (N). BEFORE
CONTINUING TO TOW, YOU MUST
RE-ENABLE STAY IN NEUTRAL MODE.
258
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Towing
BREAKING-IN
You need to break in new tires for
approximately 300 mi (480 km). During this
time, your vehicle may exhibit some unusual
driving characteristics.
Avoid driving too fast during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km). Vary your speed frequently and
change up through the gears early. Do not
labor the engine.
Do not tow during the first 1,000 mi
(1,600 km).
ECONOMICAL DRIVING
Fuel economy is affected by several things
such as how you drive, the conditions you
drive under and how you maintain your
vehicle.
There are some things to keep in mind that
may improve your fuel economy:
• Accelerate and slow down in a smooth,
moderate fashion.
• Drive at steady speeds.
• Anticipate stops; slowing down may
eliminate the need to stop.
• Combine errands and minimize
stop-and-go driving (When running
errands, go to the furthest destination
first and then work your way back home).
• Close the windows for high-speed
driving.
• Drive at reasonable speeds.
• Keep the tires properly inflated and use
only the recommended size.
• Use the recommended engine oil.
• Perform all regularly scheduled
maintenance.
There are also some things you may want to
avoid doing because they reduce your fuel
economy:
• Avoid sudden or hard accelerations.
• Avoid revving the engine before turning
off the car.
• Avoid long idle periods.
• Do not warm up your vehicle on cold
mornings.
• Reduce the use of air conditioning and
heat.
• Avoid using speed control in hilly terrain.
• Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal
while driving.
• Avoid carrying unnecessary weight.
• Avoid adding particular accessories to
your vehicle (e.g. bug deflectors,
rollbars/light bars, running boards, ski
racks).
• Avoid driving with the wheels out of
alignment.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
WARNING: Do not drive through
flowing or deep water as you may lose
control of your vehicle.
Note: Driving through standing water can
cause vehicle damage.
Note: Engine damage can occur if water
enters the air filter.
259
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Hints
Before driving through standing water, check
the depth. Never drive through water that is
higher than the bottom of the front rocker
area of your vehicle.
E259345
When driving through standing water, drive
very slowly and do not stop your vehicle.
Your brake performance and traction may
be limited. After driving through water and
as soon as it is safe to do so:
• Lightly press the brake pedal to dry the
brakes and to check that they work.
• Check that the horn works.
• Check that the exterior lights work.
• Turn the steering wheel to check that the
steering power assist works.
FLOOR MATS
WARNING: Use a floor mat designed
to fit the footwell of your vehicle that does
not obstruct the pedal area. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in the loss of
control of your vehicle, personal injury or
death.
WARNING: Pedals that cannot move
freely can cause loss of vehicle control and
increase the risk of serious personal injury.
WARNING: Secure the floor mat to
both retention devices so that it cannot slip
out of position and interfere with the pedals.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in the loss of control of your vehicle, personal
injury or death.
WARNING: Do not place additional
floor mats or any other covering on top of
the original floor mats. This could result in
the floor mat interfering with the operation
of the pedals. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in the loss of control of your
vehicle, personal injury or death.
WARNING: Always make sure that
objects cannot fall into the driver foot well
while your vehicle is moving. Objects that
are loose can become trapped under the
pedals causing a loss of vehicle control.
E142666
260
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Hints
To install the floor mats, position the floor
mat eyelet over the retention post and press
down to lock in position.
To remove the floor mat, reverse the
installation procedure.
Note: Regularly check the floor mats to make
sure they are secure.
261
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Driving Hints
ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Getting Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle
concern, Lincoln Motor Company offers a
complimentary roadside assistance program.
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
The service is available:
• Throughout the life of the vehicle for
original owners.
• For six years from the warranty start date
or 70,000 mi (110,000 km), whichever
comes first, for subsequent owners.
Roadside Assistance covers:
• A flat tire change with a good spare
(except vehicles supplied with a tire
inflation kit, which may need a tow to the
nearest Lincoln dealer).
• Battery jump start.
• Lock-out assistance (key replacement
cost is the client's responsibility).
• Fuel delivery — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall deliver up to
2 gal (8 L) of gasoline or 5 gal (20 L) of
diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle.
Roadside Assistance limits fuel delivery
service to two no-charge occurrences
within a 12-month period.
• Winch out — available within 100 ft (30 m)
of a paved or county maintained road,
no recoveries.
• Towing — independent service
contractors, if not prohibited by state,
local or municipal law shall tow Lincoln
eligible vehicles to the client's selling or
preferred dealer within 100 mi (160 km)
of the disablement location or to the
nearest Lincoln dealer. If a client requests
a tow to a selling or preferred dealer that
is more than 100 mi (160 km) from the
disablement location, the client is
responsible for any mileage costs in
excess of 100 mi (160 km).
• Roadside Assistance includes up to $200
for a towed trailer if the disabled eligible
vehicle requires service at the nearest
authorized dealer.
Vehicles Sold in the United States:
Using Roadside Assistance
United States clients who require roadside
assistance, call 1-800-521-4140.
If you need to arrange roadside assistance
for yourself, Lincoln Motor Company
reimburses a reasonable amount for towing
to the nearest Lincoln dealership within
100 mi (160 km). To obtain reimbursement
information, United States clients, call
1-800-521-4140. Clients need to submit their
original receipts.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting
Roadside Assistance
To fully assist you should you have a vehicle
concern, Lincoln Motor Company offers a
complimentary roadside assistance program.
This program is eligible within Canada or the
continental United States.
262
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
This program is separate from the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty, beginning from
the original warranty start date and lasts the
life of the vehicle for the original owner.
Subsequent owners receive coverage that
is concurrent with the 6 years or 70,000 mi
(110,000 km), whichever occurs first,
powertrain warranty coverage period.
If you purchased your vehicle in Canada and
require roadside assistance, please call
1-800-387-9333.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using
Roadside Assistance
Complete the roadside assistance
identification card and place it in your wallet
for quick reference.
In Canada, this card is found in the Warranty
Guide in the glove compartment of your
vehicle.
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside
Assistance Program Coverage
The service is available 24 hours a day,
seven days a week.
Canadian roadside coverage and benefits
may differ from the U.S. coverage.
For complete program coverage details
review your warranty guide, contact your
dealer, call us in Canada at 1-800-387-9333,
or visit our website at
www.lincolncanada.com.
HAZARD FLASHERS
Note: The hazard flashers operate when the
ignition is in any position, or if the key is not
in the ignition. If used when the vehicle is not
running, the battery loses charge. As a result,
there may be insufficient power to restart
your vehicle.
The flasher control is on the
instrument panel. Use your hazard
flashers when your vehicle is
creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
• Press the flasher control and all front and
rear direction indicators flash.
• Press the button again to switch them off.
FUEL SHUTOFF
WARNING: If your vehicle has been
involved in a crash, have the fuel system
checked. Failure to follow this instruction
could result in fire, personal injury or death.
Note: When you try to restart your vehicle
after a fuel shutoff, the vehicle makes sure
that various systems are safe to restart.
Once the vehicle determines the systems
are safe, then the vehicle allows you to
restart.
Note: In the event that your vehicle does
not restart after your third attempt, contact
a qualified technician.
The fuel pump shutoff stops the flow of fuel
to the engine in the event of a moderate to
severe crash. Not every impact causes a
shutoff.
Should your vehicle shut off after a crash,
you may restart your vehicle.
263
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
1. Press START/STOP to switch off your
vehicle.
2. Press the brake pedal and START/STOP
to switch on your vehicle.
3. Remove your foot from the brake pedal
and press START/STOP to switch off
your vehicle.
4. You can attempt to start the vehicle by
pressing the brake pedal and
START/STOP, or press START/STOP
without pressing the brake pedal.
JUMP STARTING THE VEHICLE
WARNING: Batteries normally produce
explosive gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the
battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your
eyes. Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach
of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the
battery to protect against possible splashing
of acid solution. In case of acid contact with
skin or eyes, flush immediately with water
for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
WARNING: Use only adequately sized
cables with insulated clamps.
Preparing Your Vehicle
Do not attempt to push-start your automatic
transmission vehicle.
Note: Attempting to push-start a vehicle with
an automatic transmission may cause
transmission damage.
Note: Use only a 12-volt supply to start your
vehicle.
Note: Do not disconnect the battery of the
disabled vehicle as this could damage the
vehicle electrical system.
Park the booster vehicle close to the hood
of the disabled vehicle, making sure the two
vehicles do not touch.
Connecting the Jumper Cables
WARNING: Do not connect the end of
the second cable to the negative (-) terminal
of the battery to be jumped. A spark may
cause an explosion of the gases that
surround the battery.
WARNING: Do not use fuel lines,
engine valve covers, windshield wiper arms,
the intake manifold, or hood latch as ground
points.
Note: Do not attach the end of the positive
cable to the studs or L-shaped eyelet located
above the positive (+) terminal of your
vehicle’s battery. High current may flow
through and cause damage to the fuses.
264
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Note: To avoid reverse polarity connections,
make sure that you correctly identify the
positive (+) and negative (-) terminals on both
the disabled and booster vehicles before
connecting the cables.
Note: Remove the red cap from the positive
prong (B) on your vehicle before connecting
the cables.
E226509
A. Negative prong (–).
B. Positive prong (+).
4
2
1
3
E142664
Note: In the illustration, the bottom vehicle
represents the booster vehicle.
1. Connect the positive (+) jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery.
2. Connect the other end of the positive (+)
cable to the positive (+) terminal of the
booster vehicle battery.
3. Connect the negative (-) cable to the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
4. Make the final connection of the negative
(-) cable to an exposed metal part of the
stalled vehicle's engine, away from the
battery and the fuel injection system, or
connect the negative (-) cable to a ground
connection point if available.
Jump Starting
1. Start the engine of the booster vehicle
and rev the engine moderately, or press
the accelerator gently to keep your
engine speed between 2000 and 3000
RPM, as shown in your tachometer.
2. Start the engine of the disabled vehicle.
265
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
3. Once the disabled vehicle has been
started, run both vehicle engines for an
additional three minutes before
disconnecting the jumper cables.
Removing the Jumper Cables
Remove the jumper cables in the reverse
order that they were connected.
4
1
3
2
E142665
1. Remove the negative (-) jumper cable
from the disabled vehicle.
2. Remove the jumper cable on the
negative (-) terminal of the booster
vehicle battery.
3. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the booster vehicle
battery.
4. Remove the jumper cable from the
positive (+) terminal of the disabled
vehicle battery.
5. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
POST-CRASH ALERT SYSTEM
The system flashes the direction indicators
and sounds the horn (intermittently) in the
event of a serious impact that deploys an
airbag (front, side, side curtain or Safety
Canopy) or the seatbelt pretensioners.
The horn and indicators turn off when:
• You press the hazard control button.
• You press the panic button on the remote
entry transmitter (if equipped).
266
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
• Your vehicle runs out of power.
• Sounding of the horn is only enabled in
specific markets.
TRANSPORTING THE VEHICLE
E143886
If you need to tow your vehicle, contact a
professional towing service or, if you are a
member of a roadside assistance program,
your roadside assistance service provider.
We recommend the use of a wheel lift and
dollies or flatbed equipment to tow your
vehicle. Do not tow with a slingbelt. Lincoln
Motor Company does not approve a slingbelt
towing procedure. If you tow your vehicle
incorrectly, or by any other means, vehicle
damage may occur.
Lincoln Motor Company produces a towing
manual for all authorized tow truck operators.
Have your tow truck operator refer to this
manual for proper hook-up and towing
procedures for your vehicle.
It is acceptable to have your front-wheel
drive vehicle towed from the front if using
proper wheel lift equipment to raise the front
wheels off the ground. When towing in this
manner, the rear wheels can remain on the
ground.
267
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
Front-wheel drive vehicles must have the
front wheels placed on a tow dolly when
towing your vehicle from the rear using
wheel lift equipment. This prevents damage
to the transmission.
Towing an all-wheel drive vehicle requires
that all wheels be off the ground, such as
using a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed
equipment. This prevents damage to the
transmission, all-wheel drive system and
vehicle.
TOWING POINTS
Due to local market requirements in some
countries, some vehicles may be equipped
with a recovery hook.
Recovery Hook Location
If your vehicle is equipped with a screw-in
recovery hook, it is with the spare tire kit or
the rear under floor storage.
Installing the Recovery Hook
There is an installation point for the recovery
hook located behind the fascia.
Note: The screw-in recovery hook has a
left-hand thread. Turn it counterclockwise to
install it. Make sure that the recovery hook
is fully tightened.
E146284
E188420
Remove the recovery hook cover by prying
it off at the notch with a screwdriver or similar
object.
Note: Use a soft cloth to cover the prying
tool. This helps prevent scratch marks to the
vehicle's paint.
268
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Roadside Emergencies
GETTING THE SERVICES YOU
NEED
Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be
performed by an authorized dealer. While
any authorized dealer handling your vehicle
line provides warranty service, we
recommend you return to your selling
authorized dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction.
Please note that certain warranty repairs
require special training and equipment, so
not all authorized dealers are authorized to
perform all warranty repairs. This means that,
depending on the warranty repair needed,
you may have to take your vehicle to another
authorized dealer.
A reasonable time must be allowed to
perform a repair after taking your vehicle to
the authorized dealer. Repairs are made
using Lincoln or Motorcraft parts, or
remanufactured or other parts that are
authorized by Lincoln.
Away From Home
If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs service, contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center or use the online
resources listed below to find the nearest
authorized dealer.
In the United States:
Mailing address
Lincoln Motor Company
Client Relationship Center
P.O. Box 6248
Dearborn, MI 48126
Telephone
1-800-521-4140
TDD for the hearing impaired:
1-800-232-5952
Web Address
www.LincolnOwner.com
These are some of the items that can be
found online:
• United States dealer locator by Dealer
Name, City, State or ZIP Code.
• Owner Manuals.
• Maintenance Schedules.
• Recalls.
• Lincoln Extended Service Plans.
• Lincoln Original Accessories.
• Service specials and promotions.
In Canada:
Mailing address
Lincoln Client Relationship Centre
Lincoln Motor Company of Canada, Limited
P.O. Box 2000
Oakville, Ontario L6K 1C8
Telephone
1-800-387-9333
269
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
Web Address
www.LincolnCanada.com
Online Resources
Twitter English
@LincolnMotorCA
Twitter French
@LincolnQC
Instagram
@LincolnMotorCA
Facebook
/LincolnMotorCA
Additional Assistance
If you have questions or concerns, or are
unsatisfied with the service you are receiving,
follow these steps:
1. Contact your Sales Representative or
Service Advisor at your selling or
servicing authorized dealer.
2. If your inquiry or concern remains
unresolved, contact the Sales Manager,
Service Manager or Customer Relations
Manager.
3. If you require assistance or clarification
on Lincoln Motor Company policies,
please contact the Lincoln Client
Relationship Center.
In order to help us serve you better, please
have the following information available
when contacting a Client Relationship
Center:
• Vehicle Identification Number.
• Your telephone number (home and
business).
• The name of the authorized dealer and
city where located.
• The vehicle’ s current odometer reading.
In some states, you must directly notify
Lincoln in writing before pursuing remedies
under your state’s warranty laws. Lincoln is
also allowed a final repair attempt in some
states.
In the United States, a warranty dispute must
be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before
taking action under the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, or to the extent allowed by
state law, before pursuing replacement or
repurchase remedies provided by certain
state laws. This dispute handling procedure
is not required prior to enforcing state
created rights or other rights which are
independent of the Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act or state replacement or
repurchase laws.
IN CALIFORNIA (U.S. ONLY)
California Civil Code Section 1793.2(d)
requires that, if a manufacturer or its
representative is unable to repair a motor
vehicle to conform to the vehicle’s applicable
express warranty after a reasonable number
of attempts, the manufacturer shall be
required to either replace the vehicle with
one substantially identical or repurchase the
270
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an
amount equal to the actual price paid or
payable by the consumer (less a reasonable
allowance for consumer use). The consumer
has the right to choose whether to receive
a refund or replacement vehicle.
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b)
presumes that the manufacturer has had a
reasonable number of attempts to conform
the vehicle to its applicable express
warranties if, within the first 18 months of
ownership of a new vehicle or the first
18,000 mi (29,000 km), whichever occurs
first:
1. Two or more repair attempts are made
on the same non-conformity likely to
cause death or serious bodily injury OR
2. Four or more repair attempts are made
on the same nonconformity (a defect or
condition that substantially impairs the
use, value or safety of the vehicle) OR
3. The vehicle is out of service for repair of
nonconformities for a total of more than
30 calendar days (not necessarily all at
one time).
In the case of 1 or 2 above, the consumer
must also notify the manufacturer of the need
for the repair of the nonconformity at the
following address:
Ford Motor Company
16800 Executive Plaza Drive
Mail Drop 3NE-B
Dearborn, MI 48126
You are required to submit your warranty
dispute to BBB AUTO LINE before asserting
in court any rights or remedies conferred by
California Civil Code Section 1793.22(b). You
are also required to use BBB AUTO LINE
before exercising rights or seeking remedies
created by the Federal Magnuson-Moss
Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. sec. 2301 et seq. If
you choose to seek redress by pursuing
rights and remedies not created by California
Civil Code Section 1793.22(b) or the
Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, resort to BBB
AUTO LINE is not required by those statutes.
THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU
(BBB) AUTO LINE PROGRAM (U.S.
ONLY)
Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor
Company and to your dealer. If a warranty
concern has not been resolved using the
three-step procedure outlined earlier in this
chapter in the Getting the Services you need
section, you may be eligible to participate in
the BBB AUTO LINE program.
The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of
two parts – mediation and arbitration. During
mediation, a representative of the BBB will
contact both you and Ford Motor Company
to explore options for settlement of the claim.
If an agreement is not reached during
mediation or you do not want to participate
in mediation, and if your claim is eligible, you
may participate in the arbitration process. An
arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that
you can present your case in an informal
setting before an impartial person. The
arbitrator will consider the testimony
provided and make a decision after the
hearing.
271
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE
program are usually decided within forty days
after you file your claim with the BBB. You
are not bound by the decision, and may
reject the decision and proceed to court
where all findings of the BBB Auto Line
dispute, and decision, are admissible in the
court action. Should you choose to accept
the BBB AUTO LINE decision, Ford is then
bound by the decision, and must comply with
the decision within 30 days of receipt of your
acceptance letter.
BBB AUTO LINE Application: Using the
information provided below, please call or
write to request a program application. You
will be asked for your name and address,
general information about your new vehicle,
information about your warranty concerns,
and any steps you have already taken to try
to resolve them. A Customer Claim Form will
be mailed that will need to be completed,
signed and returned to the BBB along with
proof of ownership. Upon receipt, the BBB
will review the claim for eligibility under the
Program Summary Guidelines.
You can get more information by calling
BBB AUTO LINE at 1-800-955-5100, or
writing to:
BBB AUTO LINE
3033 Wilson Boulevard, Suite 600
Arlington, Virginia 22201
BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be
requested by calling the Ford Motor
Company Customer Relationship Center at
1-800-392-3673.
Note: Ford Motor Company reserves the
right to change eligibility limitations, modify
procedures, or to discontinue this process
at any time without notice and without
obligation.
UTILIZING THE
MEDIATION/ARBITRATION
PROGRAM (CANADA ONLY)
For vehicles delivered to authorized
Canadian dealers. In those cases where you
continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of
Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve
a factory-related vehicle service concern
have been unsatisfactory, Ford of Canada
participates in an impartial third party
mediation/arbitration program administered
by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration
Plan (CAMVAP).
The CAMVAP program is a straight forward
and relatively speedy alternative to resolve
a disagreement when all other efforts to
produce a settlement have failed. This
procedure is without cost to you and is
designed to eliminate the need for lengthy
and expensive legal proceedings.
272
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
In the CAMVAP program, impartial third-party
arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually
convenient times and places in an informal
environment. These impartial arbitrators
review the positions of the parties, make
decisions and, when appropriate, render
awards to resolve disputes. CAMVAP
decisions are fast, fair, and final as the
arbitrator’ s award is binding on both you and
Ford of Canada.
CAMVAP services are available in all
Canadian territories and provinces. For more
information, without charge or obligation, call
your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator
directly at 1-800-207-0685 or visit
www.camvap.ca.
GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE
THE U.S. AND CANADA
Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign
embassy or consulate. These officials can
inform you of local vehicle registration
regulations and where to find unleaded fuel
or petrol/gas engines or the proper sulfur
fuel for diesel engines.
If you cannot find the proper fuel
recommended for your vehicle, contact our
Customer Relationship Center.
The use of improper fuels in your vehicle
without proper conversion may damage the
effectiveness of your emission control system
and may cause engine knocking or serious
engine damage. Ford Motor Company or
Ford of Canada is not responsible for any
damage caused by use of improper fuel.
Using improper fuels may also result in
difficulty importing your vehicle back into the
United States.
If your vehicle must be serviced while you
are traveling or living in Asia-Pacific Region,
Sub-Saharan Africa, U.S. Virgin Islands and/or
Puerto Rico, Central America, the Caribbean,
and Israel and the Middle East, contact the
nearest authorized dealer. If the authorized
dealer cannot help you, contact the
corresponding Ford Customer Assistance
Center:
FORD MOTOR COMPANY
Customer Relationship Centers in:
273
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
E-mailFaxPhoneCustomer Relationship Center
[email protected]N/AN/AAsia Pacific
[email protected]-+1 313 594 4857Caribbean and Central America
[email protected]971 4 3327 266
Ford
Middle East
80004443673
Lincoln
80004441066
UAE
80004441066
Saudi Arabia
8008443673
Mobily and Zain cell phone users
in Saudi
800850078
[email protected]N/AN/ANorth Africa
[email protected]N/A+1-800-841-3673Puerto Rico and U.S. Virgin Islands
[email protected]N/A+1-313-594-4857Sub-Saharan Africa
N/A+82-02-1600-6003South Korea
274
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
To contact NHTSA, you may call the
Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);
go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write
to:
Administrator
1200 New Jersey Avenue, Southeast
Washington, D.C. 20590
You can also obtain other information
about motor vehicle safety from
http://www.safercar.gov.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
(CANADA ONLY)
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately
inform Transport Canada and Ford of
Canada.
Transport Canada Contact Information
http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/reporting-defects-motor-vehicles.html (English)Website
http://www.tc.gc.ca/fra/securiteautomobile/signaler-defauts-vehicules-automobiles.html (French)Website
1–800–333–0510Phone
Ford of Canada Contact Information
www.ford.caWebsite
1–800–565-3673Phone
276
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Customer Assistance
FUSE SPECIFICATION CHART
Power Distribution Box
WARNING: Always disconnect the
battery before servicing high current fuses.
WARNING: To reduce risk of electrical
shock, always replace the cover to the power
distribution box before reconnecting the
battery or refilling fluid reservoirs.
The power distribution box is in the engine
compartment. It has high-current fuses that
protect your vehicle's main electrical systems
from overloads.
If you disconnect and reconnect the battery,
you need to reset some features. See
Changing the 12V Battery (page 314).
277
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
E190797
278
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Moonroof.
30A
1
1
Starter relay.-2
Rain sensor.
15A
2
3
Blower motor relay.-4
Power point 4 - Back of console.
20A
1
5
Water pump relay.-6
Powertrain control module - vehicle power 1.
20A
2
7
Powertrain control module power.
Powertrain control module - vehicle power 2.
20A
2
8
Emissions components.
Powertrain control module relay.-9
Power point 1 - driver front.
20A
1
10
Powertrain control module - vehicle power 4.
15A
3
11
Ignition coils.
Powertrain control module - vehicle power 3.
15A
3
12
Non-emissions components.
279
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Vehicle power 5.
10A
2
13
Ignition coils.
Vehicle power 6.
10A
2
14
Ignition coils.
Run-start relay.-15
Power point 3 - rear.
20A
1
16
Power point 2 - front.
20A
1
17
Right hand side headlamp ballast.
20A
2
18
Run-start electronic power assist steering.
10A
2
19
Run-start lighting.
10A
2
20
Adaptive cruise control.
Run-start transmission control.
15A
2
21
Transmission oil pump start-stop.
Air conditioner clutch solenoid.
10A
2
22
Run-start: Blind spot information system, Rear view camera,
All-wheel drive (3.0L engine), Heads-up display, shifter.
15A
2
23
Voltage stability module.
280
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Not used.-24
Run-start anti-lock brake system.
10A
3
25
Run-start powertrain control module.
10A
3
26
Not used.-27
Not used.-28
MAF (mass air flow).
5A
2
29
Not used.-30
Not used.-31
Electric fan #1 relay.-32
Air conditioner clutch relay.-33
Not used.-34
Not used.-35
Not used.-36
Not used.-37
Electric fan 2 relay.-38
281
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Electric fan coil 2 and 3 relay.-39
Horn relay.-40
Not used.-41
Fuel pump relay coil.-42
Not used.-43
Left hand side headlamp ballast.
20A
2
44
USB smart charger.
5A
2
45
Not used.–46
Not used.–47
Not used.–48
Keep alive power.
10A
2
49
Horn.
20A
2
50
Not used.-51
Not used.-52
282
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Multi-contour seats.
10A
2
53
Brake on-off switch.
10A
3
54
Alt sensor.
10A
3
55
Not used.-86
1
M Case fuse.
2
Micro 2 fuse.
3
Micro 3 fuse.
Power Distribution Box - Bottom
There are fuses on the bottom of the fuse
box. To access the bottom of the fuse box,
do the following:
283
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
E145983
1. Release the two latches, located on both
sides of the fuse box.
2. Raise the inboard side of the fuse box
from the cradle.
3. Move the fuse box toward the center of
the engine compartment.
4. Pivot the outboard side of the fuse box
to access the bottom side.
284
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
E190798
285
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Not used.-56
Not used.-57
Fuel pump feed.
30A
1
58
Electric fan 3 (2.0L engine).
30A
2
59
Electric fan 3 (3.0L engine).
40A
2
Electric fan 1 (2.0L engine).
30A
2
60
Electric fan 1 (3.0L engine).
40A
2
Not used.-61
Body control module 1.
50A
2
62
Electric fan 2 (2.0L engine).
25A
1
63
Electric fan 2 (3.0L engine).
30A
1
All-wheel drive (torque vectoring).
30A
1
64
286
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Front heated seat.
20A
1
65
Not used (spare).
15A
2
66
Body control module 2.
50A
2
67
Heated rear window.
40A
1
68
Anti-lock brake system valves.
30A
1
69
Passenger seat.
30A
1
70
Not used.-71
Transmission oil pump.
20A
1
72
Not used (spare).
20A
2
73
Driver seat module.
30A
1
74
Wiper motor 1.
25A
1
75
Power decklid module.
30A
1
76
287
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Front climate controlled seats.
30A
1
77
Not used.-78
Blower motor.
40A
2
79
Wiper motor 2.
25A
1
80
Inverter.
40A
1
81
Not used.–82
Transmission Range Control Module shifter.
20A
1
83
Starter solenoid.
30A
1
84
Wide open panoramic roof 2.
30A
1
85
Anti-lock brake system pump.
60A
2
87
1
M case fuse.
2
J case fuse.
288
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel
The fuse panel is under the instrument panel
to the left of the steering column.
E145984
289
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Not used.-1
Lumbar.
7.5A
1
2
Driver door unlock.
20A
1
3
Not used (spare).
5A
1
4
Subwoofer amplifier.
20A
1
5
Not used (spare).
10A
2
6
Not used (spare).
10A
2
7
Not used (spare).
10A
2
8
Not used (spare).
10A
2
9
Power trunk logic.
5A
2
10
Keypad.
Cellphone passport module.
Not used (spare).
5A
2
11
290
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Climate control.
7.5A
2
12
Gear shift.
Steering wheel column.
7.5A
2
13
Cluster.
Datalink logic.
Extended power module.
10A
2
14
Datalink-Gateway module.
10A
2
15
Trunk release.
15A
1
16
Not used (spare).
5A
2
17
Push button stop-start.
5A
2
18
Extended power module.
7.5A
2
19
Adaptive headlamps.
7.5A
2
20
Humidity and in-car temperature sensor.
5A
2
21
Not used (spare).
5A
2
22
291
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Delayed accessory (power inverter logic all smart window
logic, driver window switch).
10A
1
23
Rear sunshade.
Moonroof.
Panoramic roof.
Central lock-unlock.
20A
1
24
Driver door (window, mirror).
30A
1
25
Front passenger door (window, mirror).
30A
1
26
Moonroof.
30A
1
27
Amplifier.
20A
1
28
Rear driver side door (window).
30A
1
29
Rear passenger side door (window).
30A
1
30
Not used (spare).
15A
1
31
Voice control.
10A
1
32
Radio frequency receiver.
Display.
292
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Protected ComponentFuse RatingFuse or Relay Number
Radio.
20A
1
33
Active noise control.
CD changer.
Run-start bus (fuse #19, 20, 21, 22, 35, 36, 37, circuit breaker).
30A
1
34
Not used (spare).
5A
1
35
Continuous control damping suspension module.
15A
1
36
Auto dimming rear view mirror.
Rear heated seats.
Heated steering wheel.
20A
1
37
Not used.-38
1
Micro 2 fuse.
2
Micro 3 fuse.
293
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
CHANGING A FUSE
Fuses
WARNING: Always replace a fuse with
one that has the specified amperage rating.
Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating
can cause severe wire damage and could
start a fire.
E217331
If electrical components in the vehicle are
not working, a fuse may have blown. Blown
fuses are identified by a broken wire within
the fuse. Check the appropriate fuses before
replacing any electrical components.
294
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Fuse Types
E207206
Fuse TypeCallout
Micro 2A
Micro 3B
MaxiC
295
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
Fuse TypeCallout
MiniD
M CaseE
J CaseF
J Case Low ProfileG
296
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Fuses
GENERAL INFORMATION
Have your vehicle serviced regularly to help
maintain its roadworthiness and resale value.
There is a large network of authorized
dealers that are there to help you with their
professional servicing expertise. We believe
that their specially trained technicians are
best qualified to service your vehicle properly
and expertly. They are supported by a wide
range of highly specialized tools developed
specifically for servicing your vehicle.
If your vehicle requires professional service,
an authorized dealer can provide the
necessary parts and service. Check your
warranty information to find out which parts
and services are covered.
Use only recommended fuels, lubricants,
fluids and service parts conforming to
specifications. Motorcraft® parts are
designed and built to provide the best
performance in your vehicle.
Precautions
• Do not work on a hot engine.
• Make sure that nothing gets caught in
moving parts.
• Do not work on a vehicle with the engine
running in an enclosed space, unless you
are sure you have enough ventilation.
• Keep all open flames and other burning
material (such as cigarettes) away from
the battery and all fuel related parts.
Working with the Engine Off
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Switch off the engine.
3. Block the wheels.
Working with the Engine On
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
vehicle damage and personal burn injuries,
do not start your engine with the air cleaner
removed and do not remove it while the
engine is running.
1. Set the parking brake and shift the
transmission to park (P).
2. Block the wheels.
OPENING AND CLOSING THE
HOOD
Opening the Hood
E142457
1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
handle under the left-hand side of the
instrument panel.
297
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
E269403
2. Slightly lift the hood.
3. Release the hood latch by pushing the
secondary release lever to your left-hand
side.
E269400
4. Open the hood. The hood strut supports
the hood.
Closing the Hood
1. Lower the hood and allow it to drop
under its own weight for the last 8–12 in
(20–30 cm).
Note: Make sure that the hood is correctly
closed.
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 2.0L
298
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
E179024
299
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 304).
A
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil
Dipstick (page 302).
B
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 302).
C
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 313).
D
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 314).
E
Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuses (page 277).
F
Air filter. See Changing the
Engine Air Filter (page 317).
G
Washer system fluid reservoir. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 313).
H
UNDER HOOD OVERVIEW - 3.0L
300
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
E173375
Engine coolant reservoir. See
Engine Coolant Check (page 304).
A.
Engine oil filler cap. See Engine
Oil Check (page 302).
B.
Engine oil dipstick. See Engine Oil
Dipstick (page 302).
C.
Brake fluid reservoir. See Brake
Fluid Check (page 313).
D.
Battery. See Changing the 12V
Battery (page 314).
E.
Engine compartment fuse box.
See Fuses (page 277).
F.
301
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
Air filter assembly. See Changing
the Engine Air Filter (page 317).
G.
Automatic transmission dipstick.
See Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check (page 308).
H.
Washer fluid reservoir. See
Washer Fluid Check (page 313).
I.
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 2.0L
E142462
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK - 3.0L
E170468
A B
MINA
MAXB
ENGINE OIL CHECK
To check the engine oil level consistently
and accurately, do the following:
1. Make sure the parking brake is on. Make
sure the transmission is in park (P) or
neutral (N).
2. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature.
3. Make sure that your vehicle is on level
ground.
4. Switch the engine off and wait 15 minutes
for the oil to drain into the oil pan.
Checking the engine oil level too soon
after you switch the engine off may result
in an inaccurate reading.
5. Open the hood. See Opening and
Closing the Hood (page 297).
6. Remove the dipstick and wipe it with a
clean, lint-free cloth. See Under Hood
Overview (page 298).
7. Replace the dipstick and remove it again
to check the oil level. See Under Hood
Overview (page 298).
8. Make sure that the oil level is between
the maximum and minimum marks. If the
oil level is at the minimum mark, add oil
immediately. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 373).
9. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
302
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
Note: Do not remove the dipstick when the
engine is running.
Note: If the oil level is between the
maximum and minimum marks, the oil level
is acceptable. Do not add oil.
Note: The oil consumption of new engines
reaches its normal level after approximately
3,000 mi (5,000 km).
Adding Engine Oil
WARNING: Do not remove the filler
cap when the engine is running.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage that may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E142732
Only use oils certified for gasoline engines
by the American Petroleum Institute (API).
An oil with this trademark symbol conforms
to the current engine and emission system
protection standards and fuel economy
requirements of the International Lubricants
Specification Advisory Committee (ILSAC).
To top up the engine oil level do the
following:
1. Clean the area surrounding the engine
oil filler cap before you remove it.
2. Remove the engine oil filler cap. See
Under Hood Overview (page 298). Turn
it counterclockwise and remove it.
3. Add engine oil that meets Ford
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 373). You may have
to use a funnel to pour the engine oil into
the opening.
4. Recheck the oil level.
5. If the oil level is correct, replace the
dipstick and make sure it is fully seated.
6. Replace the engine oil filler cap. Turn it
clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
Note: Do not add oil further than the
maximum mark. Oil levels above the
maximum mark may cause engine damage.
Note: Make sure you install the oil filler cap
correctly.
Note: Soak up any spillage with an
absorbent cloth immediately.
OIL CHANGE INDICATOR RESET
Use the information display controls on the
steering wheel to reset the oil change
indicator.
303
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
From the main menu scroll to:
Action and descriptionMessage
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Settings
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Vehicle
Press the right arrow button,
then from this menu scroll to
the following message.
Oil Life
Press and hold the OK button
until the instrument cluster
displays the following
message.
Hold OK to
Reset
Reset Successful
When the oil change indicator
resets the instrument cluster
displays 100%.
Remaining Life
{00}%
Action and descriptionMessage
If the instrument cluster
displays one of the following
messages, repeat the
process.
Not Reset
Reset Cancelled
ENGINE COOLANT CHECK
WARNING: Do not remove the coolant
reservoir cap when the cooling system is hot.
Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to
cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility
of scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not put coolant in the
windshield washer reservoir. If sprayed on
the windshield, coolant could make it difficult
to see through the windshield.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
personal injury, make sure the engine is cool
before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief
cap. The cooling system is under pressure.
Steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully
when you loosen the cap slightly.
WARNING: Do not add coolant further
than the MAX mark.
When the engine is cold, check the
concentration and level of the coolant at the
intervals listed in the scheduled maintenance
information. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 504).
Note: Make sure that the coolant level is
between the MIN and the MAX marks on
the coolant reservoir.
Note: Coolant expands when it is hot. The
level may extend beyond the MAX mark.
304
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
Maintain coolant concentration within 48%
to 50%, which equates to a freeze point
between -30°F (-34°C) and -34°F (-37°C).
Coolant concentration should be checked
using a refractometer. We recommend,
Robinair® Coolant and Battery Refractometer
75240 (Rotunda tool part number:
ROB75240). We do not recommend the use
of hydrometers or coolant test strips for
measuring coolant concentration.
Note: Automotive fluids are not
interchangeable. Do not use coolant or
windshield washer fluid outside of its
specified function and vehicle location.
Note: Do not use stop leak pellets, cooling
system sealants, or non-specified additives
as they can cause damage to the engine
cooling or heating systems. Resulting
component damage may not be covered by
the vehicle Warranty.
Adding Coolant
WARNING: Do not add engine coolant
when the engine is hot. Failure to follow this
instruction could result in personal injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the coolant
reservoir cap when the cooling system is hot.
Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to
cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility
of scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
It is very important to use prediluted coolant
meeting the correct specification in order to
avoid plugging the small passageways in the
engine cooling system. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 373). Incorrect
prediluted coolant use can cause damage
not covered by the vehicle Warranty.
If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
To top up the coolant level do the following:
1. Unscrew the cap slowly. Any pressure
escapes as you unscrew the cap.
2. Add prediluted coolant meeting the
correct specification. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 366).
3. Add enough prediluted coolant to reach
the correct level.
4. Replace the coolant reservoir cap, turn
it clockwise until you feel a strong
resistance.
5. Check the coolant level in the coolant
reservoir the next few times you drive
your vehicle.
Note: During normal vehicle operation, the
coolant may change color from orange to
pink or light red. As long as the coolant is
clear and uncontaminated, this color change
does not indicate the coolant has degraded
nor does it require the coolant to be drained,
the system to be flushed, or the coolant to
be replaced.
Do not mix different colors or types of
prediluted coolant in your vehicle. Mixing of
prediluted coolant or using an incorrect
prediluted coolant may harm the engine or
cooling system components and may not be
covered by the vehicle Warranty.
In case of emergency, you can add a large
amount of water without engine coolant in
order to reach a vehicle service location. In
this instance, qualified personnel:
305
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
1. Must drain the cooling system.
2. Chemically clean the cooling system.
3. Refill with prediluted coolant as soon as
possible.
Water alone, without prediluted coolant, can
cause engine damage from corrosion,
overheating or freezing.
Do not use the following as a coolant
substitute:
• Alcohol.
• Methanol.
• Brine.
• Any coolant mixed with alcohol or
methanol antifreeze.
Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine
damage from overheating or freezing.
Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to
the coolant. These can be harmful and
compromise the corrosion protection of the
coolant.
Recycled Coolant
We do not recommend the use of recycled
coolant as an approved recycling process is
not yet available.
Dispose of used engine coolant in an
appropriate manner. Follow your
community's regulations and standards for
recycling and disposing of automotive fluids.
Severe Climates
If you drive in extremely cold climates:
• It may be necessary to increase the
coolant concentration above 50%.
• A coolant concentration of 60% provides
improved freeze point protection.
Coolant concentrations above 60%
decrease the overheat protection
characteristics of the coolant and may
cause engine damage.
If you drive in extremely hot climates:
• It may be necessary to decrease the
coolant concentration to 40%.
• A coolant concentration of 40% provides
improved overheat protection. Coolant
concentrations below 40% decrease the
freeze and corrosion protection
characteristics of the coolant and may
cause engine damage.
Vehicles driven year-round in non-extreme
climates should use prediluted coolant for
optimum cooling system and engine
protection.
Fail-Safe Cooling
Fail-safe cooling allows you to temporarily
drive your vehicle before any incremental
component damage occurs. The fail-safe
distance depends on ambient temperature,
vehicle load and terrain.
How Fail-Safe Cooling Works
If the engine begins to overheat, the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone:
306
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
A warning lamp illuminates and a
message may appear in the
information display.
If the engine reaches a preset
over-temperature condition, the engine
automatically switches to alternating cylinder
operation. Each disabled cylinder acts as an
air pump and cools the engine.
When this occurs, your vehicle still operates,
however:
• Engine power is limited.
• The air conditioning system turns off.
Continued operation increases the engine
temperature, causing the engine to
completely shut down. Your steering and
braking effort increases in this situation.
When the engine temperature cools, you can
re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
When Fail-Safe Mode Is Activated
WARNING: Fail-safe mode is for use
during emergencies only. Operate your
vehicle in fail-safe mode only as long as
necessary to bring your vehicle to rest in a
safe location and seek immediate repairs.
When in fail-safe mode, your vehicle will have
limited power, will not be able to maintain
high-speed operation, and may completely
shut down without warning, potentially losing
engine power, power steering assist, and
power brake assist, which may increase the
possibility of a crash resulting in serious
injury.
WARNING: Do not remove the coolant
reservoir cap when the cooling system is hot.
Wait 10 minutes for the cooling system to
cool down. Cover the coolant reservoir cap
with a thick cloth to prevent the possibility
of scalding and slowly remove the cap.
Failure to follow this instruction could result
in personal injury.
Your vehicle has limited engine power when
in the fail-safe mode, drive your vehicle with
caution. Your vehicle does not maintain
high-speed operation and the engine may
operate poorly.
Remember that the engine is capable of
automatically shutting down to prevent
engine damage. In this situation:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and switch the engine off.
2. If you are a member of a roadside
assistance program, we recommend that
you contact your roadside assistance
service provider.
3. If this is not possible, wait a short period
for the engine to cool.
4. Check the coolant level. If the coolant
level is at or below the minimum mark,
add prediluted coolant immediately.
5. When the engine temperature cools, you
can re-start the engine. Have your vehicle
checked as soon as possible to minimize
engine damage.
307
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management (If Equipped)
WARNING: To reduce the risk of crash
and injury, be prepared that the vehicle
speed may reduce and the vehicle may not
be able to accelerate with full power until the
coolant temperature reduces.
If you tow a trailer with your vehicle, the
engine may temporarily reach a higher
temperature during severe operating
conditions, for example ascending a long or
steep grade in high ambient temperatures.
At this time, you may notice the coolant
temperature gauge moves toward the red
zone and a message may appear in the
information display.
You may notice a reduction in vehicle speed
caused by reduced engine power in order
to manage the engine coolant temperature.
Your vehicle may enter this mode if certain
high-temperature and high-load conditions
take place. The amount of speed reduction
depends on vehicle loading, grade and
ambient temperature. If this occurs, there is
no need to pull off the road. You can
continue to drive your vehicle.
The air conditioning may automatically turn
on and off during severe operating
conditions to protect the engine from
overheating. When the coolant temperature
decreases to the normal operating
temperature, the air conditioning turns on.
If the coolant temperature gauge moves fully
into the red zone, or if the coolant
temperature warning or service engine soon
messages appear in your information display,
do the following:
1. Pull off the road as soon as safely
possible and shift the transmission into
park (P).
2. Leave the engine running until the
coolant temperature gauge needle
returns to the normal position. If the
temperature does not drop after several
minutes, follow the remaining steps.
3. Switch the engine off and wait for it to
cool. Check the coolant level.
4. If the coolant level is at or below the
minimum mark, add prediluted coolant
immediately.
5. If the coolant level is normal, restart the
engine and continue.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
FLUID CHECK
6F35 Transmission (If Equipped)
Note: Transmission fluid should be checked
by an authorized dealer. If required, fluid
should be added by an authorized dealer.
The automatic transmission does not have
a transmission fluid dipstick.
308
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission does
not consume fluid. However, the fluid level
should be checked if the transmission is not
properly working. For example, if the
transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage. See
Scheduled Maintenance (page 504).
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
6F55 Transmission (If Equipped)
WARNING: The dipstick and
surrounding components are hot. Use gloves
when moving components and checking the
transmission fluid level. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious personal
injury.
Note: Automatic transmission fluid expands
when warmed. To obtain an accurate fluid
check, drive the vehicle until it is warmed up
(approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). If your
vehicle has been operated for an extended
period at high speeds, in city traffic during
hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle
should be switched off until normal operating
temperatures are reached to allow the fluid
to cool before checking. Depending on
vehicle use, cooling times could take up to
30 minutes or longer.
Refer to your scheduled maintenance
information for scheduled intervals for fluid
checks and changes. Your transmission does
not consume fluid. However, the fluid level
should be checked if the transmission is not
working properly. For example, if the
transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you
notice some sign of fluid leakage.
1. Drive the vehicle 20 mph (30 km/h) or
until it reaches normal operating
temperature
2. Park the vehicle on a level surface and
engage the parking brake.
3. With the parking brake engaged and your
foot on the brake pedal, start the engine
and move the gearshift lever through all
of the gear ranges. Allow a minimum of
10 seconds for each gear to engage.
4. Put the gearshift lever in park (P) and
leave the engine running.
Note: You will need to move the air filter
assembly to access the transmission
dipstick.
5. Remove the dipstick, wiping it clean with
a clean, dry lint free rag. If necessary,
refer to Under hood overview in this
chapter for the location of the dipstick.
6. Install the dipstick making sure it is fully
seated in the filler tube by turning it to
the locked position.
7. Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid
level. The fluid should be in the
designated areas for normal operating
temperature.
309
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
Moving the Air Filter Assembly (Accessing
the Dipstick)
WARNING: Do not start the engine with
the air filter removed. This can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty
and can result in serious injury.
E158839
A
B
C
D
1. Shut the engine off.
2. Clean the area around the clamp that
connects the air filter assembly to the
rubber hose (A).
E158840
3. Remove the bolt cover (if equipped).
4. Remove two bolts that attach the air filter
assembly to the front of the vehicle (B).
5. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose (A).
6. Remove the harness retaining clip by
pulling up (C). Do not disconnect the
sensor (D).
7. Without disconnecting the sensor (D), pull
the air filter assembly up to disconnect
the air filter assembly from the seated
grommets located underneath the air
filter assembly.
310
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
E158841
8. Rotate the air filter assembly 90 degrees
counterclockwise and reinstall into the
rubber hose.
9. Tighten the clamp (A).
10. The transmission fluid level indicator
can now be accessed.
Checking the fluid level
Low fluid level
E158842
If the fluid level is below the MIN range of
the dipstick, add fluid to reach the hash mark
level.
Note: If the fluid level is below the MIN level,
do not drive the vehicle. An underfill
condition may cause shift or engagement
concerns or possible damage.
Correct fluid level
E158843
The transmission fluid should be checked at
normal operating temperature 180°F-200°F
(82°C-93°C) on a level surface. The normal
operating temperature can be reached after
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) of driving.
The transmission fluid level should be
targeted within the cross-hatch area if at
normal operating temperature 180°F-200°F
(82°C-93°C).
311
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
High fluid level
E158844
If the fluid level is above the MAX range of
the dipstick, remove fluid to reach the
hashmark level.
Note: Fluid level above the MAX level may
cause shift or engagement concerns or
possible damage. High fluid levels can be
caused by an overheating condition. If your
vehicle has been operated for an extended
period at high speeds, in city traffic during
hot weather or pulling a trailer, the vehicle
should be switched off until normal operating
temperatures are reached. Depending on
vehicle use, cooling times could take up to
30 minutes or longer.
Adjusting Automatic Transmission Fluid
Levels
E158845
E158846
Before adding any fluid, make sure the
correct type is used. The type of fluid used
is normally indicated on the dipstick and also
in the Technical Specifications section in this
chapter.
Note: An overfill condition of transmission
fluid may cause shift or engagement
concerns or possible damage.
Do not use supplemental transmission fluid
additives, treatments or cleaning agents. The
use of these materials may affect
transmission operation and result in damage
to internal transmission components.
Reinstall the air filter assembly. After the fluid
level has been checked and adjusted as
necessary, do the following:
1. Shut the engine off.
2. Loosen the clamp holding the air filter
assembly to the rubber hose.
3. Rotate the air filter assembly 90 degrees
clockwise without disconnecting the
sensor.
4. Seat the air filter assembly back into the
grommets by pushing down on the air
filter assembly.
5. Tighten the clamp.
6. Install and tighten two bolts that attach
air filter assembly to the front of the
vehicle.
7. Install the bolt cover (if equipped).
312
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
8. Reinstall the harness retaining clip into
the front of the air filter assembly.
BRAKE FLUID CHECK
WARNING: Do not use any fluid other
than the recommended brake fluid as this
will reduce brake efficiency. Use of incorrect
fluid could result in the loss of vehicle
control, serious personal injury or death.
WARNING: Only use brake fluid from
a sealed container. Contamination with dirt,
water, petroleum products or other materials
may result in brake system damage or failure.
Failure to adhere to this warning could result
in the loss of vehicle control, serious
personal injury or death.
WARNING: Do not allow the fluid to
touch your skin or eyes. If this happens, rinse
the affected areas immediately with plenty
of water and contact your physician.
WARNING: A fluid level between the
MAX and MIN lines is within the normal
operating range and there is no need to add
fluid. A fluid level not in the normal operating
range could compromise the performance
of the system. Have your vehicle checked
immediately.
To avoid fluid contamination, the reservoir
cap must remain in place and fully tight,
unless you are adding fluid.
Only use fluid that meets Ford specifications.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
366).
WASHER FLUID CHECK
WARNING: If you operate your vehicle
in temperatures below 41.0°F (5°C), use
washer fluid with antifreeze protection.
Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze
protection in cold weather could result in
impaired windshield vision and increase the
risk of injury or accident.
Note: The front and rear washer systems
are supplied from the same reservoir.
Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low.
Only use a washer fluid that meets our
specifications. See Capacities and
Specifications (page 366).
State or local regulations on volatile organic
compounds may restrict the use of methanol,
a common windshield washer antifreeze
additive. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be
used only if they provide cold weather
protection without damaging the vehicle’s
paint finish, wiper blades or washer system.
FUEL FILTER
2.0L Engines and 3.0L Engines with
FWD
Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel
filter that is integrated with the fuel tank.
Regular maintenance or replacement is not
needed.
313
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
3.0L Engines with AWD
The fuel filter on your vehicle must be
replaced at the specified service interval.
See Scheduled Maintenance (page 504).
CHANGING THE 12V BATTERY
WARNING: Batteries normally produce
explosive gases which can cause personal
injury. Therefore, do not allow flames, sparks
or lighted substances to come near the
battery. When working near the battery,
always shield your face and protect your
eyes. Always provide correct ventilation.
WARNING: When lifting a plastic-cased
battery, excessive pressure on the end walls
could cause acid to flow through the vent
caps, resulting in personal injury and damage
to the vehicle or battery. Lift the battery with
a battery carrier or with your hands on
opposite corners.
WARNING: Keep batteries out of reach
of children. Batteries contain sulfuric acid.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing.
Shield your eyes when working near the
battery to protect against possible splashing
of acid solution. In case of acid contact with
skin or eyes, flush immediately with water
for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt
medical attention. If acid is swallowed, call a
physician immediately.
WARNING: Battery posts, terminals
and related accessories contain lead and
lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
WARNING: For vehicles with
Auto-Start-Stop the battery requirement is
different. You must replace the battery with
one of exactly the same specification.
Your vehicle is fitted with a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery which normally
does not require additional water.
When a battery replacement is required, you
must use a recommended replacement
battery that matches the electrical
requirements of the vehicle.
Note: If your vehicle has a battery cover,
after cleaning or replacing the battery, make
sure you reinstall it.
Note: See an authorized dealer for battery
access, testing, or replacement.
To make sure the battery management
system works correctly, do not connect an
electrical device ground connection directly
to the battery negative post. This can cause
inaccurate measurements of the battery
condition and potential incorrect system
operation.
Note: If you add electrical accessories or
components to the vehicle, it may adversely
affect battery performance and durability.
This may also affect the performance of
other electrical systems in the vehicle.
If you see any corrosion on the battery or
terminals, remove the cables from the
terminals and clean with a wire brush. You
can neutralize the acid with a solution of
baking soda and water.
314
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
Because your vehicle’s engine is
electronically-controlled by a computer,
some engine control settings are maintained
by power from the battery. Some engine
computer settings, like the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy, optimize the driveability and
performance of the engine. The clock and
radio station presets are also maintained in
memory by power from the low-voltage
battery. These settings are erased when a
technician disconnects and connects the
low-voltage battery.
To restore the settings, do the following:
Note: Until you switch the ignition to the on
position, you will receive a message in your
information display stating that your vehicle
is not in park.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Shift into park (P) or neutral (N).
3. Switch off all accessories.
4. Press the brake pedal and start your
vehicle.
5. Run the engine until it reaches normal
operating temperature. While the engine
is warming up, complete the following:
Reset the clock. See Audio Unit (page
391). Reset the power windows
bounce-back feature. See Power
Windows (page 95). Reset the radio
station presets. See Audio Unit (page
391).
6. Allow the engine to idle for at least one
minute.
7. Drive the vehicle at least 10 mi (16 km) to
completely relearn the idle trim and fuel
trim strategy.
Note: If you do not allow the engine to
relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy, the
idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely
affected until the engine computer
eventually relearns the idle trim and fuel trim
strategy.
Note: Certain features may not operate if
the battery monitor system is not reset with
a scan tool following a jump start or battery
replacement. Normal electrical accessory
operation should resume after your vehicle
is left undisturbed for 8 hours.
Make sure that you dispose of old batteries
in an environmentally friendly way. Seek
advice from your local authority about
recycling old batteries.
If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days
without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the battery
cables to maintain battery charge for quick
starting.
CHECKING THE WIPER BLADES
E142463
Run the tip of your fingers over the edge of
the blade to check for roughness.
Clean the wiper blades with washer fluid or
water applied with a soft sponge or cloth.
315
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES
Replace the wiper blades at least annually
for optimum performance.
You can improve poor wiper quality by
cleaning the wiper blades and the
windshield.
Note: Do not hold the wiper blade when
lifting the wiper arm.
Note: Make sure that the wiper arm does
not spring back against the glass when the
wiper blade is not attached.
E129990
1
1
2
1. Pull the wiper blade and arm away from
the glass. Press the locking buttons
together.
2. Slightly rotate the wiper blade.
3. Remove the wiper blade.
4. Install in the reverse order.
Note: Make sure that the wiper blade locks
into place.
ADJUSTING THE HEADLAMPS
Vertical Aim Adjustment
The headlamps on your vehicle are properly
aimed at the assembly plant. If your vehicle
has been in an accident, the alignment of
your headlamps should be checked by your
authorized dealer.
Headlamp Aiming Target
E142592
8 feet (2.4 meters)A
Center height of lamp to groundB
25 feet (7.6 meters)C
Horizontal reference lineD
Vertical Aim Adjustment Procedure
1. Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall
or screen on a level surface,
approximately 25 ft (7.6 m) away.
316
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
2. Measure the height of the headlamp bulb
center from the ground and mark an 8 ft
(2.4 m) horizontal reference line on the
vertical wall or screen at this height.
Note: To see a clearer light pattern for
adjusting, you may want to block the light
from one headlamp while adjusting the
other.
3. Turn on the low beam headlamps to
illuminate the wall or screen and open
the hood.
E142465
4. On the wall or screen you will observe a
flat zone of high intensity light located at
the top of the right hand portion of the
beam pattern. If the top edge of the high
intensity light zone is not at the horizontal
reference line, the headlamp will need
to be adjusted.
E150095
5. Locate the vertical adjuster on each
headlamp. Using a Phillips #2
screwdriver, turn the adjuster either
clockwise or counterclockwise in order
to adjust the vertical aim of the
headlamp. The horizontal edge of the
brighter light should touch the horizontal
reference line.
6. Close the hood and turn off the lamps.
Horizontal Aim Adjustment
The horizontal aim does not require any
adjustment for this vehicle. If a fault occurs,
have the system checked by an authorized
dealer.
CHANGING A BULB
Replacing Bulbs
For replacing bulbs, see your authorized
dealer.
CHANGING THE ENGINE AIR
FILTER
WARNING: Do not start the engine with
the air filter removed. This can cause
damage not covered by the vehicle Warranty
and can result in serious injury.
317
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
Only use the specified replacement air filter.
See Capacities and Specifications (page
366).
Change the air filter element at the correct
interval. See Scheduled Maintenance (page
504).
When changing the engine air filter, do not
allow debris or foreign material to enter the
air induction system. The engine and
turbocharger are susceptible to damage from
even small particles.
Note: Failure to use the correct air filter
element may result in severe engine
damage. Resulting component damage may
not be covered by the vehicle Warranty.
E146427
1. Release the clamps that secure the air
filter cover to the housing.
2. Carefully lift the air filter housing cover.
3. Remove the air filter element from the air
filter housing.
4. Wipe any dirt or debris from the air filter
housing and cover to make sure no dirt
gets in the engine and that you have a
good seal.
5. Install a new air filter element. Be careful
not to crimp the filter element edges
between the air filter housing and cover.
This could cause filter damage and allow
unfiltered air to enter the engine if it is
not properly seated.
6. Install the air filter housing cover.
7. Engage the clips to secure the air filter
housing cover to the air filter housing.
318
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Maintenance
GENERAL INFORMATION
Your dealer has many quality products
available to clean your vehicle and protect
its finishes.
CLEANING PRODUCTS
Materials
For best results, use the following products
or products of equivalent quality:
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Bug and Tar Remover, ZC-42 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M5B194-BMotorcraft® Custom Bright Metal Cleaner, ZC-15 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P4-AMotorcraft® Detail Wash, ZC-3-A (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P3-AMotorcraft® Engine Shampoo and Degreaser, ZC-20 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Engine Shampoo, CXC-66-A (Canada)
Motorcraft® Premium Leather and Vinyl Cleaner, ZC-56 (U.S. & Canada)
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Cleaner, CXC-101 (Canada)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant, ZC-32-B2 (U.S.)
WSS-M14P19-AMotorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid, CXC-37-A/B/D/F (Canada)
Motorcraft® Professional Strength Carpet & Upholstery Cleaner, ZC-54 (U.S. & Canada)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Premium Glass Cleaner, CXC-100 (Canada)
319
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
SpecificationName
Motorcraft® Spot and Stain Remover, ZC-14 (U.S.)
ESR-M14P5-AMotorcraft® Ultra-Clear Spray Glass Cleaner, ZC-23 (U.S.)
Motorcraft® Wheel and Tire Cleaner, ZC-37-A (U.S. & Canada)
CLEANING THE EXTERIOR
Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or
lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo,
we recommend Motorcraft Detail Wash.
• Never use strong household detergents
or soap, for example dish washing or
laundry liquid. These products can
discolor and spot painted surfaces.
• Never wash your vehicle when it is hot
to the touch, or during strong or direct
sunlight.
• Dry your vehicle with a chamois or soft
terry cloth towel to eliminate water
spotting.
• Immediately remove fuel spillages, bird
droppings, insect deposits and road tar.
These may cause damage to your
vehicle’ s paintwork or trim over time. We
recommend Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
• Remove any exterior accessories, for
example antennas, before entering a car
wash.
• When filling with AdBlue®, remove any
residue on painted surfaces immediately.
Note: Suntan lotions and insect repellents
can damage painted surfaces. If these
substances come in contact with your
vehicle, wash the affected area as soon as
possible.
Cleaning the Headlamps
Note: Do not scrape the headlamp lenses
or use abrasives, alcoholic solvents or
chemical solvents to clean them.
Note: Do not wipe the headlamps when they
are dry.
320
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Exterior Chrome Parts
• Apply a high quality-cleaning product to
bumpers and other chrome parts. Follow
the manufacturer’s instructions. We
recommend Motorcraft Custom Bright
Metal Cleaner.
• Do not apply the cleaning product to hot
surfaces. Do not leave the cleaning
product on chrome surfaces longer than
the time recommended.
• Using non-recommended cleaners can
result in severe and permanent cosmetic
damage.
Note: Never use abrasive materials, for
example steel wool or plastic pads as they
can scratch the chrome surface.
Note: Do not use chrome cleaner, metal
cleaner or polish on wheels or wheel covers.
Exterior Plastic Parts
For routine cleaning we recommend
Motorcraft Detail Wash. If tar or grease spots
are present, we recommend Motorcraft Bug
and Tar Remover.
Stripes or Graphics (If Equipped)
Hand washing your vehicle is preferred
however, pressure washing may be used
under the following conditions:
• Do not use water pressure higher than
2,000 psi (14,000 kPa).
• Do not use water hotter than 179°F (82°C).
• Use a spray with a 40° wide spray angle
pattern.
• Keep the nozzle at a 12 in (305 mm)
distance and 90° angle to your vehicle's
surface.
Note: Holding the pressure washer nozzle
at an angle to the vehicle's surface may
damage graphics and cause the edges to
peel away from the vehicle's surface.
Underbody
Regularly clean the underside of your vehicle
using water. Keep body and door drain holes
free of debris or foreign material.
Under Hood
For removing black rubber marks from under
the hood we recommend Motorcraft Wheel
and Tire Cleaner or Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover.
WAXING
Regular waxing is necessary to protect your
car's paint from the elements. We
recommend that you wash and wax the
painted surface once or twice a year.
When washing and waxing, park your vehicle
in a shaded area out of direct sunlight.
Always wash your vehicle before applying
wax.
• Use a quality wax that does not contain
abrasives.
• Follow the manufacturer’s instructions to
apply and remove the wax.
• Apply a small amount of wax in a
back-and-forth motion, not in circles.
321
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
• Do not allow wax to come in contact with
any non-body (low-gloss black) colored
trim. The wax will discolor or stain the
parts over time.
• Roof racks.
• Bumpers.
• Grained door handles.
• Side moldings.
• Mirror housings.
• Windshield cowl area.
• Do not apply wax to glass areas.
• After waxing, your car's paint should feel
smooth, and be free of streaks and
smudges.
CLEANING THE ENGINE
Engines are more efficient when they are
clean because grease and dirt buildup keep
the engine warmer than normal.
When washing:
• Take care when using a power washer
to clean the engine. The high-pressure
fluid could penetrate the sealed parts
and cause damage.
• Do not spray a hot engine with cold water
to avoid cracking the engine block or
other engine components.
• Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and
Degreaser on all parts that require
cleaning and pressure rinse clean. In
Canada, use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo.
• Never wash or rinse the engine while it
is hot or running; water in the running
engine may cause internal damage.
• Never wash or rinse any ignition coil,
spark plug wire or spark plug well, or the
area in and around these locations.
• Cover the battery, power distribution box,
and air filter assembly to prevent water
damage when cleaning the engine.
CLEANING THE WINDOWS AND
WIPER BLADES
Car wash chemicals and environmental
fallout can result in windshield and wiper
blade contamination. Dirty windshield and
wipers will result in poor windshield wiper
operation. Keep the windshield and wiper
blades clean to maintain windshield wiper
performance.
To clean the windshield and wiper blades:
• Clean the windshield with a non-abrasive
glass cleaner. When cleaning the interior
of the windshield, avoid getting any glass
cleaner on the instrument panel or door
panels. Wipe any glass cleaner off these
surfaces immediately.
• For windshields contaminated with tree
sap, chemicals, wax or bugs, clean the
entire windshield using steel wool (no
greater than 0000 grade) in a circular
motion and rinse with water.
• Clean the wiper blades with isopropyl
rubbing alcohol or windshield washer
concentrate.
322
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Note: Do not use razor blades or other
sharp objects to clean or remove decals from
the inside of the heated rear window. The
vehicle warranty does not cover damage
caused to the heated rear window grid lines.
CLEANING THE INTERIOR
WARNING: Do not use cleaning
solvents, bleach or dye on the vehicle’s
safety belts, as these actions may weaken
the belt webbing.
WARNING: On vehicles equipped with
seat-mounted airbags, do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents. Such products
could contaminate the side airbag system
and affect performance of the side airbag in
a collision.
Note: Follow the same procedure for
cleaning leather seats when cleaning leather
interior. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
325).
Note: Do not use household cleaning
products or glass cleaners, which can stain
and discolor the fabric and affect the flame
retardant abilities of the seat materials.
For fabric, carpets, cloth seats, safety belts
and seats equipped with side airbags:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Remove light stains and soil with
Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet
& Upholstery Cleaner.
For grease or tar stains:
• Spot clean the area with Motorcraft Spot
and Stain Remover (Motorcraft
Multi-Purpose Cleaner in Canada).
• If a ring forms on the fabric after spot
cleaning, clean the entire area
immediately (but do not oversaturate) or
the ring will set.
Cleaning Alcantara Microfiber Cloth
Fabric (If Equipped)
Note: Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric is
made of polyester microfiber with
micro-porous polyurethane. Using
commercially available fabric cleaners can
cause permanent damage.
Note: Do not use commercially available
leather and vinyl cleaning products on
Alcantara microfiber cloth fabric.
Note: Some vehicles may have Alcantara
microfiber cloth fabric on the seats,
headliner, floor mats and door panels.
Depending on the type of stain, use water,
lemon juice or pure ethyl alcohol when
cleaning. For cleaning Alcantara microfiber
cloth, refer to the following chart:
323
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Cleaning ProcedureType of Stain
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Fruit juice, jam, jelly, syrup or ketchup.
Use cold water and rinse by dabbing with clean water. Avoid warm
water because it makes these substances coagulate.
Blood, egg, excrement or urine.
Use lukewarm water. If the color remains, treat with lemon juice and
then rinse.
Liquor, alcoholic beverages, wine, beer, cola and tea.
Use lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with clean water.Indelible pencil, cocoa, chocolate, pastry with cream or chocolate, ice
cream or mustard.
Use lemon juice, wipe with lukewarm water and rinse by dabbing with
clean water.
Vinegar, hair gel, tomato sauce or coffee with sugar.
Use ethyl alcohol, then dab with water.Dye transfer and all other stains.
324
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
CLEANING THE INSTRUMENT
PANEL AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER LENS
WARNING: Do not use chemical
solvents or strong detergents when cleaning
the steering wheel or instrument panel to
avoid contamination of the airbag system.
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces. See Cleaning Leather Seats (page
325).
Clean the instrument panel and cluster lens
with a clean, damp and soft cloth, then use
a clean, dry and soft cloth to dry these areas.
• Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase
the gloss of the upper portion of the
instrument panel. The dull finish in this
area helps protect you from undesirable
windshield reflection.
• Do not use any household cleaning
products or glass cleaners as these may
damage the finish of the instrument
panel, interior trim and cluster lens.
• Wash or wipe your hands clean if you
have been in contact with certain
products such as insect repellent and
suntan lotion to avoid possible damage
to the interior painted surfaces.
• Do not allow air fresheners and hand
sanitizers to spill onto interior surfaces.
If a spill occurs, wipe off immediately.
Your warranty may not cover these
damages.
If a staining liquid like coffee or juice has
been spilled on the instrument panel or on
interior trim surfaces:
1. Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean, soft
cloth as quickly as possible.
2. Use Motorcraft Premium Leather and
Vinyl Cleaner or a commercially available
leather cleaning product for automotive
interiors. Test any cleaner or stain
remover on an inconspicuous area.
3. Alternatively, wipe the surface with a
clean, soft cloth and a mild soap and
water solution. Dry the area with a clean,
soft cloth.
4. If necessary, apply more soap and water
solution or cleaning product to a clean,
soft cloth and press it onto the soiled
area. Allow this to set at room
temperature for 30 minutes.
5. Remove the soaked cloth, then with a
clean, damp cloth, use a rubbing motion
for 60 seconds on the soiled area.
6. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
CLEANING LEATHER SEATS
Note: Follow the same procedure as
cleaning leather seats for cleaning leather
instrument panels and leather interior trim
surfaces.
325
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with
a soft, damp cloth and a mild soap and water
solution. Dry the area with a clean, soft cloth.
Note: Test any cleaner or stain remover on
an inconspicuous area.
You should:
• Remove dust and loose dirt with a
vacuum cleaner.
• Clean and treat spills and stains as soon
as possible.
Do not use the following products as these
may damage the leather:
• Oil and petroleum or silicone-based
leather conditioners.
• Household cleaners.
• Alcohol solutions.
• Solvents or cleaners intended specifically
for rubber, vinyl and plastics.
REPAIRING MINOR PAINT
DAMAGE
Authorized dealers have touch-up paint to
match your vehicle’ s color. Your vehicle color
code is printed on a sticker on the front,
left-hand side door jamb. Take your color
code to your authorized dealer to make sure
you get the correct color.
Before repairing minor paint damage, use a
cleaner such as Motorcraft Bug and Tar
Remover to remove particles such as bird
droppings, tree sap, insect deposits, tar
spots, road salt and industrial fallout.
Always read the instructions before using
cleaning products.
CLEANING THE WHEELS
1. Regularly clean them with a wheel
cleaner. We recommend that you use an
approved wheel cleaner if available.
2. Remove dirt and brake dust with a
sponge.
3. Remove tar and grease with a bug and
tar remover. We recommend that you use
an approved bug and tar remover if
available.
4. Thoroughly rinse the wheels with water
after cleaning.
If you intend on parking your vehicle for an
extended period after cleaning the wheels
with a wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle for
a few minutes before doing so. This reduces
the risk of corrosion of the brake discs, brake
pads and linings.
Do not clean the wheels when they are hot.
Note: Some car washes could damage
wheel rims and covers.
Note: Using non-recommended cleaners,
harsh cleaning products, chrome wheel
cleaners or abrasive materials could
damage wheel rims and covers.
326
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you plan on storing your vehicle for 30
days or more, read the following
maintenance recommendations to make sure
your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
We engineer and test all motor vehicles and
their components for reliable, regular driving.
Under various conditions, long-term storage
may lead to degraded engine performance
or failure unless you use specific precautions
to preserve engine components.
General
• Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated
place.
• Protect from sunlight, if possible.
• If vehicles are stored outside, they
require regular maintenance to protect
against rust and damage.
Body
• Wash your vehicle thoroughly to remove
dirt, grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior
surfaces, rear-wheel housing and the
underside of front fenders.
• Periodically wash your vehicle if it is
stored in exposed locations.
• Touch-up exposed or primed metal to
prevent rust.
• Cover chrome and stainless steel parts
with a thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when
you wash your vehicle.
• Lubricate all hood, door and luggage
compartment hinges and latches with a
light grade oil.
• Cover interior trim to prevent fading.
• Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
Engine
• Change the engine oil and filter prior to
storage because used engine oil contains
contaminates which may cause engine
damage.
• Start the engine every 15 days for a
minimum of 15 minutes. Run at fast idle
with the climate controls set to defrost
until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
• With your foot on the brake, shift through
all the gears while the engine is running.
• We recommend that you change the
engine oil before you use your vehicle
again.
Fuel system
• Fill the fuel tank with high-quality fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
327
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
Cooling system
• Protect against freezing temperatures.
• When removing your vehicle from
storage, check coolant fluid level.
Confirm that there are no cooling system
leaks and that fluid is at the
recommended level.
Battery
• Check and recharge as necessary. Keep
connections clean.
• If storing your vehicle for more than 30
days without recharging the battery, we
recommend that you disconnect the
battery cables to maintain battery charge
for quick starting.
Note: It is necessary to reset memory
features if battery cables are disconnected.
Brakes
• Make sure the brakes and parking brake
release fully.
Tires
• Maintain recommended air pressure.
Miscellaneous
• Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
pins under your vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
• Move vehicles at least 25 ft (7.5 m) every
15 days to lubricate working parts and
prevent corrosion.
Removing Vehicle From Storage
When your vehicle is ready to come out of
storage, do the following:
• Wash your vehicle to remove any dirt or
grease film build-up on window surfaces.
• Check windshield wipers for any
deterioration.
• Check under the hood for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage such as mice or squirrel nests.
• Check the exhaust for any foreign
material that may have collected during
storage.
• Check tire pressures and set tire inflation
per the Tire Label.
• Check brake pedal operation. Drive your
vehicle 15 ft (4.5 m) back and forth to
remove rust build-up.
• Check fluid levels (including coolant, oil
and gas) to make sure there are no leaks,
and fluids are at recommended levels.
• If you remove the battery, clean the
battery cable ends and check for
damage.
Contact an authorized dealer if you have any
concerns or issues.
BODY STYLING KITS
The distance between the underside of your
vehicle and the ground is less than that of
other models. Drive with extreme care to
avoid damage to your vehicle.
328
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Vehicle Care
TIRE SEALANT AND INFLATOR KIT
(If Equipped)
Note: The temporary mobility kit (TMK)
contains enough sealant compound for one
tire repair. See your authorized dealer for
replacement sealant bottles after the TMK
is used. Only use the kit supplied with your
vehicle.
Note: The kit may be used as an air
compressor for tire inflation maintenance by
turning the selector switch to the Air position.
Your TMK is located under the load floor in
the trunk. The TMK consists of an air
compressor to re-inflate the tire with a bottle
of sealing compound that seals punctures
caused by most nails or similar objects. This
kit provides a temporary tire repair allowing
you to drive your vehicle up to 120 mi
(200 km) at a maximum speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h) to reach a tire service location.
E269305
Air compressor (inside)A
Selector switchB
On and off buttonC
Air pressure gaugeD
Sealant bottleE
Dual purpose hose: air and repairF
Tire valve connectorG
Accessory power plugH
Casing/housingI
Bike/raft/sports ball adaptersJ
Pressure release valveK
General Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
Note: Do not use the kit if a tire has become
severely damaged. Only punctures located
within the tire tread can be sealed with the
kit.
Do not attempt to repair punctures larger
than ¼ inch (6 millimeters) or damage to the
tire's sidewall. The tire may not seal.
329
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire
performance. For this reason:
Note: Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Note: Do not drive further than 120 mi
(200 km). Drive only to the closest authorized
Lincoln dealer or tire repair shop to have
your tire inspected.
• Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering
maneuvers.
• Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure
in the affected tire; if the tire is losing
pressure, have the vehicle towed.
• Read the information in the Tips for Use
of the Kit section to make sure safe
operation of the kit and your vehicle.
Tips for Use of your TMK
To ensure safe operation of the TMK:
• Read all instructions and cautions fully.
• Do not remove any foreign objects, such
as nails or screws, from the tire.
• Before operating the kit, make sure your
vehicle is safely off the road and away
from moving traffic. Turn on the hazard
lights.
• Always set the parking brake to ensure
the vehicle doesn't move unexpectedly.
• When using the kit, leave the engine
running (only if the vehicle is outdoors or
in a well-ventilated area) so the
compressor does not drain the vehicle's
battery.
• Do not allow the compressor to operate
continuously for more than 15 minutes.
This helps prevent the compressor from
overheating.
• Never leave the kit unattended during
operation.
• Sealant compound contains latex. Those
with latex sensitivities should use
appropriate precautions to avoid an
allergic reaction.
• Keep the kit away from children.
• Only use the kit when the ambient
temperature is between -22°F (-30°C) and
158°F (70°C).
• Only use the sealing compound before
the use-by date. The use-by date is on a
label on the sealant bottle and can be
seen through the rectangular viewing
window on the bottom of the compressor
housing. Check the use-by date regularly
and replace the bottle when the fluid has
expired.
• Do not store the kit unsecured inside the
passenger compartment of the vehicle
as it may cause injury during a sudden
stop or crash. Always store the kit in its
original location.
• After sealant use, the tire pressure
monitoring system sensor and valve stem
on the wheel must be replaced by an
authorized Lincoln dealer.
• Operating the kit could cause an
electrical disturbance in radio, CD, and
DVD player operation.
E175978
* When inflation only is required for
a tire or other objects, the selector
must be in the Air position.
330
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
What to do when a Tire Is Punctured
A tire puncture within the tire's tread area
can be repaired in two stages with the kit:
• In the first stage, the tire is reinflated with
a sealing compound and air. After the tire
has been inflated, you need to drive the
vehicle about 3.7 mi (6 km) to distribute
the sealant in the tire.
• In the second stage, you need to check
the tire pressure and adjust, if necessary,
to the vehicle's specified tire inflation
pressure.
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with
Sealing Compound and Air
WARNING: Do not stand directly
beside the tire while the compressor is
operating. This could cause personal injury
if the tire bursts.
Note: If the tire does not inflate to the
recommended tire pressure within 15
minutes, stop and call roadside assistance.
WARNING: Watch the sidewall of the
tire when inflating. If any cracks, bumps or
similar damage appears, switch the
compressor off and let the air out by means
of the pressure relief valve. Do not continue
driving with this tire. This could cause loss
of vehicle control.
WARNING: Do not run the engine
when operating the air compressor unless
the vehicle is outdoors or in a well-ventilated
area.
Preparation: Park the vehicle in a safe, level
and secure area, away from moving traffic.
Turn the hazard lights on. Apply the parking
brake and turn the engine off. Inspect the
flat tire for visible damage.
Sealant compound contains latex. Use
appropriate precautions to avoid any allergic
reactions.
Do not remove any foreign object that has
pierced the tire. If a puncture is located in
the tire sidewall, stop and call roadside
assistance.
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the back of the compressor
housing.
3. Fasten the hose to the tire valve by
turning the connector clockwise. Tighten
the connection securely.
E252191
331
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
4. Plug the power cable into the 12-volt
power point in the vehicle.
5. Remove the warning sticker found on the
casing/housing and place it on the center
of the steering wheel.
6. Start the vehicle and leave the engine
running so the compressor does not
drain the vehicle’s battery.
E175981
7. Turn dial (A) clockwise to the sealant
position. Turn the kit on by pressing the
on/off button (B).
8. Inflate the tire to the pressure shown on
the tire label located on the edge of
driver’s door or the door jamb area. For
the first 45-60 seconds when the sealant
is being pumped into the tire, the air
pressure gauge may indicate a pressure
higher than the label pressure.This is
normal and should be no reason for
concern. The pressure gauge reading
indicates the tire inflation pressure after
about 60 seconds of operation during
the tire repair process. The final tire
pressure should be checked with the
compressor turned OFF in order to get
an accurate pressure reading.
332
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E175982
9. When the recommended tire pressure is
reached, turn off the kit, unplug the
power cable, and disconnect the hose
from the tire valve. Re-install the valve
cap on the tire valve and return the kit to
the stowage area.
10. Immediately and cautiously, drive the
vehicle 3.7 mi (6 km) to distribute the
sealant evenly inside the tire. Do not
exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
11. After 3.7 mi (6 km), stop and check the
tire pressure. See Second stage:
Checking tire pressure.
WARNING: If you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise
while driving, reduce your speed until you
can safely pull off to the side of the road and
call for roadside assistance. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle and increase the risk of personal
injury or death.
Note: If you experience any unusual
vibration, ride disturbance or noise when
driving, do not proceed to the second stage
of this operation.
Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure
Check the air pressure of your tires as
follows:
E175983
1. Remove the valve cap from the tire valve.
2. Firmly screw the air compressor hose
onto the valve stem by turning clockwise.
3. Push and turn the TMK selector switch
clockwise to the air position and note the
tire pressure.
333
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Note: If you are proceeding from the First
Stage: Reinflating the Tire with Sealing
Compound and Air section and have injected
sealant in the tire but the pressure is below
20 psi (1.4 bar), stop and call roadside
assistance. If tire pressure is above 20 psi
(1.4 bar), continue to the next step.
4. If required, turn on the compressor and
adjust the tire to the recommended
inflation pressure shown on the tire label
located on the driver's door or door jamb
area. The tire pressure should be
checked with the compressor turned OFF
in order to get an accurate pressure
reading.
5. Remove the hoses, re-install the valve
cap on the tire and return the kit to the
stowage area.
WARNING: The air compressor power
plug may be hot after use. Allow it to cool
before handling. Failure to do so could result
in personal injury.
What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed
WARNING: If you experience any
unusual vibration, ride disturbance or noise
while driving, reduce your speed until you
can safely pull off to the side of the road and
call for roadside assistance. Failure to do so
could cause you to lose control of your
vehicle and increase the risk of personal
injury or death.
Note: After the sealing compound has been
used, the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph
(80 km/h) and the maximum driving distance
is 120 mi (200 km). The sealed tire should
be inspected immediately.
You can check the tire pressure any time
within the 120 mi (200 km) by performing the
steps listed previously in the Second stage:
Checking Tire Pressure procedure.
Servicing your TMK after use
After using the kit to seal your tire, you need
to replace the sealant bottle. Sealant bottle
replacement kits can be obtained at an
authorized dealer. Empty sealant bottles may
be disposed of at home. However, bottles
still containing liquid sealant should be
disposed of by your local authorized dealer
or tire dealer, or in accordance with local
waste disposal regulation.
Removal of the sealant bottle from the kit
E175984
1. Unwrap the dual purpose hose (black
tube) from the compressor housing.
334
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E175985
2. Unwrap the power cord.
E175986
3. Remove the back cover.
E175987
4. Rotate the sealant bottle up 90 degrees
and pull away from casing/housing to
remove.
Installation of the sealant bottle to the kit
1. With the bottle held perpendicular to the
housing, insert the bottle nozzle into the
connector and push until seated.
2. Rotate the bottle 90 degrees down into
the housing/casing.
E175988
3. Snap the back cover back into place.
E175989
4. Wrap the dual purpose hose (black tube)
around the channel on the bottom of the
housing/casing.
335
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E269305
5. Wrap the power cord around the housing
and stow the accessory power plug into
its storage area.
Note: If you experience any difficulties with
the removal or installation of the sealant
bottle, consult your authorized dealer for
assistance.
Check and record the sealant compound’s
use by date and make sure that it is replaced
with a fresh bottle after this date. The use by
date is on a label located on the sealant
bottle and can be seen through the
rectangular viewing window on the bottom
of the TMK housing.
TIRE CARE
Important information for 245/40R19
low-profile tires and wheels If your
vehicle is equipped with 245/40R19
tires, they are low-profile tires. These
tires and wheels are designed to give
your vehicle a sport appearance. With
low-profile tires, you may notice an
increase in road noise and faster tire
wear, depending on road conditions and
driving styles. Due to their design,
low-profile tires and wheels are more
prone to road damage from potholes,
rough or unpaved roads, car wash rails
and curb contact than standard tires and
wheels.
Note: Your vehicle’s warranty does not
cover these types of damage. Tires
should always be kept at the correct
inflation pressures and extra caution
should be taken when operating on
rough roads to avoid impacts that could
cause wheel and tire damage.
336
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading
E142542
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. The
Quality grades can be found where
applicable on the tire sidewall between
tread shoulder and maximum section
width. For example: Treadwear 200
Traction AA Temperature A.
These Tire Quality Grades are
determined by standards that the United
States Department of Transportation has
set.
Tire Quality Grades apply to new
pneumatic passenger car tires. They do
not apply to deep tread, winter-type
snow tires, space-saver or temporary
use spare tires, light truck or LT type
tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of
10 to 12 inches or limited production tires
as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal
Regulations Part 575.104 ©)(2).
U.S. Department of Transportation Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford Motor
Company to give you the following
information about tire grades exactly as
the government has written it.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative
rating based on the wear rate of the tire
when tested under controlled conditions
on a specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear 1 ½ times as well on the
government course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of
their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service
practices, and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction AA A B C
WARNING: The traction grade
assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and
does not include acceleration, cornering,
hydroplaning or peak traction
characteristics.
The traction grades, from highest to
lowest are AA, A, B, and C. The grades
represent the tire’ s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled
conditions on specified government test
surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction
performance.
337
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Temperature A B C
WARNING: The temperature grade
for this tire is established for a tire that
is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, underinflation, or
excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A (the
highest), B and C, representing the tire’ s
resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause
the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade C corresponds to a
level of performance which all
passenger car tires must meet under the
Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard
No. 139. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
• Tire label: A label showing the
original equipment tire sizes,
recommended inflation pressure and
the maximum weight the vehicle can
carry.
• Tire Identification Number: A
number on the sidewall of each tire
providing information about the tire
brand and manufacturing plant, tire
size and date of manufacture. Also
referred to as DOT code.
• Inflation pressure: A measure of the
amount of air in a tire.
• Standard load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
maximum load at set pressure. For
example: For P-metric tires 35 psi
(2.4 bar) and for Metric tires 36 psi
(2.5 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
• Extra load: A class of P-metric or
Metric tires designed to carry a
heavier maximum load at 42 psi
(2.9 bar). Increasing the inflation
pressure beyond this pressure will
not increase the tire’s load carrying
capability.
• kPa: Kilopascal, a metric unit of air
pressure.
• PSI: Pounds per square inch, a
standard unit of air pressure.
• Cold tire pressure: The tire pressure
when the vehicle has been stationary
and out of direct sunlight for an hour
or more and prior to the vehicle
being driven for 1.0 mi (1.6 km).
338
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Recommended inflation pressure:
The cold inflation pressure found on
the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door
hinge pillar, door-latch post, or the
door edge that meets the door-latch
post, next to the driver's seating
position), or Tire Label located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s
door.
• B-pillar: The structural member at
the side of the vehicle behind the
front door
• Bead area of the tire: Area of the tire
next to the rim.
• Sidewall of the tire: Area between
the bead area and the tread.
• Tread area of the tire: Area of the
perimeter of the tire that contacts the
road when mounted on the vehicle.
• Rim: The metal support (wheel) for a
tire or a tire and tube assembly upon
which the tire beads are seated.
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall
Both United States and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
Information on P Type Tires
H
I
J
K
L
M
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
E142543
P215/65R15 95H is an example of a tire
size, load index and speed rating. The
definitions of these items are listed
below. (Note that the tire size, load index
and speed rating for your vehicle may
be different from this example.)
339
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
A. P: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that may be
used for service on cars, sport utility
vehicles, minivans and light trucks. Note:
If your tire size does not begin with a
letter this may mean it is designated by
either the European Tire and Rim
Technical Organization or the Japan Tire
Manufacturing Association.
B. 215: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 65: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
D. R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 15: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
F. 95: Indicates the tire's load index. It
is an index that relates to how much
weight a tire can carry. You may find this
information in your owner’s manual. If
not, contact a local tire dealer.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
G. H: Indicates the tire's speed rating.
The speed rating denotes the speed at
which a tire is designed to be driven for
extended periods of time under a
standard condition of load and inflation
pressure. The tires on your vehicle may
operate at different conditions for load
and inflation pressure. These speed
ratings may need to be adjusted for the
difference in conditions. The ratings
range from 81–186 mph (130–299 km/h).
These ratings are listed in the following
chart.
Note: You may not find this information
on all tires because it is not required by
federal law.
mph ( km/h)Letter rating
81 mph (130 km/h)M
87 mph (140 km/h)N
99 mph (159 km/h)Q
106 mph (171 km/h)R
112 mph (180 km/h)S
118 mph (190 km/h)T
124 mph (200 km/h)U
130 mph (210 km/h)H
149 mph (240 km/h)V
340
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
mph ( km/h)Letter rating
168 mph (270 km/h)W
186 mph (299 km/h)Y
Note: For tires with a maximum speed
capability over 149 mph (240 km/h), tire
manufacturers sometimes use the letters
ZR. For those with a maximum speed
capability over 186 mph (299 km/h), tire
manufacturers always use the letters
ZR.
H. U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number:
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
I. M+S or M/S: Mud and Snow, or
AT: All Terrain, or
AS: All Season.
J. Tire Ply Composition and Material
Used: Indicates the number of plies or
the number of layers of rubber-coated
fabric in the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and the sidewall,
which include steel, nylon, polyester,
and others.
K. Maximum Load: Indicates the
maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire. See the
Safety Compliance Certification Label
(affixed to either the door hinge pillar,
door-latch post, or the door edge that
meets the door-latch post, next to the
driver's seating position), for the correct
tire pressure for your vehicle.
L. Treadwear, Traction and
Temperature Grades:
341
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
• Treadwear The treadwear grade is
a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course.
For example, a tire graded 150 would
wear one and one-half times as well
on the government course as a tire
graded 100.
• Traction: The traction grades, from
highest to lowest are AA, A, B, and
C. The grades represent the tire's
ability to stop on wet pavement as
measured under controlled
conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
• Temperature: The temperature
grades are A (the highest), B and C,
representing the tire's resistance to
the generation of heat and its ability
to dissipate heat when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified
indoor laboratory test wheel.
M. Maximum Inflation Pressure:
Indicates the tire manufacturers'
maximum permissible pressure or the
pressure at which the maximum load
can be carried by the tire. This pressure
is normally higher than the vehicle
manufacturer's recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the vehicle label.
The tire suppliers may have additional
markings, notes or warnings such as
standard load or radial tubeless.
Additional Information Contained on
the Tire Sidewall for LT Type Tires
Note: Tire Quality Grades do not apply
to this type of tire.
A
B
C
B
D
E142544
LT type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below.
A. LT: Indicates a tire, designated by the
Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for service on light trucks.
342
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
B. Load Range and Load Inflation
Limits: Indicates the tire's load-carrying
capabilities and its inflation limits.
C. Maximum Load Dual lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a dual; defined as four tires on the
rear axle (a total of six or more tires on
the vehicle).
D. Maximum Load Single lb (kg) at psi
(kPa) cold: Indicates the maximum load
and tire pressure when the tire is used
as a single; defined as two tires (total)
on the rear axle.
Information on T Type Tires
T145/80D16 is an example of a tire size.
Note: The temporary tire size for your
vehicle may be different from this
example. Tire Quality Grades do not
apply to this type of tire.
A
B
C
D
E
E142545
T type tires have some additional
information beyond those of P type tires;
these differences are described below:
A. T: Indicates a type of tire, designated
by the Tire and Rim Association, that is
intended for temporary service on cars,
sport utility vehicles, minivans and light
trucks.
B. 145: Indicates the nominal width of
the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge
to sidewall edge. In general, the larger
the number, the wider the tire.
C. 80: Indicates the aspect ratio which
gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short
sidewall.
D. D: Indicates a diagonal type tire.
R: Indicates a radial type tire.
E. 16: Indicates the wheel or rim
diameter in inches. If you change your
wheel size, you will have to purchase
new tires to match the new wheel
diameter.
343
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Location of the Tire Label
You will find a Tire Label containing tire
inflation pressure by tire size and other
important information located on the
B-Pillar or the edge of the driver’s door.
Inflating Your Tires
Safe operation of your vehicle requires
that your tires are properly inflated.
Remember that a tire can lose up to half
of its air pressure without appearing flat.
Every day before you drive, check your
tires. If one looks lower than the others,
use a tire gauge to check pressure of all
tires and adjust if required.
At least once a month and before long
trips, inspect each tire and check the tire
pressure with a tire gauge (including
spare, if equipped). Inflate all tires to the
inflation pressure recommended by Ford
Motor Company.
You are strongly urged to buy a reliable
tire pressure gauge, as automatic
service station gauges may be
inaccurate. Ford recommends the use
of a digital or dial-type tire pressure
gauge rather than a stick-type tire
pressure gauge.
Use the recommended cold inflation
pressure for optimum tire performance
and wear. Under-inflation or
over-inflation may cause uneven
treadwear patterns
WARNING: Under-inflation is the
most common cause of tire failures and
may result in severe tire cracking, tread
separation or blowout, with unexpected
loss of vehicle control and increased risk
of injury. Under-inflation increases
sidewall flexing and rolling resistance,
resulting in heat buildup and internal
damage to the tire. It also may result in
unnecessary tire stress, irregular wear,
loss of vehicle control and accidents. A
tire can lose up to half of its air pressure
and not appear to be flat!
Always inflate your tires to the Ford
recommended inflation pressure even
if it is less than the maximum inflation
pressure information found on the tire.
The Ford recommended tire inflation
pressure is found on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label (affixed
to either the door hinge pillar, door-latch
post, or the door edge that meets the
door-latch post, next to the driver's
seating position), or Tire Label which is
located on the B-Pillar or the edge of the
driver’s door. Failure to follow the tire
pressure recommendations can cause
uneven treadwear patterns and
adversely affect the way your vehicle
handles
Maximum Inflation Pressure is the tire
manufacturer's maximum permissible
pressure and the pressure at which the
maximum load can be carried by the tire.
This pressure is normally higher than the
manufacturer’s recommended cold
inflation pressure which can be found
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label (affixed to either the door hinge
pillar, door-latch post, or the door edge
344
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
that meets the door-latch post, next to
the driver's seating position), or Tire
Label which is located on the B-Pillar or
the edge of the driver’s door. The cold
inflation pressure should never be set
lower than the recommended pressure
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label or Tire Label.
When weather temperature changes
occur, tire inflation pressures also
change. A 10°F (6°C) temperature drop
can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi
(0.07 bar) in inflation pressure. Check
your tire pressures frequently and adjust
them to the proper pressure which can
be found on the Safety Compliance
Certification Label or Tire Label.
To check the pressure in your tire(s):
1. Make sure the tires are cool,
meaning they are not hot from
driving even a mile.
Note: If you are checking tire pressure
when the tire is hot, (for example driven
more than 1.0 mi (1.6 km), never bleed
or reduce air pressure. The tires are hot
from driving and it is normal for
pressures to increase above
recommended cold pressures. A hot tire
at or below recommended cold inflation
pressure could be significantly
under-inflated.
Note: If you have to drive a distance to
get air for your tire(s), check and record
the tire pressure first and add the
appropriate air pressure when you get
to the pump. It is normal for tires to heat
up and the air pressure inside to go up
as you drive.
2. Remove the cap from the valve on
one tire, then firmly press the tire
gauge onto the valve and measure
the pressure.
3. Add enough air to reach the
recommended air pressure.
Note: If you overfill the tire, release air
by pressing on the metal stem in the
center of the valve. Then recheck the
pressure with your tire gauge.
4. Replace the valve cap.
5. Repeat this procedure for each tire,
including the spare.
Note: Some spare tires operate at a
higher inflation pressure than the other
tires. For T type mini-spare tires, see the
Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at 60 psi (4.15 bar).
For full-size and dissimilar spare tires,
see the Dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly information for a description.
Store and maintain at the higher of the
front and rear inflation pressure as
shown on the Tire Label.
6. Visually inspect the tires to make
sure there are no nails or other
objects embedded that could poke
a hole in the tire and cause an air
leak.
345
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Age
WARNING: Tires degrade over
time depending on many factors such
as weather, storage conditions, and
conditions of use (load, speed, inflation
pressure) the tires experience
throughout their lives.
WARNING: In general, tires should
be replaced after six years regardless
of tread wear. However, heat caused by
hot climates or frequent high loading
conditions can accelerate the aging
process and may require tires to be
replaced more frequently.
You should replace your spare tire when
you replace the road tires or after six
years due to aging even if it has not
been used.
U.S. DOT Tire Identification Number
Both U.S. and Canada Federal
regulations require tire manufacturers
to place standardized information on the
sidewall of all tires. This information
identifies and describes the fundamental
characteristics of the tire and also
provides a U.S. DOT Tire Identification
Number for safety standard certification
and in case of a recall.
This begins with the letters DOT and
indicates that the tire meets all federal
standards. The next two numbers or
letters are the plant code designating
where it was manufactured, the next two
are the tire size code and the last four
numbers represent the week and year
the tire was built. For example, the
numbers 317 mean the 31st week of
1997. After 2000 the numbers go to four
digits. For example, 2501 means the
25th week of 2001. The numbers in
between are identification codes used
for traceability. This information is used
to contact customers if a tire defect
requires a recall.
Tire Replacement Requirements
Your vehicle is equipped with tires
designed to provide a safe ride and
handling capability.
WARNING: Replace the wheels
and tires with the exact original brand,
size and construction that came
originally on your vehicle. Use of any
other wheel or tire combinations, even
with identical size ratings, may result in
insufficient running clearances, tire
rubbing and eventual puncture. Failure
to follow tire replacement
recommendations can lead to tire failure,
loss of vehicle control, serious injury or
death.
347
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: To reduce the risk of
serious injury, when mounting
replacement tires and wheels, you
should not exceed the maximum
pressure indicated on the sidewall of the
tire to set the beads without additional
precautions listed below. If the beads
do not seat at the maximum pressure
indicated, re-lubricate and try again.
WARNING: When inflating the tire
for mounting pressures up to 20 psi
(1.38 bar) greater than the maximum
pressure on the tire sidewall, the
following precautions must be taken to
protect the person mounting the tire:
1. Make sure that you have the correct
tire and wheel size.
2. Lubricate the tire bead and wheel
bead seat area again.
3. Stand at a minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m)
away from the wheel and tire
assembly.
4. Use both eye and ear protection.
WARNING: For a mounting
pressure more than 20 psi (1.38 bar)
greater than the maximum pressure, a
Ford dealer or other tire service
professional should do the mounting.
WARNING: Always inflate steel
carcass tires with a remote air fill with
the person inflating standing at a
minimum of 12 ft (3.66 m) away from the
wheel and tire assembly.
Important: Remember to replace the
wheel valve stems when the road tires
are replaced on your vehicle
It is recommended that the two front
tires or two rear tires generally be
replaced as a pair.
The tire pressure sensors mounted in
the wheels (originally installed on your
vehicle) are not designed to be used in
aftermarket wheels.
The use of wheels or tires not
recommended by Ford Motor Company
may affect the operation of your tire
pressure monitoring system.
If the tire pressure monitoring system
indicator is flashing, your system is
malfunctioning. Your replacement tire
might be incompatible with your tire
pressure monitoring system, or some
component of the system may be
damaged.
Safety Practices
WARNING: If your vehicle is stuck
in snow, mud or sand, do not rapidly spin
the tires; spinning the tires can tear the
tire and cause an explosion. A tire can
explode in as little as three to five
seconds.
WARNING: Do not spin the wheels
at over 34 mph (55 km/h). The tires may
fail and injure a passenger or bystander.
348
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Driving habits have a great deal to do
with your tire mileage and safety.
• Observe posted speed limits
• Avoid fast starts, stops and turns
• Avoid potholes and objects on the
road
• Do not run over curbs or hit the tire
against a curb when parking
Highway Hazards
No matter how carefully you drive there
is always the possibility that you may
eventually have a flat tire on the
highway. Drive slowly to the closest safe
area out of traffic. This may further
damage the flat tire, but your safety is
more important.
If you feel a sudden vibration or ride
disturbance while driving, or you suspect
your tire or vehicle has been damaged,
immediately reduce your speed. Drive
with caution until you can safely pull off
the road. Stop and inspect the tires for
damage. If a tire is under-inflated or
damaged, deflate it, remove the wheel
and replace it with your spare tire and
wheel (if provided). If you cannot detect
a cause, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest repair facility or tire dealer to
have the vehicle inspected.
Tire and Wheel Alignment
A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole
can cause the front end of your vehicle
to become misaligned or cause damage
to your tires. If your vehicle seems to
pull to one side when you’re driving, the
wheels may be out of alignment. Have
an authorized dealer check the wheel
alignment periodically.
Wheel misalignment in the front or the
rear can cause uneven and rapid
treadwear of your tires and should be
corrected by an authorized dealer.
Front-wheel drive vehicles and those
with an independent rear suspension (if
equipped) may require alignment of all
four wheels.
The tires should also be balanced
periodically. An unbalanced tire and
wheel assembly may result in irregular
tire wear.
Tire Rotation
Note: If your tires show uneven wear
ask an authorized dealer to check for
and correct any wheel misalignment,
tire imbalance or mechanical problem
involved before tire rotation.
Note: Your vehicle may be equipped
with a dissimilar spare wheel and tire
assembly. A dissimilar spare wheel and
tire assembly is defined as a spare
wheel and tire assembly that is different
in brand, size or appearance from the
road tires and wheels. If you have a
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly
it is intended for temporary use only and
should not be used in a tire rotation.
Note: After having your tires rotated,
inflation pressure must be checked and
adjusted to the vehicle requirements.
349
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Rotating your tires at the recommended
interval (as indicated in the Scheduled
Maintenance chapter) will help your tires
wear more evenly, providing better tire
performance and longer tire life.
Front-wheel drive and all-wheel drive
vehicles (front tires on the left side of
the diagram)
E142547
All vehicles with directional tires (front
tires on the left of the diagram)
E147237
Sometimes irregular tire wear can be
corrected by rotating the tires.
USING SUMMER TIRES
Summer tires provide superior performance
on wet and dry roads. Summer tires do not
have the Mud and Snow (M+S or M/S) tire
traction rating on the tire side wall. Since
summer tires do not have the same traction
performance as All-season or Snow tires, we
do not recommend using summer tires when
temperatures drop to approximately 45°F
(7°C) or below (depending on tire wear and
environmental conditions) or in snow and ice
conditions. Like any tire, summer tire
performance is affected by tire wear and
environmental conditions. If you must drive
in those conditions, we recommend using
Mud and Snow (M+S, M/S), All-season or
Snow tires.
Always store your summer tires indoors at
temperatures above 19°F (-7°C). The rubber
compounds used in these tires lose flexibility
and may develop surface cracks in the tread
area at temperatures below 19°F (-7°C). If the
tires have been subjected to 19°F (-7°C) or
less, warm them in a heated space to at least
41°F (5°C) for at least 24 hours before
installing them on a vehicle, or moving the
vehicle with the tires installed, or checking
tire inflation. Do not place tires near heaters
or heating devices used to warm the room
where the tires are stored. Do not apply heat
or blow heated air directly on the tires.
Always inspect the tires after storage periods
and before use.
350
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
USING SNOW CHAINS
WARNING: If you choose to install
snow tires on your vehicle, they must be the
same size, construction, and load range as
the original tires listed on the tire placard,
and they must be installed on all four wheels.
Mixing tires of different size or construction
on your vehicle can adversely affect your
vehicle's handling and braking, and may lead
to loss of vehicle control.
WARNING: The use of
non-recommended tires and wheels could
cause steering, suspension, axle, transfer
case or power transfer unit failure. If you
have questions regarding tire replacement,
contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
The tires on your vehicle may have
all-weather treads to provide traction in rain
and snow. However, in some climates you
may need to use snow chains.
Your vehicle may not be compatible with
snow chain or cable usage with the
factory-fitted wheels and tires. Only certain
chains or snow cables have been approved
by Lincoln as safe for use on your vehicle
with the following tire size: 225/55R17. You
should only install chains or cables sized at
10 mm or less in dimension as measured on
the sidewall of your tire. Not all S-class snow
chains meet these restrictions. Chains of this
size restriction will include a tensioning
device. The chains should be mounted in
pairs on the front tires only. If you need to
use chains, it is recommended that steel
wheels (of the same size and specification)
be used, as chains may chip aluminum
wheels.
Follow these guidelines when using traction
devices:
• If possible, avoid fully loading your
vehicle
• Purchase chains or cables from a
manufacturer that clearly labels body to
tire dimension restrictions.
• When driving with snow chains or cables,
do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h) or the
maximum speed recommended by the
chain manufacturer; whichever is less.
• Drive cautiously. If you hear the chains
or cables rub or bang against the vehicle,
stop and retighten them. If this does not
work, remove the chains or cables and
prevent vehicle damage.
• Remove the chains or cables when they
are no longer needed. Do not use the
chains or cables on dry roads.
• If a temporary spare tire is mounted on
your vehicle, do not use snow chains on
the axle with the temporary spare tire.
If you have any questions regarding snow
tires or snow chains, please contact your
authorized dealer.
351
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING
SYSTEM
WARNING: The tire pressure
monitoring system is not a substitute for
manually checking tire pressures. You should
periodically check tire pressures using a
pressure gauge. Failure to correctly maintain
tire pressures could increase the risk of tire
failure, loss of control, vehicle rollover and
personal injury.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
Note: If the tire pressure monitoring system
sensor becomes damaged, it may not
function.
Each tire, including the spare (if
provided), should be checked
monthly when cold and inflated to
the inflation pressure recommended by the
vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard
or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size
indicated on the vehicle placard or tire
inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires).
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
been equipped with a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a
low tire pressure telltale when one or more
of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
telltale illuminates, you should stop and
check your tires as soon as possible, and
inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire
failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute
for proper tire maintenance, and it is the
driver’ s responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if under-inflation has not
reached the level to trigger illumination of
the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
the system is not operating properly. The
TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
flash for approximately one minute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect or
signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS
malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
replacement or alternate tires or wheels on
the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
352
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
functioning properly. Always check the TPMS
malfunction telltale after replacing one or
more tires or wheels on your vehicle to
ensure that the replacement or alternate tires
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to
function properly.
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with License exempt RSS
Standards of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
Note: Changes or modifications not
expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E142549
Note: Each road tire is equipped with a tire
pressure sensor located inside the wheel
and tire assembly cavity. The pressure
sensor is attached to the valve stem. The
pressure sensor is covered by the tire and
is not visible unless the tire is removed. Take
care when changing the tire to avoid
damaging the sensor.
You should always have your tires serviced
by an authorized dealer.
Check the tire pressure periodically (at least
monthly) using an accurate tire gauge. See
When Inflating Your Tires in this chapter.
Understanding Your Tire Pressure
Monitoring System
E250820
The tire pressure monitoring system
measures pressure in your road tires and
sends the tire pressure readings to your
vehicle. You can view the tire pressure
readings through the information display.
See General Information (page 110). The low
tire pressure warning light will turn on if the
tire pressure is significantly low. Once the
353
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
light is illuminated, your tires are
under-inflated and need to be inflated to the
manufacturer’ s recommended tire pressure.
Even if the light turns on and a short time
later turns off, your tire pressure still needs
to be checked.
When Your Temporary Spare Tire is
Installed
When one of your road tires needs to be
replaced with the temporary spare, the
system will continue to identify an issue to
remind you that the damaged road wheel
and tire assembly needs to be repaired and
put back on your vehicle.
To restore the full function of the tire
pressure monitoring system, have the
damaged road wheel and tire assembly
repaired and remounted on your vehicle.
When You Believe Your System is Not
Operating Properly
The main function of the tire pressure
monitoring system is to warn you when your
tires need air. It can also warn you in the
event the system is no longer capable of
functioning as intended. See the following
chart for information concerning your tire
pressure monitoring system:
354
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Customer action requiredPossible causeLow tire pressure warning light
Make sure tires are at the proper pressure. See Inflating your tires
in this chapter. After inflating your tires to the manufacturer’s
recommended pressure as shown on the Tire Label (located on
the edge of driver’s door or the B-Pillar), the vehicle must be driven
for at least two minutes over 20 mph (32 km/h) before the light
turns off.
Tire(s) under-inflated
Solid warning light Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
Repair the damaged road wheel and tire assembly and reinstall
it on the vehicle to restore system function. For a description on
how the system functions, see When Your Temporary Spare Tire
is Installed in this section.
Spare tire in use
Flashing warning light
If the tires are properly inflated and the spare tire is not in use but
the light remains on, contact your authorized dealer as soon as
possible.
TPMS malfunction
355
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
When Inflating Your Tires
WARNING: Do not use the tire
pressure displayed in the information display
as a tire pressure gauge. Failure to follow
this instruction could result in personal injury
or death.
When putting air into your tires (such as at a
gas station or in your garage), the tire
pressure monitoring system may not respond
immediately to the air added to your tires.
It may take up to two minutes of driving over
20 mph (32 km/h) for the light to turn off after
you have filled your tires to the
recommended inflation pressure.
How Temperature Affects Your Tire
Pressure
The tire pressure monitoring system monitors
tire pressure in each pneumatic tire. While
driving in a normal manner, a typical
passenger tire inflation pressure may
increase about 2–4 psi (14–28 kPa) from a
cold start situation. If the vehicle is stationary
overnight with the outside temperature
significantly lower than the daytime
temperature, the tire pressure may decrease
about 3 psi (21 kPa) for a drop of 30°F (17°C)
in ambient temperature. This lower pressure
value may be detected by the tire pressure
monitoring system as being significantly
lower than the recommended inflation
pressure and activate the system warning
light for low tire pressure. If the low tire
pressure warning light is on, visually check
each tire to verify that no tire is flat. If one or
more tires are flat, repair as necessary.
Check the air pressure in the road tires. If
any tire is under-inflated, carefully drive the
vehicle to the nearest location where air can
be added to the tires. Inflate all the tires to
the recommended inflation pressure.
CHANGING A ROAD WHEEL (If
Equipped)
WARNING: If the tire pressure monitor
sensor becomes damaged it may not
function.
Note: The tire pressure monitoring system
indicator light illuminates when the spare
tire is in use. To restore the full function of
the monitoring system, all road wheels
equipped with tire pressure monitoring
sensors must be mounted on the vehicle.
Note: You should only use tire sealants in
roadside emergencies as they may cause
damage to the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor.
If you get a flat tire when driving, do not
apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease your speed. Hold the steering
wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place
on the side of the road.
Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer
in order to prevent damage to the tire
pressure monitoring system sensors. See
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (page 352).
Replace the spare tire with a road tire as
soon as possible. During repairing or
replacing of the flat tire, have an authorized
dealer inspect the tire pressure monitoring
system sensor for damage.
356
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire
Assembly Information
WARNING: Failure to follow these
guidelines could result in an increased risk
of loss of vehicle control, injury or death.
If you have a dissimilar spare wheel and tire,
then it is intended for temporary use only.
This means that if you need to use it, you
should replace it as soon as possible with a
road wheel and tire assembly that is the
same size and type as the road tires and
wheels that were originally provided. If the
dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged, it
should be replaced rather than repaired.
Important Use of Spare Wheel
A dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly is defined as a spare wheel and tire assembly that is different in brand, size or appearance
from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types:
Types of Spare Wheels
T-type mini-spare.
1
Full-size dissimilar spare with label on wheel.
2
Full-size dissimilar spare without label on wheel.
1
This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall.
2
This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states: THIS WHEEL AND TIRE ASSEMBLY FOR TEMPORARY USE ONLY.
357
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Driving with a T-type Mini-spare or Full-size
Dissimilar Spare With Label on Wheel
Do not:
• Exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).
• Load the vehicle beyond maximum
vehicle load rating listed on the Safety
Compliance Label.
• Tow a trailer.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire.
• Use more than one dissimilar spare tire
at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire.
Use of the above dissimilar spare wheel at
any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability, if applicable.
Driving With a Full-size Dissimilar Spare
Wheel and Tire Assembly
Do not:
• Exceed 70 mph (113 km/h).
• Use more than one dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly at a time.
• Use commercial car washing equipment.
• Use snow chains on the end of the
vehicle with the dissimilar spare wheel
and tire assembly.
Use of the above dissimilar spare wheel at
any one wheel location can lead to
impairment of the following:
• Handling, stability and braking
performance.
• Comfort and noise.
• Ground clearance and parking at curbs.
• Winter weather driving capability.
• Wet weather driving capability.
• All-wheel driving capability.
Give additional caution to the following when
driving with the full-size dissimilar spare
wheel and tire assembly:
• Towing a trailer.
• Driving vehicles equipped with a camper
body.
• Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo
rack.
Drive cautiously when using a full-size
dissimilar spare wheel and tire assembly and
seek service as soon as possible.
Changing a Road Wheel Procedure
WARNING: When one of the front
wheels is off the ground, the transmission
alone will not prevent the vehicle from
moving or slipping off the jack, even if the
transmission is in park (P).
358
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
WARNING: To help prevent your
vehicle from moving when changing a wheel,
shift the transmission into park (P), set the
parking brake and use an appropriate block
or wheel chock to secure the wheel
diagonally opposite to the wheel being
changed. For example, when changing the
front left wheel, place an appropriate block
or wheel chock on the right rear wheel.
WARNING: Do not work on your
vehicle when the jack is the only support. If
the vehicle slips off the jack, you or someone
else could be seriously injured.
WARNING: Do not attempt to change
a tire on the side of the vehicle close to
moving traffic. Pull far enough off the road
to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
WARNING: Always use the jack
provided as original equipment with your
vehicle. If using a jack other than the one
provided, make sure the jack capacity is
adequate for the vehicle weight, including
any vehicle cargo or modifications. If you are
unsure if the jack capacity is adequate,
contact the authorized dealer.
Note: Passengers should not remain in your
vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.
1. Park on a level surface, set the parking
brake and activate the hazard flashers.
2. Place the transmission in park (P) and
turn the engine off. For vehicles with a
manual transmission, place the
transmission in reverse (R) after the
engine is turned off.
E175447
3. Block both the front and rear of the wheel
diagonally opposite the flat tire. For
example, if the left front tire is flat, block
the right rear wheel.
4. Remove the carpeted wheel cover.
5. Remove the spare tire bolt securing the
spare tire by turning it counterclockwise.
6. Remove the spare tire from the spare tire
compartment.
359
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E178186
7. Remove the lug wrench and jack from
the spare tire compartment.
E175694
8. To remove the wrench from the jack, turn
the hex nut on the jack counterclockwise.
This lowers the jack and loosens the
mechanical lock.
E224246
9. If your vehicle has a wheel trim, use the
tool supplied to remove it and access the
lug nuts.
10. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half
turn counterclockwise, but do not
remove them until the wheel is raised
off the ground.
E145908
11. The vehicle jacking points are shown
here, and can be identified by the
triangle markings on the molding. The
triangle marking may be on the side or
the underside of the molding. The
jacking points are identified on vehicles
without moldings by a pair of arrows on
the metal flange pointing to the jacking
point between them. Details are
depicted on the warning label on the
jack.
360
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E174939
12. Place the jack at the jacking point next
to the tire you are changing. Turn the
jack handle clockwise until the wheel
is completely off the ground.
13. Remove the lug nuts with the lug
wrench.
14. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure the valve stem is facing
outward. Reinstall the lug nuts until the
wheel is snug against the hub. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel
has been lowered. If you are using the
temporary tire, the lug nut washers do
not appear to be flush with the rim. This
is normal only when using the
temporary spare tire.
15. Lower the wheel by turning the jack
handle counterclockwise.
1
2
3
4
5
E75442
16. Remove the jack and fully tighten the
lug nuts in the order shown. See
Technical Specifications (page 364).
361
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E176165
17. To store the folded wrench on the jack,
engage the bracket of the jack base on
the wrench feature as shown. Swing
the wrench upward and adjust the
height of the jack until the pin engages
the hole. Tighten the hex nut clockwise
by hand until secure.
18. Put the flat tire, jack and lug wrench
away. Make sure the jack is fastened
securely before you drive.
19. Unblock the wheel.
362
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
Stowing the Flat Tire Without the
Retainer Strap
E227869
You can temporarily stow the full-size road
wheel in the spare tire compartment.
1. Lift the carpeted wheel cover at an angle
to access the spare tire compartment.
2. Place the wheel in the spare tire well with
the valve stem facing down.
3. Install the shorter jack retainer bolt to the
jack bolt-down bracket through the
centre of the wheel. Finally, wind the
wheel retainer down to secure the wheel
in place.
4. Place the jack and tools back into the
spare tire compartment.
5. Replace the carpeted wheel cover.
Stowing the Flat Tire Using the
Retainer Strap (If Equipped)
You can temporarily stow the full-size road
wheel in the spare tire compartment.
1. Find the flat tire retainer strap tucked
inside the jack channel.
E224480
2. Locate the jack bolt-down bracket. Push
the retainer strap through the jack
bolt-down bracket.
3. Put the jack and lug wrench away. Make
sure the jack is fastened so it does not
rattle when you drive.
4. Stow the flat tire on the floor in the cargo
area.
5. Weave the retainer strap through the
wheel openings.
363
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
E224479
6. Secure the flat tire by tying a flat knot.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Wheel Lug Nut Torque Specifications
WARNING: When you install a wheel, always remove any corrosion, dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the
wheel or the surface of the wheel hub, brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel. Make sure to secure any fasteners that attach the
rotor to the hub so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel. Installing wheels without correct metal-to-metal contact at
the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while your vehicle is in motion, resulting in loss
of vehicle control, personal injury or death.
364
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
lb.ft (Nm)
1
Bolt Size
150 lb.ft (204 Nm)M14 x 1.5
1
Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust. Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners.
Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque within 100 miles (160 kilometers) after any wheel disturbance, such as tire rotation, changing a
flat tire or wheel removal.
E145950
Wheel pilot bore.A
Inspect the wheel pilot hole and mounting
surface prior to installation. Remove any
visible corrosion or loose particles.
365
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Wheels and Tires
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L
SpecificationMeasurement
122Cubic inches
1-3-4-2Firing order
Coil on plugIgnition system
9.7:1Compression ratio
0.028–0.031 in (0.7–0.8 mm)Spark plug gap
366
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
A
B
E142480
Long drivebelt is on first pulley
groove closest to engine
A
Short drivebelt is on second pulley
groove farthest from engine
B
ENGINE SPECIFICATIONS - 3.0L
SpecificationMeasurement
180Cubic inches
1-4-2-5-3-6Firing order
Coil in plugIgnition system
9.5:1Compression ratio
0.028–0.031 in (0.7–0.8 mm)Spark plug gap
367
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Drivebelt Routing
E221312
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 2.0L
368
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Motorcraft part numberComponent
FA-1912Air filter element.
FL-910-SOil filter.
BXT-94RH7-730Battery.
SP-537Spark plugs.
FP-71Cabin air filter.
WW-2200 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade.
WW-1900 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft® replacement parts available at your Lincoln dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts
meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft® oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 504).
369
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
MOTORCRAFT PARTS - 3.0L
Motorcraft part numberComponent
FA-1912Air filter element
FL-2062Oil filter
BXT-94RH7-730Battery
SP-542Spark plugs
FP-71Cabin air filter
WW-2200 (driver side)Windshield wiper blade
WW-1900 (passenger side)
We recommend Motorcraft replacement parts available at your Lincoln dealer or at fordparts.com for scheduled maintenance. These parts
meet or exceed Ford Motor Company’s specifications and are engineered for your vehicle. Use of other parts may impact vehicle performance,
emissions and durability. Your warranty may be void for any damage related to use of other parts.
If a Motorcraft oil filter is not available, use an oil filter that meets industry performance specification SAE/USCAR-36.
For spark plug replacement, contact an authorized dealer. Replace the spark plugs at the appropriate intervals. See Scheduled Maintenance
(page 504).
370
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER
The vehicle identification number is located
on the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
E142476
Please note that in the graphic, XXXX is
representative of your vehicle identification
number.
The Vehicle Identification Number contains
the following information:
E142477
World manufacturer identifierA
Brake system, Gross Vehicle
Weight Rating, Restraint Devices
and their locations
B
Make, vehicle line, series, body
type
C
Engine typeD
Check digitE
Model yearF
Assembly plantG
Production sequence numberH
VEHICLE CERTIFICATION LABEL
E167469
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration Regulations require that a
Safety Compliance Certification Label be
affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the
Safety Compliance Certification Label may
be located. The Safety Compliance
Certification Label shall be affixed to either
the door hinge pillar, the door latch post, or
the edge of the door near the door latch,
next to the driver's seating position.
371
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
TRANSMISSION CODE
DESIGNATION
E167814
The transmission code is on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label. The
following table shows the transmission code
along with the transmission description.
CodeDescription
CSix-speed automatic transmission 6F55
WSix-speed automatic transmission 6F35
372
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 2.0L
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service
the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
Item
5.7 qt (5.4 L)Engine oil (with oil filter).
8.5 qt (8 L)Engine coolant.
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid.
16.0–20.8 fl oz (473–615 ml)Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive).
15.2 fl oz (450 ml)
1
Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive).
9.0 qt (8.5 L)
2
Automatic transmission fluid.
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid.
16.5 gal (62.5 L)Fuel tank (Front Wheel Drive).
18.0 gal (68.1 L)Fuel tank (All Wheel Drive).
22 oz (0.62 kg)A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Canada).
373
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Item
24 oz (0.68 kg)A/C refrigerant (Mexico).
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
1
Contact an authorized dealer for fluid level checking and filling.
2
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
374
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
375
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSS-M2C300-A2A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
376
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
YN-12-D
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
--Lock cylinders (U.S. and Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
--Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage, which the vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your
vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use
motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
377
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage not covered by your
vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON® LV transmission fluid. The
use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely
Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C953-A1
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine oil - SAE 0W-30
XO-0W30-QSP
378
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
CAPACITIES AND SPECIFICATIONS - 3.0L
Capacities
WARNING: The air conditioning refrigerant system contains refrigerant under high pressure. Only qualified personnel should service
the air conditioning refrigerant system. Opening the air conditioning refrigerant system can cause personal injury.
379
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
CapacityItem
6.0 qt (5.7 L)Engine oil (with oil filter).
11.4 qt (10.8 L)Engine coolant (Front Wheel Drive).
11.5 qt (10.9 L)Engine coolant (All Wheel Drive).
Between MIN/MAX on brake fluid reservoirBrake fluid.
16.0–20.8 fl oz (473–615 ml)Rear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive).
15.2 fl oz (450 ml)
1
Power Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive).
11.6 qt (11 L)
2
Automatic transmission fluid.
Fill as requiredWindshield washer fluid.
18.0 gal (68.1 L)Fuel tank (Front Wheel Drive).
18.0 gal (68.1 L)Fuel tank (All Wheel Drive).
18 oz (0.51 kg)A/C refrigerant (U.S. and Canada).
20 oz (0.567 kg)A/C refrigerant (Mexico).
5.24 fl oz (155 ml)A/C refrigerant compressor oil.
1
Contact an authorized dealer for fluid level checking and filling.
2
Approximate dry fill capacity. Actual amount may vary during fluid changes.
380
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Specifications
Materials
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil
XO-5W30-QSP
WSS-M2C946-B1Motor oil (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 5W-30 Super Premium Motor Oil
CXO-5W30-LSP12
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
VC-3DIL-B
WSS-M97B44-D2Engine coolant (Canada):
Motorcraft® Orange Prediluted Antifreeze/Coolant
CVC-3DIL-B
WSS-M6C65-A2Brake fluid:
Motorcraft® DOT 4 Low Viscosity (LV) High Performance Motor Vehicle Brake Fluid
PM-20
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-80W90-QL
381
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSP-M2C197-ARear differential fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada):
Motorcraft® SAE 80W-90 Premium Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-80W90-1L
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (U.S. and Mexico)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
XY-75W140-QL
WSL-M2C192-APower Transfer Unit fluid (All Wheel Drive) (Canada)
Motorcraft® SAE 75W-140 Synthetic Rear Axle Lubricant
CXY-75W140-1L
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
XT-10-QLVC
WSS-M2C938-AAutomatic transmission fluid (Canada):
MERCON LVMotorcraft® MERCON LV Automatic Transmission Fluid
CXT-10-LV12
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (U.S. and Mexico):
Motorcraft® Premium Windshield Wash Concentrate with Bitterant
ZC-32-B2
WSS-M14P19-AWindshield washer fluid (Canada):
Motorcraft® Premium Quality Windshield Washer Fluid
CXC-37-(A, B, D, F)
382
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (U.S.):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
YN-33-A
WSS-M17B21-AA/C refrigerant (Canada):
R-1234yf Refrigerant
HS7Z-19B519-BA
WSH-M17B19-AA/C refrigerant (Mexico):
Motorcraft® R-134a Refrigerant
MYN-19
WSS-M2C300-A2A/C refrigerant compressor oil (U.S. and Canada):
Motorcraft® R-1234yf Refrigerant PAG Oil
YN-35
WSH-M1C231-BA/C refrigerant compressor oil (Mexico):
Motorcraft® PAG Refrigerant Compressor Oil
YN-12-D
383
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
SpecificationName
ESB-M1C93-BMulti-purpose grease:
Motorcraft® Multi-Purpose Grease Spray
XL-5-A
-Lock cylinders (U.S. and Mexico):
Penetrating and Lock Lubricant
XL-1
-Lock cylinders (Canada):
Penetrating Fluid
CXC-51-A
If you use oil and fluids that do not meet the
defined specification and viscosity grade,
this may lead to:
• Component damage, which the vehicle
warranty does not cover.
• Longer engine cranking periods.
• Increased emission levels.
• Reduced engine performance.
• Reduced fuel economy.
• Degraded brake performance.
We recommend Motorcraft motor oil for your
vehicle. If Motorcraft oil is not available, use
motor oils of the recommended viscosity
grade that meet API SN requirements and
display the API Certification Mark for gasoline
engines. Do not use oil labeled with API SN
service category unless the label also
displays the API certification mark.
E142732
384
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
An oil that displays this symbol conforms to
current engine, emission system and fuel
economy performance standards of ILSAC.
Do not use supplemental engine oil additives
because they are unnecessary and could
lead to engine damage not covered by your
vehicle warranty.
Note: We recommend using DOT 4 Low
Viscosity (LV) High Performance Brake Fluid
or equivalent meeting WSS-M6C65-A2. Use
of any fluid other than the recommended
fluid may cause degraded brake
performance and not meet our performance
standards. Keep brake fluid clean and dry.
Contamination with dirt, water, petroleum
products or other materials may result in
brake system damage and possible failure.
Note: Automatic transmissions that require
MERCON® LV transmission fluid should only
use MERCON® LV transmission fluid.
Note: The use of any other fluid may cause
transmission damage.
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely
Cold Climates
To improve engine cold start performance,
we recommend that you use the following
alternative engine oil in extremely cold
climates, where the ambient temperature
reaches -22.0°F (-30°C) or below.
SpecificationName
WSS-M2C953-A1
Motorcraft® SAE 0W-30 Premium Synthetic Blend Motor Oil:
Engine oil - SAE 0W-30
XO-0W30-QSP
385
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
E240523
BULB SPECIFICATION CHART
Replacement bulbs are specified in the chart
below. Headlamp bulbs must be marked with
an authorized “D.O.T.” for North America to
make sure they have the proper lamp
performance, light brightness, light pattern,
and safe visibility. The correct bulbs will not
damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp
assembly warranty and will provide quality
bulb illumination time.
386
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Trade nameFunction
LEDHeadlamp high beam - high series
HIDHeadlamp high beam - low series
LEDHeadlamp low beam - high series
HIDHeadlamp low beam - low series
LEDSide marker lamp - front
LEDPark lamp - front
LEDSignature lamp
LEDDaytime running lamp
LEDTurn lamp - front
LEDTail and brake lamp
LEDReverse lamp
LEDTurn lamp - rear
LEDSide marker lamp - rear
LEDLicense plate lamp
LEDTrunk lamp
387
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
Trade nameFunction
LEDHigh-mount brake lamp
LEDSide repeater lamp
LEDGlove compartment lamp
LEDInterior lamp
To replace any bulb, see your authorized dealer.
388
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Capacities and Specifications
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any device
that may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Radio Frequencies and Reception
Factors
AM and FM frequencies are established by
the Federal Communications Commission
(FCC) and the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC).
Those frequencies are:
• AM: 530-1710 kHz
• FM: 87.9-107.9 MHz
Note: Listening to loud audio for long
periods of time could damage your hearing.
Radio Reception Factors
The further you travel from an AM or FM station, the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception.Distance and strength
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree foliage and
thunderstorms can interfere with the reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and
result in the audio system muting.
Station overload
389
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Audio System
CD and CD Player Information
Note: CD units play commercially pressed
4.7 in (12 cm) audio compact discs only. Due
to technical incompatibility, certain
recordable and re-recordable compact discs
may not function correctly when used in the
vehicle’s CD player.
Note: Do not insert CDs with homemade
paper (adhesive) labels into the CD player
as the label may peel and cause the CD to
become jammed. You should use a
permanent felt tip marker rather than
adhesive labels on your homemade CDs.
Ballpoint pens may damage CDs. Ask an
authorized dealer for more information.
Note: Do not use any irregularly shaped
discs or discs with a scratch protection film
attached.
Always handle discs by their edges only.
Clean the disc with an approved CD cleaner
only. Wipe it from the center of the disc
toward the edge. Do not clean in a circular
motion.
Do not expose discs to direct sunlight or heat
sources for extended periods.
MP3 and WMA Track and Folder
Structure
Audio systems capable of recognizing and
playing MP3 and WMA individual tracks and
folder structures work as follows:
• There are two different modes for MP3
and WMA disc playback: MP3 and WMA
track mode (system default) and MP3 and
WMA folder mode.
• MP3 and WMA track mode ignores any
folder structure on the MP3 and WMA
disc. The player numbers each MP3 and
WMA track on the disc (noted by the MP3
or WMA file extension) from T001 to a
maximum of T255. The maximum number
of playable MP3 and WMA files may be
less depending on the structure of the
CD and exact model of radio present.
• MP3 and WMA folder mode represents
a folder structure consisting of one level
of folders. The CD player numbers all
MP3 and WMA tracks on the disc (noted
by the MP3 or WMA file extension) and
all folders containing MP3 and WMA files,
from F001 (folder) T001 (track) to F253
T255.
• Creating discs with only one level of
folders helps with navigation through the
disc files.
If you are burning your own MP3 and WMA
discs, it is important to understand how the
system reads the structures you create. While
various files may be present (files with
extensions other than MP3 and WMA), only
files with the MP3 and WMA extension are
played; other files are ignored by the system.
This enables you to use the same MP3 and
WMA disc for a variety of tasks on your work
computer, home computer and your
in-vehicle system.
390
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Audio System
In track mode, the system displays and plays
the structure as if it were only one level deep
(all MP3 and WMA files play, regardless of
being in a specific folder). In folder mode,
the system only plays the MP3 and WMA files
in the current folder.
AUDIO UNIT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any device
that may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: The touchscreen system controls most
of the audio features.
Adjusting the Volume
E265373
Turn to adjust the volume.
Changing Radio Stations
E265696
In radio mode, turn to search through the
radio frequency band.
In satellite radio mode, turn to find the
previous or next available satellite radio
station.
Ejecting the CD (If Equipped)
E265032
Press and release the button to
eject a CD.
391
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Audio System
Inserting a CD (If Equipped)
Insert a CD into the CD slot.
Selecting the Audio Modes
E265276
Press and release the button to
access different audio modes, for
example AM, FM and CD.
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off
Press and release the button.
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse
In radio mode, select a frequency band and
press and release either button. The system
stops at the first station it finds in that
direction.
In CD mode, press and release to select the
next or previous track. Press and hold to
move quickly forward or backward through
the current track.
In satellite radio mode, press and release to
select the next or previous satellite radio
station. If you select a specific category (such
as jazz, rock or news), press to find the next
or previous station in the category you select.
USB PORT
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any device
that may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
E201595
The USB port allows you to plug in media
playing devices, memory sticks and charge
devices, if supported.
MEDIA HUB
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any device
that may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
392
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Audio System
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
The media hub may be on the instrument
panel or center console.
The media hub may contain one or more of
the following inputs:
• USB ports. See USB Port (page 392).
• Audio input jack.
393
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Audio System
GENERAL INFORMATION
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any device
that may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Getting to Know Your System
The SYNC 3 system allows you to interact
with a variety of features using the
touchscreen and voice commands. By
integrating with your Bluetooth enabled
phone, the touchscreen provides easy
interaction with audio, multimedia, climate
control, navigation, and your phone's SYNC
3 compatible apps.
Using the Touchscreen
To operate the touchscreen, you can simply
touch the item or option that you want to
select. The button changes color when you
select it.
The SYNC 3 layout allows you to quickly
select the feature you wish to use.
394
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E269856
395
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
This bar displays icons and messages pertaining to current system activities including climate
settings, voice commands and phone functions such as text messages.
Status BarA
This button is available on the main screens. Pressing it takes you to the home screen view.HomeB
This shows the current time. You can set the clock manually or have it controlled by the vehicle's
GPS location. See Settings (page 461).
ClockC
This displays the current outside temperature.Outside TemperatureD
You can touch any of the buttons on this bar to select a feature.Feature BarE
The touchscreen allows you quick access to
all of your comfort, navigation,
communication and entertainment options.
Using the status and feature bar you can
quickly select the feature you want to use.
Note: Your system is equipped with a feature
that allows you to access and control audio
features for 10 minutes after you switch the
ignition off (and no doors open).
The Status Bar
Additional icons also display in the status bar
depending on market, vehicle options and
current operation. If a feature is not active,
the icon does not display. Certain icons may
move to the left or right depending on what
options are active.
396
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E270077
i
397
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionItemCallout
This shows the temperature the driver selects through the climate control system.Driver TemperatureA
When you activate the heated steering wheel option on the touch screen, this icon
displays. It only displays when there is not a physical button for the heated steering
wheel.
Heated steering wheelB
(If equipped)
When the passenger's temperature has been adjusted and is no longer linked to the
driver's temperature, it displays here. If Dual is turned off and the temperatures are
linked, the passenger's temperature does not display.
Passenger TemperatureC
This icon displays when your phone's microphone is muted. A caller cannot hear you.Microphone MuteD
This icon displays when the audio system is muted.MuteE
This icon appears when SYNC 3 receives a software update. Pressing the icon shows
more details about the new software.
DownloadF
This icon appears if a Wi-Fi network is connected.Wi-FiG
An available Wi-Fi network is within range.Wi-Fi in RangeH
This icon displays the phone signal strength and the roaming signal strength.Signal StrengthI
This icon displays when you receive a text message on your phone.Text MessageJ
This icon displays when 911 Assist is set to off and your phone is connected to SYNC.911 Assist OffK
This icon displays when a phone call is active.In-CallL
398
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Messages may also appear in the status bar
to provide you with notifications. You can
select the message to view the associated
feature.
Feature Bar
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Allows you to control the media playing in your vehicle. You can
control all audio features including AM, FM and satellite radio, CDs,
and media streaming over a Bluetooth device or through a USB
connection.
Audio
Allows you to adjust the temperature, fan speed and airflow within
the vehicle.
Climate
Allows you to make calls, receive calls, and access the phonebook
of your connected device.
Phone
Allows you to see your vehicle's location on a virtual road map, get
driving directions to your destination and find points of interest along
your route.
Navigation
(If equipped)
399
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionsFeature Bar Item
Connect and control SYNC 3 compatible apps running on your iphone
or android device. Also, access built-in additional features such as
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (if equipped).
Apps
If your vehicle is a hybrid, plug-in hybrid, or electric this is also where
your settings and power information is located.
You can customize your system with various settings for the touch-
screen display, feature preferences, and how you want to interact
with your vehicle.
Settings
Cleaning the Touchscreen
You can remove fingerprints with a dry,
clean, soft cloth.
If dirt or fingerprints are still on the screen,
apply a small amount of alcohol to the cloth
and try to clean it again.
Note: Do not use detergent or any type of
solvent to clean the touchscreen.
Note: Do not pour or spray alcohol onto the
touchscreen.
Using Voice Recognition
Using voice commands allows you to keep
your hands on the wheel and focus on what
is in front of you. The system provides
feedback through audible tones, prompts,
questions and spoken confirmations
depending on the situation and the chosen
level of interaction (voice settings).
The system also asks short questions
(confirmation prompts) when it is not sure of
your request or when there are multiple
possible responses to your request.
When using voice commands, words and
icons may appear in the status bar indicating
the status of the voice command session.
See Using Voice Recognition (page 411).
Accessing and Adjusting Modes
Through Your Vehicle Information
Display (If Equipped)
Depending on your vehicle and selected
options you may be able to control some of
the SYNC 3 features on your information
display.
You can make the following adjustments
using the information display SYNC 3 screen:
400
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
InformationOption
Information for current audio playing.Audio
Select source.
View current road and speed limit (if information is available).Navigation
View current route, next turn, time to your destination (depending on cluster level), distance to destination (depending on
cluster level), and ability to cancel route.
If you do not have an active navigation route programed, the compass is shown.
If you are not on a call, a call can be made by selecting: *Phone
Missed callsOutgoing callsIncoming callsAll callsQuick dial
If you are on a call, the call information is displayed on the information display.
If you are receiving a call, you can accept it by selecting OK on the right-hand steering wheel controls.
* Depending on your vehicle options, all of these choices may not display.
Use the OK and arrow buttons on the right
side of your steering wheel to scroll through
the available modes.
The selection menu expands and different
options appear.
• Press the up and down arrows to scroll
through the modes.
• Press the right arrow to enter the mode,
use the left arrow to exit the mode.
• Press the up and down arrows to make
adjustments within the chosen mode.
• Press OK to confirm your selection.
401
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: If your vehicle is not equipped with
navigation, compass appears in the display
instead of navigation. If you press the right
arrow to go into the compass menu, you can
see the compass graphic. The compass
displays the direction in which the vehicle is
traveling, not true direction (for example, if
the vehicle is traveling west, the middle of
the compass graphic displays west; north
displays to the left of west though its true
direction is to the right of west).
Using the Controls on the Steering
Wheel
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you can use different controls on
your steering wheel to interact with the
touchscreen system in different ways.
VOL: Control the volume of audio output.
Mute: Mute the audio output.
Voice: Press to start a voice session. Press
again to stop the voice prompt and
immediately begin speaking. Press and hold
to end a voice session.
SEEK NEXT:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
SEEK PREVIOUS:
• While in radio mode, press to seek
between memory presets.
• While in USB, Bluetooth Audio or CD
mode, press to seek between songs or
press and hold to fast seek.
PHONE ACCEPT: Press to answer a call or
switch between calls.
PHONE REJECT: Press to end a call or reject
an incoming call.
Note: On some models, SEEK NEXT may be
combined with PHONE REJECT and SEEK
PREVIOUS may be combined with PHONE
ACCEPT.
M: Touch the control repeatedly to switch
between media sources (modes).
See Steering Wheel (page 80).
Using Your Bezel Controls
Depending on your vehicle and option
package, you may also have these controls
on your instrument panel:
• Power: Switch the audio system on and
off.
• VOL: Control the volume of playing
audio.
• Seek and Tune: Use as you normally
would in audio modes.
• Eject: Eject a CD from the audio system.
• SOURCE or MEDIA: Press repeatedly to
advance through available media modes.
• SOUND: Press to access the Sound
menu where you can adjust sound and
other audio settings.
• 1-6: Press and hold to store or press to
select an AM, FM or SIRIUS memory
preset. See Audio System (page 389).
402
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
• DISP: Switch the display on or off. You
can also touch the screen to switch the
display back on.
• Temperature, fan and climate control
buttons: Control the temperature, fan
speed or settings of the climate control
system. See Climate Control (page 136).
911 Assist
WARNING: Unless the 911 Assist
setting is set on before a crash, the system
will not dial for help which could delay
response time, potentially increasing the risk
of serious injury or death after a crash.
WARNING: Do not wait for 911 Assist
to make an emergency call if you can do it
yourself. Dial emergency services
immediately to avoid delayed response time
which could increase the risk of serious injury
or death after a crash. If you do not hear 911
Assist within five seconds of the crash, the
system or phone may be damaged or
non-functional.
WARNING: Always place your phone
in a secure location in your vehicle so it does
not become a projectile or get damaged in
a crash. Failure to do so may cause serious
injury to someone or damage the phone
which could prevent 911 Assist from working
properly.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature must be
set on before the incident.
Note: The SYNC 911 Assist feature only
operates in the U.S., Canada or in a territory
in which 911 is the emergency number.
Note: Before setting this feature on, make
sure that you read the 911 Assist Privacy
Notice later in this section for important
information.
Note: If any user sets 911 Assist to on or off,
that setting applies for all paired phones. If
911 Assist is switched off and the phone is
connected to SYNC, an icon displays on the
status bar.
Note: Every phone operates differently.
While SYNC 911 Assist works with most
cellular phones, some may have trouble
using this feature.
If a crash deploys an airbag (excluding knee
airbags and rear inflatable safety belts [if
equipped]) or activates the fuel pump
shut-off, your SYNC-equipped vehicle may
be able to contact emergency services by
dialing 911 through a paired and connected
Bluetooth enabled phone. You can learn
more about the 911 Assist feature, by visiting:
Website
www.owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
For important information about airbag
deployment and the fuel pump shut-off
please see the Supplementary Restrains and
Roadside Emergencies sections of your
owner manual.
To switch 911 Assist on and off please view
the settings information. See Settings (page
461).
403
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To make sure that 911 Assist works correctly:
• SYNC must be powered and working
properly at the time of the incident and
throughout feature activation and use.
• The 911 Assist feature must be set on
before the incident.
• You must pair and connect a Bluetooth
enabled and compatible cell phone to
SYNC.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have the ability to make and
maintain an outgoing call at the time of
the incident.
• A connected Bluetooth enabled phone
must have adequate network coverage,
battery power and signal strength.
• The vehicle must have battery power and
be located in the U.S., Canada or in a
territory in which 911 is the emergency
number.
In the Event of a Crash
Not all crashes will deploy an airbag or
activate the fuel pump shut-off (the triggers
for 911 Assist). If a connected cell phone
sustains damage or loses its connection to
SYNC during a crash, SYNC will search for
and try to connect to a previously paired cell
phone; SYNC will then attempt to call the
emergency services.
Before making the call:
• SYNC provides a short window of time
(about 10 seconds) to cancel the call. If
you fail to cancel the call, SYNC attempts
to dial 911.
• SYNC says the following, or a similar
message: "SYNC will attempt to call 911,
to cancel the call, press Cancel on your
screen or press and hold the phone
button on your steering wheel."
If you do not cancel the call, and SYNC
makes a successful call, a pre-recorded
message plays for the 911 operator, and then
the occupant(s) in your vehicle is able to talk
with the operator. Be prepared to provide
your name, phone number and location
immediately, because not all 911 systems are
capable of receiving this information
electronically.
911 Assist May Not Work If
• Your cellular phone or 911 Assist
hardware sustains damage in a crash.
• The vehicle's battery or the SYNC system
has no power.
• The phone(s) thrown from your vehicle
are the ones paired and connected to
the system.
911 Assist Privacy Notice
When you switch on 911 Assist, it may
disclose to emergency services that your
vehicle has been in a crash involving the
deployment of an airbag or activation of the
fuel pump shut-off. Certain versions or
updates to 911 Assist may also be capable
404
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911
operators your vehicle location or other
details about your vehicle or crash to assist
911 operators to provide the most appropriate
emergency services. If you do not want to
disclose this information, do not switch the
feature on.
Safety Information
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any device
that may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
• Do not attempt to service or repair the
system. Have an authorized dealer
check your vehicle.
• Do not operate playing devices if the
power cords or cables are broken, split
or damaged. Place cords and cables out
of the way, so they do not interfere with
the operation of pedals, seats,
compartments or safe driving abilities.
• Do not leave playing devices in your
vehicle during extreme conditions as it
could cause them damage. See your
device's user guide for further
information.
• For your safety, some SYNC 3 functions
are speed-dependent. Their use is limited
to when your vehicle is traveling at
speeds under 3 mph (5 km/h). Make sure
that you review your device's manual
before using it with SYNC 3.
Speed-restricted Features
Some features of this system may be too
difficult to use while your vehicle is moving
so they are restricted from use unless your
vehicle is stationary.
• Screens crowded with information, such
as Points of Interest reviews and ratings,
SiriusXM Travel Link sports information,
or ski condition search areas.
• Any action that requires you to use a
keyboard is restricted, such as entering
a navigation destination or editing
information.
• All lists are limited so the user can view
fewer entries (such as phone contacts or
recent phone call entries).
See the following table for more specific
examples.
405
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Restricted features
Pairing a Bluetooth phone.Cellular Phone
Browsing of list entries is limited for phone contacts and recent phone calls.
Editing the keypad code.System Functionality
Enabling Valet Mode.
Editing settings while the rear view camera or active park assist are active.
Editing Wi-Fi settings.Wi-Fi
Editing the list of wireless networks.
Connecting to a new Wi-Fi network.
Viewing received text messages.Text Messages
Using the keyboard to enter a destination.Navigation
Adding or editing Navigation Favorites entries or Avoid Areas.
Creating a SYNC Owner Account
Why do I need a SYNC owner account?
• Essential for keeping up with the latest
software and connected features.
• Access to customer support for any
questions you may have.
• Maintain account permissions.
Visit the website to sign up and register.
Website
www.owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
406
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Website
www.syncmaroute.ca
Lincoln Connect with Lincoln Way (If
Equipped)
With a Lincoln Connect-equipped vehicle,
you can use Lincoln Way® to track your
vehicle’s location and remotely access
vehicle features such as start, lock and
unlock and vehicle status including fuel level
and approximate mileage. You can also
schedule specific times to remotely start your
vehicle so it’s ready to hit the road as soon
as you are. Lincoln Way® is available through
a free download via the Apple App Store®
or Google Play™. Message and data rates
may apply. Services may be limited by mobile
phone network coverage area.
• FCC: LHJ-FAN
• IC: 2807E-FAN
Updating Your System
You can choose to download the update
onto a USB drive or use Wi-Fi to deliver
automatic updates.
USB Updates
To use the USB update you need to log into
your owner account and visit the SYNC
software update page.
Website
www.owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
The website notifies you if an update is
available. You can then select to download
the update.
You will need an empty USB drive. Please
check the website for minimum
requirements. Once you have inserted the
USB drive into your computer, choose to start
the download. Follow the instructions
provided to download the files to the USB
drive.
The installation of most files occurs in the
background, and does not interrupt your use
of the system. Navigation updates cannot be
installed in the background, because the files
are too large.
To install the update in your vehicle, remove
anything that is plugged in the USB ports on
the media hub and plug in the USB drive
containing the update. When the USB drive
is plugged in, the installation should begin
immediately. After a successful installation,
the update is available the next time the
vehicle is started.
Please reference the website for any further
actions.
Updating Over Wi-Fi
To update your System over Wi-Fi your
vehicle must be within the range of a Wi-Fi
access point. Data rates may apply.
407
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To connect your system to Wi-Fi, select:
Menu Item
Settings
Wi-Fi
You can then select your Wi-
Fi network. You may have
to enter the security code if
the network is secured. The
system confirms when it has
connected to the network.
Available Wi-
Fi Networks
You must also give the system permission
to update automatically. Upon vehicle
delivery, the System asks you if you would
like to use the automatic update feature. If
you agree to automatic updates, you can
press OK to confirm. If this selection does
not appear upon vehicle delivery you can
access it through the General Settings. See
Settings (page 461). You can also perform a
master reset. See SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting
(page 481).
If you would like to switch this feature on
later, select:
Menu Item
Settings
General
From this menu, you can
enable automatic updates.
If you have not done so
already, the system prompts
you to set up a Wi-Fi
connection when you
enable this feature.
Automatic
System
Updates
When Wi-Fi and automatic updates are
enabled, your system checks for software
updates periodically. If a new version is
available, it downloads at that time. Software
downloads can take place for up to 30
minutes after you have switched your vehicle
off. The updates do not interrupt the normal
use of your SYNC 3 system. If a download
does not complete for any reason, the
download continues where it left off at the
next Wi-Fi connected opportunity. Upon
activation of an update, a banner displays
on the touchscreen indicating the system
update. Select the icon to see more detail.
This icon displays for two ignition cycles.
To switch this feature off:
Menu Item
Settings
General
In this menu selection, you
can change the selection for
automatic updates to OFF.
Automatic
System
Updates
Customer Assistance
The SYNC support team is available to help
you with any questions you are not able to
answer on your own.
Monday-Saturday, 8:30am-8:00pm EST.
United States: 1-800-521-4140.
Canada: 1-800-387-9333.
Mexico: 01-800-719-8466.
408
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Times are subject to change due to holidays.
Privacy Information
When you connect a cellular phone to SYNC
3, the system creates a profile within your
vehicle that links to that cellular phone. This
profile helps in offering you more cellular
features and operating more efficiently.
Among other things, this profile may contain
data about your cellular phone book, text
messages (read and unread), and call history,
including history of calls when your cell
phone was not connected to the system. In
addition, if you connect a media device, the
system creates and retains an index of
supported media content. The system also
records a short diagnostic log of
approximately 10 minutes of all recent system
activity. The log profile and other system data
may be used to improve the system and help
diagnose any problems that may occur.
The cellular profile, media device index, and
diagnostic log remain in your vehicle unless
you delete them and are generally accessible
only in your vehicle when the cellular phone
or media player is connected.
If you no longer plan to use the system or
your vehicle, we recommend you perform a
Master Reset to erase all stored information.
You can find more information about the
Master Reset in General Settings. See
Settings (page 461). System data cannot be
accessed without special equipment and
access to your vehicle's SYNC 3 module. The
Lincoln Motor Company does not access the
system data for any purpose other than as
described absent consent, a court order, or
where required by law enforcement, other
government authorities, or other third parties
acting with lawful authority. Other parties
may seek to access the information
independently of The Lincoln Motor
Company.
HOME SCREEN
409
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E224962
Home screen displayTileItem
Shows the active media source.AudioA
410
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Home screen displayTileItem
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the compass.
The name of the connected phone appears on the screen. The status of the phone features
also appear. This includes signal strength, battery charge, text messaging and roaming.
PhoneB
This map displays your current location or current route in real time.Navigation *C
When you have navigation active, you also see the next turn and the length of time and
distance to your destination.
If your vehicle does not have navigation, this space contains the audio information.
* If equipped.
You can touch any of the feature displays to
access that feature.
Anytime you select the home button, the
system returns you to this screen.
USING VOICE RECOGNITION
The SYNC 3 system allows you to use voice
commands, to control features like audio and
climate controls. By using voice commands,
you can keep your hands on the wheel and
your eyes on the road.
You can access each feature controlled by
SYNC 3 through a variety of commands.
E142599
To activate the SYNC 3 voice
commands push the voice button
on the steering wheel and wait for
the prompt.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that it can
be the name of anything, such as artist, the
name of contact or number. The context and
the description of the command tell you what
to say for this dynamic option.
There are some commands that work for
every feature, these commands are:
411
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionVoice Command
Brings you to the main menu.Main Menu
Returns you to the previous screen.Go back
Ends the voice session.Cancel
Gives you a list of possible voice commands.List of Commands
You can name any feature and the system gives a list of commands available for the feature. For
example, you could say:
___ List of Commands
Phone List of Commands
Navigation List of Commands
You can use this command to view the next page of options on any screen where multiple pages of
choices are given.
Next Page
You can use this command to view the previous page of options on any screen where multiple pages
of choices are given.
Previous Page
Gives you available commands you can use on the current screen.Help
Included here are some of the most popular
commands for each SYNC 3 feature.
412
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Audio Voice Commands
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
audio voice commands it can be the name
of a Sirius channel or a channel number, a
radio frequency number, or the name of an
artist, album, song or a genre.
To control the media features, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
You can say the Sirius channel name or number such as "Sirius channel 16".
1
Sirius Channel ___
You can also turn to a Sirius channel by saying the channel's name, such as "The Pulse".
Allows you to tune to a specific FM or AM frequency such as "FM 88.7" or "AM
1580".
AM ___
FM ___
Allows you to tune to a specific HD frequency such as “FM 88.7 HD 1”.
1
FM ___ HD ___
Allows you to listen to music on your Bluetooth connected device.Bluetooth Audio
Allows you to listen to music on your USB connected device.USB
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, song or a genre
to listen to that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option
is available. For example, you could say "Play artist, The Beatles" or "Play song,
Penny Lane".
Play Genre ___
Play Playlist ___
Play Artist ___
Play Album ___
Play Podcast ___
413
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
Play Song ___
Play Audiobook ___
For USB audio only, you can say the name of an artist, album, or a genre to
browse by that selection. Your system must finish indexing before this option
is available. For example you can say "Browse The Beatles" or "Browse folk".
Browse ___
1
This option may not be available in all markets or may require a subscription.
Climate Voice Commands
You can control the temperature of the
vehicle using voice commands.
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
climate voice commands it can be the
desired degrees for the temperature setting.
To adjust the temperature, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Adjust the temperature between 60–85°F (15.5–29.5°C).Set Temperature ___
Phone Voice Commands
Pairing a Phone
You can use voice commands to connect
your Bluetooth enabled phone to the system.
414
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To pair your phone, press the voice button and when prompted, say:
DescriptionVoice command
Follow the on-screen instructions to complete the pairing process. See Settings (page 461).Pair Phone
Making Calls
___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
phone voice commands it can be the name
of the contact you wish to call or the digits
you want to dial.
Press the voice button and say a command similar to the following:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook such as "Call Jenny".Call ___
Allows you to call a specific contact from your phonebook at a specific location such as "Call
Jenny at Home".
Call ___ at ___
Allows you to dial a specific number such as “Dial 867-5309”.Dial ___
Please make sure that you are saying the
contact name exactly as it appears in your
contact list.
415
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Once you have provided the digits of the phone number, you can say the following commands:
DescriptionVoice Command
If you did not enter the full number with the first command, you can continue saying the number.<0-9>
Tells SYNC 3 to make the phone call.Dial
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the last block of digits you state.Delete
Tells SYNC 3 to erase the entire number.Clear
Text Message Voice Commands
To access text message options, press the voice button and say:
DescriptionVoice command
Listen to Message
You can say the number of the message you would like to hear.Listen to text message ___
Reply to Message
416
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Voice Commands (If Equipped)
Setting a Destination
You can use any of the following commands
to set a destination or find a point of interest. ___ is a dynamic listing, meaning that for
navigation voice commands it can be a POI
category or a major brand name, where
major brand name is a chain with more than
20 locations
You can find an address, a point of interest (POI), or search for points of interest by category:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the address search functionality. You can also search for an address in a specific
state or province.
Find an Address
State the name of the POI category or major brand name you would like to search for such as "Find
restaurants".
Find a ___
Allows you to enter the POI search functionality.Find a POI
Allows you to enter the intersection search functionality.Find an Intersection
State the name of a POI category or major brand name you would like to search for.Find the Nearest <POI Category>
Allows you to see a list of your previous destinations.Show Previous Destinations
Allows you to see a list of your favorite destinations.Show Favorites
Allows you to route to your home address.Drive Home
Allows you to route to your work address.Drive to Work
417
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
In addition, you can say these commands when a route is active:
DescriptionVoice command
Cancels the current route.Cancel Route
Allows you to select an alternate route.Detour
Repeats the last guidance prompt.Repeat Instruction
Displays the active route.Show Route
Displays the list of upcoming maneuvers.Route Summary
Provides current location.Where Am I
Allows you to zoom in on the map.Zoom in
Allows you to zoom out from the map.Zoom out
418
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Mobile App Voice Commands (If Equipped)
The following voice commands are always available:
DescriptionVoice command
SYNC 3 will prompt you to say the name of an app to start it on SYNC 3.Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will list all of the currently available Mobile Apps.List Mobile Apps
SYNC 3 will search and connect to compatible app(s) running on your mobile device.Find Mobile Apps
There are also voice commands that you can use when app(s) are connected to SYNC 3:
DescriptionVoice command
At any time, you can say the name of a mobile app to start the mobile app on SYNC 3.Say the name of an app
SYNC 3 will list the available voice commands for the specified app if the app is running on SYNC 3.Say the name of an app, followed
by help
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands (If Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may not be
available in all markets. Activation and a
subscription are required.
419
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can say the following commands to access SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link:
DescriptionVoice command
Displays a list of traffic incidents.Show Traffic
Displays the current weather map.Show Weather Map
Displays a list of fuel prices.Show Fuel Prices
Displays the 5 day weather forecast.Show 5 Day Forecast
Help
Voice Settings Commands
You can say the following commands to access the voice settings:
DescriptionVoice command
Allows you to enter the voice settings functionality.Voice Settings
Sets standard prompting with longer prompts.Interaction Mode Standard
Sets advanced prompting with shorter prompts.Interaction Mode Advanced
Allows the system to confirm before making a phone call.Call Confirmation On
420
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionVoice command
The system does not confirm before placing a call.Call Confirmation Off
The system displays a short list of available commands.Voice Command Lists On
The system does not display the list of commands.Voice Command Lists Off
You can use the volume control to adjust the
volume of the system voice prompts. While
prompt is active, adjust the volume control
up or down to your desired setting.
Note: Depending on the current climate
control settings, the fan speed may
automatically go down while issuing voice
commands or while making and receiving
phone calls via SYNC to reduce the amount
of background noise in the vehicle. The fan
speed will automatically return to normal
operation once the voice session ends. You
can adjust the fan speed during a voice
session, simply press the fan buttons (or turn
the fan knob) to increase or decrease the
fan speed to the setting you prefer.
To disable this automatic fan speed
reduction feature during voice sessions,
press and hold the climate control AC and
Recirculated air buttons simultaneously,
release and then increase fan speed within
2 seconds. To re-enable this feature, repeat
the above sequence.
ENTERTAINMENT
421
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E242502
422
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Message and descriptionMessage
SourcesA
Direct TuneB
PresetsC
Note: Your vehicle may allow you to save
presets from different audio sources on the
same page.
You can access these options using the
touchscreen or voice commands.
Sources
Press this button to select the source of
media you want to listen to.
Menu item
AM
FM
1
SIRIUS
1
CD
The name of the USB that is plugged in displays here.USB
423
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu item
Bluetooth Stereo
If you have SYNC 3 compatible apps on your connected smart phone, they display here as individual source selections.Apps
1
This feature may not be available in all markets and requires an active subscription.
AM/FM Radio
Tuning a Station
You can use the tune or seek controls on the
radio bezel to select a station.
To tune a station using the touchscreen,
select:
Menu item
Direct Tune
A pop up appears, allowing you to type in
the frequency of a station. You can only enter
a valid station for the source you are
currently listening to.
You can press the backspace button to
delete the previously entered number.
Once you have entered the station's call
numbers, you can select:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Press to begin
playing the station
you have entered.
Enter
Press to exit without
changing the station.
Cancel
Presets
To set a new preset, tune to the station and
then press and hold one of the memory
preset buttons. The audio mutes briefly while
the system saves the station and then
returns.
There are two preset banks available for AM
and three banks for FM. To access additional
presets, tap the preset button. The indicator
on the preset button shows which bank of
presets you are currently viewing.
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets and requires an active
subscription.
E234451
424
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM satellite radio is a
subscription-based satellite radio service that
broadcasts a variety of music, sports, news,
weather, traffic and entertainment
programming. Your factory-installed SiriusXM
satellite radio system includes hardware and
a limited subscription term that begins on
the date of sale or lease of your vehicle. See
an authorized dealer for availability.
For more information on extended
subscription terms (a service fee is required),
the online media player and a list of SiriusXM
satellite radio channels, and other features,
please visit www.siriusxm.com in the United
States, www.siriusxm.ca in Canada, or call
SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474.
Note: SiriusXM reserves the unrestricted
right to change, rearrange, add or delete
programming. This includes canceling,
moving or adding particular channels, and
its prices, at any time, with or without notice
to you. Ford Motor Company shall not be
responsible for any such programming
changes.
Note: This receiver includes the eCos
real-time operating system. eCos is
published under the eCos License.
The following buttons are available for SiriusXM:
Action and descriptionMenu item
Touch this button to see a list of available stations.Browse
A pop-up appears, allowing you to type in the call numbers of a station.Direct Tune
Once you enter the stations call numbers, you can select:
The system tunes to the station you select.Enter
You exit the pop-up and the current station continues to play.Cancel
You can press the backspace button to delete the previous number.
425
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and descriptionMenu item
Replay audio on the current channel. You can replay approximately 45 minutes of audio as long as
you remain tuned to the current station. Changing stations erases the previous audio.
Replay
When you are in replay mode, you are not able to select a different
preset until you return to live audio. Pressing this button returns you
to the live broadcast.
Live
Save the current song, artist, or team as a favorite. The system alerts you when it plays again on
any channel.
ALERT
Selecting this button allows you to enable and edit alerts. See Settings (page 461).
Memory Presets
To set a preset, tune to the station then press
and hold one of the memory preset buttons.
The audio mutes briefly while the system
saves the station and returns once the
station is stored.
There are three preset banks available for
SiriusXM. To access additional presets, tap
the preset button. The indicator on the preset
button shows which bank of presets you are
currently viewing.
Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number
(ESN)
You need your ESN to activate, modify or
track your satellite radio account. See
Settings (page 461).
426
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Reception Factors and Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
For optimal reception performance, keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build-up and keep
luggage and other materials as far away from the antenna as possible.
Antenna obstructions
Hills, mountains, tall buildings, bridges, tunnels, freeway overpasses, parking garages, dense tree
foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception.
Terrain
When you pass a ground-based broadcast-repeating tower, a stronger signal may overtake a
weaker one and the audio system may mute.
Station overload
Your display may show ACQUIRING... to indicate the interference and the audio system may mute.Satellite radio signal interference
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
No action required. This message should disap-
pear shortly.
Radio requires more than two seconds to produce
audio for the selected channel.
Acquiring Signal
If this message does not clear shortly, or with an
ignition key cycle, your receiver may have a fault.
See an authorized dealer for service.
There is an internal module or system failure
present.
Satellite antenna fault
SIRIUS system failure
Tune to another channel or choose another preset.The channel is no longer available.Invalid Channel
427
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Troubleshooting tips
ActionCauseMessage
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to subscribe
to the channel, or tune to another channel.
Your subscription does not include this channel.Unsubscribed Channel
The signal is blocked. When you move into an
open area, the signal should return.
The signal is lost from the SiriusXM satellite or
SiriusXM tower to your vehicle antenna.
Satellite acquiring signal…
No action required. The process may take up to
three minutes.
Update of channel programming in progress.Updating…
Contact SiriusXM at 1-888-539-7474 to resolve
subscription issues.
Your satellite service is no longer available.Questions? Call 1-888-539-7474
Use the channel guide to turn off the Lock or Skip
function on that station.
All the channels in the selected category are either
skipped or locked.
None found. Check channel guide.
No action required.SiriusXM has updated the channels available for
your vehicle.
SIRIUS Subscription updated
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)
Note: This feature may not be available in
all markets.
To activate HD radio, please see the Radio
Settings in the Settings Chapter. See
Settings (page 461).
Note: HD Radio broadcasts are not available
in all markets.
428
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
HD Radio technology is the digital evolution
of analog AM/FM radio. Your system has a
special receiver that allows it to receive
digital broadcasts (where available) in
addition to the analog broadcasts, it already
receives. Digital broadcasts provide a better
sound quality than analog broadcasts with
free, crystal-clear audio and no static or
distortion. For more information, and a guide
to available stations and programming,
please visit:
Website
www.hdradio.com
When HD Radio is on and you tune to a
station broadcasting HD Radio technology,
you may notice the following indicators on
your screen:
E142616
The HD logo is grey when acquiring a digital
station, and then changes to orange when
digital audio is playing. When this logo is
available, you may also see Title and Artist
fields on-screen.
The multicast indicator appears in FM mode
(only) if the current station is broadcasting
multiple digital broadcasts. The highlighted
numbers signify available digital channels
where new or different content is available.
HD1 signifies the main programming status
and is available in analog and digital
broadcasts. Other multicast stations (HD2
through HD7) are only available digitally.
Note: There is also an additional feature for
stations that have more than 1 HD multicast
(For example, HD1 or HD2). The HD logo and
Radio text appears as a button. Pressing this
button allows you cycle through all of the
HD stations on that specific frequency. For
example, if you are on 101.1 and it has HD1,
HD2, HD3, pressing the button repeatedly
causes the radio to cycle through the HD
stations in a cyclic increasing order.
429
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
When HD Radio broadcasts are active, you can access the following functions:
Action and descriptionMessage
Allows you to save an active channel as a memory preset. Touch and hold a memory preset slot
until the sound returns. There is a brief mute while the radio saves the station. Sound returns
when the channel saves. When switching to an HD2 or HD3 memory preset, the sound mutes
before the digital audio plays, because the system has to reacquire the digital signal.
Presets
Note: As with any station you save, you cannot access the saved station if your vehicle is outside the station’s reception area.
HD Radio Reception and Station Troubleshooting
Potential reception issues
If you are listening to a multicast station and you are on the fringe of the reception area, the station
may mute due to weak signal strength.
Reception area
If you are listening to HD1, the system changes back to the analog broadcast until the digital
broadcast is available again. However, if you are listening to any of the possible HD2-HD7 multicast
channels, the station mutes and stays muted unless it is able to connect to the digital signal again.
When the system first receives a station (aside from HD2-HD7 multicast stations), it first plays the
station in the analog version. Once the receiver verifies the station is an HD Radio station, it shifts
to the digital version. Depending on the station quality, you may hear a slight sound change when
the station changes from analog to digital. Blending is the shift from analog to digital sound or
digital back to analog sound.
Station blending
430
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
In order to provide the best possible
experience, use the contact form to report
any station issues found while listening to a
station broadcasting with HD Radio
technology. Independent entities own and
operate each station. These stations are
responsible for ensuring all audio streams
and data fields are accurate.
Potential station issues
ActionCauseIssues
No action required. This is a broadcast issue.This is poor time alignment by the radio broad-
caster.
Echo, stutter, skip or repeat in audio.
Increase or decrease in audio
volume.
No action required. The reception issue may clear
up as you continue to drive.
The radio is shifting between analog and digital
audio.
Sound fading or blending in and out.
No action required. This is normal behavior. Wait
until the audio is available.
The digital multicast is not available until the HD
Radio broadcast is decoded. Once decoded, the
audio is available.
There is an audio mute delay when
selecting HD2 or HD3, multicast
preset or Direct Tune.
No action required. The station is not available in
your current location.
The previously stored multicast preset or direct
tune is not available in your current reception area.
Cannot access HD2 or HD3 multicast
channel when recalling a preset or
from a direct tune.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.Text information does not match
currently playing audio.
Fill out the station issue form.
1
Data service issue by the radio broadcaster.There is no text information shown
for currently selected frequency.
1
You can find the form here:
431
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Website
http://hdradio.com/stations/feedback
HD Radio Technology manufactured under
license from iBiquity Digital Corporation and
foreign patents. HD Radio and the HD and
HD Radio logos are proprietary trademarks
of DTS. Ford Motor Company and DTS are
not responsible for the content sent using
HD Radio technology. Content may be
changed, added or deleted at any time at
the station owner's discretion.
CD (If equipped)
Once you select this option, the system
returns you to the main audio screen.
The current audio information appears on
the screen.
The following buttons are also available:
FunctionButton
You can use the browse button to select a track.Browse
Select this button and a small number one displays to indicate the track is set to repeat.Repeat
For MP3 CDs, this button allows you to toggle through repeat off, repeat one track (a small number
one displays), and repeat current folder (a small folder displays).
Select the shuffle symbol to have the audio on the disk play in random order.Shuffle
432
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
Bluetooth Stereo or USB
Bluetooth Stereo and USB allow you to
access media that you store on your
Bluetooth device or USB device such as
music, audio books or podcasts.
The following buttons are available for Bluetooth and USB:
FunctionButton
Pressing the repeat button toggles the repeat setting through three modes: repeat off (button not
highlighted), repeat all (button highlighted) and repeat track (button highlighted with a small number
one).
Repeat
Play the tracks in random order.Shuffle
You can use the forward, reverse, pause or
play buttons to control the audio playback.
To get more information about the currently
playing track, press the cover art or Info
button.
For some devices, SYNC 3 is able to provide
30-second skip buttons when you listen to
audio books or podcasts. These buttons
allow you to skip forward or backward within
a track.
While playing audio from a USB device you
can look for certain music by selecting the
following:
433
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
FunctionButton
If available, displays the list of tracks in the Now Playing playlist.Browse
This option, which is available under browse, allows you to play all
tracks or to filter the available media into one of the below categories.
New Search
Play All
Playlists
Artist
Albums
Songs
Genres
Podcasts
Audio books
Composers
This button allows you to choose a specific letter to view within the
category you are browsing.
A-Z Jump
If available, this allows you to browse the folders and files on your
USB device.
Explore Device
434
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB Ports
E211463
The USB ports are in the center console or
behind a small access door in the instrument
panel.
This feature allows you to plug in USB media
devices, memory sticks, flash drives or thumb
drives, and charge devices if they support
this feature.
Select this option to play audio from your
USB device.
Apps
The system supports the use of certain audio
apps such as iHeartRadio through a USB or
Bluetooth enabled device.
Each app gives you different on-screen
options depending on the app's content.
See Apps (page 458).
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information
The system is capable of hosting nearly any
digital media player, including iPod, iPhone,
and most USB drives.
Supported audio formats include MP3, WMA,
WAV, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported audio file extensions include MP3,
WMA, WAV, M4A, M4B, AAC, and FLAC.
Supported USB file systems include: FAT,
exFAT, and NTFS.
SYNC 3 is also able to organize the media
from your USB device by metadata tags.
Metadata tags, which are descriptive
software identifiers embedded in the media
files, provide information about the file.
If your indexed media files contain no
information embedded in these metadata
tags, SYNC 3 may classify the empty
metadata tags as unknown.
SYNC 3 is capable of indexing up to 50,000
songs per USB device, for up to 10 devices.
CLIMATE
Touch the climate button on the touchscreen
to access your climate control features.
Depending on your vehicle line and option
package, your climate screen may look
different from one of the screens shown
below. Your screen may not contain all of
the features shown.
Note: You can switch temperature units
between Fahrenheit and Celsius. See
Settings (page 461).
435
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E206820
436
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Driver temperature: Touch up or
down to adjust the temperature.
A
Heated steering wheel:B
Note: This feature only functions
when you switch the engine on.
Touch this icon to switch the
heated steering wheel on and off.
It takes about 5 minutes to warm
the steering wheel to 74°F (23.3°C)
in temperatures as low as -4°F
(-20°C). The wheel maintains an
approximate temperature of 90°F
(32.2°C) and operates
independently from the heated
seats and other climate-control
functions. The heating element is
in between the leather covering
and foam core to help provide
maximum heat without adversely
affecting the feel of the steering
wheel.
Note: For steering wheels with
wood trim, the heating feature will
not heat the wheel between the 10
and 2 o'clock positions.
Defrost: A pop up appears on the
screen to display the defrost
options.
C
MAX Defrost: Touch the button to
maximize defrosting. Air flows
through the windshield vents, the
fan automatically adjusts to the
highest speed and the driver and
passenger temperatures are set to
HI. You can use this setting to
defog or clear a thin covering of
ice from the windshield. The
heated rear window also
automatically turns on when you
select MAX Defrost.
Defrost: Distributes air through the
windshield defroster vents and
demister vents.
Heated rear window: Turns the
heated rear window on and off.
See Heated Rear Window (page
139).
AUTO: Touch the button to switch
on automatic operation. Select the
desired temperature using the
temperature control. The system
adjusts fan speed, air distribution,
air conditioning operation, and
selects outside air or recirculated
air to heat or cool the vehicle in
order to maintain the desired
temperature.
D
Power: Touch the button to switch
the system on and off. Switching
off the climate control system
prevents outside air from entering
the vehicle.
E
DUAL: This button lights up when
the passenger temperature
controls are active. To switch the
passenger temperature controls
off and link the passenger
temperature to the driver
temperature, touch the DUAL
button.
F
437
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: the passenger side
temperature and the DUAL
indication automatically turn on
when you or your passenger adjust
the passenger temperature.
Passenger temperature: Touch up
or down to adjust the temperature.
G
Fan speed: Touch up or down to
increase or decrease the volume
of air that circulates in your vehicle.
H
Note: You cannot adjust the fan
speed when the system is set to
AUTO, MAX A/C or MAX Defrost.
A/C: A pop-up appears on the
screen to display the air
conditioning options.
I
MAX A/C: Touch the button to
activate and maximize cooling. The
driver and passenger temperatures
are set to LO, recirculated air flows
through the instrument panel
vents, air conditioning
automatically turns on and the fan
automatically adjusts to the highest
speed.
A/C: Touch to switch the air
conditioning on or off. Use A/C
with recirculated air to improve
cooling performance and
efficiency.
Note: In certain conditions (for
example, Max Defrost), the air
conditioning compressor may
continue to operate even when
you switch the air conditioning A/C
button off.
Recirculated air: Touch to switch
the recirculated air on or off. When
recirculated air is on, it may reduce
the amount of time needed to cool
down the interior (when used with
A/C) and help reduce odors from
reaching the interior.
Note: Recirculated air may turn off
automatically (or the system may
prevent it from turning on) in all
airflow modes except MAX A/C to
reduce risk of fogging. It may also
turn on and off automatically in
Panel or Panel/Floor airflow modes
during hot weather in order to
improve cooling efficiency.
Manual airflow distribution
controls: Select these controls
individually, together, or with
Defrost to direct the air flow to the
area you desire.
J
Panel: Distributes air through the
instrument panel vents.
Floor: Distributes air through the
demister vents, floor vents and rear
seat floor vents.
438
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
PHONE
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any device
that may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Hands-free calling is one of the main features
of the system. Once you pair your cell phone,
you can access many options using the
touchscreen or voice commands. While the
system supports a variety of features, many
are dependent on your cell phone’s
functionality.
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with the
system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin
pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add a Bluetooth Device
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add a Bluetooth Device
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
439
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
At a minimum, most cell phones with
Bluetooth wireless technology support the
following functions:
• Answering an incoming call.
• Ending a call.
• Dialing a number.
• Call waiting notification.
• Caller identification.
Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Phone Menu
This menu becomes available after pairing
a phone.
440
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E251249
G
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
Displays your recent calls.Recent Call ListA
441
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu ItemItem
You can place a call by selecting an entry from this list.
You can also sort the calls by selecting the drop down menu at the top of the screen. You
can choose:
MissedOutgoingIncomingAll
All of your contacts from your phone display in alphabetical order.ContactsB
Selecting this button allows you to choose a
specific letter to view.
A-Z Jump
Displays the name of your phone and takes you to the phone settings options.Phone SettingsC
From this menu, you can pair subsequent devices, set ring tones and alerts.
Gives you access to the list of paired or connected Bluetooth devices allowing you to change
or select a device.
Change DeviceD
Displays all recent text messages.Text MessagesE
Use this keypad to dial in a phone number.Phone KeypadF
Use the backspace button to delete numbers.
Press this button to begin a call.Call
Touch this button to reject all incoming calls automatically. Text message notifications do
not display on the screen. All ringtones and alerts are set to silent.
Do Not DisturbG
442
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Users with phones having voice services may
see a button to access the feature. For
example, iPhone users see a Siri button. A
press and hold of the voice button on the
steering wheel also accesses this feature.
Making Calls
There are many ways to make calls from the
SYNC 3 system, including using voice
commands. See Using Voice Recognition
(page 411). You can use the touchscreen to
place calls as well.
443
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To call a number in your contacts, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select the
name of the contact you
want to call. Any numbers
stored for that contact
display along with any
stored contact photos. You
can then select the number
that you want to call. The
system begins the call.
Contacts
To call a number from your recent calls,
select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
You can then select an entry
that you want to call. The
system begins the call.
Recent Call
List
To call a number that is not stored in your
phone, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select the digits of the
number you wish to call.
Phone
Keypad
The system begins the call.Call
Pressing the backspace button deletes the
last digit you typed.
Receiving Calls
During an incoming call, an audible tone
sounds. Caller information appears in the
display if it is available.
To accept the call, select:
Menu Item
Accept
Note: You can also accept the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
To reject the call, select:
Menu Item
Reject
Note: You can also reject the call by
pressing the phone button on the steering
wheel.
Ignore the call by doing nothing. SYNC 3
logs it as a missed call.
During a Phone Call
During a phone call, the contacts name and
number display on the screen along with the
call duration.
The phone status items are also visible:
• Signal Strength.
• Battery.
You can select any of the following during
an active phone call:
444
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Item
Immediately end a
phone call. You can
also press the button
on the steering
wheel.
End Call
Press this to access
the phone keypad.
Keypad
Item
Mute You can switch the
microphone off so
the caller does not
hear you.
Transfer the call to
the cell phone or
back to SYNC 3.
Privacy
Text Messaging
Note: Downloading and sending text
messages using Bluetooth are cell
phone-dependent features.
Note: Certain features in text messaging are
speed-dependent and not available when
your vehicle is traveling at speeds over
3 mph (5 km/h).
Receiving a Text Message
When a new message arrives, an audible tone sounds and the screen displays a pop-up with the sender name and ID, if supported by
your cell phone. You can select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Have SYNC 3 read the message to you.Hear It
View the text on the touchscreen.View
To call the sender.Call
You can select from 15 preset messages. Press the message that you would like to use and confirm
to send the message. SYNC 3 confirms when the message is sent successfully.
Reply
To exit the screen.Close
445
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Smartphone Connectivity (If Equipped)
SYNC 3 allows you to use Apple CarPlay and
Android Auto to access your phone.
When you use Apple CarPlay or Android
Auto, you can:
• Make calls.
• Send and receive messages.
• Listen to music.
• Use your phone's voice assistant.
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto disable
some SYNC 3 features.
Most Apple CarPlay and Android Auto
features use mobile data.
Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay requires an iPhone 5 or newer
with iOS 7.1 or newer. Updating to the latest
iOS version is recommended.
1. Plug your phone into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 392).
2. Follow the prompts on the touchscreen.
3. Follow the prompts that appear on your
phone to allow access to Apple CarPlay.
After completing the setup, your phone
connects to CarPlay automatically when
plugged into a USB port.
To disable this feature from the Settings
screen, select:
Menu Item
Apple CarPlay Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects Apple
CarPlay. Select the name of your device
and set the Apple CarPlay switch to off.
To return to SYNC 3, go to the Apple CarPlay
home screen and select the SYNC app.
Note: Contact Apple for Apple CarPlay
support.
Android Auto
Android Auto is compatible with most
devices with Android 5.0 or newer.
1. Download the Android Auto app to your
device from Google Play to prepare your
device (this may require mobile data
usage).
Note: The Android Auto App may not be
available within your current market.
2. Plug your device into a USB port. See
USB Port (page 392).
3. Follow the prompt on the touchscreen.
4. Follow the prompts that appear on your
device.
Note: You may be prompted to update
additional apps on your device (this may
require mobile data usage).
To disable this feature from the Settings
screen, select:
Menu Item
Android Auto Preferences
Your device is listed if SYNC detects
Android Auto. Select the name of your
device and set the Android Auto switch to
off.
Note: You may need to slide your Settings
screen to the left to select Apple CarPlay
Preferences or Android Auto Preferences.
446
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To return to SYNC 3, select the speedometer
icon in the Android Auto menu bar at the
bottom of the touchscreen, and then touch
the option to return to SYNC.
Note: Contact Google for Android Auto
support.
NAVIGATION
Your navigation system is comprised of two
main features, destination mode and map
mode.
Map Mode
Map mode shows advanced viewing
comprised of 2D city maps, 3D landmarks
and 3D city models (when available). 2D city
maps show detailed outlines of buildings,
visible land use, landscape features, and
detailed railroad infrastructure for the most
essential cities around the globe.
3D landmarks appear as clear, visible objects
that are typically recognizable and have a
certain tourism value.
3D city models are complete 3D models of
entire city areas including navigable roads,
parks, rivers and rendered buildings. 3D
landmarks and city models appear in 3D map
mode only. Coverage of these varies and
improves with updated map releases.
E207752
Select the zoom in icon to see a
closer view of the map.
E207753
Select the zoom out icon to see a
farther away view of the map.
You can adjust the view in preset increments.
You can also pinch to zoom in or out of the
map.
The information bar tells you the names of
streets, cities or landmarks as you hover over
them with the crosshair curser.
You can change your view of the map by
tapping on the location indicator icon on the
right hand side of the screen. You can
choose from the following options:
E207750
Heading up (2D map) This always
shows the direction of forward
travel to be upward on the screen.
This view is available for map
scales up to 3 mi (5 km).
E207749
North up (2D map) always shows
the northern direction to be
upward on the screen.
E207748
3D map mode provides an
elevated perspective of the map.
Adjust this viewing angle and
rotate the map 180 degrees by
touching the map twice, and then dragging
your finger along the shaded bar with arrows
at the bottom of the map.
E207751
Re-center the map by pressing this
icon whenever you scroll the map
away from your vehicle’s current
location.
447
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
E251780
E251779
Mute: Press to mute the audio
navigation guidance. Press the
button again to un-mute the
guidance.
E207754
Points of Interest (POI) grouping
icon: You can choose up to three
POI icons to display on the map. If
the chosen POIs are located close
together or are at the same location a box is
used to display a single category icon
instead of repeating the same icon, in order
to reduce clutter. When you select the box
on the map, a pop-up appears indicating how
many POIs are in this location. Select the pop
up to see a list of the available POIs. You can
scroll through and select POIs from this list.
If your vehicle is low on charge or fuel,
station icons automatically display on the
map.
If you have subscribed to SiriusXM Traffic
and Travel Link (where available), traffic flow
will be indicated on the map by green (clear),
yellow (slowing), and red (stopped) road
highlights. Traffic flow is indicated where the
information is available and varies across the
US.
You can choose to display traffic icons on
the map representing twelve different types
of incidents. See Settings (page 461).
You can set a destination by hovering above
a location and selecting:
Button
Start
Destination Mode
To set a destination, press:
DescriptionMenu Item
Destination
Enter a navigation destination in any of the following formats:
Street AddressSearch
448
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
(number, street, city, state)
For example "12 Mainstreet Dearborn MI"
Partial Address
(number, street) if searching in current state
(number, street and zip code (or postal code in Canada)) if searching out of state
You can enter unique addresses that contain door number prefixes with or without the prefix. For example,
you could enter "6N340 Fairway Lane" or "340 Fairway Lane".
City
(name or zip code)
Point of Interest
(name or category)
Intersection
(street 1 / street 2)
(street 1 and street 2)
(street 1 & street 2)
(street 1 @ street 2)
(street 1 at street 2)
Latitude and Longitude
(##.###### , ##.######)
449
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
This is in a decimal degrees format, one to six decimal places are accepted.
You are given autocomplete options below the address bar to select as you type.
If you do not give an exact destination, a menu displays with your possible selections.
Collections of your last 40 navigation destinations display here.Previous Destinations
You can select any option from the list to select it as your destination.
Select this option to remove all previous destinations.Delete All
Select to navigate to your set Home destination.Home
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Home displays.
To set your Home, press:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for home. Select:Home
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
Select to navigate to your set Work destination.Work
The time it takes to travel from your current location to Work displays.
To set your Work:
A prompt appears asking if you would like to create a favorite for work. Select:Work
Enter a location into the search bar and press:Yes
Save
450
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
DescriptionMenu Item
Along Route
Near Destination
In a City
Once you have chosen your destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
This saves the destination to your favorites.Save
This shows you a map of your entire route. You can then choose your route from three different options.Start
Uses the fastest moving roads possible.Fastest
Uses the shortest distance possible.Shortest
Uses the most fuel-efficient route.Economical Route
The time and distance for each route also displays.
On the route screen, you can choose to cancel the current navigation. The system asks for confirmation then
returns you to the map mode screen.
Cancel
452
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Once you have chosen you destination, press:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The system uses a variety of screens and prompts to guide you to your destination.Start
During Route guidance, you can press the maneuver arrow icon on the map if you want the system to repeat
route guidance instructions. When the system repeats the last guidance instruction, it updates the distance to
the next guidance instruction, since it detects that the vehicle is moving.
The navigation map shows your estimated time of arrival, remaining travel time and the distance to your
destination.
SYNC 3 may not always announce vehicle arrival at the exact point of your destination and you may have to
cancel a route manually.
Navigation Menu
In map mode and during active navigation
you can access the navigation menu.
During active navigation, touch the bottom
of the screen to view the menu and other
buttons.
To access the Navigation menu, press:
Button
Menu
You can then select:
A full screen map displays during navigation.Full MapScreen View
453
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Highway exit information displays on the right hand side of the screen during navigation.Highway Exit Info
Points of interest icons display for restaurants, hotels, fuel stations and ATMs when they
are present at the exit. You can select the POI icons to receive a listing of specific locations.
You can select the POI location as a waypoint or destination if desired.
Only available during an active route. Displays all of the turns on the current route.Turn List
You can choose to avoid any road on the turn list by selecting the road from the list. A
screen then appears and you can press:
Avoid
The system calculates a new route and displays a new turn list.
You can find the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link information by pressing this button. This information requires
an active subscription to SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.
Traffic List
When a route is not active, a list of nearby traffic incidents displays (if any are present).
When a route is active, you can choose to display a list of traffic nearby or on the route.
Press this button to adjust your preferences. See Settings (page 461).Navigation Settings
Provides your current location city and the nearest road.Where Am I?
The following are only available on the menu during an active navigation route:
The system asks for confirmation and then returns you to the map mode screen.Cancel Route
Press this to see a map of the full route.View Route
An alternate route displays in comparison with the current route.Detour
454
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Button
Only available if you have an active waypoint on your route. See Waypoints later in this section for information
on how to set waypoints.
Edit Waypoints
Use this button to re-order or remove your waypoints.
Optimize OrderYou can also have
the system set the
order for you by
pressing:
GoTo return to your
route press:
Waypoints
You can add a waypoint to a navigation route
as a destination along your route.
To add a waypoint:
1. Select the search icon (magnifying glass)
while on an active route. This brings up
the destination menu.
2. Set your destination using any of the
given methods. Once the destination has
been selected, the screen allows you to
set the destination as a waypoint by
selecting:
455
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
The waypoint list then appears and you are able to re-order all of your
waypoints by selecting the menu icon on the right hand side of the
location. You can select up to five waypoints.
Add Waypoint
Optimize OrderYou can also have the system set the order for you by pressing:
GoTo return to your route, press:
SYNC AppLink
The AppLink app allows you to use some
SYNC 3 navigation features on your phone.
First Mile Navigation
When you switch your ignition off, the
location of your vehicle is recorded and sent
to your SYNC AppLink app. The location of
your vehicle can be viewed within the app.
You can also view walking directions to your
vehicle.
Last Mile Navigation
When you park near your destination, the
system provides walking directions to your
destination.
POI Search
Your paired phone can be used to access
additional points of interest (POI). These
points of interest can only be access when
your phone is paired.
Send To Car
You can send destinations to your navigation
system using a computer or phone using
AppLink.
cityseeker (If Equipped)
Note: cityseeker point of interest (POI)
information is limited to approximately 1,110
cities (1,049 in the United States, 36 in
Canada and 15 in Mexico).
E225487
456
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
cityseeker, when available, is a service that
provides more information about certain
points of interest such as restaurants, hotels
and attractions.
When you have selected a point of interest,
the location and information appear, such as
address, phone number and a star rating.
Press More Information to see a photo, a
review, a list of services and facilities, the
average room or meal price and the web
address. This screen displays the point of
interest icons.
For restaurants, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, average cost,
review, handicap access, hours of operation,
and website address.
For hotels, cityseeker can provide
information such as star rating, price
category, review, check-in and checkout
times, hotel service icons and website
address. Hotel service icons include:
• Restaurant
• Business center
• Handicap facilities
• Laundry
• Refrigerator
• 24 hour room service
• Fitness center
• Internet access
• Pool
• Wi-Fi
Attractions include nearby landmarks,
amusement parks, historic buildings and
more. cityseeker can provide information
such as star rating, reviews, hour of operation
and admission price.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link is available
on vehicles equipped with navigation and
only in select markets. You must activate and
subscribe to receive SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link information. It helps you locate
the best gas prices, find movie listings, get
current traffic alerts, view the weather map,
get accurate ski conditions and see current
sports scores. See Apps (page 458).
The system calculates a reasonable efficient
route based on available speed limits, traffic,
and road conditions. You may know a local
short cut that is more efficient at a given time
than the route provided by SYNC 3, but you
should expect a slight difference in minutes
or miles with the SYNC 3 route.
Navigation Map Updates
Annual navigation map updates are available
for purchase through your dealership, by
calling 1-866-462-8837 in the United States
and Canada or 01-800-557-5539 in Mexico.
You can also visit:
Website
www.navigation.com/sync
You need to specify the make and model of
your vehicle to determine if there is an
update available.
457
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
HERE is the digital map provider for the
navigation application. If you find map data
errors, you may report them directly to HERE
by going to www.here.com/mapcreator.
HERE evaluates all reported map errors and
responds with the result of their investigation
by e-mail.
Map coverage includes the USA (including
Puerto Rico and the US Virgin Islands),
Canada and Mexico.
APPS
The system enables voice, steering wheel,
and touch screen control of SYNC 3 AppLink
enabled smartphone apps. When an app is
running through AppLink, you can control
main features of the app through voice
commands and steering wheel controls.
Note: Available AppLink enabled apps will
vary by market.
Note: You must pair and connect your
smartphone via Bluetooth to SYNC 3 to
access AppLink.
Note: iPhone users need to connect the
phone to the USB port.
Note: For information on available apps,
supported smartphone devices and
troubleshooting tips please visit:
Websites
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Note: Make sure you have an active account
for the app that you have downloaded. Some
apps will work with no setup. Other apps will
want you to configure your personal settings
and personalize your experience by creating
stations or favorites. We recommend you do
this at home or outside of your vehicle.
Note: We encourage you to review the
smartphone app’s terms of service and
privacy policies because Lincoln is not
responsible for your app or its use of data.
Note: AppLink is a native SYNC system
feature. Accessing mobile apps through
AppLink is only possible when Android Auto
or Apple CarPlay are disabled. Some apps
may only be accessible in the car through
AppLink and others only through Android
Auto or Apple CarPlay. Please refer to the
Smartphone Connectivity information to
disable Android Auto or Apple CarPlay.
Note: In order to use an app with SYNC 3,
the app needs to be running in the
background of your phone. If you shut down
the app on your phone, it shuts down the
app on SYNC 3 as well.
Note: If a SYNC 3 AppLink compatible app
is not shown in the Apps Domain, make sure
the required app is running on the mobile
device.
458
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and Descrip-
tion
Menu Item
SYNC 3 will search
and connect to
compatible app(s)
running on your
mobile device.
Find Mobile Apps
Enabling SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
In order to enable mobile apps, SYNC 3
requires user consent to send and receive
app authorization information and updates
using the data plan associated with the
connected device.
The connected device sends data to Lincoln
in the United States. The information is
encrypted and includes your VIN, SYNC 3
module number, odometer, usage statistics
and debugging information. We retain this
data for only as long as necessary to provide
this service, troubleshoot, and improve
products and services and to offer you
products and services that may interest you
where allowed by law.
Note: You must enable mobile apps for each
connected device the first time you select a
mobile app using the system.
Note: Lincoln reserves the right to limit
functionality or deactivate mobile apps at
any time.
Note: Standard data rates apply. Lincoln is
not responsible for any additional charges
you may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device. This includes
any additional charges incurred due to
driving in areas when roaming out of a home
network.
You can enable and disable apps through
settings. See Settings (page 461).
App Permissions
The system organizes the app permissions
into groups. You can individually grant these
group permissions.You can change a
permission group status any time when not
driving, by using the settings menu. While
in the settings menu, you can also see the
data included in each group.
When you launch an app using SYNC 3, the
system may ask you to grant certain
permissions, for example Vehicle information,
Driving characteristics, GPS and Speed,
and/or Push notifications. You can enable all
groups or none of them during the initial app
permissions prompts. The settings menu
offers individual group permission control.
Note: You are only prompted to grant
permissions the first time you use an app
with SYNC 3.
Note: If you disable group permissions, apps
will still be enabled to work with SYNC 3
unless you deactivate All Apps in the settings
menu.
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link (If
Equipped)
WARNING: Driving while distracted
can result in loss of vehicle control, crash
and injury. We strongly recommend that you
use extreme caution when using any device
that may take your focus off the road. Your
primary responsibility is the safe operation
459
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
of your vehicle. We recommend against the
use of any hand-held device while driving
and encourage the use of voice-operated
systems when possible. Make sure you are
aware of all applicable local laws that may
affect the use of electronic devices while
driving.
Note: SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link may
not be available in all markets.
Note: In order to use SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, your vehicle must have
navigation.
Note: A paid subscription is required to
access and use these features. Go to
www.siriusxm.com/travellink for more
information.
Note: Visit www.siriusxm.com/traffic and click
on Coverage map and details for a complete
listing of all traffic areas covered by SiriusXM
Traffic and Travel Link.
Note: Neither Sirius nor Lincoln is
responsible for any errors or inaccuracies in
the SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link services
or its use in vehicles.
When you subscribe to SiriusXM Traffic and
Travel Link, it can help you locate the best
gas prices, find movie listings, get current
traffic alerts, view the current weather map,
get accurate ski conditions and see scores
to current sports games.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Touch these buttons to identify traffic incidents on your route, near your vehicle’s current location
or near any of your favorite places, if programmed.
Traffic on Route
Traffic Nearby
Touch this button to view fuel prices at stations close to your vehicle’s location or on an active
navigation route.
Fuel Prices
Touch this button to view nearby movie theaters and their show times, if available.Movie Listings
Touch this button to view the nearby weather, current weather, or the five-day forecast for the
chosen area.
Weather
Select to see the weather map, which can show storms,
radar information, charts and winds.
Map
460
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select to choose from a listing of weather locations.Area
Touch this button to view scores and schedules from a variety of sports. You can also save up to
10 favorite teams for easier access. The score automatically refreshes when a game is in progress.
Sports Info
Touch this button to view ski conditions for a specific area.Ski Conditions
SETTINGS
Under this menu, you can access and adjust
the settings for many of the system features.
To access additional settings, swipe the
screen left or right.
Sound
Pressing this button allows you to adjust the
following:
Sound Settings
Returns Treble, Midrange, and Bass sound settings to factory levels.Reset All
Adjusts the high frequency level.Treble
Adjusts the middle frequency level.Midrange
Adjusts the low frequency level.Bass
Adjusts the sound ratio from side to side or front to back.Balance / Fade
461
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Sound Settings
Adjusts the amount the audio system volume increases with speed, or turns the feature off.Speed Compensated Vol.
Optimizes the sound based on the location of the listeners.Occupancy Mode
StereoSound Settings
Surround
Your vehicle might not have all of these features.
Media Player
This button is available when a media device
such as a Bluetooth Stereo or USB device is
the active audio source. Pressing the button
allows you to access the following options
for active devices only.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of podcasts. When a podcast is playing, you
can choose:
Podcast Speed
FasterNormalSlower
For some USB devices, SYNC 3 can adjust the playback speed of audiobooks. When an audiobook is playing,
you can choose:
Audiobook Speed
462
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
FasterNormalSlower
Cover art displays from your device’ s music files. If no cover art for the files
exists on the device, then the Gracenote Database provides cover art.
Media PlayerCover Art Priority
The Gracenote Database supplied cover art is used for your music files.
This overrides any cover art from your device.
Gracenote®
Switches on and off Gracenote® to provide metadata information such as genre, artist and album.Gracenote® Management
This allows you to view the version level of the Gracenote Database.Gracenote® Database Info
This allows you to view the manufacturer and model number of your media device.Device Information
Erase the stored media information in order to re-index.Update Media Index
Clock
To adjust the time, select the up and down
arrows on either side of the screen. The
arrows on the left adjust the hour and arrows
on the right adjust the minute. You can then
select AM or PM.
You can adjust the following features:
463
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select how time displays.Clock Format
When active, the clock adjusts to time zone changes.Auto Time Zone Update
This feature is only available in vehicles with navigation.
When selected, the vehicle clock resets to GPS satellite time.Reset Clock to GPS Time
The system automatically saves any updates
you make to the settings.
Bluetooth
Pressing this button allows you to access the
following:
ActionMenu Item
OnBluetooth
Off
You must activate Bluetooth to pair a
Bluetooth enabled device.
The processes of pairing a Bluetooth device
is the same as pairing a phone. See Pairing
a Device in Phone settings for how to pair a
device and the available options.
Phone
Pair your Bluetooth enabled phone with the
system before using the functions in
hands-free mode.
Switch on Bluetooth on your device to begin
pairing. See your phone’s manual if
necessary.
464
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
To add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. A prompt alerts you to search for the
system on your phone.
3. Select your vehicle's make and model as
it displays on your phone.
4. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
5. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
6. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Alternatively, to add a phone, select:
Menu Item
Add Phone
Then select:
Discover Other Bluetooth Devices
1. Follow the on-screen instructions.
2. Select your phone's name when it
appears on the touchscreen.
3. Confirm that the six-digit number
appearing on your phone matches the
six-digit number on the touchscreen.
4. The touchscreen indicates when the
pairing is successful.
5. Your phone may prompt you to give the
system permission to access information.
To check your phone’ s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website.
Other features, such as text messaging using
Bluetooth and automatic phonebook
download, are phone-dependent features.
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
To check your phone’s compatibility, see
your phone’s manual or visit the website:
Website
owner.lincoln.com
www.syncmyride.ca
www.syncmaroute.ca
Once you have paired a device you can
adjust the following options.
465
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
View Devices
You can then select:
You can add a Bluetooth enabled device by following the steps in the previous table.Add a Bluetooth Device
You can select a phone by touching the name of the phone on the screen. You then have the following options:
Depending on the status of the device, you can select either of these options to interact with the selected
device.
Connect
Disconnect
Allows you to select this device to be your preferred device.Make Primary
Removes the selected device from the system.Delete
Press the info icon next to the device name
to see phone and device information.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Manage Contacts
You can then select:
Enable this option to have SYNC 3 periodically re-download your phonebook to keep your contact list up to
date.
Auto-Download Contacts
466
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Choose how you would like the system to display your contacts. You can choose:Sort By:
Last NameFirst Name
Select this option to re-download your contact list manually.Re-download Contacts
Select this option to delete the in vehicle contact list. Deleting the in vehicle list does not erase the contact
list on the connected phone.
Delete Contacts
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Set Phone Ringtone
You can then select:
No sound plays when a call comes to your phone.No Ringtone
The currently selected ringtone on your phone plays when you receive a call. This option may not be available
for all phones. If this option is available, it is the default setting.
Use Phone Ringtone
You can also select one of the three available ringers.
467
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Text Messaging
You can then select:
No sound plays when a message comes to your phone.No Alert (Silence)
You can select one of the three available notification sounds.
When enabled, a voice prompt alerts you when you receive a new message.Voice Readout
You can enable and disable the following options as well:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
When enabled, vehicle audio (such as radio or apps) is muted for the duration of the phone call even when
the phone call is in privacy.
Mute Audio in Privacy
When enabled, an alert displays that your phone is roaming when you attempt to place a call.Roaming Warning
When enabled, a message displays when the battery on your phone is running low.Low Battery Notification
468
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
911 Assist
Enabling 911 Assist
Note: For this feature to work, your cell
phone must have Bluetooth and connect
with SYNC3.
To activate 911 Assist from the settings
screen select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature. You can switch this feature on and off by sliding
the scrollbar as follows.
911 Assist
Slide the scrollbar to switch this feature on.
You can set your contacts in the phone book
for emergency quick dialing.
Setting Emergency Contacts
Ensure the phone book of your cell phone
downloaded to SYNC 3.
From the settings screen select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Press this button to enter the settings screen for this feature.911 Assist
Select this option as it displays on the screen.Set Emergency Contacts
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Select this option under <Emergency contact 1>.Select a Contact
469
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
The screen lists contacts in the phone book.
Select the contact that you want to set as
emergency contact. You can set Emergency
Contact 2 by same process. You can set two
Emergency Contacts in total.
Note: After SYNC3 tries to place an
emergency call, the Emergency Contact
button displays on the touch screen. You
need to press the button to call the contact
through your Bluetooth phone.
Note: If the vehicle is equipped with
navigation, a map with your current street
information displays on the screen when 911
Assist is in process.
Radio
This button is available if a Radio source such
as AM or FM is the active media source.
Pressing the button allows you to access the
following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Activation of this feature allows you to listen to HD radio broadcasts.FM HD Radio
AM HD Radio
(Dependent on current
radio source, If Available)
This feature is available when FM Radio is your active media source. Activate this feature to have the system
display radio text.
Radio Text
RefreshAutoset Presets (AST)
Selecting this option stores the six strongest stations in your current location to the last preset bank of the
currently tuned source.
470
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SiriusXM
This button is available if SiriusXM is the
active audio source. Pressing the button
allows you to access the following features:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
If you select a category, seek functions only stop on channels in that category.Set Category for Seek
Select to create a personal identification number (PIN), which allows you to lock or unlock channels. Your initial
PIN is 1234.
Parental Lockout
Select to switch on or off songs, artists or teams alerts or delete an alert or delete all alerts.Edit Alerts
You can also view your satellite radio
Electronic Serial Number (ESN) from this
screen. You need this number when
communicating with SiriusXM to activate,
modify or track your account.
Navigation
You can adjust many of the Navigation
preferences by selecting the following
menus.
Map Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Map Preferences
Then select any of the following:
When this option is active, the system shows 3D renderings of buildings.3D City Model
When enabled, your vehicle’s previously traveled route displays with white dots.Breadcrumbs
471
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable this feature to display up to 3 POI icons on the navigation map. A rest area POI icon is displayed on the
map regardless of this setting.
POI Icons
Select POIsOnce this feature is activated you can select the icons you want displayed
by selecting:
This menu allows you to choose which incident icons you would like to have displayed on the navigation map.Incident Map Icons
Route Preferences
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
Route Preferences
Then select any of the following:
Choose to have the system display your chosen route type.Preferred Route
EcoFastestShortest
Bypass route selection in destination programming. The system only calculates one route based on your preferred
route setting.
Always Use ___ Route
When activated, the system uses your selected route type to calculate only one route to the desired destination.
The system selects High Occupancy Vehicle or car pool lanes when providing route guidance.Use HOV Lanes
472
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Second Level Messages, Actions and DescriptionsMenu Item
The system searches for and displays available parking locations as you approach your destination.Automatically Find Parking
Select a level of cost for the calculated Eco Route. The higher the setting, the longer the time allotment is for
the route.
Eco Time Penalty
Enable or disable considering traffic information when planning a route. The system can find a faster route based
on heavy traffic flow information or detect a Road Closed incident and find a detour route if possible.
Dynamic Route Guidance
Navigation Preferences
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Navigation Preferences
You can adjust how the system provides prompts.Guidance Prompts
Then select any of the following:
Voice and Tones
Voice Only
Tones Only
473
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Navigation Source Selection
The screen lists available alternative
navigation sources using Applink.
Mobile Apps
You can enable the control of compatible
mobile apps running on your Bluetooth or
USB device on SYNC 3. In order to enable
mobile apps, SYNC 3 requires user consent
to send and receive app authorization
information and updates using the data plan
associated with the connected device.
The connected devices send data to us in
the United States. The encrypted information
includes your VIN, SYNC 3 module number,
anonymous usage statistics and debugging
information. Updates may take place.
Note: Not all Mobile Apps are compatible
with the system.
Note: Standard data rates apply. We are not
responsible for any additional charges you
may receive from your service provider,
when your vehicle sends or receives data
through the connected device.
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable or disable the use of mobile apps on
SYNC 3.
OnMobile Apps
Off
Disabling mobile apps in the settings menu
disables automatic updates and the use of
mobile apps on SYNC 3.
You can view the status of mobile app permissions in the settings menu.
Once Mobile Apps is enabled, you have the following options:
This provides information on the current state of available app updates.Update Mobile Apps
There are three possible statuses:
474
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Updating Mobile Apps…Up-To-DateUpdate Needed
The system is trying to receive an update.No update is required.The system has detected a new app
requiring authorization or a general
permissions update is required.
Select this button if an update is required and
you want to request this update manually. For
example, when your mobile device is connected
to a Wi-Fi hotspot, select:
Request Update
Request Update
Grant or deny permissions to all apps at once.All Apps
Grant or deny an individual app particular permissions. App permissions are organized into groups. By pressing
the info book icon, you can see which signals are included in each group.
There may also be SYNC 3
enabled apps listed under
these options.
Note: We is not responsible or liable for any
damages or loss of privacy relating to usage
of an app, or dissemination of any vehicle
data that you approve us to provide to an
app.
General
Access and adjust the system settings, voice
features, as well as phone, navigation and
wireless settings.
475
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Select to have the touchscreen display in English, Spanish or French.Language
Select to display units in kilometers or miles.Distance
Select to display units in Celsius or Fahrenheit.Temperature
Select to have the system beep to confirm choices made through the touch-
screen.
Touch Screen Beep
When you activate this option, the system automatically updates when you have
an available Internet connection through a Wi-Fi network or mobile connection.
Automatic System Updates
Information pertaining to the system and its software.About SYNC
Documentation of the software license for the system.Software Licenses
Select to restore factory defaults. This erases all personal settings and personal
data.
Master Reset
Wi-Fi & Hotspot (If Equipped)
Access SYNC Wi-Fi and Vehicle Hotspot
settings and information.
System Wi-Fi
You can access the following:
476
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Enable this option to connect to Wi-Fi for SYNC 3 vehicle software updates.Wi-Fi
This provides you with a list of available Wi-Fi networks within range.Available Networks
Clicking on a network from the list allows you to connect or disconnect from that network. The system may
require a security code to connect.
When you click the information button next to a network, more information about the network displays such
as the signal strength, connection status and security type.
The system alerts you when your vehicle is parked and a Wi-Fi network is within range if SYNC is not already
connected.
Wi-Fi Available Notifications
Vehicle Hotspot
You can access the following:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
Allows you to turn the hotspot on and off.Wi-Fi Hotspot On/Off
Allows you to view and edit hotspot settings such as the SSID and password.Settings
Allows you to view your vehicle's hotspot plan and data usage.Data Usage
Allows you to manage devices connected to your hotspot.Manage Devices
477
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Note: The Vehicle Wi-Fi Hotspot (Vehicle
Hotspot) may be operational while ignition
is On and may remain operational while the
ignition is Off.
Note: Vehicle Hotspot services are provided
by the vehicle network carrier, subject to
your vehicle network carrier agreement,
coverage and availability.
Note: It is the account owner’s responsibility
to remove the vehicle from the vehicle
network carrier account when ownership of
the vehicle is transferred. If the owner would
like to remove the vehicle from the account
for any reason, please contact your vehicle
network carrier for more information.
Note: Data, such as the Vehicle Identification
Number (VIN), SIM Card ID, and data plan
usage, is shared between us and the vehicle
network carrier to provide the Vehicle
Hotspot service in accordance with your
vehicle network carrier agreement, coverage
and availability, and may be used to enable
a seamless transition from an old to new
embedded modem and to confirm any
updates are successfully delivered.
Note: For your convenience data usage may
be available for monitoring under Settings
but may not reflect actual or current usage.
The vehicle network carrier is responsible
for providing information about your account.
Please contact the vehicle network carrier
for more information.
Note: We may need to update operating
system software on your vehicle, including
security updates and bug fixes, to keep
connected services current, like Vehicle
Hotspot, without prior notice to you.
Ambient Lighting (If Equipped)
Tap a color once to active ambient lighting.
This sets the color to the highest intensity.
You can drag the colors up and down to
increase or decrease the intensity.
To switch ambient lighting off, press the
active color once or drag the active color all
the way down to zero intensity.
Vehicle
Note: Your vehicle may not have all of these
features.
You can select the following features to
update their settings.
Door Keypad Code
Select this button to add or erase a personal
door keypad code. To add or erase a
personal code, you first need to enter the
five-digit factory set code. You can find this
code on the owner's wallet card in the glove
box or from your authorized dealer.
478
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Camera Settings
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMessage
Camera Settings
Then select from the following:
You can enable or disable this option using the slider.Rear Camera Delay
You can find more information on the rear-view camera system in the parking aids chapter of your owner's manual.
Onboard Modem Serial Number (ESN)
Selecting this button on the settings menu
shows you the ESN number for your system.
You need this number for certain
registrations such as Satellite Radio.
479
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Display
To make adjustments using the touchscreen, select:
Action and DescriptionMenu Item
The screen goes black and does not display anything. Tap the screen to switch it back on.Display Off
Make the screen display brighter or dimmer.Brightness
You can select:Mode
The screen automatically switches between day and night modes based on the outside
light level.
Auto
The screen displays with a light background to enhance daytime viewing.Day
The screen displays with a darker background to make nighttime viewing easier.Night
Enable this option to automatically dim the display brightness based on ambient lighting conditions.Auto Dim
Voice Control
You can adjust the voice control settings by
selecting the following options.
480
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Menu Item
Enable this option to remove additional voice prompts and confirmations.Advanced Mode
Enable this option to have the system confirm a contact's name with you before
making a call.
Phone Confirmation
Enable this option to have the system display a list of available voice commands
when you press the voice.
Voice Command List
Valet Mode
Valet mode allows you to lock the system.
No information is accessible until the system
is unlocked with the correct PIN.
When you select valet mode, a pop up
appears informing you that a four digit code
must be entered to enable and disable valet
mode. You can use any PIN you chose but
you must use the same PIN to disable valet
mode. The system asks you to input the
code.
Note: If the system is locked and you cannot
remember the PIN, please contact the
Customer Relationship Center.
For Lincoln
United States: 1-800-521-4140
Canada: 1-800-387-9333
LincolnFord
United States: 1-800-
521-4140
United States and
Canada: 1-800-392-
3673
Canada: 1-800-387-
9333
To enable valet mode, enter your chosen
PIN. The system then asks to confirm your
PIN by reentering it. The system then locks.
To unlock the system, enter the same pin
number. The system reconnects to your
phone and all of your options are available
again.
SYNC™ 3 TROUBLESHOOTING
Your SYNC 3 system is easy to use.
However, should questions arise, please
refer to the tables below.
To check your cell phone's compatibility,
refer to the regional Ford or Lincoln website.
481
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Refer to your device's manual about audio adjustments.
The audio control settings on your cell
phone may be affecting SYNC 3
performance.
There is background noise
during a phone call.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
During a call, I can hear the
other person but they
cannot hear me.
Make sure that the microphone for SYNC 3 is not set to off. Look for
the microphone icon on the phone screen.
To restart your system, shut down the engine, open and close the
door, and then lock the door and wait for 2-3 minutes. Make sure that
your SYNC 3 screen is black and the lighted USB port is off.
The system may need to be restarted.
During a call, I cannot hear
the other person and they
cannot hear me.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
SYNC 3 is not able to
download my phonebook.
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone.
Refer to your cell manual.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook
download feature on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
482
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure you allow SYNC 3 to retrieve contacts from your phone.
Refer to your cell manual.
Limitations on your cell phone's capab-
ility.
The system says "Phone-
book downloaded" but my
SYNC 3 phonebook is
empty or is missing
contacts.
If the missing contacts are stored on your SIM card, move them to
your cell phone's memory.
You must switch on your cell phone and the automatic phonebook
download feature on SYNC 3.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
I am having trouble
connecting my cell phone
to SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
Try deleting your device from SYNC 3 and deleting SYNC from your
device, then trying again.
Always check the security and auto accept prompt settings relative
to the SYNC 3 Bluetooth connection on your cell phone.
Update your cell phone's firmware.
Switch the auto download setting off.
Check your cell phone's compatibility.This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
Text messaging is not
working on SYNC 3.
Try switching your cell phone off, resetting it or removing the battery,
then try again.
Possible cell phone malfunction.
483
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
iPhone • Go to your cell phone's Settings.
• Go to the Bluetooth Menu.
• Press the blue circle to the right of the device named with your
vehicle make and model to enter the next menu.
• Turn Show Notifications on.
• Disconnect then reconnect your iPhone from the SYNC 3 system
to activate this settings update.
Your iPhone is now set up to forward incoming text messages to
SYNC 3.
Repeat these steps for every other SYNC 3 vehicle that you connect.
Your iPhone will only forward incoming text messages to SYNC 3 if
the iPhone is not unlocked in the messaging application.
Replying to text messages using SYNC 3 is not supported by iPhone.
484
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Cell phone issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Text messages from WhatsApp and Facebook Messenger are not
supported.
Your cell phone must support downloading text messages through
Bluetooth to receive incoming text messages.
This is a cell phone-dependent feature.
Audible text messages do
not work on my cell phone.
Because each cell phone is different, refer to your device's manual
for the specific cell phone you are pairing. In fact, there can be
differences between cell phones due to brand, model, service provider
and software version.
This is a cell phone limitation.
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off,
resetting it or removing the battery, then reconnect it to SYNC 3.
Possible device malfunction.
I am having trouble
connecting my device.
Make sure you are using the manufacturer's cable.
Make sure to correctly insert the USB cable into the device and your
vehicle's USB port.
Make sure that the device does not have an auto-install program or
active security settings.
485
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3.The device has a lock screen enabled.
Make sure you are not leaving the device in your vehicle during very
hot or cold temperatures.
This is a device limitation.
SYNC 3 does not recog-
nize my device when I start
my vehicle.
Make sure you connect the device to SYNC 3 and that you have
started the media player on your device.
This is a device-dependent feature.
Bluetooth audio does not
stream.
The device is not connected.
Try switching your device off, resetting it or removing the battery, then
reconnect it to SYNC 3.
The device is in a bad state.
Make sure that all song details are populated.
Your music files may not contain the
correct artist, song title, album or genre
information.
SYNC 3 does not recog-
nize music that is on my
device.
Try replacing the corrupt file with a new version.The file may be corrupted.
Some devices require you to change the USB settings from mass
storage to media transfer protocol class.
The song may have copyright protection
that does not allow it to play.
Convert the file to a supported format. See Entertainment (page 421).The file format is not supported by SYNC
3.
Update media index. See Settings (page 461).The device needs to be re-indexed.
Make sure your device is unlocked before connecting it to SYNC 3.The device has a lock screen enabled.
486
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
USB and Bluetooth Stereo issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Disconnect the device from SYNC 3. Try switching your device off,
resetting it or removing the battery, then connect it back to SYNC 3.
This is a device limitation.
When I connect my device,
I sometimes do not hear
any sound.
To listen to Apple devices through USB, select AirPlay from the devices
Control Center, then select Dock Connector.
To listen to Apple devices through Bluetooth Stereo, select AirPlay
from the devices Control Center, then select SYNC.
Connect a compatible device or media player.
The device or media player is incompat-
ible.
SYNC 3 does not display
the song information,
repeat, or shuffle buttons.
Wi-Fi Access Point issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Verify password.Password error.Failed connection.
Check for a poor Wi-Fi signal.Weak signal.
Use a unique name for your SSID, don’t use the default name unless
it contains a unique identifier, such as part of the MAC address.
Multiple Access points within range with
the same SSID.
487
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Access Point issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Position the vehicle close to the access point with the front of the
vehicle facing the access point direction and remove obstacles if
possible. Other Wi-Fi, Bluetooth, microwave and cordless phones may
cause interference.
Weak signal probably due to distance
from the access point, obstruction or high
interference.
Disconnecting after
successful connection.
If the vehicle is equipped with heated windshield, try positioning the
vehicle so that the windshield is not facing the access point. If you
have metallic window tinting but not on the windshield, position the
vehicle to face the access point. If all windows are tinted, you can
open the windows in the direction of the access point if that is feasible.
There may be an obstruction between
SYNC 3 and the access point.
Poor signal seen by SYNC
3 despite being near a
access point.
Try to remove other obstructions that may impact signal quality such
as opening the garage door.
Please set the network to visible and try again.The access point was defined as a
hidden network.
An access point is not
listed in the list of available
networks.
488
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Wi-Fi Access Point issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 currently does not provide an access point.SYNC 3 does not currently provide a
access point.
SYNC 3 is not seen when
searching for Wi-Fi
networks from your phone
or other devices.
Check the signal quality (under network details), if SYNC 3 indicates
good or excellent, test with another high-speed equipped access
point where the environment is more predictable.
Poor signal strength, too far from the
access point, access point is supporting
multiple connections, slow Internet
connection or other problems.
Software download takes
too long.
Test the connection with another device, if the access point requires
a subscription, you may contact the service provider.
It is possible that there is no new soft-
ware. The connected access point may
be a managed one and it requires either
a subscription or agreeing to the terms
and conditions.
SYNC 3 seems to connect
with a access point and the
signal strength is excellent
but the software is not
being updated.
489
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink Issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Make sure you have a compatible smartphone; an Android with OS
2.3 or higher or an iPhone 3GS or newer with iOS 5.0 or higher.
Additionally, make sure you pair and connect your phone to SYNC 3
in order to find AppLink-capable apps on your device. iPhone users
must also connect to a USB port with an Apple USB cable.
You did not connect an Applink Compat-
ible phone to SYNC 3.
AppLink Mobile Applica-
tions: When I select "Find
Mobile Apps," SYNC 3
does not find any applica-
tions.
Make sure you have downloaded and installed the latest version of
the app from your phone's app store. Make sure the app is running
on your phone. Some apps require you to register or login to the app
on the phone before using them with AppLink. Also, some may have
a "Ford SYNC" setting, so check the app's settings menu on the phone.
AppLink-enabled apps are not installed
and running on your mobile device.
My phone is connected,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
Closing and restarting apps may help SYNC 3 find the application if
you cannot discover it inside the vehicle. On an Android device, if
apps have an 'Exit' or 'Quit' option, then select it and restart the app.
If the app does not have that option, select the phone's settings menu
and select 'Apps', then find the particular app and choose 'Force stop.'
Do not forget to restart the app afterward, then select "Find Mobile
Apps" on SYNC 3.
Sometimes apps do not properly close
and re-open their connection to SYNC 3,
over ignition cycles, for example.
My phone is connected, my
app(s) are running, but I still
cannot find any apps.
On an iPhone with iOS7+, to force close an app, double tap the home
button then swipe up on the app to close it. Tap the home button
again, then select the app again to restart it. After a few seconds, the
app should then appear in SYNC 3's Mobile App's Menu.
490
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
AppLink Issues
Possible solution(s)Possible cause(s)Issue
Switch Bluetooth off and then on to reset it on your phone. If you are
in your vehicle, SYNC 3 should be able to automatically re-connect
to your phone if you press the "Phone" button.
There is a Bluetooth issue on some older
versions of the Android operating system
that may cause apps that were found on
your previous vehicle drive to not be
found again if you did not switch
Bluetooth off.
My Android phone is
connected, my app(s) are
running, I restarted them,
but I still cannot find any
apps.
Unplug the USB cable from the phone, wait a moment, and plug the
USB cable back in to the phone. After a few seconds, the app should
appear in SYNC 3's Mobile Apps Menu. If not, "Force Close" the
application and restart it.
You may need to reset the USB connec-
tion to SYNC 3.
My iPhone is connected,
my app is running, I
restarted the app but I still
cannot find it on SYNC 3.
Increase the Bluetooth volume of the device by using the device's
volume control buttons which are most often found on the side of the
device.
The Bluetooth volume on the phone may
be low.
I have an Android phone. I
found and started my
media app on SYNC 3, but
there is no sound or the
sound is very low.
Force close or uninstall the apps you do not want SYNC 3 to find. If
the app has a "Ford SYNC" setting, disable that setting in the app's
settings menu on the phone.
Some Android devices have a limited
number of Bluetooth ports that apps can
use to connect. If you have more AppLink
apps on your phone than the number of
available Bluetooth ports, you will not see
all of your apps listed in the SYNC 3
mobile apps menu.
I can only see some of the
AppLink apps running on
my phone listed in the
SYNC 3 Mobile Apps
Menu.
491
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
Review the cell phone voice commands and the media voice
commands at the beginning of their respective sections.
You may be using the wrong voice
commands.
SYNC 3 does not under-
stand what I am saying.
Refer to the audio display during an active voice session to find a list
of voice commands there.
Wait for the system to prompt you before you state your command.You may be speaking too soon or at the
wrong time.
Review the media voice commands at the beginning of the media
section.
You may be using the wrong voice
commands.
SYNC 3 does not under-
stand the name of a song
or artist.
Say the song or artist name exactly as it is displayed on your device.
For example, say "Play Artist Prince" or "Play song Purple Rain".
You may not be saying the name exactly
as it appears on your device.
Make sure you are saying the complete title such as "California remix
featuring Jennifer Nettles".
If there are any abbreviations in the name, like ESPN or CNN, you
have to spell those: "E-S-P-N" or "C-N-N".
Make sure that song titles, artists, album, and playlists names do not
have any special characters like *, - or +.
The song or artist name may have some
special characters that are not being
recognized by SYNC 3.
492
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Voice command issues
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 applies the phonetic pronunciation rules of the selected
language to the names stored on your media player or USB flash
drive. It is able to make some exceptions for very popular artist names
(for example, U2) such that you can always use the English pronunci-
ation for these artists.
You may be saying the foreign names
using the currently selected language for
SYNC 3.
The SYNC 3 voice control
system is having trouble
recognizing foreign tracks,
artists, albums, genres and
playlist names from my
media player or USB flash
drive.
SYNC 3 uses a synthetically generated voice rather than pre-recorded
human voice.
SYNC 3 uses text-to-speech voice prompt
technology.
The system generates
voice prompts and the
pronunciation of some
words may not be accurate
for my language.
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of
languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook
without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player
(for example, "play artist Madonna").
494
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Possible cause and solutionIssue
Personal Profiles have not been set up.
I cannot create a profile.
An invalid profile name was entered.
A memory button was not selected when prompted.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in Park or was shifted out of
Run or Park while creating a profile.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The lock button was not selected on a keyfob when prompted.
I cannot link a keyfob.
The keyfob selected was already associated to another profile and
an overwrite was declined.
A profile recall was performed while linking a keyfob.
The vehicle’s ignition was not On and in Park, or was shifted out of
Run or Park while linking a keyfob.
The old linking method is used.
The unsaved setting is not supported by Personal Profiles.
My personalized settings do not save.
A different Personal Profile is active than expected.
495
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Possible cause and solutionIssue
Another user has changed settings for the wrong Personal Profile.
A Personal Profile has not been created.
My profile will not recall.
Personal Profiles is turned off.
The requested profile is already active.
The memory button being used is not linked to a profile.
The keyfob being used is not linked to a profile.
The wrong keyfob is being used.
A button other than unlock or remote start is being pressed on a linked
keyfob.
The Personal Profile was deleted.
Personal Profiles is turned off.My preset positions recall but my profile does not.
The vehicle is in motion.
My profile recalls but my preset positions do not.
The preset positions are the same as the Guest or previously active
profile.
496
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
Personal Profiles
Possible cause and solutionIssue
Unlink and relink your keyfob in the Personal Profiles menu. You may
need to see your authorized dealer.
I lost a keyfob.
Keyfobs had been erased and reprogramed. This could happen if you
let dealership add a new keyfob to replace lost one.
I lost all profiles.
Master Reset had been performed without your acknowledgement.
General
Possible solutionPossible causeIssue
SYNC 3 only supports four languages in a single module for text
display, voice control and voice prompts. The country where you
bought your vehicle dictates the four languages based on the most
popular languages spoken. If the selected language is not available,
SYNC 3 remains in the current active language.
SYNC 3 does not support the currently
selected language for the instrument
cluster and information and entertainment
display.
The language selected for
the instrument cluster and
information and entertain-
ment display does not
match the SYNC 3
language (phone, USB,
Bluetooth audio, voice
control and voice prompts).
SYNC 3 offers several new voice control features for a wide range of
languages. Dialing a contact name directly from the phonebook
without pre-recording (for example, “call John Smith”) or selecting a
track, artist, album, genre or playlist directly from your media player
(for example, "play artist Madonna").
497
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
SYNC 3 System Reset
The system has a System Reset feature that can be performed if the function of a SYNC 3 feature is lost. This reset is intended to restore
functionality and will not erase any information previously stored in the system (such as paired devices, phonebook, call history, text
messages, or user settings). To perform a System Reset, press and hold the Seek Up (>>|) button while pressing and holding the Radio
Power button. After approximately 5 seconds the screen will go black. Allow 1-2 minutes for the system reset to complete. You may then
resume using the SYNC 3 system.
For additional assistance with SYNC 3
troubleshooting, refer to the regional Ford
or Lincoln website.
498
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
SYNC™ 3
For a complete listing of the accessories that
are available for your vehicle, please contact
your authorized dealer or visit our online
store at:
Web Address (United States)
www.Accessories.Lincoln.com
Web Address (Canada)
www.LincolnCanada.com
Lincoln Motor Company will repair or replace
any properly authorized dealer-installed
Lincoln Original Accessory found to be
defective in factory-supplied materials or
workmanship during the warranty period, as
well as any component damaged by the
defective accessories.
Lincoln Motor Company will warrant your
Lincoln accessory through the warranty that
provides the greatest benefit:
• 24 months, unlimited mileage.
• The remainder of your new vehicle
limited warranty.
Contact an authorized dealer for details and
a copy of the warranty.
Exterior Style
• Bumper protectors.
• Side-window deflectors*.
Interior Style
• Floor liners.
• Premium carpeted floor mats.
Lifestyle
• Ash cup (smoker's packages).
• Cargo area protector.
• Cargo net.
• Cargo organizer.
• Sun shade.
• Tablet cradle*.
Peace of Mind
• Car covers*.
• First aid kit.
• Remote start.
• Roadside assistance kit*.
• Vehicle security system.
• Wheel locks.
*Lincoln Licensed Accessory. The accessory
manufacturer designs, develops and
therefore warrants Lincoln Licensed
Accessories, and does not design or test
these accessories to Lincoln Motor Company
engineering requirements. Contact an
authorized Lincoln dealer for the
manufacturer's limited warranty details and
request a copy of the Lincoln Licensed
Accessories product limited warranty from
the accessory manufacturer.
499
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Accessories
For maximum vehicle performance, keep the
following information in mind when adding
accessories or equipment to your vehicle:
• When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers and luggage to your vehicle,
do not exceed the total weight capacity
of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle
(GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the
Safety Compliance Certification label).
Consult an authorized dealer for specific
weight information.
• The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications (CRTC) regulate the
use of mobile communications systems
that are equipped with radio transmitters,
for example two-way radios, telephones
and theft alarms. Any such equipment
installed in your vehicle should comply
with the Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) and Canadian Radio
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
regulations and should be installed only
by an authorized dealer.
• Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if their manufacturer did not
design them specifically for automotive
use.
• If you or an authorized Lincoln dealer add
any non-Lincoln electrical or electronic
accessories or components to your
vehicle, you may adversely affect battery
performance and durability. In addition,
you may also adversely affect the
performance of other electrical systems
in the vehicle.
500
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Accessories
PROTECT YOURSELF FROM THE RISING
COST OF VEHICLE REPAIRS WITH
LINCOLN PROTECT EXTENDED SERVICE
PLAN.
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plans
(U.S. Only)
Lincoln Protect means peace of mind. It’s the
extended service plan backed by the Lincoln
Motor Company, and provides more
protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited
Warranty coverage. When you visit your
Lincoln Dealer, insist on genuine Lincoln
Protect extended service plans!
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan Can
Quickly Pay for Itself
One trip to the Service Center could easily
exceed the price of your Lincoln Protect
extended service plan. With Lincoln Protect
you minimize your risk for unexpected repair
bills and rising repair costs.
Up to 1000+ Covered Vehicle Components
There are four mechanical Lincoln Protect
extended service plans with different levels
of coverage. Ask your authorized dealer for
details.
1. PremiumCARE - Our most comprehensive
coverage. With over 1,000 covered
components, this plan is so complete it’ s
probably easier to list what’s not covered.
2. ExtraCARE - Covers 113 components, and
includes many high-tech items.
3. BaseCARE - Covers 84 components.
4. PowertrainCARE - Covers 29 critical
components.
Lincoln Protect extended service plans are
honored by all authorized Lincoln dealers in
the U.S., Canada and Mexico.
That means you get:
• Reliable, quality service at any Lincoln or
Ford dealership.
• Repairs performed by factory trained
technicians, using genuine parts.
Rental Car Reimbursement
1st day Rental Benefit
If you bring your car into your dealer for
service, we’ll give you a loaner to use for the
day.
Extended Rental Benefits
If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered
repairs, you are eligible for rental car
coverage, including bumper to bumper
warranty repairs, and Field Service Actions.
Roadside Assistance
Exclusive 24/7 roadside assistance, including:
• Towing, flat-tire change and battery jump
starts.
• Out of fuel and lock-out assistance.
• Travel expense reimbursement for
lodging, meals and rental car.
• Assistance for taxi, shuttle, rental car
coverage and other transportation.
501
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Lincoln Protect
Transferable Coverage
If you sell your vehicle before your Lincoln
Protect extended service plan coverage
expires, you can transfer any remaining
coverage to the new owner. Which should
give you and your potential buyer a little
more peace of mind.
Less Cost to Properly Maintain Your Vehicle
Lincoln Protect extended service plan also
offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that
covers all scheduled maintenance, and
selected wear items. The coverage is
prepaid, so you never have to worry about
the cost of your vehicle’s maintenance.
Covered maintenance includes:
• Windshield wiper blades.
• Spark plugs.
• The clutch disc (if equipped).
• Brake pads and linings.
• Shock absorbers and struts.
• Engine cooling hoses, clamps and
o-rings.
• Engine belts.
• Diesel exhaust fluid replenishment (if
equipped).
Interest Free Finance Options
Just a 10% down payment will provide you
with an affordable, no interest, no fee
payment program allowing you all the
security and benefits Lincoln Protect
extended service plan has to offer while
paying over time. You are pre-approved with
no credit check or hassles. To learn more,
call our Lincoln Protect extended service
plan specialists at 800-367-3377.
Complete the information below and mail to:
Lincoln Protect Extended Service Plan
P.O. Box 321067
Detroit, MI 48232
Lincoln Protect (CANADA ONLY)
You can get more protection for your vehicle
by purchasing a Lincoln Protect extended
service plan. Lincoln Protect extended
service plan is the only service contract
backed by Lincoln Motor Company of
Canada, Limited. Depending on the plan you
purchase, Lincoln Protect extended service
plan provides benefits such as:
• Rental reimbursement.
• Coverage for certain maintenance and
wear items.
• Protection against repair costs after your
New Vehicle Limited Warranty Coverage
expires.
• Roadside Assistance benefits.
502
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Lincoln Protect
There are several Lincoln Protect extended
service plans available in various time,
distance and deductible combinations. Each
plan is tailored to fit your own driving needs,
including reimbursement for towing and
rental. When you purchase Lincoln Protect
extended service plan, you receive added
peace-of-mind protection throughout
Canada, the United States and Mexico,
provided by a network of participating
authorized Lincoln Motor Company dealers.
Note: Repairs performed outside of Canada,
the United States and Mexico are not eligible
for Lincoln Protect extended service plan
coverage.
This information is subject to change. For
more information, visit your local Lincoln of
Canada dealer or www.Lincoln.ca to find the
Lincoln Protect extended service plan that
is right for you.
503
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Lincoln Protect
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
INFORMATION
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?
Carefully following the maintenance
schedule helps protect against major repair
expenses resulting from neglect or
inadequate maintenance and may help to
increase the value of your vehicle when you
sell or trade it. Keep all receipts for
completed maintenance with your vehicle.
We have established regular maintenance
intervals for your vehicle based upon
rigorous testing. It is important that you have
your vehicle serviced at the proper times.
These intervals serve two purposes; one is
to maintain the reliability of your vehicle and
the second is to keep your cost of owning
your vehicle down.
It is your responsibility to have all scheduled
maintenance performed and to make sure
that the materials used meet the
specifications identified in this owner's
manual. See Capacities and Specifications
(page 366).
Failure to perform scheduled maintenance
invalidates warranty coverage on parts
affected by the lack of maintenance.
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?
Factory-Trained Technicians
Service technicians participate in extensive
factory-sponsored certification training to
help them become experts on the operation
of your vehicle. Ask your dealership about
the training and certification their technicians
have received.
Genuine Ford and Motorcraft® Replacement
Parts
Dealerships stock Ford, Motorcraft and
Ford-authorized branded re-manufactured
replacement parts. These parts meet or
exceed our specifications. Parts installed at
your dealership carry a nationwide 24-month
or unlimited mile (kilometer) parts and labor
limited warranty.
If you do not use Ford authorized parts they
may not meet our specifications and
depending on the part, it could affect
emissions compliance.
Convenience
Many dealerships have extended evening
and Saturday hours to make your service
visit more convenient and they offer one stop
shopping. They can perform any services
that are required on your vehicle, from
general maintenance to collision repairs.
Note: Not all dealers have extended hours
or body shops. Please contact your dealer
for details.
Protecting Your Investment
Maintenance is an investment that pays
dividends in the form of improved reliability,
durability and resale value. To maintain the
proper performance of your vehicle and its
emission control systems, make sure you
have scheduled maintenance performed at
the designated intervals.
504
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Your vehicle is equipped with the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor system, which displays a
message in the information display at the
proper oil change interval. This interval may
be up to one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km).
When the oil change message appears in
the information display, it is time for an oil
change. Make sure you perform the oil
change within two weeks or 500 mi (800 km)
of the message appearing. Make sure you
reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after
each oil change. See Oil Change Indicator
Reset (page 303).
If your information display resets prematurely
or becomes inoperative, you should perform
the oil change interval at six months or
5,000 mi (8,000 km) from your last oil
change. Never exceed one year or 10,000 mi
(16,000 km) between oil change intervals.
Your vehicle is very sophisticated and built
with multiple, complex, performance systems.
Every manufacturer develops these systems
using different specifications and
performance features. That is why it is
important to rely upon your dealership to
properly diagnose and repair your vehicle.
Ford Motor Company has recommended
maintenance intervals for various parts and
component systems based upon engineering
testing. Ford Motor Company relies upon this
testing to determine the most appropriate
mileage for replacement of oils and fluids to
protect your vehicle at the lowest overall cost
to you and recommends against
maintenance schedules that deviate from
the scheduled maintenance information.
We strongly recommend the use of only
genuine Ford, Motorcraft or Ford-authorized
re-manufactured replacement parts
engineered for your vehicle.
Additives and Chemicals
This owner's manual and the Ford Workshop
Manual list the recommended additives and
chemicals for your vehicle. We do not
recommend using chemicals or additives not
approved by us as part of your vehicle’s
normal maintenance. Please consult your
warranty information.
Oils, Fluids and Flushing
In many cases, fluid discoloration is a normal
operating characteristic and, by itself, does
not necessarily indicate a concern or that the
fluid needs to be changed. However, a
qualified expert, such as the factory-trained
technicians at your dealership, should
inspect discolored fluids that also show signs
of overheating or foreign material
contamination immediately.
Make sure to change your vehicle’ s oils and
fluids at the specified intervals or in
conjunction with a repair. Flushing is a viable
way to change fluid for many vehicle
sub-systems during scheduled maintenance.
It is critical that systems are flushed only with
new fluid that is the same as that required
to fill and operate the system or using a
Ford-approved flushing chemical.
Owner Checks and Services
Make sure you perform the following basic
maintenance checks and inspections every
month or at six-month intervals.
505
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Month
Engine oil level.
Function of all interior and exterior lights.
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure.
Windshield washer fluid level.
Fuel and water separator. Drain if necessary (or if indicated by the information display).
Holes and slots in the tail pipe to make sure they are functional and clear of debris.
Check Every Six Months
Battery connections. Clean if necessary.
Body and door drain holes for obstructions. Clean if necessary.
Cooling system fluid level and coolant strength.
Door weatherstrips for wear. Lubricate if necessary.
Hinges, latches and outside locks for proper operation. Lubricate if necessary.
Parking brake for proper operation.
506
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Check Every Six Months
Safety belts and seat latches for wear and function.
Safety warning lamps (brake, ABS, airbag and safety belt) for operation.
Washer spray and wiper operation. Clean or replace blades as necessary.
Multi-Point Inspection
In order to keep your vehicle running right,
it is important to have the systems on your
vehicle checked regularly. This can help
identify potential issues and prevent major
problems. We recommend having the
following multi-point inspection performed
at every scheduled maintenance interval to
help make sure your vehicle keeps running
great.
Multi-Point Inspection
Hazard warning system operationAccessory drive belt(s)
Horn operationBattery performance
Radiator, cooler, heater and air conditioning hosesEngine air filter
Suspension components for leaks or damageExhaust system
507
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Multi-Point Inspection
Steering and linkageExterior lamps operation
Tires (including spare) for wear and proper pressure
2
Fluid levels
1
; fill if necessary
Windshield for cracks, chips or pitsFor oil and fluid leaks
Washer spray and wiper operationHalf-shaft dust boots
1
Brake, coolant recovery reservoir, automatic transmission and window washer
2
If your vehicle is equipped with a temporary mobility kit, check the tire sealant expiration Use By date on the canister. Replace as needed.
Be sure to ask your dealership service
advisor or technician about the multi-point
vehicle inspection. It is a comprehensive way
to perform a thorough inspection of your
vehicle. Your checklist gives you immediate
feedback on the overall condition of your
vehicle.
NORMAL SCHEDULED
MAINTENANCE
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™
Your vehicle is equipped with an Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor that determines when you
should change the engine oil based on how
your vehicle is used. By using several
important factors in its calculations, the
monitor helps reduce the cost of owning your
vehicle and reduces environmental waste at
the same time.
This means you do not have to remember to
change the oil on a mileage-based schedule.
Your vehicle lets you know when an oil
change is due by displaying a message in
the information display.
The following table provides examples of
vehicle use and its impact on oil change
intervals. It is a guideline only. Actual oil
change intervals depend on several factors
and generally decrease with severity of use.
508
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
When to expect the OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Message
Vehicle Use and ExampleInterval
Normal
7,500–10,000 mi (12,000–16,000 km)
Normal commuting with highway driving
No, or moderate, load or towing
Flat to moderately hilly roads
No extended idling
Severe
5,000–7,500 mi (8,000–12,000 km)
Moderate to heavy load or towing
Mountainous or off-road conditions
Extended idling
Extended hot or cold operation
Extreme
3,000–5,000 mi (5,000–8,000 km)
Maximum load or towing
Extreme hot or cold operation
509
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Maintenance Intervals
At Every Oil Change Interval as Indicated by the Information Display
1
Change engine oil and filter.
2
Rotate the tires.
Perform a multi-point inspection, recommended.
Inspect the automatic transmission fluid level. Consult your dealer for requirements.
Inspect the brake pads, rotors, hoses and parking brake.
Inspect the engine cooling system strength and hoses.
Inspect the exhaust system and heat shields.
Inspect the rear axle and U-joints (All-Wheel Drive only).
Inspect the half-shaft boots.
Inspect the steering linkage, ball joints, suspension, tie-rod ends, driveshaft and U-joints.
Inspect the tires, tire wear and measure the tread depth.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.
1
Do not exceed one year or 10,000 mi (16,000 km) between service intervals.
2
Reset the Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Oil Change Indicator Reset (page 303).
510
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Other Maintenance Items
1
Replace cabin air filter.Every 20,000 mi
(32,000 km)
Replace engine air filter.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace Fuel Filter (3.0L All-Wheel Drive only).Every 40,000 mi
(64,000 km)
Change engine coolant.
2
At 100,000 mi (160,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.
Every 100,000 mi
(160,000 km)
Inspect accessory drive belt or belts.
3
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Every 150,000 mi
(240,000 km)
Replace accessory drive belt or belts.
4
1
Perform these maintenance items within 3,000 mi (4,800 km) of the last engine oil and filter change. Do not exceed the designated distance
for the interval.
2
Initial replacement at six years or 100,000 mi (160,000 km), then every three years or 50,000 mi (80,000 km).
3
After initial inspection, inspect every other oil change until replaced.
4
If not replaced within the last 100,000 mi (160,000 km).
511
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
SPECIAL OPERATING CONDITIONS
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
If you operate your vehicle primarily in any
of the following conditions, you need to
perform extra maintenance as indicated. If
you operate your vehicle occasionally under
any of these conditions, it is not necessary
to perform the extra maintenance. For
specific recommendations, see your
dealership service advisor or technician.
Perform the services shown in the following
tables when specified or within 3,000 mi
(4,800 km) of the message appearing in the
information display prompting you to change
your oil.
• Example 1: The message comes on at
28,750 mi (46,270 km). Perform the
30,000 mi (48,000 km) automatic
transmission fluid replacement.
• Example 2: The message has not come
on, but the odometer reads 30,000 mi
(48,000 km) (for example, the Intelligent
Oil-Life Monitor was reset at 25,000 mi
(40,000 km). Perform the engine air filter
replacement.
512
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Towing a Trailer or Using a Car-top Carrier
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Inspect rear axle and U-joints.Inspect frequently, service
as required
See axle maintenance items under Exceptions.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Change automatic transmission fluid.
Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
513
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Extensive Idling or Low-speed Driving for Long Distances, as in Heavy Commercial Use Such as Delivery, Taxi, Patrol Car or Livery
Change engine oil and filter as indicated by information display and perform services listed in the Normal
Scheduled Maintenance chart.
As required
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
Replace spark plugs.Every 60,000 mi
(96,000 km)
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Replace cabin air filter.Inspect frequently, service
as required
Replace engine air filter.
Inspect the wheels and related components for abnormal noise, wear, looseness or drag.Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
Rotate tires, inspect tires for wear and measure tread depth.
Change engine oil and filter.
1
Every 5,000 mi (8,000 km)
or six months
514
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Operating in dusty or sandy conditions (such as unpaved or dusty roads)
Perform multi-point inspection.
Change automatic transmission fluid.Every 30,000 mi
(48,000 km)
1
Reset your Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor after engine oil and filter changes. See Engine Oil Check (page 302).
Exclusive use of E85, Flex Fuel Vehicles Only
If ran exclusively on E85, fill the fuel tank full with regular unleaded fuel.Every oil change
Exceptions
There are several exceptions to the Normal
Schedule:
Rear Axle and PTU Maintenance
The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) and rear axle,
All Wheel Drive only, in your vehicle does
not require any normal scheduled
maintenance unless the unit shows signs of
leakage. Contact an authorized dealer for
service.
California Fuel Filter Replacement
If you register your vehicle in California, the
California Air Resources Board has
determined that the failure to perform this
maintenance item does not nullify the
emission warranty or limit recall liability
before the completion of your vehicle's
useful life. Ford Motor Company, however,
urges you to have all recommended
maintenance services performed at the
specified intervals and to record all vehicle
service.
Hot Climate Oil Change Intervals
Vehicles operating in the Middle East, North
Africa, Sub-Saharan Africa or locations with
similar climates using an American Petroleum
Institute (API) Certified for Gasoline Engines
(Certification mark) oil of SM or SN quality,
the normal oil change interval is 3,000 mi
(5,000 km).
If the available API SM or SN oils are not
available, then the oil change interval is
2,000 mi (3,000 km).
515
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
Engine Air Filter and Cabin Air Filter
Replacement
The life of the engine air filter and cabin air
filter is dependent on exposure to dusty and
dirty conditions. Vehicles operated in these
conditions require frequent inspection and
replacement of the engine air filter and cabin
air filter.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
RECORD
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
516
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
517
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
518
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
519
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
520
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
521
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
522
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
523
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
524
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
525
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
526
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
527
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
528
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
529
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
530
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
531
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
532
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
533
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
534
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
E146852
Repair Order #:
Distance:
Engine hours (optional):
Multi-point inspection (recommended):
Signature:
Dealer stamp
535
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Scheduled Maintenance
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY
WARNING: Do not place objects or
mount equipment on or near the airbag
cover, on the side of the seatbacks (of the
front seats), or in front seat areas that may
come into contact with a deploying airbag.
Failure to follow these instructions may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a crash.
WARNING: Do not fasten antenna
cables to original vehicle wiring, fuel pipes
and brake pipes.
WARNING: Keep antenna and power
cables at least 4 in (10 cm) from any
electronic modules and airbags.
Note: We test and certify your vehicle to
meet electromagnetic compatibility
legislation (UNECE Regulation 10 or other
applicable local requirements). It is your
responsibility to make sure that any
equipment an authorized dealer installs on
your vehicle complies with applicable local
legislation and other requirements.
Note: Any radio frequency transmitter
equipment in your vehicle (such as cellular
telephones and amateur radio transmitters)
must keep to the parameters in the following
table. We do not provide special provisions
or conditions for installations or use.
536
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
Car
E239120
537
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
Van
E239122
538
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
Truck
E239121
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak RMS)Frequency Band MHz
1501-30
2, 35050-54
2, 35068-88
539
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
Antenna PositionsMaximum output power Watt (Peak RMS)Frequency Band MHz
2, 350142-176
2, 350380-512
2, 310806-870
Note: After the installation of radio frequency
transmitters, check for disturbances from
and to all electrical equipment in your
vehicle, both in the standby and transmit
modes.
Check all electrical equipment:
• With the ignition ON.
• With the engine running.
• During a road test at various speeds.
Check that electromagnetic fields generated
inside your vehicle cabin by the transmitter
installed do not exceed applicable human
exposure requirements.
540
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER
LICENSE AGREEMENT (EULA)
• You (“You” or “Your” as applicable) have
acquired a vehicle having several
devices, including SYNC ® and various
control modules, ("DEVICES") that include
software licensed or owned by Ford
Motor Company and its affiliates ("FORD
MOTOR COMPANY"). Those software
products of FORD MOTOR COMPANY
origin, as well as associated media,
printed materials, and "online" or
electronic documentation ("SOFTWARE")
are protected by international intellectual
property laws and treaties. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. All
rights reserved.
• The SOFTWARE may interface with
and/or communicate with, or may be later
upgraded to interface with and/or
communicate with additional software
and/or systems provided by FORD
MOTOR COMPANY.
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THIS END
USER LICENSE AGREEMENT ("EULA") DO
NOT USE THE DEVICES OR COPY THE
SOFTWARE. ANY USE OF THE SOFTWARE,
INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO USE ON
THE DEVICES, WILL CONSTITUTE YOUR
AGREEMENT TO THIS EULA (OR
RATIFICATION OF ANY PREVIOUS
CONSENT).
GRANT OF SOFTWARE LICENSE: This EULA
grants you the following license:
• You may use the SOFTWARE as installed
on the DEVICES and as otherwise
interfacing with systems and/or services
provide by or through FORD MOTOR
COMPANY or its third party software and
service providers.
Description of Other Rights and Limitations
• Speech Recognition: If the SOFTWARE
includes speech recognition
component(s), you should understand
that speech recognition is an inherently
statistical process and that recognition
errors are inherent in the process.
Neither FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor
its suppliers shall be liable for any
damages arising out of errors in the
speech recognition process. It is your
responsibility to monitor any speech
recognition functions included in the
system.
• Limitations on Reverse Engineering,
Decompilation and Disassembly: You
may not reverse engineer, decompile,
translate, disassemble or attempt to
discover any source code or underlying
ideas or algorithms of the SOFTWARE
nor permit others to reverse engineer,
decompile or disassemble the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
541
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
• Limitations on Distributing, Copying,
Modifying and Creating Derivative
Works: You may not distribute, copy,
make modifications to or create
derivative works based on the
SOFTWARE, except and only to the
extent that such activity is expressly
permitted by applicable law
notwithstanding this limitation or to the
extent as may be permitted by the
licensing terms governing use of any
open source components included with
the SOFTWARE.
• Single EULA: The end user
documentation for the DEVICES and
related systems and services may contain
multiple EULAs, such as multiple
translations and/or multiple media
versions (e.g., in the user documentation
and in the software). Even if you receive
multiple EULAs, you are licensed to use
only one (1) copy of the SOFTWARE.
• SOFTWARE Transfer: You may
permanently transfer your rights under
this EULA only as part of a sale or transfer
of the DEVICES, provided you retain no
copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE
(including all component parts, the media
and printed materials, any upgrades, and,
if applicable, the Certificate(s) of
Authenticity), and the recipient agrees to
the terms of this EULA. If the SOFTWARE
is an upgrade, any transfer must include
all prior versions of the SOFTWARE.
• Termination: Without prejudice to any
other rights, FORD MOTOR COMPANY
may terminate this EULA if you fail to
comply with the terms and conditions of
this EULA.
• Internet-Based Services Components:
The SOFTWARE may contain
components that enable and facilitate
the use of certain Internet-based
services. You acknowledge and agree
that FORD MOTOR COMPANY, third
party software and service suppliers, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent may
automatically check the version of the
SOFTWARE and/or its components that
you are utilizing and may provide
upgrades or supplements to the
SOFTWARE that may be automatically
downloaded to your DEVICES.
• Additional Software/Services: The
SOFTWARE may permit FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, third party software and
service suppliers, its affiliates and/or its
designated agent to provide or make
available to you SOFTWARE updates,
supplements, add-on components, or
Internet-based services components of
the SOFTWARE after the date you obtain
your initial copy of the SOFTWARE
("Supplemental Components".)
SOFTWARE updates may cause you to
incur additional charges from your
wireless service provider. If FORD
MOTOR COMPANY or third party
software and services suppliers provide
or make available to you Supplemental
Components and no other EULA terms
are provided along with the
Supplemental Components, then the
terms of this EULA shall apply. FORD
542
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates and/or
its designated agent reserve the right to
discontinue without liability any
Internet-based services provided to you
or made available to you through the use
of the SOFTWARE.
543
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
• Links to Third Party Sites: The
SOFTWARE may provide you with the
ability to link to third party sites. The third
party sites are not under the control of
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates
and/or its designated agent. Neither
FORD MOTOR COMPANY nor its
affiliates nor its designated agent are
responsible for (I) the contents of any
third party sites, any links contained in
third party sites, or any changes or
updates to third party sites, or (ii)
webcasting or any other form of
transmission received from any third
party sites. If the SOFTWARE provides
links to third party sites, those links are
provided to you only as a convenience,
and the inclusion of any link does not
imply an endorsement of the third party
site by FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its
affiliates and/or its designated agent.
• Obligation to Drive Responsibly: You
recognize your obligation to drive
responsibly and keep attention on the
road. You will read and abide with the
DEVICES operating instructions
particularly as they pertain to safety and
you agree to assume any risk associated
with the use of the DEVICES.
UPGRADES AND RECOVERY MEDIA: If the
SOFTWARE is provided by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY separate from the DEVICES on
media such as a ROM chip, CD ROM disk(s)
or via web download or other means, and is
labeled "For Upgrade Purposes Only" or "For
Recovery Purposes Only" you may install one
(1) copy of such SOFTWARE onto the
DEVICES as a replacement copy for the
existing SOFTWARE, and use it in
accordance with this EULA, including any
additional EULA terms accompanying the
upgrade SOFTWARE.
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS: All
title and intellectual property rights in and to
the SOFTWARE (including but not limited to
any images, photographs, animations, video,
audio, music, text and "applets" incorporated
into the SOFTWARE), the accompanying
printed materials, and any copies of the
SOFTWARE, are owned by FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, or its affiliates or suppliers. The
SOFTWARE is licensed, not sold. You may
not copy the printed materials accompanying
the SOFTWARE. All title and intellectual
property rights in and to the content which
may be accessed through use of the
SOFTWARE is the property of the respective
content owner and may be protected by
applicable copyright or other intellectual
property laws and treaties. This EULA grants
you no rights to use such content outside its
intended use. All rights not specifically
granted under this EULA are reserved by
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and
third party software and service providers
and suppliers. Use of any on-line services
which may be accessed through the
SOFTWARE may be governed by the
respective terms of use relating to such
services. If this SOFTWARE contains
documentation that is provided only in
electronic form, you may print one copy of
such electronic documentation.
544
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
EXPORT RESTRICTIONS: You acknowledge
that the SOFTWARE is subject to U.S. and
European Union export jurisdiction. You
agree to comply with all applicable
international and national laws that apply to
the SOFTWARE, including the U.S. Export
Administration Regulations, as well as
end-user, end-use and destination
restrictions issued by U.S. and other
governments.
TRADEMARKS: This EULA does not grant
you any rights in connection with any
trademarks or service marks of FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, its affiliates, and third
party software and service providers.
PRODUCT SUPPORT: Please refer to FORD
MOTOR COMPANY instructions provided in
the documentation for the DEVICES product
support, such as the vehicle owner guide.
Should you have any questions concerning
this EULA, or if you desire to contact FORD
MOTOR COMPANY for any other reason,
please refer to the address provided in the
documentation for the DEVICES.
No Liability for Certain Damages: EXCEPT
AS PROHIBITED BY LAW, FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, ANY THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE
OR SERVICES SUPPLIERS, AND THEIR
AFFILIATES SHALL HAVE NO LIABILITY FOR
ANY INDIRECT, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL
OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ARISING FROM
OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR
PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE. THIS
LIMITATION SHALL APPLY EVEN IF ANY
REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL
PURPOSE. THERE ARE NO WARRANTIES
OTHER THAN THOSE THAT MAY BE
EXPRESSLY PROVIDED FOR YOUR NEW
VEHICLE.
SYNC® Automotive Important Safety
Information Read and follow instructions:
• Before using your SYNC® system, read
and follow all instructions and safety
information provided in this end user
manual ("Owner Guide".) Not following
precautions found in the Owner Guide
can lead to an accident or other serious
injuries.
General Operation
• Voice Command Control: Certain
functions within the SYNC® system may
be accomplished using voice commands.
Using voice commands while driving
helps you to operate the system without
removing your hands from the wheel or
eyes from the road.
• Prolonged Views of Screen: Do not
access any function requiring a
prolonged view of the screen while you
are driving. Pull over in a safe and legal
manner before attempting to access a
function of the system requiring
prolonged attention.
• Volume Setting: Do not raise the volume
excessively. Keep the volume at a level
where you can still hear outside traffic
and emergency signals while driving.
Driving while unable to hear these
sounds could cause an accident.
545
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
• Navigation Features: Any navigation
features included in the system are
intended to provide turn by turn
instructions to get you to a desired
destination. Please make certain all
persons using this system carefully read
and follow instructions and safety
information fully.
• Distraction Hazard: Any navigation
features may require manual (non-verbal)
setup. Attempting to perform such set-up
or insert data while driving can distract
your attention and could cause an
accident or other serious injury. Stop the
vehicle in a safe and legal manner before
attempting these operations.
• Let Your Judgment Prevail: Any
navigation features are provided only as
an aid. Make your driving decisions
based on your observations of local
conditions and existing traffic regulations.
Any such feature is not a substitute for
your personal judgment. Any route
suggestions made by this system should
never replace any local traffic regulations
or your personal judgment or knowledge
of safe driving practices.
• Route Safety: Do not follow the route
suggestions if doing so would result in
an unsafe or illegal maneuver, if you
would be placed in an unsafe situation,
or if you would be directed into an area
that you consider unsafe. The driver is
ultimately responsible for the safe
operation of the vehicle and therefore,
must evaluate whether it is safe to follow
the suggested directions.
• Potential Map Inaccuracy: Maps used
by this system may be inaccurate
because of changes in roads, traffic
controls or driving conditions. Always use
good judgment and common sense when
following the suggested routes.
• Emergency Services: Do not rely on any
navigation features included in the
system to route you to emergency
services. Ask local authorities or an
emergency services operator for these
locations. Not all emergency services
such as police, fire stations, hospitals and
clinics are likely to be contained in the
map database for such navigation
features.
546
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
Your Responsibilities and Assumptions of
Risk
547
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
• You agree to each of the following:(a)
Any use of the SOFTWARE while driving
an automobile or other vehicle in
violation of applicable law or otherwise
driving in an unsafe manner presents a
significant risk of distracted driving and
should not be attempted under any
circumstances;(b) Use of the SOFTWARE
at excessive volume poses a significant
risk of hearing damage and should not
be attempted under any
circumstances;(c) The SOFTWARE may
not be compatible with new or different
versions of an operating system, third
party software, or third party services,
and the SOFTWARE may potentially
cause a critical failure of an operating
system, third party software, or third party
service.(d) Any third party service
accessed by or third party software used
with the SOFTWARE (I) may charge an
additional fee for access, (ii) may not
work correctly, on an uninterrupted basis,
or error free, (iii) may change streaming
formats or discontinue operation, (iv) may
contain adult, profane or offensive
content; and (v) may contain inaccurate,
false or misleading traffic, weather,
financial or safety information or other
content; and (e) Use of the SOFTWARE
may cause you to incur additional
charges from your wireless service
provider (WSP) and any data or minute
calculators that may be included in the
software program are for reference only,
are not warranted in any way and should
not be relied upon in anyway.
• When using the SOFTWARE, you agree
to be responsible for and assume the
entire risk to the items set forth in Section
(a) – (e) above.
Disclaimer of Warranty
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND
AGREE THAT USE OF THE DEVICES AND
SOFTWARE IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND
THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO
SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
COMPATIBILITY, ACCURACY AND EFFORT
IS WITH YOU. TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, THE
SOFTWARE AND ANY THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
ARE PROVIDED "AS IS" AND “AS
AVAILABLE”, WITH ALL FAULTS AND
WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND
FORD MOTOR COMPANY HEREBY
DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND
CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, AND
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES, EITHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT
NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF
MERCHANTABILITY, OF SATISFACTORY
QUALITY, OF FITNESS FOR AN ARTICULAR
PURPOSE, OF ACCURACY, OF QUIET
ENJOYMENT, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT
OF THIRD-PARTY RIGHTS. FORD MOTOR
COMPANY DOES NOT WARRANT (a)
AGAINST INTERFERENCE WITH YOUR
ENJOYMENT OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES, (b) THAT THE SOFTWARE, THIRD
PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL MEET YOUR
REQUIREMENTS, (c) THAT THE OPERATION
OF THE SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY
SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY SERVICES
WILL BE UNINTERRUPTED OR ERROR-FREE,
(d) OR THAT DEFECTS IN THE SOFTWARE,
THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR THIRD-PARTY
SERVICES WILL BE CORRECTED. NO ORAL
548
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE
GIVEN BY FORD MOTOR COMPANY OR ITS
AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL
CREATE A WARRANTY. SHOULD THE
SOFTWARE, THIRD PARTY SOFTWARE, OR
THIRD-PARTY SERVICES PROVE
DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE ENTIRE
COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING,
REPAIR OR CORRECTION. SOME
JURISDICTIONS DO NOT ALLOW THE
DISCLAIMER OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR
LIMITATIONS ON APPLICABLE STATUTORY
RIGHTS OF A CONSUMER, SO THE ABOVE
DISCLAIMER MAY NOT FULLY APPLY TO
YOU. THE SOLE WARRANTY PROVIDED BY
FORD MOTOR COMPANY SHALL BE FOUND
IN THE WARRANTY INFORMATION
INCLUDING WITH YOUR OWNER GUIDE. TO
THE EXTENT THAT THERE IS ANY
CONFLICT BETWEEN THE TERMS OF THIS
SECTION AND THE WARRANTY BOOKLET,
THE WARRANTY BOOKLET SHALL
CONTROL.
Applicable Law, Venue, Jurisdiction
• The laws of the State of Michigan govern
this EULA and Your use of the
SOFTWARE. Your use of the SOFTWARE
may also be subject to other local, state,
national, or international laws. Any
litigation arising out of or related to this
EULA shall be brought and maintained
exclusively in a court of the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County or in
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan. You hereby
consent to submit to the personal
jurisdiction of a court in the State of
Michigan located in Wayne County and
the United States District Court for the
Eastern District of Michigan for any
dispute arising out of or relating to this
EULA.
Binding Arbitration and Class Action Waiver
(a) Application. This Section applies to any
dispute EXCEPT IT DOES NOT INCLUDE A
DISPUTE RELATING TO COPYRIGHT
INFRINGEMENT, OR TO THE
ENFORCEMENT OR VALIDITY OF YOUR,
FORD MOTOR COMPANY, OR ANY OF
FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S LICENSORS’
INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. Dispute
means any dispute, action, or other
controversy between You and FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, other than the exceptions listed
above, concerning the SOFTWARE (including
its price) or this EULA, whether in contract,
warranty, tort, statute, regulation, ordinance,
or any other legal or equitable basis.
(b) Notice of Dispute. In the event of a
Dispute, You or FORD MOTOR COMPANY
must give the other a “Notice of Dispute”,
which is a written statement of the name,
address, and contact information of the party
giving it, the facts giving rise to the dispute,
and the relief requested. You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will attempt to resolve
any dispute through informal negotiation
within 60 days from the date the Notice of
Dispute is sent. After 60 days, You or FORD
MOTOR COMPANY may commence
arbitration.
549
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
(c) Small claims court. You may also litigate
any dispute in small claims court in your
county of residence or FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S principal place of business, if
the dispute meets all requirements to be
heard in the small claims court. You may
litigate in small claims court whether or not
You negotiated informally first.
(d) Binding arbitration. If You and FORD
MOTOR COMPANY, do not resolve any
dispute by informal negotiation or in small
claims court, any other effort to resolve the
dispute will be conducted exclusively by
binding arbitration. You are giving up the
right to litigate (or participate in as a party or
class member) all disputes in court before a
judge or jury. Instead, all disputes will be
resolved before a neutral arbitrator, whose
decision will be final except for a limited right
of appeal under the Federal Arbitration Act.
Any court with jurisdiction over the parties
may enforce the arbitrator’s award.
(e) Class action waiver. Any proceedings to
resolve or litigate any dispute in any forum
will be conducted solely on an individual
basis. Neither you nor FORD MOTOR
COMPANY, will seek to have any dispute
heard as a class action, as a private attorney
general action, or in any other proceeding
in which any party acts or proposes to act in
a representative capacity. No arbitration or
proceeding will be combined with another
without the prior written consent of all parties
to all affected arbitrations or proceedings.
(f) Arbitration procedure. Any arbitration
will be conducted by the American
Arbitration Association (the “AAA”), under its
Commercial Arbitration Rules. If You are an
individual and use the SOFTWARE for
personal or vehicle use, or if the value of the
dispute is $75,000 or less whether or not
You are an individual or how You use the
SOFTWARE, the AAA Supplementary
Procedures for Consumer-Related Disputes
will also apply. To commence arbitration,
submit a Commercial Arbitration Rules
Demand for Arbitration form to the AAA. You
may request a telephonic or in-person
hearing by following the AAA rules. In a
dispute involving $10,000 or less, any
hearing will be telephonic unless the
arbitrator finds good cause to hold an
in-person hearing instead. For more
information, see adr.org or call
1-800-778-7879. You agree to commence
arbitration only in your county of residence
or FORD MOTOR COMPANY’S principal
place of business. The arbitrator may award
the same damages to You individually as a
court could. The arbitrator may award
declaratory or injunctive relief only to You
individually, and only to the extent required
to satisfy Your individual claim.
(g) Arbitration fees and incentives.
• I. Disputes involving $75,000 or less.
FORD MOTOR COMPANY will promptly
reimburse your filing fees and pay the
AAA’s and arbitrator’s fees and
expenses. If you reject FORD MOTOR
COMPANY’S last written settlement offer
made before the arbitrator was appointed
(“last written offer”), your dispute goes
all the way to an arbitrator’s decision
(called an “award”), and the arbitrator
awards you more than the last written
offer, FORD MOTOR COMPANY will give
550
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
you three incentives: (1) pay the greater
of the award or $1,000; (2) pay twice your
reasonable attorney’ s fees, if any; and (3)
reimburse any expenses (including expert
witness fees and costs) that your attorney
reasonably accrues for investigating,
preparing, and pursuing your claim in
arbitration. The arbitrator will determine
the amounts.
• ii. Disputes involving more than $75,000.
The AAA rules will govern payment of
filing fees and the AAA’ s and arbitrator’ s
fees and expenses.
• iii. Disputes involving any amount. In any
arbitration you commence, FORD
MOTOR COMPANY will seek its AAA or
arbitrator’s fees and expenses, or Your
filing fees it reimbursed, only if the
arbitrator finds the arbitration frivolous
or brought for an improper purpose. In
any arbitration FORD MOTOR COMPANY
commences, it will pay all filing, AAA, and
arbitrator’ s fees and expenses. It will not
seek its attorney’s fees or expenses from
you in any arbitration. Fees and expenses
are not counted in determining how
much a dispute involves.
(h) Claims or disputes must be filed within
one year. To the extent permitted by law,
any claim or dispute under this EULA to
which this Section applies must be filed
within one year in small claims court (Section
c) or in arbitration (Section d). The one-year
period begins when the claim or dispute first
could be filed. If such a claim or dispute is
not filed within one year, it is permanently
barred.
(I) Severability. If the class action waiver
(Section e) is found to be illegal or
unenforceable as to all or some parts of a
dispute, then that portion of Section e will
not apply to those parts. Instead, those parts
will be severed and proceed in a court of
law, with the remaining parts proceeding in
arbitration. If any other provision of that
portion Section e is found to be illegal or
unenforceable, that provision will be severed
with the remainder of Section e remaining in
full force and effect.
Telenav Software End User License
Agreement
Please read these terms and conditions
carefully before you use the TeleNav
Software. Your use of the TeleNav Software
indicates that you accept these terms and
conditions. If you do not accept these terms
and conditions, do not break the seal of the
package, launch, or otherwise use the
TeleNav Software. TeleNav may revise this
Agreement and the privacy policy at any
time, with or without notice to you. You agree
to visit http://www.telenav.com from time to
time to review the then current version of
this Agreement and of the privacy policy.
1. Safe and Lawful Use
You acknowledge that devoting attention to
the TeleNav Software may pose a risk of
injury or death to you and others in situations
that otherwise require your undivided
attention, and you therefore agree to comply
with the following when using the TeleNav
Software:
(a) observe all traffic laws and otherwise drive
safely;
551
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
(b) use your own personal judgment while
driving. If you feel that a route suggested by
the TeleNav Software instructs you to
perform an unsafe or illegal maneuver,
places you in an unsafe situation, or directs
you into an area that you consider to be
unsafe, do not follow such instructions;
(c) do not input destinations, or otherwise
manipulate the TeleNav Software, unless
your vehicle is stationary and parked;
(d) do not use the TeleNav Software for any
illegal, unauthorized, unintended, unsafe,
hazardous, or unlawful purposes, or in any
manner inconsistent with this Agreement;
(e) arrange all GPS and wireless devices and
cables necessary for use of the TeleNav
Software in a secure manner in your vehicle
so that they will not interfere with your
driving and will not prevent the operation of
any safety device (such as an airbag).
You agree to indemnify and hold TeleNav
harmless against all claims resulting from any
dangerous or otherwise inappropriate use
of the TeleNav Software in any moving
vehicle, including as a result of your failure
to comply with the directions above.
2. Account Information
You agree: (a) when registering the TeleNav
Software, to provide TeleNav with true,
accurate, current, and complete information
about yourself, and (b) to inform TeleNav
promptly of any changes to such information,
and to keep it true, accurate, current and
complete.
3. Software License
• Subject to your compliance with the
terms of this Agreement, TeleNav hereby
grants to you a personal, non-exclusive,
non-transferable license (except as
expressly permitted below in connection
with your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software license), without the
right to sublicense, to use the TeleNav
Software (in object code form only) in
order to access and use the TeleNav
Software. This license shall terminate
upon any termination or expiration of this
Agreement. You agree that you will use
the TeleNav Software only for your
personal business or leisure purposes,
and not to provide commercial navigation
services to other parties.
3.1 License Limitations
• (a) reverse engineer, decompile,
disassemble, translate, modify, alter or
otherwise change the TeleNav Software
or any part thereof; (b) attempt to derive
the source code, audio library or
structure of the TeleNav Software without
the prior express written consent of
TeleNav; (c) remove from the TeleNav
Software, or alter, any of TeleNav's or its
suppliers' trademarks, trade names,
logos, patent or copyright notices, or
other notices or markings; (d) distribute,
sublicense or otherwise transfer the
TeleNav Software to others, except as
part of your permanent transfer of the
TeleNav Software; or (e) use the TeleNav
Software in any manner that
I. infringes the intellectual property or
proprietary rights, rights of publicity or
privacy or other rights of any party,
ii. violates any law, statute, ordinance or
regulation, including but not limited to laws
and regulations related to spamming, privacy,
consumer and child protection, obscenity or
defamation, or
552
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
iii. is harmful, threatening, abusive, harassing,
tortuous, defamatory, vulgar, obscene,
libelous, or otherwise objectionable; and (f)
lease, rent out, or otherwise permit
unauthorized access by third parties to the
TeleNav Software without advanced written
permission of TeleNav.
4. Disclaimers
• To the fullest extent permissible pursuant
to applicable law, in no event will
TeleNav, its licensors and suppliers, or
agents or employees of any of the
foregoing, be liable for any decision
made or action taken by you or anyone
else in reliance on the information
provided by the TeleNav Software.
TeleNav also does not warrant the
accuracy of the map or other data used
for the TeleNav Software. Such data may
not always reflect reality due to, among
other things, road closures, construction,
weather, new roads and other changing
conditions. You are responsible for the
entire risk arising out of your use of the
TeleNav Software. For example but
without limitation, you agree not to rely
on the TeleNav Software for critical
navigation in areas where the well-being
or survival of you or others is dependent
on the accuracy of navigation, as the
maps or functionality of the TeleNav
Software are not intended to support
such high risk applications, especially in
more remote geographical areas.
• TELENAV EXPRESSLY DISCLAIMS AND
EXCLUDES ALL WARRANTIES IN
CONNECTION WITH THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, WHETHER STATUTORY,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING ALL
WARRANTIES WHICH MAY ARISE FROM
COURSE OF DEALING, CUSTOM OR
TRADE AND INCLUDING, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES
OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR
A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND
NON-INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY
RIGHTS WITH RESPECT TO THE
TELENAV SOFTWARE.
• Certain jurisdictions do not permit the
disclaimer of certain warranties, so this
limitation may not apply to you.
5. Limitation of Liability
• TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED UNDER
APPLICABLE LAW, UNDER NO
CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS BE
LIABLE TO YOU OR TO ANY THIRD
PARTY FOR ANY INDIRECT,
INCIDENTAL, CONSEQUENTIAL,
SPECIAL OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES
(INCLUDING IN EACH CASE, BUT NOT
LIMITED TO, DAMAGES FOR THE
INABILITY TO USE THE EQUIPMENT OR
ACCESS DATA, LOSS OF DATA, LOSS
OF BUSINESS, LOSS OF PROFITS,
BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE)
ARISING OUT OF THE USE OF OR
INABILITY TO USE THE TELENAV
SOFTWARE, EVEN IF TELENAV HAS
BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF
SUCH DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING
ANY DAMAGES THAT YOU MIGHT
INCUR FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, ALL DAMAGES
REFERENCED HEREIN AND ALL DIRECT
OR GENERAL DAMAGES IN CONTRACT,
TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE) OR
553
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
OTHERWISE), THE ENTIRE LIABILITY OF
TELENAV AND OF ALL OF TELENAV'S
SUPPLIERS SHALL BE LIMITED TO THE
AMOUNT ACTUALLY PAID BY YOU FOR
THE TELENAV SOFTWARE. SOME
STATES AND/OR JURISDICTIONS DO
NOT ALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR
LIMITATION OF INCIDENTAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, SO THE
ABOVE LIMITATIONS OR EXCLUSIONS
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU.
6. Arbitration and Governing Law
• You agree that any dispute, claim or
controversy arising out of or relating to
this Agreement or the TeleNav Software
shall be settled by independent
arbitration involving a neutral arbitrator
and administered by the American
Arbitration Association in the County of
Santa Clara, California. The arbitrator
shall apply the Commercial Arbitration
Rules of the American Arbitration
Association, and the judgment upon the
award rendered by the arbitrator may be
entered by any court having jurisdiction.
Note that there is no judge or jury in an
arbitration proceeding and the decision
of the arbitrator shall be binding upon
both parties. You expressly agree to
waive your right to a jury trial. This
Agreement and performance hereunder
will be governed by and construed in
accordance with the laws of the State of
California, without giving effect to its
conflict of law provisions. To the extent
judicial action is necessary in connection
with the binding arbitration, both TeleNav
and you agree to submit to the exclusive
jurisdiction of the courts of the County of
Santa Clara, California. The United
Nations Convention on Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods shall not
apply.
7. Assignment
• You may not resell, assign, or transfer
this Agreement or any of your rights or
obligations, except in totality, in
connection with your permanent transfer
of the TeleNav Software, and expressly
conditioned upon the new user of the
TeleNav Software agreeing to be bound
by the terms and conditions of this
Agreement. Any such sale, assignment
or transfer that is not expressly permitted
under this paragraph will result in
immediate termination of this Agreement,
without liability to TeleNav, in which case
you and all other parties shall
immediately cease all use of the TeleNav
Software. Notwithstanding the foregoing,
TeleNav may assign this Agreement to
any other party at any time without
notice, provided the assignee remains
bound by this Agreement.
8. Miscellaneous
8.1
This Agreement constitutes the entire
agreement between TeleNav and you with
respect to the subject matter hereof.
8.2
Except for the limited licenses expressly
granted in this Agreement, TeleNav retains
all right, title and interest in and to the
TeleNav Software, including without
limitation all related intellectual property
rights. No licenses or other rights which are
554
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
not expressly granted in this Agreement are
intended to, or shall be, granted or conferred
by implication, statute, inducement, estoppel
or otherwise, and TeleNav and its suppliers
and licensors hereby reserve all of their
respective rights other than the licenses
explicitly granted in this Agreement.
8.3
By using the TeleNav Software, you consent
to receive from TeleNav all communications,
including notices, agreements, legally
required disclosures or other information in
connection with the TeleNav Software
(collectively, "Notices") electronically.
TeleNav may provide such Notices by
posting them on TeleNav's Website or by
downloading such Notices to your wireless
device. If you desire to withdraw your
consent to receive Notices electronically,
you must discontinue your use of the
TeleNav Software.
8.4
TeleNav's or your failure to require
performance of any provision shall not affect
that party's right to require performance at
any time thereafter, nor shall a waiver of any
breach or default of this Agreement
constitute a waiver of any subsequent breach
or default or a waiver of the provision itself.
8.5
If any provision herein is held unenforceable,
then such provision will be modified to reflect
the intention of the parties, and the
remaining provisions of this Agreement will
remain in full force and effect.
8.6
The headings in this Agreement are for
convenience of reference only, will not be
deemed to be a part of this Agreement, and
will not be referred to in connection with the
construction or interpretation of this
Agreement. As used in this Agreement, the
words "include" and "including" and
variations thereof, will not be deemed to be
terms of limitation, but rather will be deemed
to be followed by the words "without
limitation".
9. Other Vendors Terms and Conditions
• The Telenav Software utilizes map and
other data licensed to Telenav by third
party vendors for the benefit of you and
other end users. This Agreement includes
end-user terms applicable to these
companies (included at the end of this
Agreement), and thus your use of the
Telenav Software is also subject to such
terms. You agree to comply with the
following additional terms and conditions,
which are applicable to Telenav’s third
party vendor licensors::
555
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
9.1 End User Terms Required by HERE
North America, LLC
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
Telenav (“Telenav”) and its licensors
(including their licensors and suppliers) on
the other hand.
© 2013 HERE. All rights reserved.
The Data for areas of Canada includes
information taken with permission from
Canadian authorities, including: © Her
Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada, ©
Queen's Printer for Ontario, © Canada Post
Corporation, GeoBase®, © Department of
Natural Resources Canada.
HERE holds a non-exclusive license from the
United States Postal Service® to publish and
sell ZIP+4® information.
©United States Postal Service® 2014. Prices
are not established, controlled or approved
by the United States Postal Service®. The
following trademarks and registrations are
owned by the USPS: United States Postal
Service, USPS, and ZIP+4
The Data for Mexico includes certain data
from Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía.
9.2 End User Terms Required by NAV2
(Shanghai) Co., Ltd
The data (“Data”) is provided for your
personal, internal use only and not for resale.
It is protected by copyright, and is subject to
the following terms and conditions which are
agreed to by you, on the one hand, and
NAV2 (Shanghai) Co., Ltd (“NAV2”) and its
licensors (including their licensors and
suppliers) on the other hand. 20xx. All rights
reserved
Terms and Conditions
Permitted Use. You agree to use this Data
together with the Telenav Software solely
for the internal business and personal
purposes for which you were licensed, and
not for service bureau, time-sharing or other
similar purposes. Accordingly, but subject to
the restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you agree not to otherwise
reproduce, copy, modify, decompile,
disassemble, create any derivative works of,
or reverse engineer any portion of this Data,
and may not transfer or distribute it in any
form, for any purpose, except to the extent
permitted by mandatory laws.
Restrictions. Except where you have been
specifically licensed to do so by Telenav, and
without limiting the preceding paragraph,
you may not use this Data (a) with any
products, systems, or applications installed
or otherwise connected to or in
communication with vehicles, capable of
vehicle navigation, positioning, dispatch, real
time route guidance, fleet management or
similar applications; or (b) with or in
556
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
communication with any positioning devices
or any mobile or wireless-connected
electronic or computer devices, including
without limitation cellular phones, palmtop
and handheld computers, pagers, and
personal digital assistants or PDAs.
Warning. The Data may contain inaccurate
or incomplete information due to the
passage of time, changing circumstances,
sources used and the nature of collecting
comprehensive geographic data, any of
which may lead to incorrect results.
No Warranty. This Data is provided to you
“as is,” and you agree to use it at your own
risk. Telenav and its licensors (and their
licensors and suppliers) make no guarantees,
representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, arising by law or
otherwise, including but not limited to,
content, quality, accuracy, completeness,
effectiveness, reliability, fitness for a
particular purpose, usefulness, use or results
to be obtained from this Data, or that the
Data or server will be uninterrupted or
error-free.
Disclaimer of Warranty: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM ANY
WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Some States,
Territories and Countries do not allow certain
warranty exclusions, so to that extent the
above exclusion may not apply to you.
Disclaimer of Liability: TELENAV AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFORMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF TELENAV OR
ITS LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF
THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
Some States, Territories and Countries do
not allow certain liability exclusions or
damages limitations, so to that extent the
above may not apply to you.
Export Control. You shall not export from
anywhere any part of the Data or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations, including but not limited to the
laws, rules and regulations administered by
the Office of Foreign Assets Control of the
U.S. Department of Commerce and the
Bureau of Industry and Security of the U.S.
Department of Commerce. To the extent that
any such export laws, rules or regulations
prohibit HERE from complying with any of its
obligations hereunder to deliver or distribute
Data, such failure shall be excused and shall
not constitute a breach of this Agreement.
557
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
Entire Agreement. These terms and
conditions constitute the entire agreement
between Telenav (and its licensors, including
their licensors and suppliers) and you
pertaining to the subject matter hereof, and
supersedes in their entirety any and all
written or oral agreements previously
existing between us with respect to such
subject matter.
Governing Law. The above terms and
conditions shall be governed by the laws of
the State of Illinois [insert “Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used], without
giving effect to (i) its conflict of laws
provisions, or (ii) the United Nations
Convention for Contracts for the International
Sale of Goods, which is explicitly excluded.
You agree to submit to the jurisdiction of the
State of Illinois [insert “The Netherlands”
where European HERE Data is used] for any
and all disputes, claims and actions arising
from or in connection with the Data provided
to you hereunder.
Government End Users. If the Data is being
acquired by or on behalf of the United States
government or any other entity seeking or
applying rights similar to those customarily
claimed by the United States government,
this Data is a “commercial item” as that term
is defined at 48 C.F.R. (“FAR”) 2.101, is
licensed in accordance with these End-User
Terms, and each copy of Data delivered or
otherwise furnished shall be marked and
embedded as appropriate with the following
“Notice of Use,” and shall be treated in
accordance with such Notice:
NOTICE OF USE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) NAME: HERE
CONTRACTOR (MANUFACTURER/
SUPPLIER) ADDRESS: c/o Nokia, 425 West
Randolph Street, Chicago, Illinois 60606
This Data is a commercial item as defined
in FAR 2.101 and is subject to these End-
User Terms under which this Data was
provided.
© 1987 – 2014 HERE – All rights reserved.
If the Contracting Officer, federal government
agency, or any federal official refuses to use
the legend provided herein, the Contracting
Officer, federal government agency, or any
federal official must notify HERE prior to
seeking additional or alternative rights in the
Data.
I. US/Canada Territory
A. United States Data. The End-User
Terms for any Application containing Data
for the United States shall contain the
following notices:
“HERE holds a non-exclusive license
from the United States Postal Service®
to publish and sell ZIP+4® information.”
“©United States Postal Service® 20XX.
Prices are not established, controlled or
approved by the United States Postal
Service®. The following trademarks and
registrations are owned by the USPS:
United States Postal Service, USPS, and
ZIP+4.”
558
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
B. Canada Data. The following provisions
apply to the Data for Canada, which may
include or reflect data from third party
licensors (“Third Party Data”), including
Her Majesty the Queen in Right of Canada
(“Her Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department of
Natural Resources of Canada (“NRCan”):
1. Disclaimer and Limitation: Client
agrees that its use of the Third Party
Data is subject to the following provi-
sions:
a. Disclaimer: The Third Party Data is
licensed on an “as is” basis. The
licensors of such data, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
make no guarantees, representations
or warranties respecting such data,
either express or implied, arising by
law or otherwise, including but not
limited to, effectiveness, complete-
ness, accuracy or fitness for a partic-
ular purpose.
b. Limitation on Liability: The Third
Party Data licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan,
shall not be liable: (i) in respect of any
claim, demand or action, irrespective
of the nature of the cause of the claim,
demand or action alleging any loss,
injury or damages, direct or indirect,
which may result from the use or
possession of such Data; or (ii) in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
Data.
2. Copyright Notice: In connection with
each copy of all or any portion of the
Data for the Territory of Canada, Client
shall affix in a conspicuous manner the
following copyright notice on at least
one of: (i) the label for the storage media
of the copy; (ii) the packaging for the
copy; or (iii) other materials packaged
with the copy, such as user manuals or
end user license agreements: “This data
includes information taken with permis-
sion from Canadian authorities, including
© Her Majesty the Queen in Right of
Canada, © Queen's Printer for Ontario,
© Canada Post Corporation, GeoBase®,
© The Department of Natural Resources
Canada. All rights reserved.”
3. End-User Terms: Except as otherwise
agreed by the parties, in connection with
the provision of any portion of the Data
for the Territory of Canada to End-Users
as may be authorized under the Agree-
ment, Client shall provide such End-
Users, in a reasonably conspicuous
manner, with terms (set forth with other
end user terms required to be provided
559
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
under the Agreement, or as otherwise
may be provided, by Client) which shall
include the following provisions on
behalf of the Third Party Data licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post and
NRCan:
The Data may include or reflect data
of licensors, including Her Majesty the
Queen in the Right of Canada (“Her
Majesty”), Canada Post Corporation
(“Canada Post”) and the Department
of Natural Resources Canada
(“NRCan”). Such data is licensed on
an “as is” basis. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, make no guarantees,
representations or warranties
respecting such data, either express
or implied, arising by law or otherwise,
including but not limited to, effective-
ness, completeness, accuracy or
fitness for a particular purpose. The
licensors, including Her Majesty,
Canada Post and NRCan, shall not be
liable in respect of any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action alleging any loss, injury or
damages, direct or indirect, which may
result from the use or possession of
the data or the Data. The licensors,
including Her Majesty, Canada Post
and NRCan, shall not be liable in any
way for loss of revenues or contracts,
or any other consequential loss of any
kind resulting from any defect in the
data or the Data.
End User shall indemnify and save
harmless the licensors, including Her
Majesty, Canada Post and NRCan, and
their officers, employees and agents
from and against any claim, demand
or action, irrespective of the nature of
the cause of the claim, demand or
action, alleging loss, costs, expenses,
damages or injuries (including injuries
resulting in death) arising out of the
use or possession of the data or the
Data.
4. Additional Provisions: The terms
contained in this Section are in addition
to all of the rights and obligations of the
parties under the Agreement. To the
extent that any of the provisions of this
Section are inconsistent with, or conflict
with, any other provisions of the Agree-
ment, the provisions of this Section shall
prevail.
560
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
II. Mexico. The following provision applies
to the Data for Mexico, which includes
certain data from the Instituto Nacional de
Estadística y Geografía (“INEGI”):
A. Any and all copies of the Data and/or
packaging containing Data for Mexico
shall contain the following notice: “Fuente:
INEGI (Instituto Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
III. Latin America Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeTerritory
IGN “INSTITUTO
GEOGRAFICO NACIONAL
ARGENTINO”
Argentina
“INSTITUTO GEOGRAFICO
MILITAR DEL ECUADOR
AUTORIZACION N° IGM-2011-
01- PCO-01 DEL 25 DE ENERO
DE 2011”
Ecuador
“source: © IGN 2009 - BD
TOPO ®”
“Fuente: INEGI (Instituto
Nacional de Estadística y
Geografía)”
Guade-
loupe,
French
Guiana
and
Marti-
nique
Mexico
IV. Middle East Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeCountry
“© Royal Jordanian
Geographic Centre” . The fore-
going notice requirement for
Jordan Data is a material term
of the Agreement. If Client or
any of its permitted subli-
censees (if any) fail to meet
such requirement, HERE shall
have the right to terminate
Client’ s license with respect to
the Jordan Data.
Jordan
B. Jordan Data. Client and its permitted
sublicensees (if any) are restricted from
licensing and/or otherwise distributing
HERE’s database for the country of Jordan
(“Jordan Data”) for use in Enterprise
Applications to (i) non-Jordanian entities
for use of the Jordan Data solely in Jordan
or (ii) Jordan-based customers. In addition,
Client, its permitted sublicensees (if any)
and End-Users are restricted from using
the Jordan Data in Enterprise Applications
if such party is (i) a non-Jordanian entity
using the Jordan Data solely in Jordan or
(ii) a Jordan-based customer. For purposes
561
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
of the foregoing, “Enterprise Applications”
shall mean Geomarketing applications,
GIS applications, mobile business asset
management applications, call center
applications, telematics applications,
public organization Internet applications
or for providing geocoding services.
V. Europe Territory
A. Use of Certain Traffic Codes in Europe
1. General Restrictions Applicable to
Traffic Codes. Client acknowledges and
agrees that in certain countries of the
Europe Territory, Client will need to
obtain rights directly from third party
RDS-TMC code providers to receive and
use the Traffic Codes in the Data and to
deliver to End-Users Transactions in any
way derived from or based on such
Traffic Codes. For such countries, HERE
shall deliver the Data incorporating
Traffic Codes to Client only after
receiving certification from Client of its
having obtained such rights.
2. Display of Third Party Rights Legends
for Belgium. Client shall, for each Trans-
action that uses Traffic Codes for
Belgium, provide the following notice to
the End-User: “Traffic Codes for Belgium
are provided by the Ministerie van de
Vlaamse Gemeenschap and the
Ministèrie de l’Equipement et des
Transports.”
B. Paper Maps. With respect to any license
granted to Client relating to making,
selling or distributing paper maps (i.e., a
map fixed on a paper or paper-like
medium): (a) such license with respect to
Data for the Territory of Great Britain is
conditioned on Client’s entering into and
complying with a separate written agree-
ment with the Ordnance Survey (“OS”) to
create and sell paper maps, Client’s
paying to the OS any and all applicable
paper map royalties, and Client’s
complying with the OS copyright notice
requirements; (b) such license for selling
or otherwise distributing for charge with
respect to Data for the Territory of Czech
Republic is conditioned on Client’s
obtaining prior written consent from
Kartografie a.s.; (c) such license for selling
or distributing with respect to Data for the
Territory of Switzerland is conditioned on
Client’s obtaining a permit from
Bundesamt für Landestopografie of
Switzerland; (d) Client is restricted from
using Data for the Territory of France to
create paper maps with a scale between
1:5,000 and 1:250,000; and (e) Client is
restricted from using any Data to create,
sell or distribute paper maps that are the
same or substantially similar, in terms of
data content and specific use of color,
symbols and scale, to paper maps
published by the European national
mapping agencies, including without
limitation, Landervermessungämter of
Germany, Topografische Dienst of the
Netherlands, Nationaal Geografisch
Instituut of Belgium, Bundesamt für
Landestopografie of Switzerland,
Bundesamt für Eich-und Vermessung-
swesen of Austria, and the National Land
Survey of Sweden.
562
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
C. OS Enforcement. Without limiting
Section IV(B) above, with respect to Data
for the Territory of Great Britain, Client
acknowledges and agrees that the
Ordnance Survey (“OS”) may bring a direct
action against Client to enforce compli-
ance with the OS copyright notice (see
Section IV(D) below) and paper map
requirements (see Section IV(B) above)
contained in this Agreement.
D. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
NoticeCountry(ies)
“© Bundesamt für Eich- und
Vermessungswesen”
Austria
“© EuroGeographics”
Croatia
Cyprus,
Estonia,
Latvia,
Lithuania,
Moldova,
Poland,
Slovenia
and/or
Ukraine
“source: © IGN 2009 – BD
TOPO ®”
France
“Die Grundlagendaten
wurden mit Genehmigung
der zuständigen Behörden
entnommen”
Germany
“Contains Ordnance Survey
data © Crown copyright
and database right 2010
Contains Royal Mail data ©
Royal Mail copyright and
database right 2010”
Great Britain
“Copyright Geomatics Ltd.”Greece
“Copyright © 2003; Top-
Map Ltd.”
Hungary
“La Banca Dati Italiana è
stata prodotta usando
quale riferimento anche
cartografia numerica ed al
tratto prodotta e fornita
dalla Regione Toscana.”
Italy
“Copyright © 2000;
Norwegian Mapping
Authority”
Norway
“Source: IgeoE – Portugal”Portugal
“Información geográfica
propiedad del CNIG”
Spain
“Based upon electronic
data © National Land
Survey Sweden.”
Sweden
“Topografische Grundlage:
© Bundesamt für
Landestopographie.
Switzerland
E. Respective Country Distribution. Client
acknowledges that HERE has not received
approvals to distribute map data for the
following countries in such respective
countries: Albania, Belarus, Kyrgyzstan,
Moldova and Uzbekistan. HERE may
563
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
update such list from time to time. The
license rights granted to Client under this
TL with respect to the Data for such
countries are contingent upon Client’s
compliance with all applicable laws and
regulations, including, without limitation,
any required licenses or approvals to
distribute the Application incorporating
such Data in such respective countries.
VI. Australia Territory
A. Third Party Notices. Any and all copies
of the Data and/or packaging relating
thereto shall include the respective Third
Party Notices set forth below and used as
described below corresponding to the
Territory (or portion thereof) included in
such copy:
Copyright. Based on data provided
under license from PSMA Australia
Limited (www.psma.com.au).
Product incorporates data which is ©
20XX Telstra Corporation Limited, GM
Holden Limited, Intelematics Australia
Pty Ltd and Continental Pty Ltd.
B. Third Party Notices for Australia. In
addition to the foregoing, the End-User
Terms for any Application containing RDS-
TMC Traffic Codes for Australia shall
contain the following notice: “Product
incorporates traffic location codes which
is © 20XX Telstra Corporation Limited and
its licensors.”
AT&T Vehicle Network Carrier Telematics
Disclosure
END USER FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION MEANS YOU AND YOUR HEIRS,
EXECUTORS, LEGAL PERSONAL
REPRESENTATITVES AND PERMITED
ASSIGNS. FOR PURPOSES OF THIS
SECTION “UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER” INCLUDES ITS AFFILIATES AND
CONTRACTORS AND THEIR RESPECTIVE
OFFICERS, DIRECTORS, EMPLOYEES,
SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS. END USER
HAS NO CONTRACTUAL RELATIONSHIP
WITH THE UNDERLYING WIRELESS SERVICE
CARRIER AND END USER IS NOT A THIRD
PARTY BENEFICIARY OF ANY AGREEMENT
BETWEEN FORD AND UNDERLYING
CARRIER. END USER UNDERSTANDS AND
AGREES THAT THE UNDERLYING CARRIER
HAS NO LEGAL, EQUITABLE, OR OTHER
LIABILITY OF ANY KIND TO END USER. IN
ANY EVENT, REGARDLESS OF THE FORM
OF THE ACTION, WHETHER FOR BREACH
OF CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE,
STRICT LIABILITY IN TORT OR OTHERWISE,
END USER'S EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR
CLAIMS ARISING IN ANY WAY IN
CONNECTION WITH THIS AGREEMENT, FOR
ANY CAUSE WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY FAILURE OR
DISRUPTION OF SERVICE PROVIDED
HEREUNDER, IS LIMITED TO PAYMENT OF
DAMAGES IN AN AMOUNT NOT TO EXCEED
THE AMOUNT PAID BY END USER FOR THE
SERVICES DURING THE TWO-MONTH
PERIOD PRECEDING THE DATE THE CLAIM
AROSE.
564
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
(ii) END USER AGREES TO INDEMNIFY AND
HOLD HARMLESS THE UNDERLYING
WIRELESS SERVICE CARRIER AND ITS
OFFICERS, EMPLOYEES, AND AGENTS
AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION CLAIMS
FOR LIBEL, SLANDER, OR ANY PROPERTY
DAMAGE, PERSONAL INJURY OR DEATH,
ARISING IN ANY WAY, DIRECTLY OR
INDIRECTLY, IN CONNECTION WITH THIS
AGREEMENT OR THE USE, FAILURE TO USE,
OR INABILITY TO USE THE DEVICE EXCEPT
WHERE THE CLAIMS RESULT FROM THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER’S GROSS
NEGLIGENCE OR WILLFUL MISCONDUCT.
THIS INDEMNITY WILL SURVIVE THE
TERMINATION OF THE AGREEMENT.
(iii) END USER HAS NO PROPERTY RIGHT
IN ANY NUMBER ASSIGNED TO THE
DEVICE.
(iv) END USER UNDERSTANDS THAT FORD
AND THE UNDERLYING CARRIER CANNOT
GUARANTY THE SECURITY OF WIRELESS
TRANSMISSIONS, AND WILL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY LACK OF SECURITY RELATING
TO THE USE OF THE SERVICES
THE SERVICE IS FOR [END USER’S] USE
ONLY AND END USER MAY NOT RESELL
THE SERVICE TO ANY OTHER PARTY END
USER UNDERSTANDS THAT THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
GUARANTEE ANY END USER
UNINTERRUPTED SERVICE OR COVERAGE.
THE UNDERLYING CARRIER DOES NOT
WARRANT THAT END USERS CAN OR WILL
BE LOCATED USING THE SERVICE. THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER MAKES NO
WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, OF
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, SUITABILITY, OR
PERFORMANCE REGARDING ANY SERVICES
OR GOODS, AND IN NO EVENT SHALL
AT&T BE LIABLE, WHETHER OR NOT DUE
TO ITS OWN NEGLIGENCE, FOR ANY: (A)
ACT OR OMISSION OF A THIRD PARTY; (B)
MISTAKES, OMISSIONS, INTERRUPTIONS,
ERRORS, FAILURES TO TRANSMIT, DELAYS,
OR DEFECTS IN THE SERVICE PROVIDED
BY OR THROUGH THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER; (C) DAMAGE OR INJURY CAUSED
BY SUSPENSION OR TERMINATION BY THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER; OR (D) DAMAGE OR
INJURY CAUSED BY A FAILURE OR DELAY
IN CONNECTING A CALL TO ANY ENTITY,
INCLUDING 911 OR ANY OTHER
EMERGENCY SERVICE. TO THE FULL
EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, THE END USER
RELEASES, INDEMNIFIES AND HOLDS THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER HARMLESS FROM
AND AGAINST ANY AND ALL CLAIMS OF
ANY PERSON OR ENTITY FOR DAMAGES
OF ANY NATURE ARISING IN ANY WAY
FROM OR RELATING TO, DIRECTLY OR
INDIRECTLY, SERVICES PROVIDED BY THE
UNDERLYING CARRIER OR ANY PERSON’S
USE THEREOF, INCLUDING CLAIMS ARISING
IN WHOLE OR IN PART FROM THE ALLEGED
NEGLIGENCE OF THE UNDERLYING
CARRIER.
VII. China Territory
Personal Use Only
You agree to use this Data together with
[insert name of Client Application] for the
solely personal, non-commercial purposes
for which you were licensed, and not for
service bureau, time-sharing or other similar
purposes. Accordingly, but subject to the
restrictions set forth in the following
paragraphs, you may copy this Data only as
necessary for your personal use to (i) view
565
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
it, and (ii) save it, provided that you do not
remove any copyright notices that appear
and do not modify the Data in any way. You
agree not to otherwise reproduce, copy,
modify, decompile, disassemble or reverse
engineer any portion of this Data, and may
not transfer or distribute it in any form, for
any purpose, except to the extent permitted
by mandatory laws.
Restrictions
Except where you have been specifically
licensed to do so by NAV2 , and without
limiting the preceding paragraph, you may
not (a) use this Data with any products,
systems, or applications installed or
otherwise connected to or in communication
with vehicles, capable of vehicle navigation,
positioning, dispatch, real time route
guidance, fleet management or similar
applications; or (b) with or in communication
with any positioning devices or any mobile
or wireless-connected electronic or computer
devices, including without limitation cellular
phones, palmtop and handheld computers,
pagers, and personal digital assistants or
PDAs. You agree to cease using this Data if
you fail to comply with these terms and
conditions.
Limited Warranty
NAV2 warrants that (a) the Data will perform
substantially in accordance with the
accompanying written materials for a period
of ninety (90) days from the date of receipt,
and (b) any support services provided by
NAV2 shall be substantially as described in
applicable written materials provided to you
by NAV2, and NAV2’s support engineers will
make commercially reasonable efforts to
solve any problem issues.
rigCustomer Remedies
NAV2 and its suppliers’ entire liability and
your exclusive remedy shall be, at NAV2’s
sole discretion, either (a) return of the price
paid, if any, or (b) repair or replacement of
the Data that do not meet NAV2’s Limited
Warranty and that are returned to NAV2 with
a copy of your receipt. This Limited Warranty
is void if failure of the Data has resulted from
accident, abuse, or misapplication. Any
replacement Data will be warranted for the
remainder of the original warranty period or
thirty (30) days, whichever is longer. Neither
these remedies nor any product support
services offered by NAV2 are available
without proof of purchase from an authorized
international source.
No Other Warranty:
EXCEPT FOR THE LMITED WARRANTY SET
FORTH ABOVE AND TO THE EXTENT
PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2
AND ITS LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR
LICENSORS AND SUPPLIERS) DISCLAIM
ANY WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
OF QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, OWNERSHIP OR
NON-INFRINGEMENT. Certain warranty
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
566
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
Limited Liability:
TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW, NAV2 AND ITS
LICENSORS (INCLUDING THEIR LICENSORS
AND SUPPLIERS) SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO
YOU: IN RESPECT OF ANY CLAIM, DEMAND
OR ACTION, IRRESPECTIVE OF THE
NATURE OF THE CAUSE OF THE CLAIM,
DEMAND OR ACTION ALLEGING ANY LOSS,
INJURY OR DAMAGES, DIRECT OR
INDIRECT, WHICH MAY RESULT FROM THE
USE OR POSSESSION OF THE
INFORMATION; OR FOR ANY LOSS OF
PROFIT, REVENUE, CONTRACTS OR
SAVINGS, OR ANY OTHER DIRECT,
INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL OR
CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT
OF YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE
THIS INFORMATION, ANY DEFECT IN THE
INFROMATION, OR THE BREACH OF THESE
TERMS OR CONDITIONS, WHETHER IN AN
ACTION IN CONTRACT OR TORT OR BASED
ON A WARRANTY, EVEN IF NAV2 OR ITS
LICENSORS HAVE BEEN ADVISED OF THE
POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. UNDER
NO CIRCUMSTANCES SHALL NAV2’s OR
ITS SUPPLIERS’ LIABILITY HEREUNDER
EXCEED THE PRICE PAID. Certain liability
exclusions may not be permitted under
applicable law, so to that extent the above
exclusion may not apply to you.
Export Control
You agree not to export to anywhere any
part of the Data provided to you or any direct
product thereof except in compliance with,
and with all licenses and approvals required
under, applicable export laws, rules and
regulations.
IP Protection
The Data are owned by NAV2 or its suppliers
and are protected by applicable copyright
and other intellectual property law and
treaties. The Data are provided solely on the
basis of a license to use, not sale.
Entire Agreement
These terms and conditions constitute the
entire agreement between NAV2(and its
licensors, including their licensors and
suppliers) and you pertaining to the subject
matter hereof, and supersedes in their
entirety any and all written or oral
agreements previously existing between us
with respect to such subject matter.
Governing Law.
The above terms and conditions shall be
governed by the laws of the People’s
Republic of China, without giving effect to (i)
its conflict of laws provisions, or (ii) the United
Nations Convention for Contracts for the
International Sale of Goods, which is
explicitly excluded. Any dispute arising from
or in connection with the Data provided to
you hereunder shall be submitted to the
Shanghai International Economic and Trade
Arbitration Commission for arbitration.
Gracenote® Copyright
CD and music-related data from Gracenote,
Inc., copyright©
567
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
2000-2007 Gracenote. Gracenote Software,
copyright © 2000-2007 Gracenote. This
product and service may practice one or
more of the following U.S. Patents 5,987,525;
6,061,680; 6,154,773; 6,161,132; 6,230,192;
6,230,207; 6.240,459; 6,330,593 and other
patents issued or pending. Some services
supplied under license from Open Globe,
Inc. for U.S. Patent 6,304,523.
Gracenote and CDDB are registered
trademarks of Gracenote. The Gracenote
logo and logotype, and the "Powered by
Gracenote™" logo are trademarks of
Gracenote.
Gracenote® End User License Agreement
(EULA)
This device contains software from
Gracenote, Inc. of 2000 Powell Street
Emeryville, California 94608 ("Gracenote").
The software from Gracenote (the
"Gracenote Software") enables this device
to do disc and music file identification and
obtain music-related information, including
name, artist, track, and title information
("Gracenote Data") from online servers
("Gracenote Servers"), and to perform other
functions. You may use Gracenote Data only
by means of the intended End User functions
of this device. This device may contain
content belonging to Gracenote's providers.
If so, all of the restrictions set forth herein
with respect to Gracenote Data shall also
apply to such content and such content
providers shall be entitled to all of the
benefits and protections set forth herein that
are available to Gracenote. You agree that
you will use the content from Gracenote
("Gracenote Content") , Gracenote Data, the
Gracenote Software, and Gracenote Servers
for your own personal, non-commercial use
only. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer
or transmit the Gracenote Content,
Gracenote Software or any Gracenote Data
(except in a Tag associated with a music file)
to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE
OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE CONTENT,
GRACENOTE DATA, THE GRACENOTE
SOFTWARE, OR GRACENOTE SERVERS,
EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED
HEREIN.
You agree that your non-exclusive licenses
to use the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers will terminate if you
violate these restrictions. If your licenses
terminate, you agree to cease any and all
use of the Gracenote Content, Gracenote
Data, the Gracenote Software, and
Gracenote Servers.
Gracenote, respectively, reserve all rights in
Gracenote Data, the Gracenote Software,
and the Gracenote Servers and Gracenote
Content, including all ownership rights.
Under no circumstances will either
Gracenote become liable for any payment
to you for any information that you provide,
including any copyrighted material or music
file information. You agree that Gracenote
may enforce its respective rights, collectively
or separately, under this agreement against
you, directly in each company's own name.
568
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
Gracenote uses a unique identifier to track
queries for statistical purposes. The purpose
of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is
to allow Gracenote to count queries without
knowing anything about who you are. For
more information, see the web page at
www.gracenote.com for the Gracenote
Privacy Policy.
THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE, EACH ITEM
OF GRACENOTE DATA AND THE
GRACENOTE CONTENT ARE LICENSED TO
YOU "AS IS". NEITHER GRACENOTE MAKES
ANY REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES,
EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING THE
ACCURACY OF ANY GRACENOTE DATA
FROM THE GRACENOTE SERVERS OR
GRACENOTE CONTENT. GRACENOTE
COLLECTIVELY AND SEPARATELY RESERVE
THE RIGHT TO DELETE DATA AND/OR
CONTENT FROM THE COMPANIES'
RESPECTIVE SERVERS OR, IN THE CASE OF
GRACENOTE, CHANGE DATA CATEGORIES
FOR ANY CAUSE THAT GRACENOTE
DEEMS SUFFICIENT. NO WARRANTY IS
MADE THAT EITHER GRACENOTE
CONTENT OR THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE
OR GRACENOTE SERVERS ARE
ERROR-FREE OR THAT THE FUNCTIONING
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR
GRACENOTE SERVERS WILL BE
UNINTERRUPTED. GRACENOTE IS NOT
OBLIGATED TO PROVIDE YOU WITH ANY
ENHANCED OR ADDITIONAL DATA TYPES
THAT GRACENOTE MAY CHOOSE TO
PROVIDE IN THE FUTURE AND IS FREE TO
DISCONTINUE ITS ONLINE SERVICES AT
ANY TIME. GRACENOTE DISCLAIM ALL
WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY,
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE,
TITLE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. NEITHER
GRACENOTE WARRANTS THE RESULTS
THAT WILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USE
OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR ANY
GRACENOTE SERVER. IN NO CASE WILL
GRACENOTE BE LIABLE FOR ANY
CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL
DAMAGES OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR
LOST REVENUES FOR ANY REASON
WHATSOEVER. © Gracenote 2007.
Radio Frequency Statement
FCC ID: ACJ-SYNCG3-L
IC: 216B-SYNCG3-L
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC
Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions:
(1) This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
(2) this device must accept any interference
received, including interference that may
cause undesired operation.
WARNING: Changes or modifications
not expressively approved by the party
responsible for compliance could void the
user's authority to operate the equipment.
The term "IC:" before the radio certification
number only signifies that Industry Canada
technical specifications were met.
The antenna used for this transmitter must
not be co-located or operating in conjunction
with any other antenna or transmitter.
569
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
Taiwan Territory
Note: In accordance with the management
approach of low-power radio wave radiation
motors:
Article 12: For approved and certified
low-power radiation motor models,
companies, firms or users must not alter the
frequency, increase the power or change the
characteristics and functions of the original
design without authorization.
Article 14: The usage of low-power
radio-frequency motors must not affect
aviation safety and interfere with legal
telecommunications. Should interference be
detected, immediately stop using the device
and only resume usage after ensuring that
there is no longer any interference. For the
legal telecommunication and wireless
telecommunication of the telco, the
low-power radio frequency motor must be
able to tolerate legal limits of interference
from telecommunication, industrial, scientific
and radio wave equipment.
SUNA TRAFFIC CHANNEL – TERMS AND
CONDITIONS
By activating, using and/or accessing the
SUNA Traffic Channel, SUNA Predictive or
other content or material provided by
Intelematics (together, SUNA Products
and/or Services), you must accept certain
terms and conditions. The following is a brief
summary of the terms and conditions that
apply to you. To view the full terms and
conditions relevant to your use of the SUNA
Products and/or Services, please consult:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcondi-
tions/
1. Acceptance
By using SUNA Products and/or Services,
you will be deemed to have accepted and
agreed to be bound by the terms and
conditions fully detailed at:
Website
www.sunatraffic.com.au/termsandcondi-
tions/
2. Intellectual Property
SUNA Products and/or Services are for your
personal use. You may not record, or
retransmit the content, nor use the content
in association with any other traffic
information or route guidance service or
device not approved by Intelematics. You
obtain no right of ownership in any
Intellectual Property Rights (including
copyright) in the data that is used to provide
SUNA Products and/or Services.
3. Appropriate Use
570
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
Argentina
E197509
Brazil
E207818
European Union EU
E253824
Ghana
E253823
Jordan
E253822
Malaysia
E253812
E253813
Mexico
E197811
Moldova
E207821
Morocco
572
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
E253817
Oman
E198001
Philippines
E253816
Russia
E197844
Serbia
E253820
Singapore
E198002
South Africa
E253819
South Korea
E203679
Taiwan
E253818
Ukraine
573
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
E207817
United Arab Emirates
Radio Frequency Certification Logos
for Mid Range Radar
E269659
Argentina
E269662
Ghana
E269660
Jordan
E269661
Morocco
E269664
South Africa
574
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
E269663
United Arab Emirates
Radio Frequency Certification Logos
for Passive Anti-Theft System
E274065
Argentina
E269675
Brazil
E274068
Djibouti
E269674
Ghana
E274067
Jamaica
575
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
E269666
Jordan
E269673
Malaysia
E269670
Morocco
E274066
Paraguay
E275754
Pakistan
E269672
Serbia
576
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
E269676
Singapore
E269667
South Africa
E269671
Ukraine
E269668
United Arab Emirates
E269677
Vietnam
Radio Frequency Certification Logos
for Radio Transceiver Module
E272192
577
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
Djibouti
E272193
Jamaica
E272194
Jordan
E269683
Morocco
E269684
Pakistan
E272195
Paraguay
E269681
Serbia
578
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
E269685
South Africa
E269682
Ukraine
E272196
United Arab Emirates
Radio Frequency Certification Logos
for Blind Spot Information System
E269695
Ghana
E269697
Malaysia
E269696
South Africa
579
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
E269694
United Arab Emirates
E269693
Vietnam
Radio Frequency Certification Logos
for Wireless Charging
E272903
United Arab Emirates
E273475
South Korea
Radio Frequency Certification Logos
for SYNC 3
E252722
Brazil
580
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Appendices
A
A/C
See: Climate Control..........................................136
About This Manual............................................7
ABS
See: Brakes...........................................................192
ABS driving hints
See: Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes................................................................193
Accessories...................................................499
Exterior Style.......................................................499
Interior Style.........................................................499
Lifestyle.................................................................499
Peace of Mind.....................................................499
Accessories
See: Replacement Parts Recommendation.....13
ACC
See: Using Adaptive Cruise Control..............218
Active Park Assist........................................205
Using Active Park Assist..................................206
Adaptive Headlamps......................................91
System Check........................................................92
Adjusting the Headlamps............................316
Horizontal Aim Adjustment...............................317
Vertical Aim Adjustment....................................316
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Manual Adjustable Steering
Column...........................................................80
Adjusting the Steering Wheel - Vehicles
With: Power Adjustable Steering
Column...........................................................80
End of Travel Position...........................................81
Memory Feature.....................................................81
AFS
See: Adaptive Headlamps...................................91
Airbag Disposal...............................................56
Air Conditioning
See: Climate Control..........................................136
Air Filter
See: Changing the Engine Air Filter...............317
Alarm
See: Anti-Theft Alarm...........................................78
All-Wheel Drive..............................................183
Ambient Lighting.............................................94
Adjusting the Brightness.....................................94
Changing the Color..............................................94
Switching Ambient Lighting Off........................94
Switching Ambient Lighting On........................94
Anti-Theft Alarm..............................................78
Arming the Alarm..................................................79
Disarming the Alarm.............................................79
Appendices....................................................536
Apps.................................................................458
.................................................................................458
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link.....................459
At a Glance........................................................17
Audible Warnings and Indicators..............108
Headlamps On Warning Chime.......................108
Keyless Warning Alert........................................108
Parking Brake On Warning Chime..................109
Audio Control..................................................82
Seek, Next or Previous........................................82
Audio System................................................389
General Information...........................................389
Audio Unit.......................................................391
Adjusting the Volume.........................................391
Changing Radio Stations...................................391
Ejecting the CD....................................................391
Inserting a CD.....................................................392
Selecting the Audio Modes.............................392
Switching the Audio Unit On and Off............392
Using Seek, Fast Forward and Reverse.......392
Auto Hold........................................................194
Using Auto Hold..................................................196
Autolamps.........................................................88
Windshield Wiper Activated Headlamps........89
Automatic Climate Control..........................136
Directing Air to the Footwell Air Vents..........136
Directing Air to the Instrument Panel Air
Vents..................................................................136
581
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Index
Setting the Blower Motor Speed.....................136
Setting the Temperature....................................136
Switching Auto Mode On and Off...................136
Switching Defrost On and Off..........................136
Switching Dual Zone Mode On and Off.........137
Switching Maximum Air Conditioning On and
Off........................................................................137
Switching Maximum Defrost On and Off.......137
Switching Recirculated Air On and Off..........137
Switching the Air Conditioning On and
Off.......................................................................136
Switching the Climate Controlled Seats On
and Off...............................................................137
Switching the Climate Control On and
Off........................................................................137
Switching the Heated Seats On and Off.......137
Switching the Heated Steering Wheel On and
Off........................................................................137
Automatic High Beam Control....................90
Automatic High Beam Indicator.........................91
Switching the System On and Off.....................91
Automatic Transmission...............................177
Automatic Transmission Adaptive
Learning............................................................182
Brake-Shift Interlock Override.........................180
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck In Mud or
Snow..................................................................182
Push Button Shift Transmission........................177
SelectShift Automatic™ Transmission.............179
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Check...........................................................308
6F35 Transmission.............................................308
6F55 Transmission.............................................309
Autowipers.......................................................85
Autowipers Settings.............................................85
Low Temperature Wipe Inhibit..........................85
Auxiliary Power Points.................................158
110 Volt AC Power Point.....................................158
12 Volt DC Power Point......................................158
Locations...............................................................158
AWD
See: All-Wheel Drive...........................................183
B
Battery
See: Changing the 12V Battery........................314
Blind Spot Information System.................234
Switching the System Off and On..................236
System Errors......................................................236
Using the Blind Spot Information
System..............................................................235
BLIS
See: Blind Spot Information System..............234
Body Styling Kits...........................................328
Bonnet Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............297
Booster Seats..................................................30
Types of Booster Seats........................................31
Brake Fluid Check.........................................313
Brakes..............................................................192
General Information............................................192
Breaking-In....................................................259
Bulb Specification Chart.............................386
C
Cabin Air Filter...............................................139
Capacities and Specifications - 2.0L.......373
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates............................................................378
Specifications.......................................................374
Capacities and Specifications - 3.0L.......379
Alternative Engine Oil for Extremely Cold
Climates............................................................385
Specifications.......................................................381
Capacities and Specifications...................366
Car Wash
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................320
Catalytic Converter.......................................174
On-Board Diagnostics (OBD-II)........................175
Readiness for Inspection and Maintenance
(I/M) Testing......................................................176
582
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Index
Center Console.............................................160
Rear Seat Armrest...............................................160
Changing a Bulb............................................317
Replacing Bulbs...................................................317
Changing a Fuse..........................................294
Fuses.....................................................................294
Changing a Road Wheel............................356
Changing a Road Wheel Procedure..............358
Dissimilar Spare Wheel and Tire Assembly
Information.......................................................357
Stowing the Flat Tire Using the Retainer
Strap..................................................................363
Stowing the Flat Tire Without the Retainer
Strap..................................................................363
Changing the 12V Battery...........................314
Changing the Engine Air Filter...................317
Changing the Wiper Blades.......................316
Checking MyKey System Status.................64
MyKey Distance.....................................................64
Number of Admin Keys.......................................65
Number of MyKeys...............................................64
Checking the Wiper Blades........................315
Child Restraint and Seatbelt
Maintenance..................................................44
Child Restraint Positioning...........................33
Child Safety.......................................................19
General Information..............................................19
Child Safety Locks..........................................35
Left-Hand Side.......................................................36
Right-Hand Side....................................................36
Cleaning Leather Seats..............................325
Cleaning Products.........................................319
Materials................................................................319
Cleaning the Engine....................................322
Cleaning the Exterior..................................320
Cleaning the Headlamps.................................320
Exterior Chrome Parts........................................321
Exterior Plastic Parts...........................................321
Stripes or Graphics.............................................321
Underbody............................................................321
Under Hood..........................................................321
Cleaning the Instrument Panel and
Instrument Cluster Lens...........................325
Cleaning the Interior....................................323
Cleaning Alcantara Microfiber Cloth
Fabric................................................................323
Cleaning the Wheels...................................326
Cleaning the Windows and Wiper
Blades...........................................................322
Clearing All MyKeys.......................................64
Climate............................................................435
Climate Control..............................................136
Climate Controlled Seats............................150
Cooled Seats.........................................................151
Coolant Check
See: Engine Coolant Check............................304
Crash Sensors and Airbag Indicator..........55
Creating a MyKey...........................................63
Programming and Changing Configurable
Settings...............................................................64
Cross Traffic Alert.........................................236
Blocked Sensors................................................239
Switching the System Off and On..................239
System Errors......................................................239
System Lights, Messages and Audible
Alerts.................................................................239
System Limitations.............................................239
Using the Cross Traffic Alert System.............236
Cruise Control..................................................83
Principle of Operation........................................217
Type One................................................................83
Type Two.................................................................83
Cruise control
See: Using Cruise Control.................................217
Customer Assistance..................................269
D
Data Recording................................................10
Event Data Recording...........................................10
Service Data Recording.......................................10
583
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Index
Daytime Running Lamps...............................89
Type One - Conventional
(Non-Configurable)..........................................90
Type Two - Configurable....................................90
Direction Indicators........................................92
Indicating a Lane Change..................................92
Doors and Locks.............................................67
Drive Control.................................................246
Lincoln Drive Control.........................................246
Driver Alert.....................................................227
PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION............................227
USING DRIVER ALERT......................................228
Driver and Passenger Airbags....................48
Children and Airbags...........................................49
Proper Driver and Front Passenger Seating
Adjustment.........................................................49
Driver and Passenger Knee Airbags.........53
Driving Aids....................................................227
Driving Hints..................................................259
Driving Through Water...............................259
DRL
See: Daytime Running Lamps...........................89
E
Economical Driving......................................259
Electric Parking Brake..................................193
Applying the Electric Parking Brake...............193
Automatically Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake..................................................................194
Manually Releasing the Electric Parking
Brake..................................................................194
Releasing the Electric Parking Brake if the
Vehicle Battery is Running Out of
Charge...............................................................194
Electromagnetic Compatibility..................536
Emission Law..................................................173
Noise Emissions Warranty, Prohibited
Tampering Acts and Maintenance..............174
Tampering With a Noise Control System......173
End User License Agreement....................541
VEHICLE SOFTWARE END USER LICENSE
AGREEMENT (EULA) .....................................541
Engine Block Heater....................................164
Using the Engine Block Heater.......................165
Engine Coolant Check................................304
Adding Coolant...................................................305
Engine Coolant Temperature
Management...................................................308
Fail-Safe Cooling................................................306
Recycled Coolant...............................................306
Severe Climates.................................................306
Engine Emission Control.............................173
Engine Immobilizer
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.........................77
Engine Oil Check.........................................302
Adding Engine Oil..............................................303
Engine Oil Dipstick - 2.0L...........................302
Engine Oil Dipstick - 3.0L...........................302
Engine Specifications - 2.0L......................366
Drivebelt Routing................................................367
Engine Specifications - 3.0L......................367
Drivebelt Routing................................................368
Entertainment.................................................421
AM/FM Radio.......................................................424
Apps.......................................................................435
Bluetooth Stereo or USB..................................433
CD (If equipped)..................................................432
HD Radio™ Information (If Available)..............428
SiriusXM® Satellite Radio (If Activated).........424
Sources.................................................................423
Supported Media Players, Formats and
Metadata Information....................................435
USB Ports.............................................................435
Environment......................................................16
EPB
See: Electric Parking Brake..............................193
Essential Towing Checks...........................255
Before Towing a Trailer.....................................256
Hitches..................................................................255
Launching or Retrieving a Boat or Personal
Watercraft (PWC)............................................256
Safety Chains......................................................255
584
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Index
Trailer Brakes......................................................255
Trailer Lamps.......................................................255
When Towing a Trailer......................................256
Event Data Recording
See: Data Recording.............................................10
Export Unique Options...................................14
Exterior Mirrors................................................96
Auto-Dimming Feature........................................98
Auto-Folding Mirrors............................................97
Blind Spot Monitor................................................99
Fold-Away Exterior Mirrors.................................97
Heated Exterior Mirrors.......................................98
Integrated Blind Spot Mirrors............................98
Lincoln Welcome Mat..........................................98
Memory Mirrors.....................................................98
Power Exterior Mirrors.........................................96
Signal Indicator Mirrors.......................................98
F
Fastening the Seatbelts................................38
Rear Inflatable Seatbelt.......................................40
Seatbelt Locking Modes.....................................39
Using Seatbelts During Pregnancy..................38
Flat Tire
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................356
Flat Tire Inflation
See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................329
Floor Mats......................................................260
Front Parking Aid.........................................202
Obstacle Distance Indicator............................203
Front Passenger Sensing System..............50
Fuel and Refueling........................................166
Fuel Consumption.........................................172
Advertised Capacity...........................................172
Fuel Economy.......................................................172
Fuel Filler Funnel Location..........................167
Fuel Filter.........................................................313
2.0L Engines and 3.0L Engines with
FWD....................................................................313
3.0L Engines with AWD.....................................314
Fuel Quality.....................................................166
Choosing the Right Fuel....................................166
Fuel Shutoff...................................................263
Fuses................................................................277
Fuse Specification Chart.............................277
Passenger Compartment Fuse Panel...........289
Power Distribution Box......................................277
G
Garage Door Opener
See: Universal Garage Door Opener.............153
Gauges.............................................................103
Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge.............104
Fuel Gauge...........................................................104
Information Display.............................................104
Gearbox
See: Transmission................................................177
General Information on Radio
Frequencies...................................................57
Intelligent Access..................................................57
General Maintenance Information...........504
Multi-Point Inspection........................................507
Owner Checks and Services...........................505
Protecting Your Investment.............................504
Why Maintain Your Vehicle?............................504
Why Maintain Your Vehicle at Your
Dealership?.....................................................504
Getting Assistance Outside the U.S. and
Canada.........................................................273
Getting the Services You Need................269
Away From Home..............................................269
Global Opening and Closing.......................96
Closing the Windows...........................................96
Opening the Windows.........................................96
H
Hazard Flashers............................................263
Headlamp Adjusting
See: Adjusting the Headlamps........................316
Headlamp Exit Delay.....................................89
585
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Index
Headrest
See: Head Restraints..........................................142
Head Restraints.............................................142
Adjusting the Head Restraint...........................143
Tilting Head Restraints ......................................143
Heated Exterior Mirrors...............................139
Heated Rear Window...................................139
Heated Seats..................................................149
Front Seats............................................................149
Rear Seats.............................................................150
Heated Steering Wheel.................................83
Heated Windshield.......................................139
Windshield Wiper De-Icer.................................139
Heating
See: Climate Control..........................................136
Hints on Controlling the Interior
Climate..........................................................138
Defogging the Side Windows in Cold
Weather.............................................................139
General Hints........................................................138
Quickly Cooling the Interior..............................138
Quickly Heating the Interior.............................138
Recommended Settings for Cooling..............139
Recommended Settings for Heating..............138
Hints on Driving With Anti-Lock
Brakes............................................................193
Home Screen................................................409
Hood Lock
See: Opening and Closing the Hood............297
I
In California (U.S. Only)...............................270
Information Display Control.........................83
Information Displays......................................110
General Information.............................................110
Information Messages..................................116
Active Park.............................................................116
Adaptive Cruise Control.....................................117
Adaptive Headlamps...........................................118
AdvanceTrac™........................................................118
Airbag......................................................................118
Alarm.......................................................................119
Automatic Engine Shutdown.............................119
AWD........................................................................120
Battery and Charging System...........................121
Blind Spot Information and Cross Traffic Alert
System...............................................................122
Doors and Locks..................................................122
Driver Alert............................................................123
Fuel.........................................................................123
Hill Start Assist.....................................................124
Keys and Intelligent Access..............................124
Lane Keeping System........................................125
Maintenance.........................................................126
MyKey.....................................................................127
Park Aid..................................................................128
Park Brake.............................................................128
Power Steering....................................................129
Pre-Collision Assist.............................................130
Remote Start.........................................................130
Seats........................................................................131
Starting System ....................................................131
Tire Pressure Monitoring System....................132
Traction Control...................................................132
Transmission.........................................................133
Installing Child Restraints..............................21
Child Seats..............................................................21
Using Lap and Shoulder Belts............................21
Using Lower Anchors and Tethers for
CHildren (LATCH).............................................27
Using Tether Straps..............................................29
Instrument Cluster.........................................103
Instrument Lighting Dimmer........................89
Instrument Panel Overview...........................17
Interior Lamps..................................................93
Front Interior Lamp...............................................93
Rear Interior Lamps..............................................94
Interior Luggage Compartment
Release...........................................................75
Interior Mirror...................................................99
Auto-Dimming Mirror...........................................99
Introduction.........................................................7
586
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Index
N
Navigation......................................................447
cityseeker.............................................................456
Destination Mode...............................................448
Map Mode.............................................................447
Navigation Map Updates..................................457
Navigation Menu................................................453
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link......................457
SYNC AppLink....................................................456
Waypoints.............................................................455
Normal Scheduled Maintenance.............508
Intelligent Oil-Life Monitor™.............................508
Maintenance Intervals........................................510
O
Oil Change Indicator Reset........................303
Oil Check
See: Engine Oil Check......................................302
Opening and Closing the Hood...............297
Closing the Hood...............................................298
Opening the Hood.............................................297
Ordering Additional Owner's
Literature......................................................275
Obtaining a French Owner’s Manual............275
Overhead Console.......................................160
P
Parking Aids...................................................201
Principle of Operation........................................201
Passive Anti-Theft System............................77
SecuriLock...............................................................77
PATS
See: Passive Anti-Theft System.........................77
Perchlorate........................................................12
Personal Safety System™..............................46
How Does the Personal Safety System
Work?...................................................................46
Phone..............................................................439
During a Phone Call...........................................444
Making Calls.........................................................443
Pairing Your Cell Phone for the First
Time...................................................................439
Phone Menu........................................................440
Receiving Calls....................................................444
Smartphone Connectivity.................................446
Text Messaging...................................................445
Post-Crash Alert System............................266
Power Decklid...................................................71
Obstacle Detection...............................................72
Opening and Closing the Power Decklid.......72
Resetting the Power Decklid..............................73
Power Door Locks
See: Locking and Unlocking..............................67
Power Seats....................................................143
Adjusting the Four-Way Lumbar
Support..............................................................145
Adjusting the Lumbar Support.........................145
Adjusting the Multi-Contour Front Seats With
Active Motion ..................................................145
Power Windows..............................................95
Accessory Delay...................................................96
Bounce-Back..........................................................95
One-Touch Down..................................................95
One-Touch Up.......................................................95
Window Lock.........................................................96
Pre-Collision Assist.......................................241
Adjusting the Pre-Collision Assist
Settings.............................................................243
Blocked Sensors.................................................244
Distance Indication and Alert..........................242
Using the Pre-Collision Assist System..........242
Protecting the Environment..........................16
Puncture
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................356
R
Rear Parking Aid............................................201
Obstacle Distance Indicator............................202
Rear Seat Armrest..........................................151
Armrest Pass-Through.......................................152
588
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Index
Rear Seats.......................................................148
Rear View Camera........................................213
Using the Rear View Camera System............214
Rear View Camera
See: Rear View Camera.....................................213
Recommended Towing Weights..............254
Refueling.........................................................169
System Warnings..................................................171
Remote Control...............................................58
Car Finder...............................................................60
Intelligent Access Key.........................................58
Remote Start..........................................................60
Replacing the Battery..........................................58
Sounding the Panic Alarm..................................60
Remote Start...................................................140
Automatic Settings..............................................140
Heated and Cooled Features..........................140
Last Settings.........................................................140
Repairing Minor Paint Damage.................326
Replacement Parts Recommendation........13
Collision Repairs.....................................................13
Scheduled Maintenance and Mechanical
Repairs.................................................................13
Warranty on Replacement Parts.........................13
Replacing a Lost Key or Remote
Control.............................................................61
Reporting Safety Defects (Canada
Only)..............................................................276
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Only).......275
Roadside Assistance...................................262
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Getting Roadside
Assistance.......................................................262
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Roadside Assistance
Program Coverage........................................263
Vehicles Sold in Canada: Using Roadside
Assistance.......................................................263
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Getting
Roadside Assistance....................................262
Vehicles Sold in the United States: Using
Roadside Assistance....................................262
Roadside Emergencies...............................262
Running-In
See: Breaking-In.................................................259
Running Out of Fuel.....................................168
Adding Fuel From a Portable Fuel
Container..........................................................168
Filling a Portable Fuel Container.....................168
S
Safety Canopy™...............................................53
Safety Precautions........................................166
Scheduled Maintenance Record...............516
Scheduled Maintenance............................504
Seatbelt Extension.........................................45
Seatbelt Height Adjustment..........................41
Seatbelt Reminder..........................................43
Belt-Minder™...........................................................43
Seatbelts...........................................................37
Principle of Operation..........................................37
Seatbelt Warning Lamp and Indicator
Chime..............................................................42
Conditions of operation......................................42
Seats..................................................................141
Security..............................................................77
Settings............................................................461
911 Assist...............................................................469
Ambient Lighting.................................................478
Bluetooth..............................................................464
Clock......................................................................463
Display..................................................................480
General..................................................................475
Media Player........................................................462
Mobile Apps.........................................................474
Navigation.............................................................471
Phone....................................................................464
Radio......................................................................470
SiriusXM.................................................................471
Sound.....................................................................461
Valet Mode............................................................481
Vehicle...................................................................478
Voice Control.......................................................480
Wi-Fi & Hotspot...................................................476
Side Airbags.....................................................52
589
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Index
Side Sensing System..................................203
Obstacle Distance Indicator............................204
Sitting in the Correct Position.....................141
Snow Chains
See: Using Snow Chains...................................351
Spare Wheel
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................356
Special Notices.................................................13
New Vehicle Limited Warranty...........................13
On Board Diagnostics Data Link
Connector............................................................14
Special Instructions...............................................13
Special Operating Conditions Scheduled
Maintenance................................................512
Exceptions.............................................................515
Speed Control
See: Cruise Control.............................................217
Stability Control.............................................198
Principle of Operation........................................198
Starting a Gasoline Engine.........................162
Automatic Engine Shutdown............................163
Failure to Start......................................................163
Fast Restart...........................................................162
Guarding Against Exhaust Fumes...................164
Important Ventilating Information...................164
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Moving...............................................................164
Stopping the Engine When Your Vehicle is
Stationary..........................................................164
Starting and Stopping the Engine..............161
General Information.............................................161
Steering..........................................................240
Electric Power Steering....................................240
Steering Wheel................................................80
Storage Compartments...............................160
Sunroof
See: Moonroof.....................................................100
Sun Shades....................................................100
Sun Visors.......................................................100
Illuminated Vanity Mirror...................................100
Supplementary Restraints System..............47
Principle of Operation..........................................47
Symbols Glossary..............................................7
SYNC™ 3..........................................................394
General Information...........................................394
SYNC™ 3 Troubleshooting...........................481
T
Technical Specifications
See: Capacities and Specifications...............366
The Better Business Bureau (BBB) Auto
Line Program (U.S. Only)...........................271
Tire Care.........................................................336
Glossary of Tire Terminology..........................338
Information About Uniform Tire Quality
Grading.............................................................337
Information Contained on the Tire
Sidewall............................................................339
Temperature A B C.............................................338
Traction AA A B C...............................................337
Treadwear.............................................................337
Tire Inflation When Punctured
See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................329
Tire Pressure Monitoring System.............352
Changing Tires With a Tire Pressure
Monitoring System.........................................353
Understanding Your Tire Pressure Monitoring
System .............................................................353
Tire Repair Kit
See: Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit....................329
Tire Sealant and Inflator Kit.......................329
First Stage: Reinflating the Tire with Sealing
Compound and Air.........................................331
General Information...........................................329
Second Stage: Checking Tire Pressure........333
Tips for Use of your TMK..................................330
What to do after the Tire has been
Sealed...............................................................334
What to do when a Tire Is Punctured.............331
Tires
See: Wheels and Tires......................................329
590
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Index
Mobile App Voice Commands.........................419
Navigation Voice Commands...........................417
Phone Voice Commands...................................414
SiriusXM Traffic and Travel Link Voice
Commands.......................................................419
Voice Settings Commands..............................420
Utilizing the Mediation/Arbitration Program
(Canada Only).............................................272
V
Vehicle Care...................................................319
General Information............................................319
Vehicle Certification Label..........................371
Vehicle Identification Number....................371
Vehicle Storage.............................................327
Battery...................................................................328
Body.......................................................................327
Brakes...................................................................328
Cooling system...................................................328
Engine....................................................................327
Fuel system..........................................................327
General..................................................................327
Miscellaneous.....................................................328
Removing Vehicle From Storage...................328
Tires.......................................................................328
Ventilation
See: Climate Control..........................................136
VIN
See: Vehicle Identification Number................371
Voice Control...................................................82
W
Warning Lamps and Indicators..................105
Adaptive Cruise Control Indicator..................105
Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Lamp........105
Auto Hold Active.................................................105
Auto Hold Unavailable.......................................105
Automatic Headlamp High Beam
Indicator............................................................105
Battery....................................................................105
Blind Spot Monitor..............................................105
Brake System Warning Lamp...........................106
Cruise Control Indicator....................................106
Direction Indicator..............................................106
Door Ajar...............................................................106
Electric Park Brake..............................................106
Engine Coolant Temperature Warning
Lamp..................................................................106
Engine Oil..............................................................106
Fasten Seatbelt Warning Lamp........................107
Front Airbag..........................................................107
Headlamp High Beam Indicator......................107
Heads Up Display................................................107
Hood Ajar..............................................................107
Lane Keeping System Lamp.............................107
Low Fuel Level Warning Lamp.........................107
Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp...................107
Low Washer Fluid Level Warning Lamp.........107
Parking Lamps.....................................................108
Powertrain Fault..................................................108
Service Engine Soon..........................................108
Stability Control...................................................108
Stability Control Off............................................108
Trunk Ajar..............................................................108
Washer Fluid Check......................................313
Washers
See: Cleaning the Exterior...............................320
Waxing..............................................................321
Welcome Lighting...........................................92
Wheel Nuts
See: Changing a Road Wheel.........................356
Wheels and Tires.........................................329
Technical Specifications...................................364
Windows and Mirrors.....................................95
Windshield Washers......................................86
Windshield Wipers..........................................84
Intermittent Wipe..................................................84
Speed Dependent Wipers..................................84
Wiper Blades
See: Checking the Wiper Blades....................315
Wipers and Washers......................................84
592
MKZ (CC9) Canada/United States of America, enUSA, Edition date: 201805, First-Printing
Index
